and Reversing - Tufts University School of Dental Medicine

TUFTS UNIVERSITY SCHOOL OF
DENTAL MEDICINE
Division of Advanced and Graduate Education
Student Handbook
Academic year 2012-13
The Division of Advanced and Graduate Education, Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine reserves the right to make changes, without notice, to the curriculum,
policies, procedures, regulations, dates, and financial and other information contained
in this handbook.
TUFTS UNIVERSITY SCHOOL OF DENTAL MEDICINE
Division of Advanced & Graduate Education Student Handbook
ii-iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
ix
x
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MISSION
STATEMENT
INTRODUCTION
STATEMENT OF
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
DIVISIONS
DEPARTMENTS AND
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
HEALTH SCIENCE CAMPUS ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICES
ADVANCED AND GRADUATE EDUCATION COMMITTEE
STUDENT AFFAIRS, POLICIES, PROCEDURES AND SERVICES
REGISTRATION
CERTIFICATION OF
ENROLLMENT
DEFERMENTS
STUDENT
ID CARDS
SERVICES FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES
RELIGIOUS HOLIDAYS
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS
ACADEMIC RECORDS
ACCESS TO ACADEMIC RECORDS
PAYMENT OF FEES
WITHDRAWAL/TUITION REFUND POLICIES
CLEARANCE UPON DEPARTURE FROM
TUSDM
STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT AND FAIR PROCESS
PREAMBLE
CITIZENSHIP
ETHICS, PROFESSIONALISM AND CITIZENSHIP COMMITTEE
CODE OF PRINCIPLES OF ETHICAL AND
PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
CLINICAL CONDUCT
MASSACHUSETTS COMPUTER CRIME LAW
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES RELATIVE TO STUDENT CHEATING
IMPLEMENTATION OF THE CODE OF ETHICS AND PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
PRINCIPLES OF ETHICAL AND
PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT/STUDENT HONOR CODE
DISCIPLINARY ACTION AND FAIR PROCESS
DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURAL GUIDELINES
ACTIONS AND PENALTIES
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
5
5
6
8
9
9
9
10
11
11
12
14
14
15
16
17
17
21
23
23
24
24
25
26
26
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS
RESEARCH SOCIETIES
UNIVERSITY POLICY ON CAMPUS GATHERINGS
STUDENT MEMBERSHIP IN COMMITTEES
STUDENT RESOURCES
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICIES, RESOURCES AND FACILITIES
POLICIES
FAMILY EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS & PRIVACY ACT OF 1974
SNOW EMERGENCY/CLINICAL GUIDELINES
POLICY ON USE OF TUFTS UNIVERSITY NAME & INSIGNIAS
INFECTION CONTROL
MEDICAL EMERGENCIES PROTOCOL SUMMARY
ii
27
27
27
28
30
31
NEEDLESTICK/PERCUTANEOUS INCIDENT PROTOCOL
34
35
36
36
40
40
40
42
42
42
44
45
46
47
48
52
52
53
53
53
54
55
57
57
57
58
60
60
60
61
61
61
62
INFECTED HEALTH CARE WORKER PROTOCOL
PAYMENT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES FOLLOWING ACCIDENT OR NEEDLESTICK INJURY
PUBLIC SAFETY AND RELATED POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
LOST AND FOUND PROTOCOL
SMOKE-FREE INDOOR POLICY
STUDENT AND FACULTY DRESS CODE
RESOURCES
STUDENT ADVISORY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION OFFICE
HEALTH INSURANCE
IMMUNIZATION REQUIREMENTS
COUNSELING CONTACTS
CHAPLAINS
BURSAR’S OFFICE
HEALTH SCIENCES LIBRARY
LIABILITY INSURANCE
PARKING
FACILITIES
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
BOOKSTORE
STATE AND NATIONAL DENTAL ASSOCIATIONS
PROFESSIONAL ACADEMIES AND ASSOCIATIONS
DIVISION OF ADVANCED AND GRADUATE EDUCATION GENERAL INFORMATION
OVERSIGHT
COURSES
STUDENT EVALUATION AND QUALITY STANDARDS
RE-EXAMINATION POLICY
COURSE EVALUATIONS
ACADEMIC PROBATION AND DISMISSAL
LEAVE OF ABSENCE
MEDICAL LEAVE OF ABSENCE
WITHDRAWAL
COURSE SYLLABI
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A:
ADVANCED & GRADUATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT PAGES
MASTER OF SCIENCE
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN CRANIOMANDIBULAR DISORDERS
& OROFACIAL PAIN
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN ENDODONTICS
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN GENERAL PRACTICE RESIDENCY
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN ORTHODONTICS
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN PERIODONTOLOGY
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN
PROSTHODONTICS
1974
APPENDIX B:
FAMILY EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS AND PRIVACY ACT OF
APPENDIX C:
TUFTS UNIVERSITY DRUG FREE CAMPUS PROGRAM
APPENDIX D:
TUFTS UNIVERSITY INFORMATION STEWARDSHIP POLICIES
APPENDIX E:
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY ON SEXUAL HARASSMENT AND TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY ON
CONSENSUAL RELATIONSHIPS
APPENDIX F:
APPENDIX G:
APPENDIX H:
APPENDIX H:
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY ON SEXUAL ASSAULT
AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES POLICY
NON-DISCRIMINATION POLICY
OFFICE OF ADVANCED AND GRADUATE EDUCATION FORMS
iii
81
82
95
108
116
122
129
156
161
168
193
197
201
206
213
219
223
225
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
Mission Statement
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine is an accredited private dental school providing education to
diverse predoctoral and postdoctoral students to prepare them for the practice of dentistry in the 21 st
century, with knowledge or many different populations, dental specialties, and varied practice settings.
This education occurs in an ethical and professional environment in which quality dental care is provided
to its patients.
We strive to achieve a dynamic curriculum, which provides excellent clinical training utilizing technology to
integrate health science with clinical experience. Our success is based on maintaining a strong faculty and
staff committed to teaching, administration, student service and community service, supported by ongoing
development, scholarship and research.
iv
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, Division of Advanced and Graduate Education. The
information in this handbook provides an overview of information specific to residents in Advanced
Education programs and/or candidates for the Master of Science degree. The purpose of this handbook is
to acquaint you with the policies and procedures of the School of Dental Medicine, as well as information
that may assist you during your enrollment in our school and your stay in the Boston area.
v
Statement of Equal Opportunity
Applicants for admission and employment, students, employees, sources of referral of applicants for
admission and employment, and all unions or professional organizations holding collective bargaining or
professional agreements with Tufts University are hereby notified that this institution does not
discriminate on the basis of race, religion, color, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age, or mental or
physical disability in admission or access to treatment or employment in its programs and activities. Any
person having inquiries or complaints concerning Tufts University’s compliance with the regulations
implementing Title VI, Title IX, Age Discrimination Act of 1975, and Section 504 is directed to contact the
Medford/Somerville campus 617-627-3298. The Director of the Office of Equal Opportunity/Affirmative
Action has been designated by Tufts University to coordinate the institution’s efforts to comply with the
regulations implementing Title VI, Title IX, Age Discrimination Act of 1975, and Section 504. Any person
may also contact the Assistant Secretary for Civil Rights, U.S. Department of Education, Washington, D.C.,
20202, or the Director, U.S. Department of Education, Office for Civil Rights, Region One, Boston,
Massachusetts, 02109, regarding the institution’s compliance with the regulations implementing Title VI,
34 C.F.R. Part 100; Title IX, 34 C.F.R. Part 106; Age Discrimination Act of 1975, 45 C.F.R. 90; or, Section
504, 34 C.F.R. Part 104.
Also, Tufts has formulated an administrative policy that educational and employment decisions be based
on the principle of equal opportunity. The consideration of factors such as sex, race, color, sexual
orientation, national or ethnic origin, age, religion, veteran status, or disability unrelated to a person’s
ability, qualifications, and performance is inconsistent with this policy.
vi
DEPARTMENTS & DIVISIONS--SCHOOL OF DENTAL MEDICINE
All Boston campus numbers may be reached by dialing 617-636-, then the four digit extension.
To call any number internally, dial 6 and the four digit extension.
DEPARTMENT
Chair
Dept. Manager/
Staff Assistant
Endodontics
Daniel Green
Pat Morrow
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Maria Papageorge
Marilyn Peterson
Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology
Michael Kahn
Cheryl Frost
Orthodontics
Barry Briss
Paula Manowitz
Pediatric Dentistry
Stanley Alexander
Midge Buchan-Hartman
Periodontology
James Hanley (interim)
Therese Kohlman
Prosthodontics & Operative Dentistry Hans-Peter Weber
Lisa Jordan
Public Health & Community Service
Mark Nehring
Christine Robertson
Extension
DIVISION
Extension
Head
Division Manager/
Staff Assistant
6-6796
6-0857
6-6510
6-6887
6-6902
6-6530
6-6585
6-3471
Department of Prosthodontics and Operative Dentistry
Prosthodontics
Nopsaran Chaimattayompol
Operative Dentistry
Peter Arsenault
PG Prosthodontics
Hiroshi Hirayama
Jessica Upham
Simulated Patient Care
Iqbal Singh
6-0866
6-6585
6-6591
6-6787
Department of General Dentistry
Clinical Affairs
Oral Diagnosis
Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology
TMD Clinic
6-6791
6-6833
6-4767
6-6817
James Hanley
Paul Trombly
Aruna Ramesh
Noshir Mehta
Nicole Wade
Patty DiAngelis
Patty DiAngelis
Christopher Gifford
Department of Public Health and Community Service
Education, Outreach & Advocacy
Wanda Wright
Medicine
Kanchan Ganda
Oral Medicine & Research
Athena Papas
Geriatric Dentistry
Hilde Tillman
Nutrition & Oral Health Promotion Carole Palmer
Special Care
Patty DiAngelis
Pam Corrado
Patty DiAngelis
Patty DiAngelis
Marie Burack
SCHOOL ADMINISTRATION
Huw F. Thomas, Dean
Mark Gonthier, Executive Associate Dean
Nadeem Y. Karimbux, Associate Dean, Academic Affairs
Robert Kasberg, Associate Dean, Admissions & Student Affairs
Gerard Kugel, Associate Dean for Research
James Hanley, Associate Dean Clinical Affairs
Maria Papageorge, Assistant Dean Hospital Affairs
Noshir Mehta, Assistant Dean International Relations
Paul Stark, Director of Advanced & Graduate Education
Vangel Zissi, Director of Continuing Education
Mary-Ellen Marks, Academic Affairs Administrator
Melissa Kelly, Faculty Affairs Officer
Beth Conant, Director of Finance and Administration
Sandra Pearson, Director of Financial Aid
Katherine Vosker, Associate Director, Student Affairs
vii
Gerard Cedrone
Brittany Downey
Nicole Wade
Marilyn Peterson
Christopher Gifford
Susan J. Brown
6-3646
6-4055
6-6790
6-6968
6-6808
781-899-6020
6-6656
6-0909
6-6622
6-6639
6-4099
6-6791
6-6515
6-6817
6-3753
6-6629
6-6544
6-2165
6-6842
6-6640
6-0887
TELEPHONE NUMBERS
House phones for calls to Tufts Medical Center and all Tufts University campuses are located on every floor.
Boston campus numbers may be reached by dialing 6 and the four digit extension. Medford campus
numbers may be reached by dialing 7 and the four digit extension.
Basic Sciences
Anatomy
Biochemistry
Gross Anatomy Lab
Molecular Biology & Microbiology
Pathology
Pharmacology
Physiology
Clinical Sciences
Endodontics
General Dentistry
Geriatric Dentistry
Oral Diagnosis
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Oral Pathology
Orthodontics
Pediatric Dentistry
Periodontology
Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology
Prosthodontics & Operative
Dentistry
Miscellaneous
Bookstore
Bursar’s Office
Campus Police-General
Campus Police-Emergency
Health Sciences Library
Student Health Administration
Esthetic Dentistry
General Clinic
Implant Center
Oral Surgery
Code Response Team
Postgraduate Clinic
Preclinical Laboratory
New Patient Encounter Clinic
6-6685
6-6867
6-6681
6-6750
6-6710
6-3775
6-6739
6-6796
6-6814
6-6968
6-6814
6-6515
6-6510
6-6887
6-6902
6-6530
6-6812
6-6547
6-6628
6-6551
6-6610
6-6911
6-6706
6-2700
6-0443
6-6828
6-6930
6-6516
6-6995
6-6888
6-6952
6-6614
viii
Health Science Campus Administrative Offices
Bursar’s Office
Posner Hall
200 Harrison Ave. 1st floor
617-636-6551, 617-636-6553
Terry Goodale, Assistant University Bursar
Responsible for student billing and collection of educational costs
Student Advisory and Health Administration Office
Posner Hall
200 Harrison Ave. 4th floor
617-636-2700
Deborah Quinn, Director
Gianna Dimitrakos, Associate Director
Responsible for personal counseling, administration of health insurance and health service fee programs,
health insurance waiver program, and administration of immunization records.
Public Safety
M&V Building
136 Harrison Ave. Lobby
617-636-6610
Responsible for providing for the service, safety and protection of persons and property within the Tufts
community. Administers student ID system. Maintains lost and found department for students, faculty and
staff. Assists in emergency medical services.
Health Sciences International Office
Park Plaza Office Building
20 Park Plaza
Suite 1101
Boston, MA 02116
Tel: (617) 636-0391
Fax: (617) 636-0356
Adel Abu-Moustafa, Ph.D., Dean
Responsible for preparation of all immigration documents. The office prepares and issues I-20 forms for F1 students and also prepares immigration forms for visitor and employment visas.
ix
Advanced & Graduate Education Committee
2012-2013
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Paul Stark, Director of Advanced and Graduate Education, Chair
Stanley Alexander—Pediatric Dentistry
Jonathan Garlick—Oral Pathology
Robert Amato—Endodontics
Timothy Hempton—Periodontology
Hiroshi Hirayama—Prosthodontics
Noshir Mehta—Diagnosis & Health Promotion
Maria Papageorge—Oral Surgery
Gina Terenzi—Public Health & Community Service (General Practice Residency)
Barry Briss—Orthodontics
Wanda Wright—Public Health & Community Service
Driss Zoukhri—Diagnosis & Health Promotion
Ex officio without vote: Associate Dean Robert Kasberg, Dr. Matthew Finkelman
Student members: Dr. Rebekah Lucier Pryles--Endodontics, Dr. Alaa AlQutub—Master of Science
x
OFFICE OF STUDENT AFFAIRS
POLICIES, PROCEDURES & SERVICES
The Office of Student Affairs is responsible for administering and maintaining student academic and
registration records. This responsibility is governed by policies established by the School and University
as well as mandates initiated by the State and Federal Governments.
Students must realize that their status as a student is a legal matter and is subject to State and Federal
laws as well as University Policy. The student is obliged, therefore, to insure that the Office of Student
Affairs is notified of changes in enrollment status, names, citizenship status, and addresses.
REGISTRATION
Students are required to complete registration documents at a place and time announced each year.
Registration documents contain information the School is required to maintain on each student and must
be verified annually through the registration process.
To be a fully registered student in the School of Dental Medicine, the student is required to meet three
conditions:
1. The student is required to formally complete Registration documents. A late registration fee of
$50.00 per day may be imposed upon any student failing to complete this aspect of Registration at
the time scheduled.
2. The student must be financially cleared by the Bursar's Office in order to register. Although students
are permitted to complete their Registration forms without financial clearance, they will not be fully
registered until the Bursar's Office has cleared them. Students not registered because of this
condition must see the Bursar to make satisfactory arrangements to pay their bill. Failure to make
full and timely payment of tuition and fees may result in a financial penalty being assessed to the
student by the Bursar.
3. A student is not fully registered unless the student has submitted health insurance and immunization
documentation to the Student Advisory and Health Administration Office.
Please note that any student not fully registered:
1. Forfeits all rights to obtain official transcripts or other documents requiring the Seal of the
University or signature of a School Official.
2. May be suspended or withdrawn from the program.
The primary Registration Form requests:







Name: Your full legal name. Required by law.
991#: This number is assigned through the Admissions Office during the application process. This
number is utilized as your identification number. Foreign students without a social security number
are assigned an identification number by the Admissions Office. This number will be used as the
student's identification throughout the educational program. Please keep this number confidential.
Date/Place of Birth: Verification of the date and place of birth by the School is required by licensing
jurisdictions, the Federal Government, and others.
Citizenship: Federal law requires schools to determine this as a part of a student's enrollment
record.
State of Legal Residence: Determines eligibility for certain loan and scholarship programs.
Required by School policy.
Marital Status: Determines educational budget and, therefore, eligibility or access to certain federal
loan programs. Required by School Policy and Federal laws for certain loan programs.
Non-Citizen Information: Foreign students are required to provide Visa information as mandated by
Immigration Laws. Permanent residency information is also mandated by Immigration Laws.
1




Addresses: School policy requires students to provide four addresses:
Local Address/Billing Address/Emergency Address/Permanent Home Address.
The Emergency Address includes the name of the person(s) to contact if an emergency regarding
the student arises.
Mobile Phone Number: This number will be used only for emergency purposes, unless given as
primary local phone number.
Changes in Registration Information
Changes in any of the information cited above should be reported to the Office of Student Affairs.
Special provisions are required for the following:
 Change in Name: Student is required to provide a copy of the court order & marriage certificate
authorizing the legal change of name.
 Citizenship: Achievement of permanent residency status must be verified by submission of the
Alien Registration Card "Green Card" – I-151 or I-551 form, copy of both sides. Change in Visa
status must be documented through the International Affairs Office on the Boston Campus.
CERTIFICATION OF ENROLLMENT
The Office of Students Affairs provides the following types of letters certifying student enrollment.
Standard Certifying Letter:
This letter certifies full-time enrollment for the current academic year. The letter contains:





Student Name
School ID #
Specialty - For Postgraduate Students Only
Enrollment Period (current academic period)
Expected Date of Graduation
Certifying Letter with Educational Costs:
This letter certifies full-time enrollment for the current academic year as well as a list of billed costs for
the year, payment deadline, estimated living costs for the specific academic period, and estimated costs of
books and supplies. The letter, thus, certifies enrollment, educational budget for a specific academic
period, and expected graduation date.
The two basic certifying letters can be modified to include such special requirements as a statement of
satisfactory academic progress or absence of School-funded financial assistance.
Letters are signed by the appropriate school official and embossed with the school seal.
Special Certifying Letters Regarding Malpractice Insurance for Postgraduate Students:
Many of the students in the Advanced Education programs are able to practice either at night or on
weekends. Costs of liability insurance can be expensive for the full-time practitioner. Many insurance
companies will offer reduced rates for part-time practice.
The Office of Student Affairs can provide a letter certifying full-time enrollment with a statement reading,
“The student is covered by School Malpractice insurance while enrolled 8am-5pm, Monday-Friday.” Such
letters can be filed with applications for liability insurance.
DEFERMENTS
In addition to letters certifying enrollment, the Office of Student Affairs signs the deferment forms
generated by lenders and loan authorities for prior and current student loans. It is the responsibility of
the student to obtain proper deferment forms from lenders or loan servicing agencies and to submit them
for processing.
2
NOTE: Deferment forms for future academic terms for which the student has not registered will not be
processed until registration has been completed. While Tufts University participates in the National
Student Loan Clearinghouse and reports student enrollment status accordingly, not all lenders and loan
servicers utilize the Clearinghouse. Therefore, completion of the deferment form process may still be
necessary. Students should contact their loan servicers for confirmation of participation in the
Clearinghouse.
Deferment forms will be signed for the academic period for which the student is registered or past
academic periods in which the student was registered.
STUDENT ID CARDS
The Tufts Campus Police, during orientation and registration, initially issue student ID cards. ID cards
should be safeguarded against loss or theft, as these cards provide access to many buildings, library
resources and clinical instruments at Tufts. All recovered ID cards shall be turned in to the Office of
Student Affairs. If replacement of a card is necessary, the student must report the loss or theft to the
Student Affairs division of the School of Dental Medicine. Students will incur a $25.00 Student ID
Replacement Fee, which will be collected by the Office of Student Affairs. You will receive a receipt for
proof of payment that must be presented to the Tufts Campus Police for initiation of a replacement ID.
ID cards are produced during regular business hours (Monday - Friday, 9am - 5pm) at the Tufts Campus
Police office, 136 Harrison Avenue, first floor lobby.
In the clinic, ID’s must be attached to the clinic gown by clip. ID chains or cloth rope may not be worn in
clinical areas because of Infection Control concerns.
SERVICES FOR STUDENTS WITH DISABILITIES
Tufts’ goal is the full inclusion of students with disabilities into the life of the University. Although the
University has no special academic programs for individuals with disabilities who are otherwise qualified
for admission, Tufts is committed to providing support services and accommodations to all students who
need and have legal entitlement to them.
When a disability requires that accommodations related to course work or to facilities be made, students
should discuss their situation with the Associate Dean for Admissions and Student Affairs. In cases where
the Associate Dean does not agree that the requested accommodations be implemented, the student may
seek review of this decision to the Dean.
RELIGIOUS HOLIDAYS
It is the policy of the University that all classes, which fall on major religious holidays such as Rosh
Hashanah, Yom Kippur and Good Friday, will be held. Examinations however, will not be scheduled on
religious holidays. Students are responsible for making up any work missed if they choose to observe the
holidays. Students on clinical assignments involving patient care must make arrangements in advance to
have their assignments covered by a classmate while they observe the holiday. The major religious
holidays indicated in the annually published Master Calendar are listed below.
Rosh Hashanah—Sept. 17-18, 2012
Yom Kippur—September 26, 2012
Passover—March 26-April 2, 2013
Good Friday—March 29, 2013
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS
The School of Dental Medicine is fortunate to attract many students from foreign countries; this section is
included to provide general information for these students.
The International Affairs Office (IAO) serves the Tufts University Health Sciences Campus and its affiliated
hospitals in many aspects of immigration regulations and procedures. This includes administration of the
3
student visa program and the exchange visitor program under the authorization of the United States
Department of State. In addition, the IAO provides annual orientation to all entering graduate students,
travel authorization, practical training authorization and other support services. International students are
welcome to contact the IAO office for assistance and advice.
In addition, the IAO office provides immigration, orientation and adjustment services to international
research scholars and faculty. The IAO is responsible for dissemination of information to the various
departments at Tufts to assist the international population in improving the quality and productivity of
their experience at the institution.
Under the direction of the Dean of International Affairs, the IAO coordinates and manages a number of
health technology transfer projects. Various training programs have been established abroad in
conjunction with faculty of the Health Sciences campus and its affiliate hospitals.
Health Sciences International Affairs Office
Campus location: 20 Park Plaza, suite 1101, Boston, MA 02111
Phone: 617-636-0355
Fax: 617-636-0356
Tej Maini, M.D., F.A.C.S., Dean, International Affairs
Ghenwa Hakim, J.D., Assistant Director, International Affairs
Initial Issuance of Visa Documentation
In order to obtain visa documentation from the IAO, all incoming students must:
1. Obtain a confirmed acceptance from the Admissions Office
2. Complete and return the Declaration of English Proficiency and Financial Certification (DEC) forms to
the IAO
3. Provide original financial support documentation
4. Submit a copy of the biographical page in the passport
5. Pay the required admissions deposit and first semester tuition deposit
Please note that documents will only be issued once all the above requirements have been met.
Travel Information for Current Students in F-1 or J-1 Status
All students who are currently in F-1 or J-1 visa status and wish to travel abroad must obtain a signature
from the IAO on the back of their I-20 or DS-2019. Students must bring in the forms at least two weeks
before planning to leave the United States to allow the IAO enough time to prepare the forms.
Reissuance of I-20s
Whenever I-20 information changes a new I-20 is required. Examples of such changes include, but are not
limited to, a student’s marital status, new graduation date or change in finances. Students are individually
responsible for notifying the IAO of any changes so that the IAO can assure compliance with Department
of Homeland Security regulations.
Work Authorization
Work authorization for F-1 and J-1 students is strictly regulated; therefore, any student with questions
about eligibility for work should refer to the International Student Handbook for details or call the IAO
directly.
Special Services - Office of Student Affairs
Frequently, visa students require special letters or other documents which they need to present in their
home countries. The Office of Student Affairs has two types of prepared letters, which have been
developed to meet the needs of both foreign and domestic students:
1.
A letter which certifies the enrollment for the current academic year and which indicates the
expected graduation date.
2.
A letter, which contains the certification of enrollment, expected graduation dates, and lists the
billed costs, living allowances, and ancillary costs for the academic period.
Each of these letters may be altered as necessary to include a statement indicating the student's
satisfactory academic progress, need to return to studies by a specific date, etc. Students are urged to
consider which documents best meet their needs.
It should be noted that all letters are embossed with the School Seal and/or signed by the appropriate
school official. They may be provided in a sealed envelope if requested.
4
In addition to certifying letters, foreign students may receive official Dental School transcript records from
Tufts under conditions outlined in the Transcript Section.
PLEASE NOTE:
Transcripts from other schools will not be provided by the Office of Student Affairs. Foreign students are
urged to obtain pre-professional transcripts from their prior school. In the case of foreign-trained
dentists, copies of foreign dental school transcripts should be obtained from prior schools for use in
applying for postdoctoral programs.
Practical Training
Students nearing the completion of their program who desire to extend their stay in the United States for
the purpose of further professional experience should contact the International Affairs Office to explore
application for Practical Training. Since the application process is extensive, students should begin contact
with the International Affairs Office at least six months prior to the completion of their studies.
For more information on the topics directly above, please refer to the International Student
Handbook.
ACADEMIC RECORDS
Each student’s academic record is maintained on the official transcript document for the School of Dental
Medicine. Report of grades to the student is made by issuing a STUDENT COPY transcript.
Grades are reported A, B, C, and F for courses each Fall, Spring and Summer term.
Access to Academic Records (Transcripts)
Grades for each term are reported to the student on a transcript marked “STUDENT COPY.” Students
should retain these records of their grades. When evaluations are requested of faculty, students may
make copies of their latest grade report and furnish them to faculty members.
Additional STUDENT COPY transcripts are available. The student must request additional copies in writing
by completing a Transcript Request Form. There is a $1.00 fee for each additional transcript.
When a grade change is issued by a Course Director or a re-examination grade is submitted, the student’s
transcript is altered to reflect this change/addition and a new STUDENT COPY transcript is provided to the
student. When a grade change results in a new average, the new average is computed and the new
standing is determined. The new standing is determined by tying the student with another student whose
average is closest. The standing of the student being tied with is not altered.
Official and sealed envelope transcripts signed by a School Official and embossed with the School seal are
available to be sent directly to recognized third parties by either Tufts or by the student, if document
integrity standards are maintained. Students must request the transmittal of their transcripts in writing
by completing a Transcript Request Form. There is a $5.00 charge for each transcript requested.
Copies of transcripts from Undergraduate or professional schools previously attended are not provided to
students. These transcripts must be requested from the other schools directly.
NOTE: The University is not obligated to furnish a transcript to any student or graduate whose
financial obligations to the University have not been satisfied.
PAYMENT OF FEES
It is the policy of the University that all tuition and fees are payable in full when bills are rendered. Tuition
payments in two installments have been made possible for the convenience of the student.
Any student who fails to make full payment of billed costs by the designated payment date will be
assessed a late payment fine determined by the Bursar's Office and will forfeit all rights and privileges of
the University.
If a student withdraws from the University, dormitory charges will be prorated if a replacement occupant
5
can be found. Students who withdraw from the University after the start of the term are responsible for
the total instrument fee for that year.
FEE WAIVERS
Each student is automatically assessed for individual health insurance and the health administration fee.
Students who have equivalent comprehensive coverage may apply to the Student Health Advisory Office
for a waiver prior to September 1st of each academic year. The Health Administration fee cannot be
waived.
TUITION REFUND POLICIES
Students who take a leave of absence may be responsible for tuition and fees for the term in which their
effective leave takes place. The Tuition Refund Policy is explained later in this section and should be
carefully reviewed prior to the student’s withdrawal or leave of absence.
Financial aid (which includes student loans) a student receives may be impacted if the student decides to
withdraw or take a leave of absence:

Withdrawn Students A student who is considered withdrawn from the school is not entitled to
financial aid after the point they have withdrawn. Financial aid received up to the point the student
has withdrawn may be prorated in accordance to the Financial Aid Refund Policy that is outlined
later in this section. Students should review this policy closely realizing it and the Tuition Refund
policy are mutually exclusive. A withdrawn student who has outstanding student loans is no longer
entitled to defer payments on their student loans based on their enrollment status. As a
consequence, the student will enter repayment on their outstanding student loans. Withdrawn
students who received Federal or Institutional student loans while in attendance are required to
complete student loan exit counseling as part of the administrative clearance process.

Students on a Leave of Absence A student who has received federal student financial aid who is
considered on a leave of absence may be required to be treated as though they have withdrawn
from school thus the policy outlined under “Withdrawn Students” above applies to those cases.
Federal financial aid regulations dictate whether or not the leave of absence must be treated as a
withdrawal using established conditions which the leave of absence must meet in order for the
student to remain “in student status”. If the leave meets all prescribed conditions, the student is
able to retain financial aid received and their student loan payments will continue to be placed in
an in-school deferment status.
Students who are considered “in student status” while on a leave may not receive any additional
financial aid for the term in which the leave is taken nor would they be entitled to receive any
additional financial aid disbursements during their period of leave. Upon their return, the student
may be eligible for financial aid based on a revised cost of attendance. Student loans, however,
will continue to receive in-school deferment during the period of leave.
Students who fail to return from a leave of absence as expected whereas the student was kept “in
student status” during the period of leave, will be considered to have withdrawn from the school
effective the date their leave of absence began. Both the Tuition Refund Policy and the Financial
Aid Refund Policy will be applied in accordance with university policy and federal financial aid
regulations.
Oftentimes the Financial Aid Office will be required to treat a student that is considered on a leave of
absence as though they have withdrawn from the school since the period of leave usually does not meet
the federal conditions. The reasons for this include (but are not limited to) the fact the leave often
extends beyond the 180-day limit, the student is unable to resume their academic program at the same
point they left prior to taking leave or the student’s return to school is conditional.
6
Tuition Refund Policy
In the event a registered student withdraws from the university after the beginning of the enrollment
period, tuition and fee refunds are prorated as follows:
1st – 12th calendar day of term
13th – 19th calendar day of term
20th – 26th calendar day of term
27th – 33rd calendar day of term
34th calendar day of term and thereafter
80%
60%
40%
20%
No refund
Student Financial Aid Refund Policy
Federal Refund Policy
In accordance with federal regulations governing Federal Student Financial Aid programs, a student
receiving Title IV Federal Student Financial Aid is subject to Title IV Refund Policy rules. This policy is
applied to situations where a student received Federal Perkins Loan, Federal Direct Loan and /or Federal
Direct Grad PLUS loans and is considered to have withdrawn from the school or has dropped below half
time status at the school.
The Title IV Federal Refund Policy states that any student who withdraws at or prior to the 60% point of
the term for which they were enrolled and received Title IV financial aid for that term, will have their
federal financial aid prorated based on the percentage of time they were enrolled for that term. The
application of the TIV Refund Policy determines the amount of federal student financial aid that the school
and, in some cases, the student, is required to return to the student’s lender(s). The funds are returned
to repay the federal student aid programs received by the student in the following prescribed order:
1. Federal Direct Loan
2. Federal Perkins Loan
3. Federal Direct Grad PLUS
Any student who has withdrawn after the 60% point of the term is said to have “earned” all Title IV
financial aid received and the school cannot apply the Title IV Federal Refund Policy. However, upon
receipt of written authorization from the student, the Financial Aid Office can facilitate returning unused or
unwanted loan funding to the student’s lender(s).
Please note that Title VII funding (Health Professions Student Loan and Loans for Disadvantaged
Students) will also be prorated in a similar manner as Title IV financial aid unless the student received
100% tuition reversal. In that case, all Title VII financial aid funding as well as institutional funding (such
as, but not limited to, Tufts Grant and Tufts Loan) will be rescinded from the student. In the event that
HPSL and LDS funding is prorated, these funds will be repaid after all Title IV aid the student received has
been repaid (including Federal Direct Grad PLUS loan proceeds) in accordance to the Title IV Federal
Refund Policy.
Treatment of Private Education Loans and Institutional Financial Aid
Treatment of private education loans a withdrawn student has received or is due to receive is subject to
the private education loan lender’s policies. Normally, if funds have been disbursed to the student,
lenders usually do not require the student or the school to return funds. If the student withdraws or drops
below half time prior to the funds being received, the Financial Aid Office is required to return 100% of the
loan disbursement.
Similarly outside scholarships or loans awarded to a student are subject to the awarding organization’s
policies. Institutional financial aid such as grants, loans or scholarships may or may not be prorated or
require 100% reversal depending on the circumstances.
7
It is important to note that the application of the Tuition Refund Policy and that of the TIV Federal Refund
Policies are mutually exclusive. The student is responsible for payment of any balance that remains on his
or her student account after the Student Financial Aid Refund policies are applied. The Financial Aid Office
does not provide administrative clearance from the Financial Aid Office until they have been able to
calculate and apply the appropriate Financial Aid Refund policies and all other financial aid-related
administrative requirements (such as student loan exit counseling) have been completed by the student
requesting clearance.
CLEARANCE UPON DEPARTURE FROM THE SCHOOL OF DENTAL MEDICINE
Every student leaving the University is required to complete an Administrative Clearance procedure to
satisfy the officers of the University that the student has met all obligations. Federal student aid recipients
must have an exit interview with the Financial Aid Office as a condition of meeting administrative
clearance. Prior to this, the appropriate refund and repayment policies have to be applied in order to
conduct the exit interview. Administrative clearance forms are provided in the Office of Student Affairs for
students on an approved leave of absence, who have received an unofficial leave of absence, are
withdrawing from the program, or are completing their program. The School of Dental Medicine will not
release a transcript or any other official document until the student has completed the administrative
clearance process.
8
STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT AND FAIR PROCESS
PREAMBLE
Our School is a community of students, staff, and faculty. Important to our school is the high standard of
honesty and integrity with which the community carries out its responsibilities. Absolute honesty on the
part of every student, every faculty member, administrator, and staff member always has and always
shall be an essential part of higher education at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. Honesty must
extend not only to academic and professional endeavors but also to social activities. Since academic and
professional work in the School is designed to assist the student in expanding his/her knowledge and
intellectual capacity, it can be achieved only by individual, independent study and work.
The student dentist must fully recognize the obligations involved in the discharge of his/her duties toward
patients. The latter are, in most cases, unable to estimate precisely the character of adequate
procedures; therefore, the student's own sense of right must guarantee faithfulness in his/her
performance.
The students, in their relationship to the institution, must be governed by strict rules of honesty and
courtesy.
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, as a school of the University, has a four-fold mission: to
educate students for the dental profession, to provide patient care, to advance knowledge through
research, and to serve the community at large through its diverse resources.
The Code of Principles of Ethical and Professional Conduct (herein after referred to as the Code), as
administered by the Ethics, Professionalism, and Citizenship (EPC) Committee, is a set of rules to insure
that all students in the School of Dental Medicine share a collective responsibility for maintaining the
highest ethical standards and professional conduct in their relationships with each other and with patients.
Nothing in this document is to be construed as contradictory to present or future University policies and
procedures, and in the event of such conflict, University policies and procedures will prevail. The final
responsibility for adherence to the Code rests with each individual. Therefore, each student has the
general obligation to:
1. Maintain high standards of academic and professional honesty and integrity.
2. Respect the rights, privileges and property of other members of the academic community and
visitors to the campus.
3. Refrain from actions that would interfere with University functions, endanger the health, safety
or welfare of other persons, or would expose the University to legal risk.
4. Know and comply with the rules and regulations of Tufts University and the School of Dental
Medicine.
5. Seek advice and counsel when faced with an ethical dilemma.
The School of Dental Medicine, through its faculty and staff, will foster an environment that promotes
adherence to the Code. For example, the faculty and staff will work to clarify academic requirements,
provide help to students in meeting expectations, and avoid situations that may lead anyone to violate the
Code.
CITIZENSHIP
A major responsibility of the Ethics, Professionalism, and Citizenship (EPC) Committee is to promote
citizenship within our community. Ethical and professional practices are certainly part of citizenship, but
additionally, civility to members of our community, care for the environment of our community,
9
understanding and acceptance of the diversity within our community, and pride in our accomplishments,
are goals also strongly encouraged by the EPC Committee.
Citizenship is promoted by each of its members by, in part, understanding that caring for the details of
everyday life during the rather long and focused hours of school is extremely important. Politeness,
cleaning up after oneself, and helping others with small and/or large tasks, all go a long way toward a
more civil, neater, and cleaner environment.
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine is composed of individuals from a diverse range of backgrounds
and circumstances. This diversity is important for students to embrace in order to function effectively as
professionals, but this process can be challenging and difficult. Customs and attitudes are not
homogenous for a group of individuals drawn from many different cultures and countries. Understanding
the differences and how those differences may be accepted and incorporated within the larger framework
of our own community’s culture is an important part of the work of the EPC Committee. Customs and
attitudes change, and recognition and communication regarding such change are necessary to the
functioning of a community.
Effective communication among individuals in our community - students, staff, and faculty - is essential to
its smooth functioning and development of traditions that will positively affect the community is strongly
encouraged. All members of the community are urged to discuss ideas with the elected or appointed
representatives of the EPC Committee to help institute positive change that can become a part of
traditions within our school.
ETHICS, PROFESSIONALISM, AND CITIZENSHIP (EPC) COMMITTEE
Ethics, Professionalism and Citizenship Committee (EPC)
Members, 2011-2012
Chair: Executive Associate Dean Mark Gonthier
Dr. Michael Hall, Oral Pathology
Dr. James Hanley, Periodontology
Dr. Kathryn Ragalis, General Dentistry
Dr. Roger Galburt, Oral Surgery
Dr. Eric Weinstock, Director, Ethics & Jurisprudence
Dr. Michael Thompson, General Dentistry
6-6639
6-6510
6-6783
6-6924
6-6930
6-6814
6-3775
The EPC Committee shall have responsibility for:
1. promoting ethical and professional behavior and citizenship among students, faculty and staff
2. reviewing and making recommendations concerning all issues relating to the ethical and
professional behavior of students, faculty and staff
3. monitoring compliance with the code of ethics
Written allegations related to staff behavior should be forwarded to the Associate Dean for Student Affairs,
who will consult with the Executive Associate Dean in the disposition of the complaint.
Written allegations related to faculty behavior should be forwarded to the Chairperson of the EPC
Committee. A standing EPC Subcommittee on Faculty will review the allegation and forward its
recommendation to the Faculty Committee on Committees, which will formally respond to the allegation.
EPC Subcommittee for Faculty
The elected faculty members shall constitute the subcommittee on Faculty Ethics and Professionalism. One
student member will be appointed yearly by the Chairperson of the EPC Committee to the Faculty
10
Subcommittee with vote. All initial allegations regarding faculty shall be heard first by the faculty
subcommittee. A recommendation, regarding the allegation, if applicable, will be forwarded to the
Committee on Committees for adjudication.
CODE OF PRINCIPLES OF ETHICAL AND PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
A. Professional Conduct
In order to create and maintain the best possible professional atmosphere at the School of Dental
Medicine, it is necessary that students adhere to standards of professionalism, courtesy, and ethics.
Common courtesy and mutual respect are essential to enhance the educational experience, and to
decrease stress and misunderstanding. Each student should recognize their responsibility in professional
growth, and maintain an attitude that strengthens that development.
Inappropriate conduct is subject to disciplinary action but is not limited to the following:
A student will not:
I.
a. Fail to safeguard confidentiality of patient records.
II.
a. Give, receive or obtain information pertaining to an examination during the examination period, except
as authorized by the instructor.
b. Represent written, clinical or laboratory work prepared by another person as his or her own work for
credit (unless authorized by the instructor).
c. Possess any material or use any procedure or practice not authorized by the instructor, course director
or department on any examination, written assignment, laboratory project, or clinical activity to be
submitted or being performed for credit.
d. Violate any policies of the School.
e. Aid another person in committing any acts in violation of the schools’ Ethics and Professionalism
Honor Code.
III.
a. Withhold evidence pertinent or give false evidence about any ethics and professionalism complaint
being heard or investigated.
b. Act in a manner that significantly interferes with School teaching, research, administration or other
responsibilities.
c. Commit gross or continuous violations of any procedures for infection control.
IV.
a. Furnish false or misleading information during the admissions and annual financial aid application
process.
b. Steal, procure in any unauthorized manner, damage, deface or destroy the property of the university or
of another person. Willful property loss or damage caused by a student will be considered a violation
of the Code of Principles of Ethical and Professional Conduct.
c. Sell, lend, give (provide in any manner), steal or acquire information or materials unauthorized by the
instructor.
d. Falsify in any way a grade, evaluation, patient record or any other university record.
e. Present for credit any work that includes information (e.g. dates, patient encounter records, etc.) that
the student knows to be false.
f. Possess or use firearms or any other dangerous weapons on School property.
g. Use pressure, threat, abuse, or similar behaviors against any person involved to inhibit the reporting,
investigation, or hearing of an alleged violation against this Code of Conduct.
V.
a. Use, possess or sell any illegal drugs on or off the School property. 24
b. Treat patients either outside regularly scheduled clinic periods or without appropriate faculty
supervision. This action constitutes the illegal practice of dentistry.
Compliance with the following standards is the obligation of all dental students:
A student will:
11
1. be respectful and courteous when dealing with patients, students, faculty, staff and visitors. Students
will also
extend the same level of respect to the didactic and clinical Student Teaching Assistants as they would to
faculty members.
2. address disagreement between faculty and/or students in a private setting off the clinic floor.
3. indicate when direct quotations are used, and when the ideas of another are incorporated into any work
to be submitted for academic credit, those ideas must be appropriately acknowledged.
4. not make negative remarks in a patient’s presence. Significant negative criticism should be given in a
private setting.
5. understand that any form of harassment relating to sex, sexual orientation, race, color, religion, age,
national origin, disability or medical condition will be considered unethical. (The University Policy on
Sexual Harassment is included as Appendix E).
6. safeguard the integrity of all research; any violation should be reported to the alleged violator’s
supervisor.
7. follow the directives of assigned instructors and faculty members. Students cannot selectively identify
alternate faculty members who advise differently. If there is a difference of opinion perceived by the
student regarding faculty decisions or judgments, the Department Chairperson or Chairperson’s designee
shall make the final judgment or decision.
8. adhere to departmental standards for patient care.
9. respect the rights, safety and welfare of other persons in the School of Dental Medicine (patients,
faculty, students, staff and visitors).
B. Clinical Conduct
The following guidelines, which are based on the current ADA Principles of Ethics and Code of Professional
Conduct, shall be adhered to by all students. The following guidelines have been derived from that
document for Tufts University School of Dental Medicine.
1. In the clinics, the primary professional obligation shall be to provide competent and timely delivery of
quality care within the bounds of clinical circumstances presented by the School and the patient, with
due consideration being given to the needs and desires of the patient.
2. No person shall be discriminated against because of sex, sexual orientation, race, color, religion, age,
national origin, disability, or medical condition.
3. Patient records must be maintained in such a way as to safeguard confidentiality and to protect the
patient’s welfare. Patient records must be accessible at all times to other faculty, staff or students to
allow provision of care; patient records should not be kept at the student’s residence. Students must
maintain professional confidentiality about patients.
4. Students shall treat patients under the supervision of Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
faculty in approved locations.
5. Consultation from another specialist or specialty clinic at the School of Dental Medicine shall be
sought whenever the welfare of the patient calls for it.
6. A student shall refer a patient for evaluation to any other medical specialty deemed necessary by the
student in consultation with clinical faculty
7. Patients should be informed of their present oral health status without disparaging comments made
about prior services, whether or not provided at the School of Dental Medicine. Unjustified comments
can be grounds for disciplinary action against the student making such statements. When accepted
professional standards of care are not followed, the Associate Dean of Clinical Affairs or his designate
should be notified at the earliest possible time.
8. Care being rendered to patients shall not be represented in a false or misleading manner. Anyone who
represents that a dental treatment recommended or performed has the capacity to cure or alleviate
disease or other conditions, when those representations are not based on accepted scientific knowledge
or research, is acting unethically.
9. Fees being charged for providing care shall not be represented in a false or misleading manner.
Incorrect treatment dates may not be reported to a third party payment agency in order to assist a
patient in obtaining benefits that otherwise would be disallowed. A dental procedure on a third party
claim form may not be incorrectly described in order to allow a greater payment, or to make a noncovered
procedure appear to be covered.
12
10. Patients should be informed, in language the patient could reasonably be expected to understand, of
the nature of the proposed treatment, any recognized alternatives, the possible risk, complications, and
anticipated benefits involved in the treatment and recognized alternatives. Information should be
provided to a patient in a manner that allows the patient to make informed decisions regarding his
treatment. Departmental requirements shall take lower priority to the patient’s welfare, in situations of
conflict.
11. A final written treatment plan will be provided to the patient.
12. Before undertaking patient treatment, the student shall be certain the patient has read about the
proposed treatment in the Informed Consent Booklet, understood the information provided and signed
the informed consent form.
13. A person’s training or competence shall not be represented in any way that would be false or
misleading.
14. Inserting false information on a patient record, altering or forging a signature, or misrepresenting any
material fact regarding a diagnosis, treatment, or management of a patient shall be considered
unethical.
15. No student shall treat patients while under the influence of alcohol, controlled substances, or, as
judged
by appropriate qualified treating authority, any medical treatment that could impair clinical judgment
or psychomotor function. (Students are obliged to notify the treating authority of the student’s
responsibility regarding patient care.)
16. Prescribing or distributing controlled substances in violation of the law or University rules shall be
considered unethical.
17. A patient’s confidential communication shall not be disclosed to any individual not involved in that
patient’s care, unless permission has been granted in writing by the patient in accordance with School
policy.
18. Failure to exercise approved infection control procedures is considered unethical behavior.
19. Services performed for patients shall be limited to those listed in an approved plan of care authorized
by supervising faculty.
20. Failure to follow through with the approved signed plan of care in a timely manner is considered
unethical, unless the patient is consulted and signed approval by a faculty member is obtained.
21. A research subject must grant informed consent for any test or procedure to be performed for the sole
purpose of research.
22. Failure to treat patients in a timely fashion, failure to be in regular attendance in clinic in order to treat
patients, unexcused absences which would result in not treating patients in a timely fashion, or
misrepresenting patients’ desires about timely care or the desire for care, will be considered unethical.
23. Treating patients in a manner, which would knowingly harm the patient, is assault and will be dealt
with in such fashion. Assault is a felony and is punishable under the law. Allegations of such
treatment (for example, knowingly extracting a tooth in order to make a prosthesis for graduation
requirements or intentionally causing a pulp exposure in order to necessitate root canal therapy) will be
investigated and may be referred to the Campus Police.
24. Transfer of patients or treatment of patients from one student to another must be done with the
signed permission of the student’s Practice Coordinator and the signed informed consent of the patient.
C. Computer Ethics
Use of Tufts Computer Services' facilities is a privilege extended to students of Tufts University. Tufts
University cannot guarantee the privacy or security of users' computer files, or the anonymity of any user.
The person issued an account is responsible for all use made of that account. Users of these facilities
agree not to violate any of the following rules:
1. Tufts' computer facilities (computers, printers, networks, software, etc.) may only be used by
authorized persons for legitimate purposes relating to teaching, course work, clinical patient care,
research, and administration at Tufts University.
2. No one may use, access, alter, or copy the accounts, passwords, directories, files, or programs of
13
any other user without that person's consent.
3. No one may use Tufts' computer facilities for inappropriate purposes such as: the playing of
practical jokes, deliberate breaching of security, the sending of abusive or offensive material,
deliberate interference with the work of other users, or the introduction of computer viruses.
4. No one may copy copyrighted software or run illegally copied software at Tufts.
5. All students wishing to obtain access to or use Tufts computer facilities are required to sign a
statement agreeing to comply with the Information Technology Responsible Use Policy at the time
of initiation.
Any such violation by a student may result in disciplinary action by the Associate Dean of Student Affairs
through the aegis of the Ethics, Professionalism, and Citizenship Committee. See Appendix C for additional
information.
D. Massachusetts Computer Crime Law
This Massachusetts law:



Prohibits unauthorized access to any computer system, either directly or by network or telephone. The
law provides that the use of password authorization systems to control access to a computer system
puts people on notice that their access is unauthorized if they don’t have a legitimate password.
Amends the criminal vandalism statute to make it clear that electronically stored or processed data is
“property”, the destruction or corruption of which is illegal.
Prohibits the theft of commercial computer service.
The law also makes electronic copies of computer and data files admissible in court, thus allowing a
business to maintain use of its original systems and files during proceedings. The new law also provides
that computer crime may be prosecuted and punished either in the county where the perpetrator was
physically located at the time he or she committed the crime, or in the county where the computer system
and data that was accessed or corrupted were located at the time of the violation. This means, for
example, that a hacker accessing a Massachusetts-based business’s computers in Massachusetts from
another state would be susceptible to prosecution in Massachusetts.
POLICIES AND PROCEDURES RELATIVE TO STUDENT CHEATING
Cheating is a serious infraction of the School’s Code of Principles of Ethical and Professional Conduct. It
gives cause to doubt the offending student’s integrity and fitness to be entrusted with the oral health care
of the public. Undetected or ignored cheating encourages dishonesty. It can give a student unfair
advantage over other students in comparative ratings and can lead to improper assessment of the
student’s readiness to progress to more advanced study or to provide direct patient care. It may also
demoralize the majority of students who do act fairly and honestly.
I. Responsibilities
Student responsibility includes the avoidance of even the appearance of cheating. Any student behavior
that gives the appearance of cheating may be taken as a presumption of cheating. Upon observation of
cheating on an examination or laboratory project, a student must report the incident immediately to the
instructor as information orlater in writing as a complaint to the Chairperson(s) of the EPC Committee.
II. Examination Administration
The following measures are mandatory for all examinations within the School of Dental Medicine:
• Tufts Student IDs are to be placed on the desktop, in a location that is clearly visible to the Course
Director and Proctors. Examination guideline infractions (for example, if a student fails to bring his/her
Tufts ID to the examination) are subject to a 5 point deduction in examination grade.
14
• All phones must be in the “off” position. If a student anticipates needing to be contacted for an
emergency, s/he should give the “on” cell phone (labeled with the student’s name) to a proctor. In the
event that a student’s cell phone rings during an examination, there will be a 5 point deduction in the
examination grade.
• Coats, book bags/back packs should be placed in the front of the room during the examination.
However, please arrive early enough to visit your locker before the exam. Students are reminded to dress
in layers, depending on the time of year. Sweaters/jackets may be removed and placed on the back of the
seat.
• Items are not to be left outside the examination room and material found in the areas outside of the
examination room will be discarded.
• Students who have not located their seat by the official start time of the class on the day of the
examination, but who arrive before the end of the class, will be classified as late and will receive the grade
on the examination with a 5 point deduction for a first time offense, a 10 point deduction for a second
offense and for a third occurrence, the student is required to attend an SPC or EPC hearing to determine
additional consequences.
• Students who arrive late due to an MBTA delay of greater than 15 minutes will be asked to request a
letter documenting the delay from the MBTA transit office in the Stuart Street Transportation Building.
Delays of less than 15 minutes will not result in the late penalty being forgiven, so students are
encouraged to allow ample time for transportation.
• Students that do not appear before the exam has officially ended will be defined as having an unexcused
absence. The student is entitled to a makeup examination and will receive the grade on the examination
with a 15 point deduction for a first time offense, a 20 point deduction for a second occurrence and for a
third occurrence, the student is required to attend an SPC or EPC hearing to determine additional
consequences.
• No blank or “crib” sheets are allowed in the room during examinations.
• No headphones are allowed during examinations.
• No food is allowed during examinations; drinks are permitted.
• The wearing of head coverings (except for religious reasons) is not permitted during examinations.
• Unless the student has applied for and been granted legal accommodation by the Office of Student
Affairs, students are not allowed to walk up to the front of the room during slide examinations.
• Students must protect their own examinations and answer sheets during examinations.
• No communication between students is allowed during examinations.
• Students must turn in their examinations and answer sheets when the Course Director announces that
the examination time is over.
• Students are not to congregate outside of the examination room before or after an examination, as it is
distracting to those still taking the examination.
• PDS’s or the use of PDA’s, calculators, clocks or other electronic devices is prohibited.
• When leaving the exam room to visit the bathroom, exam proctors will require that students record their
name on a sign-out sheet. The proctors will document the time that students leave the examination room.
Upon returning to the exam room, students will be required to sign in, and provide the time of their return
to the exam room. The clock in the exam room will be considered as providing the official time.
IMPLEMENTATION OF THE CODE OF ETHICS AND PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
Students will sign the Code upon matriculation or at the first presented opportunity after matriculation.
The following is a copy of the Ethics and Professionalism Conduct Code.
15
TUFTS UNIVERSITY SCHOOL OF DENTAL MEDICINE
CODE OF PRINCIPLES OF
ETHICAL AND PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT
Revised: 06/10
ETHICAL BEHAVIOR AS A STUDENT
You are beginning, or continuing, your career as a professional who will help care for other human beings. As a professional,
you are subject to a code of conduct to which you pledge to adhere. This code requires high standards of ethical conduct and
honesty. We expect that each of you will make a personal commitment to abide by a standard of behavior which will form the
basis of future professional conduct and will guide your conduct while enrolled at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine.
We expect you to begin the practice of professional and ethical behavior as a student.
Tufts students are expected to be responsible citizens not only of the Tufts community, but also the greater community. Students
are expected to comply with all university policies, local ordinances, and state and federal laws. Students are expected to avoid
activities that harm the reputation of the University or its members. Students also may not engage in conduct that poses a danger
or threat to others. Notwithstanding the above, legitimate and peaceful activities, including but not limited to protests of certain
University policies, whether expressed on or off campus, and provided that such activities are lawful and do not interfere with
normal University functions, shall not be deemed to be a breach of this code of ethics. The Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine Honor Code further imposes an obligation on each student to take affirmative steps to ensure that other dental students
comply with these standards of behavior. All students are required to sign a copy of the Honor Code, which is maintained in the
student’s file.
STUDENT HONOR CODE
Academic Misconduct and Professional Misconduct are defined below:
Academic Misconduct: Is the misrepresentation of one’s own academic achievement, including but not limited to the use of
inappropriate materials brought into an examination room; copying the work of others during or outside of an exam (e.g. 29
plagiarism) and any other acts or lack of acts which constitute a submission of someone else’s work as your own without proper
credit or reference.
Professional Misconduct: Encompasses such actions as, but not limited to, infractions of the ADA Principles of Ethics and Code
of Professional Conduct and falsifying or altering clinical documents, and conduct which threatens or endangers the health or
safety of any person.
I agree to uphold the provisions of the Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct for students at Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine (herein referred to as the Code). These include all acts that could be construed as cheating, stealing, falsification or
misrepresentation of patient care in records or to patients, or any action related to academic or professional conduct that would
knowingly place a patient or anyone else at risk of physical or emotional harm.
If I observe academic and/or professional misconduct, I will discuss these observations with the member of my class elected to
the Ethics, Professionalism, and Citizenship Committee (if applicable), with the Course Director or with any other member of the
Ethics, Professionalism, and Citizenship Committee. Formal action to address violations of the Honor Code, when deemed
necessary by the Dean for Students or his designee, will be taken in accordance with the Bylaws of the TUSDM Ethics,
Professionalism and Citizenship Committee.
I agree to respect all other members of our community, and to act towards them with courtesy. I will refrain from any comments
regarding patients, or any negative or disparaging statements about other students, faculty or staff, in public places. I will respect
the physical facilities and premises of the school as if they were my own.
I understand the procedures that will be followed if I do not uphold the Student Honor Code of Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine.
I have read, understand and agree to comply with the Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct at Tufts University School
of Dental Medicine. I have read the Section on Ethics, Professionalism and Citizenship as well as the Policies regarding
Sexual Harassment, Sexual Assault and Consensual Relationships as detailed in the Student Handbook and understand
the policies and procedures governing the evaluation of student conduct.
(Signature) __________________________________________________________________ Date ____________
Print Name ___________________________________________________________________________________
Phonetic Pronunciation of Name (for use at official School
ceremonies)_________________________________________________________
16
DISCIPLINARY ACTION AND FAIR PROCESS
The policy and procedures described in the section ensure fair process, that a fair hearing has taken place
and that the student's position has received full consideration.
The University makes every effort to protect the privacy of the individual. The location and time of EPC
Committee hearings are not made public and the decisions rendered at the hearings are announced to the
school community in a summarized fashion, which does not identify complainants and respondents, by
name. Each member of the EPC Committee is required to sign a confidentiality agreement, which requires
that the names of individuals appearing at committee hearings not be disclosed.
Ethical and Professional Complaints
Alleged violations of clinical and/or academic ethical standards and professional conduct by any student of
Tufts University as witnessed by any employee, student or faculty member of Tufts University will be
handled as described in the following section.
Unethical conduct should first be reported to the appropriate Course Director and/or Practice Coordinator,
who may consult with a relevant Department Chairperson and/or any of the Associate Deans for Clinics,
Research, Academic Affairs or Student Affairs. Unprofessional conduct of students in non-academic
situations should be reported to the Associate Dean for Student Affairs. Every effort should be made to
resolve the situation at this level.
If the situation cannot be resolved by the above-identified actions or if the informed parties believe the
allegation(s) ascribed to the student warrant it, the matter should be handled through the following
channels.
DISCIPLINARY PROCEDURAL GUIDELINES
The following guidelines supplement the Faculty Bylaws concerning how the School of Dental Medicine
generally may respond to alleged student violations of the Code of Principles of Ethical and Professional
Conduct (“the Code”). The School’s application of these guidelines is intended to be flexible, and their
general applicability will depend on the facts and circumstances that each case presents. Accordingly, no
contract is created or implied by anything stated herein. The School may exercise its discretion to change
the guidelines at any time and/or may deviate from them whenever the circumstances of a particular case
make deviation practical.
Student discipline may take a variety of forms, including (without limitation) counseling, oral or written
reprimand, probation, restitution, suspension, and expulsion (with or without the possibility of
readmission).
A. Allegations Concerning a Respondent
For purposes of these guidelines, the Respondent is any student accused of violating the Code.
An allegation is a written assertion that a violation of the Code may have occurred.
Any employee, student or faculty member of the University may present allegations to the Chair of the
Ethics, Professionalism, and Citizenship Committee (“EPC”). 1 Each allegation should describe with as much
specificity as possible (e.g., dates, names, locations, occurrences), the particular factual events that
constitute the alleged violation. If such specificity is missing, the person making the allegation should
supplement as appropriate.
1
Article IV, 2h, of the Faculty Bylaws makes the EPC responsible for “reviewing and making
recommendations concerning all issues related to the ethical and professional behavior of students” and
“appointing a subcommittee annually to review all specific instances of alleged unethical or unprofessional
behavior by students.” This subcommittee is referred to herein as an Incident Review Committee (“IRC”).
17
B. Optional preliminary investigation and report
Upon receiving the allegation, the Chair of the EPC will determine whether preliminary investigation is
appropriate before considering the initiation of proceedings involving an Incident Review Committee
(“IRC”) appointed by the EPC. Such preliminary investigation may be conducted by an individual faculty
member or administrator appointed by the Chair of the EPC, the campus police, or some other appropriate
body or person.
Depending on the circumstances, preliminary investigation may include gathering and reviewing pertinent
documents, interviewing necessary witnesses, and interviewing the Respondent (if he or she agrees to be
interviewed).
If the Respondent insists on the presence of a lawyer during any interview, then the interview will be
conducted only if a lawyer for the University also is present.
The University’s General Counsel is available for consultation at any time on any student disciplinary case,
as appropriate. If the Chair of the EPC determines that the Respondent’s probation, suspension, or
expulsion is within the range of possible sanctions for the offense(s) alleged, then he or she will ensure
that the case is coordinated with the General Counsel at an appropriate time.
Any person or body charged with conducting the preliminary investigation will conclude his or her work by
reporting to the Chair of the EPC a summary of the facts and evidence supporting any suspected violation
of the Code.
C. Initial notice to the Respondent, the Respondent’s right to respond in writing and with
documents, and review and report by the IRC.
The procedures of this section apply in either of two circumstances. First, they apply whenever the Chair
of the EPC determines that no preliminary investigation is necessary but that circumstances warrant
further consideration of student discipline. Second, they also apply whenever the Chair of the EPC makes
this determination after reviewing a report resulting from preliminary investigation. In either situation, the
Chair will provide the Respondent written notice of the following:
1. The violation(s) to be considered.
2. A summary of the evidence generally indicating that such violation has occurred.
3. The range of disciplinary sanctions that could result.
4. The Respondent’s opportunity to exercise any and all of the following rights, which will be waived if
not exercised within the periods of time specified:
A. A right to respond in writing within ten (10) days to explain anything that is factually
erroneous about the allegation and/or that there has been no violation;
B.
A right to respond in writing within ten (10) days to explain why a particular disciplinary
sanction would be too severe even though a violation has occurred;
C. A right to submit within ten (10) days all documentary evidence (including
statements/affidavits of witnesses, letters of character references, etc.) that support any of
the Respondent’s positions; and
D. A right to submit within ten (10) days a written demand for an oral hearing.
Upon lapse of the above ten (10) day period and/or the receipt of the written submissions at issue, the
IRC will review the evidence and, pursuant to Article IV, 2h, of the Faculty Bylaws, make a written
recommendation to the EPC regarding case disposition.
18
D. EPC Deliberation and Disposition
Upon receiving and reviewing the IRC’s report, the EPC will dismiss the case if it determines that no
further proceedings are appropriate.
If the EPC determines that additional proceedings are appropriate, however, it will proceed as suggested
below.
If the respondent did not demand a hearing, the EPC will review the available evidence and make a
written recommendation to the Executive Faculty concerning case disposition. 2
If the Respondent did demand a hearing, then the Chair of the EPC will provide to the Respondent a letter
of notification with notice of the following:
1. The time of the hearing (no sooner than ten days from the date of notification).
2. The location of the hearing.
3. The violation(s) to be considered.
4. The range of disciplinary sanctions that could result.
5. The names of the witnesses expected to be called by the EPC or any complainant.
6. The written or documentary evidence that the EPC will consider.
7. That the Respondent may testify at the hearing if he or she chooses.
8. That the Respondent may present evidence at the hearing through the testimony of witnesses,
provided that he or she provides written notice of the identities of these witnesses to the Chair of
the EPC at least five (5) days before the scheduled hearing.
9. That the Respondent may submit further written or documentary evidence for the consideration of
the EPC, provided that he or she does so at least five (5) days before the scheduled hearing.
10. That the Respondent may cross-examine any witness who testifies against him.
11. That the Respondent may orally argue his or her position(s) to the EPC after all evidence is
presented.
12. That the Respondent may be accompanied and advised by an attorney or other advisor, provided
that written notice is given at least five (5) days before the hearing of the name of the
attorney/advisor, and provided that the Respondent and his or her attorney/advisor understand
that the attorney/advisor will be present for advice to the Respondent only – he or she will not be
allowed to address the EPC.
13. That, at the conclusion of the hearing, the EPC will deliberate privately and, by majority vote, make
its recommendation to the Executive Faculty on the issues of whether a violation has occurred and
whether a particular disciplinary sanction should be imposed.
E. The EPC hearing
The Chair of the EPC, or some other EPC member appointed by the Dean, will preside at the EPC hearing.
The hearing will proceed as set forth in the EPC’s letter of notification (as described above), beginning with
a presentation of evidence against the Respondent.
After all evidence is presented, the Respondent and any individual complainant may argue in his or her
behalf.
2
Article III, 3, provides, with exceptions not applicable here that the Executive Faculty shall “act upon the
reports of all standing and ad hoc committees.”
19
EPC hearing procedures otherwise are intended to be as flexible and informal as practical. Formal rules of
evidence are not appropriate. The EPC may consider any evidence that it deems relevant, and may attach
to the evidence whatever weight, if any, it deems appropriate.
The hearing will not be recorded.
At an appropriate point, the Chair of the EPC will announce the termination of the hearing.
F. EPC deliberation and recommendation
After the hearing, the EPC will deliberate in private and make decisions by majority vote about what to
recommend to the Executive Faculty.
After appropriate deliberation and voting, the EPC will submit a written report to the Executive Faculty on
the following:
1. Its determination of each violation, if any that has occurred.
2. Its summary of the evidence that supports the finding of any violation.
3. Its recommendation of an appropriate disciplinary penalty, if any (not to exceed in
severity the penalty for which the Respondent was given notice).
G. Review and decision by the Executive Faculty
Upon receiving the written report from the EPC, the Executive Faculty will deliberate and may take any of
the following actions:
1. Dismiss the case;
2. Return the case to the EPC for additional proceedings, as appropriate; or
3. Advise the Respondent in writing of the EPC’s findings, the EPC’s initial determinations of
disciplinary sanctions, if any, and the Respondent’s right to show cause in writing why the
disciplinary sanction(s) would be unjust. The Respondent will be allowed ten (10) days to
show such cause in writing. The respondent may attach to his written submission any
documents that he or she believes appropriate for further consideration.
After the ten (10) day period for written submissions has expired, the Executive Faculty will review the
case file again and make its final determination of an appropriate disposition of the case, including any
sanction(s) to be imposed.
The Executive Faculty then will notify the Respondent in writing of (a) the decisions made by the
Executive Faculty and the sanction(s) being imposed, and (b) the Respondent’s right to submit within ten
(10) days a written appeal to the Dean. Any such written appeal should explain fully the bases for the
appeal. The Respondent may attach additional documentation to the written appeal, if he or she deems it
appropriate.
If no appeal is received within the specified deadline, then the determination by the Executive Faculty will
be final.
H. Review of the appeal by the Dean
If the Respondent appeals in the manner suggested above, the Dean will review the entire case file
(including all materials submitted by the Respondent in support of his or her appeal), consult with others
as appropriate, and provide written notice to the Respondent of final disposition of the case.
20
ACTIONS AND PENALTIES
The following are the actions and penalties, which the EPC Committee may recommend to the Executive
Faculty and Dean. The EPC Committee may present other reasonable recommendations to the Executive
Faculty and Dean.
Counseling
The student will be counseled by members of the Committee, or by some person(s) appointed or
authorized by the Committee. Counseling is not considered a punishment or penalty, and is designed to
help the student understand his/her reasons for violating the Code, and to avoid future violations. A
determination by the Executive Faculty and Dean that a student be counseled will not be noted on the
student's record.
Repeat of Examination
The student will be required to repeat an examination or other exercise or procedure in connection with
the violation of the Code. The disciplinary proceedings and action will be noted in the student's record, but
may be deleted after graduation, and will not be used in correspondence from the School, if no further
violations occur. A grade of zero on the examination in question can be recommended.
Temporary Letter of Reprimand
The student will receive a written reprimand by the Committee, signed by the Chairperson(s). A copy of
the written reprimand will be included in the student's record, will not be referred to in correspondence
from the school, and will be removed upon graduation if no further violations of the Code occur.
Written Reprimand
The student will receive a written reprimand by the Committee, signed by the Chairperson(s). A copy of
the written reprimand will be included in the student's record, and will be referred to in correspondence
from the school.
Repeat Course or Academic Year
The student will be required to repeat the course or year in which violation of the Code occurred. The
student cannot advance to the subsequent year’s curriculum while repeating a course. This action will be
noted in the student’s permanent record, and will be referred to in correspondence from the school.
Probation
The student will be placed on probation for a specified period of time. During such time, the student will
remain under the continuing observation and supervision of the Chairperson(s) of the EPC Committee.
The Committee may take appropriate steps, including requiring the student to appear regularly before the
Committee or a designated member(s), to assure that the student is acting in accordance with the Code.
If the student fails to fulfill the directives of the Committee during this time, the Committee may
recommend to the Dean that another action or penalty be imposed. Probation will be noted in the
student’s permanent record, and will be referred to in correspondence from the school.
Restitution
Where the student has damaged, converted, or otherwise impaired the value of the property of Tufts
University, a Tufts University affiliate, or member or clients thereof, the student may be required to make
adequate restitution to the injured party. Restitution may be ordered at the discretion of the Committee
and restitution may be in the form of monetary compensation or penalty, which will not be mentioned in
the student's record. The fact that restitution was ordered shall not be noted in the student’s permanent
record.
Suspension
The student will not be permitted to continue as a registered student for a specified period of time. At the
expiration of this time period, the student shall be re-enrolled upon his/her request. The student will
receive credit only for those courses, which have been completed and passed prior to suspension. At the
21
discretion of the Executive Faculty or Dean, the student may be permitted to complete courses in
progress, the current semester, or the current academic year before beginning the term of suspension.
Suspension will be noted in the student’s record and will be referred to in correspondence from the school.
Expulsion with Possibility of Re-application
The student will be dismissed from the program but will be permitted to reapply for admission to Tufts
University, subject to all the conditions of the regular admissions process. This action will be noted in the
student’s permanent record, and will be referred to in correspondence from the school.
Final Expulsion
The student will be dismissed from the program, but will not be permitted to re-apply or re-enroll. This
action will be noted in the student’s permanent record, and will be referred to in correspondence from the
school.
22
STUDENT ACTIVITIES
There are basically two types of student activities: (1) sponsored or university activities which have active
management, financial, physical and administrative involvement from the University, involving significant
staff and faculty time and (2) non-sponsored activities that are independent from the institutions physical,
financial or administrative involvement. In this instance the University will have limited or no oversight of
the activity.
The University’s mission regarding these types of activities is to allocate limited resources, effectuate a
mission, meet student interest and limit the liabilities to which the University, its students, faculty and
staff are exposed. University sponsored activities require the prior approval of the Office of Student
Affairs.
Any questions regarding the appropriateness of an activity or whether the University will sponsor it, must
be referred to the Office of Student Affairs well in advance of the event.
Depending on the nature of the activity, participants may be obliged to sign a release or waiver of liability
as a condition of participation.
If a personal vehicle is utilized for a University sponsored activity, personal liability insurance limits are
primary and the University’s limits may be excess. Under no circumstances will the University reimburse
for damages to a personal vehicle.
STUDENT ORGANIZATIONS
Student organizations at Tufts are established and run by the students who wish to participate. Student
groups are maintained based upon the general level of student interest. If you wish to establish a new
organization it is necessary that you submit a mission statement along with a general overview of
proposed activities associated with the group to the Assistant Director of Student Affairs.
Student organizations may, upon written request, receive an annual budget allocation. However,
organizations are expected to fundraise in order to cover their expenses. Organizations interested in
receiving funds must submit a budget proposal to the Assistant Director of Student Affairs. Funding will
be received based upon the proposal submitted and the availability of funds at the time of submission.
Any allocated money must be used by June 15th for each fiscal year close or the use of the money will
expire.
Student organizations are encouraged to seek faculty advisors for assistance in support of their group.
Please notify the Office of Student Affairs of the selection of an advisor or if you need assistance in finding
one. Organizations must also keep the Office of Student Affairs informed of the election of new leadership
positions each year.
General Responsibilities of Student Organization Representatives
Maintain correspondence with the student body regarding events or issues associated with the group.
Complete room requests for organized meetings or events on campus.
Maintain communication with the Assistant Director of Student Affairs in regards to event planning in
order to ensure that no conflicts exist with the planned events of other organizations. Communicate all on
campus organized meetings or events or off campus University sponsored meetings or events to the
Assistant Director of Student Affairs. Complete all necessary room request forms, special event setup
forms and any other additional paperwork and submit all necessary paperwork to the Assistant Director of
Student Affairs.
Submit a written report and/or presentation to the Office of Student Affairs upon returning from each
national and/or regional meeting, if applicable. All travel arrangements must be pre-approved by the
Office of Student Affairs.
23
The following is a list of currently active student organizations:
Alpha Omega
American Dental Education Association (ADEA)
American Association of Women Dentists (AAWD)
American Association of Men in Dentistry (AAMD)
American Student Dental Association (ASDA)
Bates Student Research Group
Bridge Over Troubled Waters
Christian Medical and Dental Society (CMDS)
Delta Sigma Delta
Gay Lesbian Student Organization (GLBT)
Health Professions Scholarship Program
Hillel
Hispanic Dental Association (HDA)
Muslim Student Association (MSA)
Persian Association of Student Dentists and Dentists (PASDAD)
Project Correct
Smile Share and Care
Smile Squad
South Asian Medical-Dental Association (SAMDA)
Student National Dental Association (SNDA)
RESEARCH SOCIETIES
History of Bates-Andrews Research Day
Since the 1930’s this day is held in February or March to honor George A. Bates, an alumnus of Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine, who taught Tufts medical and dental students. The student research
societies annually sponsor “Bates Day” which consists of student table clinics that showcase the research
conducted by students during the preceding year. It also features displays by commercial exhibitors and
has included photography and arts & crafts exhibitions by students and faculty. Bates-Andrews Day
especially gives our students an opportunity to share with the rest of the Tufts community their
accomplishments in fields of special interest. Bates Day is held annually at Tufts to promote student
research and thereby enhance the opportunities for professional growth of our students, alumni and
faculty. Several prizes are awarded, included funded travel to meetings of the American Dental
Association and the Greater New York Dental Society.
Who participates/is expected to participate?
All students who received Student Summer Research Grants from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine are required to present at Bates Day. Graduate students and students who completed research
at other institutions are encouraged to participate. Master of Science students are encouraged to present
posters.
The George A. Bates - Student Research Group
A student organization established in 1935, the local Student Research Group chapter of the American
Association for Dental Research bears the name of the late George A. Bates. Dr. Bates was a graduate of
the dental school and inspirational professor in microscopic anatomy for both the dental and medical
students. The Bates-Student Research Group (SRG) promotes student research in dentistry and its
related disciplines. All students interested in research are encouraged to pursue membership in the
Bates-Student Research Group.
Membership
Interested students are welcome to attend various Bates-SRG meetings and activities throughout the
year. Students are encouraged to join the American Association of Dental Research National Student
24
Research Group, and to help represent student research at Tufts on a national level. Membership in the
Bates-Student Research Group is also acknowledged for all students who present at the annual BatesAndrews Research Day.
The Robert R. Andrews Research Honors Society
This student-run organization was established in 1921 to promote dental research and to honor those who
excel in it. It is named in memory of Dr. Robert R. Andrews, a former member of the faculty, an
outstanding researcher and distinguished dental surgeon. As the name signifies, this is an honor society
to which students are elected following peer-review by research faculty and the Society’s officers. Student
members are acknowledged at graduation by special mention in the commencement program for their
class.
The Robert R. Andrews Research Honors Society-Criteria for Membership
Typically, students inducted into the Andrews Research Honors Society have conducted research during
two or more years, and have presented their work at regional and national conferences. Each year one to
three faculty members are inducted into the society based on their personal research accomplishments as
well as their continuing support, guidance and mentoring for student research.
UNIVERSITY POLICY ON CAMPUS GATHERINGS
Because free inquiry and expression are indispensable to the attainment of the goals of the University,
Tufts encourages members of the University community to develop the capacity for critical judgment and
supports the rights of members of the University community to freely express their views and opinions.
The University also recognizes a concurrent obligation to develop policies and procedures, which safeguard
this freedom of expression but which, at the same time, will maintain on the campuses an atmosphere
conducive to academic work. The University expects its members to be conscious and respectful of the
corollary rights of fellow students, faculty, staff, and other participants in the University community to
perform their duties free from disruption, interference, or harassment.
While the University recognizes the rights of members of the Tufts community to peaceful and nonobstructive gathering for the purpose of expressing and discussing ideas and opinions, the University will
not sanction conduct such as the following:
a. Interference with students, faculty, staff or visitors to the campus who are seeking to perform their
various duties. Blocking, directly or by crowding, an entry to a university building and/or creating
excessive noise that interferes with sanctioned activities, constitutes disruption.
b. Intimidation of students, faculty, staff, or visitors to the campus. Examples of intimidation include
but are not limited to: causing or attempting to cause physical injury; physically preventing or
attempting to prevent use of a university facility; or threatening, by worlds or actions, either of the
above. Picketing outdoors that allows free access to the facility is permitted.
c. Destruction of, damage to, or unauthorized access to property, records, documents, files, etc., of
the University or of members of the University community.
d. Unauthorized entry to a non-public area, a private office, or a University facility declared closed by
the University and/or refusal to leave when asked. Such behavior constitutes trespassing.
e. Interruption or disturbance of, or unwelcome participation (including symbolic, verbal, or other
activity) at a religious service being conducted at the University.
f.
Failure to identify oneself when asked by a University official or University police officer or refusing
to present proper ID when asked.
g. Disregarding requests by a University official to disperse or preventing an official from carrying out
his/her responsibilities to enforce university rules.
h. Aiding and abetting others in violating any of these rules.
Any individual who engages in the conduct described above, or who otherwise interferes with and disrupts
the orderly conduct of University affairs will be subject to civil or criminal prosecution, when civil or
25
criminal statutes are violated, and to applicable University disciplinary procedures. With respect to
students, such disciplinary procedures could result in suspension or expulsion from the University.
STUDENT REPRESENTATION ON ADVANCED & GRADUATE EDUCATION COMMITTEE
AND ETHICS, PROFESSIONALISM & CITIZENSHIP COMMITTEES
While there is no formal governing body (class officers) for participants in the Advanced and Graduate
Education programs, the Advanced & Graduate Education Committee and Ethics, Professionalism &
Citizenship Committees have student representatives. Students serve for one year and may volunteer for
service. In the event that there are no volunteers, a student representative is selected by the committee.
STUDENT RESOURCES
CLASS E-MAIL LIST SERVS
REQUESTING A MESSAGE TO BE SENT TO ALL DMD CLASSES:
1. Type the mailing list address in the TO: field
2. For all DMD classes type: [email protected]
3. Complete the subject line with the true subject of your message, type the message text in the
body, add any cc: or bcc: individuals and send.
4. The postings to class lists are set up as "Announcement" and "No Moderated-Edit". This means
that the list owner, in this case the Office of Student Affairs, will receive a copy of the message for
approval or discard. If there are any concerns with the content of the message, the message may
be sent back for a request for modification, which has previously occurred, in rare cases. The
message will appear as if it is coming from you.
5. If you wish to receive a copy of the sent message, please cc: yourself on the message.
REQUESTING A MESSAGE TO BE SENT TO INDIVIDUAL CLASSES:
Type the mailing list address in the TO: field and then continue with instructions above.
Mailing list
The Class
The Class
The Class
The Class
addresses for:
of 2016
of 2015
of 2014
of 2013
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
REQUESTING A MESSAGE TO BE SENT TO ALL ADVANCED EDUCATION/GRADUATE
(POSTDOCTORAL) STUDENTS:
Type the mailing list address in the TO: field and then continue with instructions above.
All Advanced Education/Graduate (Postdoctoral) Students [email protected]
If you have any questions or concerns regarding Dental School Class Listservs, please contact the Office of
Student Affairs at 6-6543 (Jenny Olivera), or 6-6823 (Lee Gant).
26
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICIES, RESOURCES & FACILITIES
POLICIES
FAMILY EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS AND PRIVACY ACT OF 1974
The Federal Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act of 1974 gives each enrolled student at Tufts access
to his/her educational records, the right to request that they be amended where they are inaccurate or
misleading, and the right to control their distribution to others.
A detailed description of the student's rights under the act, the location of all pertinent records and the
procedures for requesting access and invoking the right to control access are contained in Appendix B.
SNOW EMERGENCY/CLINICAL GUIDELINES
The School of Dental Medicine and the School of Veterinary Medicine operate a major clinical facility for
the treatment of patients. As such, the School of Dental Medicine remains open for patient care even
though other schools in the University may close for a snow emergency. Students are expected to make
every reasonable effort to be in attendance since many of the schools patients will make extraordinary
efforts to keep an appointment for treatment.
In the event of a severe snowstorm, the Dean, in consultation with the central administration of the
University, may close the School of Dental Medicine. If this is done, announcements will be made on local
radio and television stations. Please note that the announcement must refer to the School of Dental
Medicine specifically. General Tufts University announcements may not apply to the Dental School. It is
very rare for the Dental School to suspend classes and clinical activity for inclement weather. An
announcement will also be distributed through the student e-mail listservs. Please note that the Tufts
University weather emergency number is 617-627-4636.
POLICY ON USE OF TUFTS UNIVERSITY NAME AND INSIGNIAS
INTRODUCTION
The name "Tufts University" and how it is used affects both the institution as a whole and the individual
members of the University community. Appropriate use of the name and insignias can benefit all, while
inappropriate use may reflect negatively on both the institution and its individual members.
Because of these far-reaching implications, oversight regarding the use of the University's name and
insignias, and the names of individual schools within the University (including web domain names that
incorporate "Tufts" or the name of a Tufts school), will be conducted on an institutional level according to
the principles and guidelines outlined in this policy.
The Office of University Counsel will coordinate all requests for use of the Tufts name and insignias, which
are trademarks of the University. The Office of University Counsel is located in Ballou Hall, Third Floor,
Medford, MA 02155, 617-627-3337.
The Senior Vice President for University Relations is responsible for making final decisions on use of the
Tufts name and insignias, including the names of individual units of the University.
Principles
1. Is the implied association with the University accurate and can we ensure that the
association with the University will continue to be portrayed accurately?
Use of Tufts' name in connection with an activity, project or product implies a close association with the
University and is generally construed as sponsorship or endorsement. Tufts must ensure that this
27
portrayal is accurate and that it has the requisite control of the activity, project or product to ensure that
the implied close association remains an accurate representation of the affiliation with the University.
2. Is the use of the Tufts name consistent with the research and educational mission of the
University?
Tufts has an obligation to its students, alumni, faculty, staff, donors and others to ensure that the use of
its name falls, in general, within its primary mission of research and education. Some activities such as
promotion of individual causes, political or otherwise, clearly fall outside this mission.
3. What effect will the proposed use of name have on the image of the University as a whole?
Use of the Tufts name in situations having a potential to diminish or damage Tufts' image and reputation
must be avoided.
4. Will Tufts be able to realize a fair and reasonable gain (through image enhancement or
through economic benefit) from the use of its name?
Related to this is the issue of liability. If there is a potential for financial, legal or reputational risk to the
University through the use of its name, for example on a particular product, such use of name should be
avoided.
General Guidelines and Procedures
1. Any use of name that refers to the University as a whole must be submitted to the Office of University
Counsel for review. The Office of University Counsel will review the request and forward it with a
recommendation to the Senior Vice President for University Relations, who will make the final decision.
Specific questions or requests for approval can be emailed to [email protected]
2. Any use of name that refers to individual schools or units should first be submitted to the Dean or a
responsible authority of that school or unit for approval and should then be submitted to the Office of
University Counsel for review and transmittal to the Senior Vice President for University Relations.
3. In considering any proposed use, University officials will be guided by the principles outlined above.
4. Use of the official Tufts logo will follow these guidelines and additionally must adhere to the graphic
standards outlined in the university’s visual identity manual. In most cases such use will require review by
the Office of Publications before printing or manufacturing is approved. The University name may not be
used to create new logos and may not be integrated or combined with existing logos. Issues regarding cobranding must follow the guidelines above and require review by University Counsel, Public Relations and
Publications.
Guidelines for Use of Name by Faculty, Staff, Students and Alumni
1. Faculty members and staff may use the Tufts name or the name of the appropriate school to identify
themselves on stationery, business cards, publications in research or educational journals and other
materials used in the course of their university-related activities (e.g. John Smith, Professor of
Mathematics, Tufts University.) Students and alumni may wish to identify themselves as students or
graduates of the University in biographical information. In using or authorizing use of the Tufts name to
identify themselves in connection with activities conducted with outside individuals or entities (e.g.
authoring a book), members of the Tufts community should be sure that the Tufts name is used in a
manner that does not imply University endorsement or responsibility for the particular activity, project or
product. For example, when authoring a book, a faculty member may describe his or her affiliation with
Tufts University on the inside of the book or book jacket. The name of the University should not appear on
the cover of the book. Likewise, the name of Tufts University may not be used in the title of any journal or
other publication without the expressed permission of the University. Such permission will not normally be
given in any circumstance where the University does not retain exclusive editorial control over the
publication. Use of the University name or logo is NOT permitted for cards, stationery, signage,
28
promotional literature, web sites or other communications used in connection with an individual’s private
practice or business.
2. All other proposed uses of the Tufts name by faculty and staff and any use of the name by students and
alumni should be submitted to the Office of University Counsel.
Guidelines for Use of Name by Individual Schools and Units
1. Schools or units may use the name of Tufts University or the name of their school or unit in the
following activities:
 stationery, business cards and other materials used by the schools or other units in the course of
their university-related activities;
 content in printed or multimedia form in which the University, school or unit involved regularly
communicates with its constituencies, including course catalogues and related materials, web
pages within the tufts.edu domain and similar publications issued by the schools and other units;
 course materials and any materials prepared for use in connection with courses conducted at the
University, whether in printed or digital form.
In any such uses, the school or unit involved should take care that its use does not adversely affect other
schools or the institution as a whole. Ultimately the Senior Vice President for University Relations has the
right to review and determine the appropriate use of the Tufts University name.
2. Any other use of the University's name or the name of the individual school or unit will require approval
as outlined above in Item 2 of "General Guidelines and Procedures." In particular, prior approval is
required if the use of name involves the sale or distribution for financial consideration of a product or
service or the granting of a license for use of the name on merchandise, including but not limited to
apparel, software or electronic media.
3. Any news, marketing and/or publicity materials designated for dissemination to media channels and
extended audiences of elected/appointed officials, investors, donors, and others concerning official
University or School matters require up-front involvement (at the planning stages) with the University's
Public Relations Department and, as appropriate, the Community Relations and Publications departments.
The Public Relations Department, working with the mandate and approvals of the University's
administrative leadership team, must review any materials and information targeted at the media. The
Public Relations, Publications and/or Community Relations departments should be an integral part of any
continuing external publicity or marketing outreach by other parties if it involves the use of the Tufts
name, insignias, or affiliation, etc.
Guidelines for Use of Name by Third Parties
In general, use of the University's name or the name of an individual school or unit requires written
approval by the Office of University Counsel as outlined above. However, certain uses by third parties are
generally permitted and do not require written approval:
1. A third party may use the University name when reporting a transaction internally or reporting a
transaction to regulatory authorities as required by applicable law.
 For example, a corporation that has made a grant to the University may report the amount of such
grant in internal documents summarizing its charitable activities, or on its tax returns.
2. A non-profit or government entity that has funded research or programming at the University may
disclose that it has provided such funding. In addition, if such funded research is published, the source of
the funding should be indicated along with the University affiliation of the researcher.
3. If a third party receives a license to use or distribute material written or developed by the University,
the material should include a written acknowledgment that the copyright is owned by Tufts University and
29
that the material is being used or distributed under the terms of a license with the University (with all
other rights being reserved).
INFECTION CONTROL
The Dental School has a Risk Management/Safety/Infection Control Committee, which is composed of
representatives from each department, each clinical area and each dental class. Dr. James Hanley is the
Director of Infection Control and Ms. Maureen Lombard is the Assistant Director. Ms. Shannon Balletto is
the Infection Control Administrator. The main purpose of Infection Control is to break the chain of crosscontamination (the transfer of pathogens from one area to another to reduce exposure to any infectious
diseases). Universal Procedures for Infection Control at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, the
Infection Control handbook for students, faculty, and staff, details the policies and procedures of the
School. Please study and refer to this handbook. Infection Control is the responsibility of all of us. The
summary guidelines are as follows:
 Universal Standard Precautions are used for ALL patients since it is not possible to tell
which patient is infectious. All potentially infectious materials, such as blood or saliva, are
considered infectious for blood borne pathogens.
 Exposure Control is to be followed at all times. This is the practice of preventing any
reasonably anticipated eye, skin, mucous membrane or parental (injected) contact with blood or
other potentially infectious fluids during the performance of one’s duties.
 Immunizations are required for Hepatitis B (HBV), Measles/Mumps/Rubella (MMR),
Diphtheria/ Tetanus/Pertussis (DPT or DT), and Polio. It is strongly recommended that Dental
Health Care Workers also receive yearly tuberculin testing and influenza vaccinations.
 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is to be worn for ALL patient procedures. This
includes protective eyewear, clinic gown, facemask, and appropriate gloves.
 Sterilization is required for all instruments, burs, and handpieces by appropriate means
(autoclave, dry heat, or ethylene oxide gas sterilization). Items must be dated and kept properly
wrapped and sealed until ready to use.
 Surface Disinfection of cleaned surfaces is done by the Spray/Wipe/Spray technique with the
appropriate disinfectant.
 Barrier Protection is used on cleaned and disinfected surfaces that may be touched or
contaminated.
 Disinfection of non-sterilizable patient contact items is done by the student with the
Spray/Wipe/Spray technique (examples include impressions, record bases, dentures, curing lights,
and ultrasonic scaler units).
 Waste Disposal must conform to the guidelines provided by local, state, and governmental
regulatory agencies.
If you have any questions, please contact Shannon Balleto at (617) 636-3941, at the Infection Control
Office in DHS-102, or by e-mail at [email protected].
30
TUSDM Medical Emergencies Protocol Summary
Assume charge of the emergency
If ABCs
present
have assistant
Call Oral Surgery:
6-6995
YOU stay
with patient
Designate an
ASSISTANT
Check:
Airway,
Breathing,
Circulation
Indicate floor
and operatory #
Station assistant at
front
stairway to direct oral
surgery team
Dial 6-5555 for Code 99
Indicate floor and operatory #, state
“AT DENTAL TOWER BUILDING”
Inform if child or adult
Inform front desk
Bring oxygen tank,
stethoscope and
BP
cuff to emergency
site
If ABCs
not present
have assistant
TMC
TRANPORTATION
FOR NON-CODED
PATIENTS:
6-5122 or Beeper #
2933 or Page
TMC runner
at Beeper # 1358.
Indicate level of
urgency for
transportation.
Station assistant at rear doors (Proger
Bldg.) to direct Code 99 team
Alert Oral Surgery: 6-6995
Call Campus Police: 6-6911
Code Operator will call back in 1
minute to check code team arrival
Notify Campus
Police: 6-6911
Keep area
clear
31
MEDICAL EMERGENCY PROTOCOL SUMMARY
Emergency medical problems can occur at any place in the dental building. Most commonly they will
occur in the clinic, but they could also occur in a laboratory, office, restroom or lounge.
Whoever discovers the emergency situation should do the following:
A. Assume charge of the situation until relieved. You are responsible for managing the event
until expert help arrives.
B. Be calm and don’t panic. Most emergencies appear worse than they are. If you lose control,
you will be of no help to the victim.
C. Check and note the time. Knowing how long the victim has been in a compromised situation
is very important to the management of the care of the victim. Write down the time on anything at
hand. Record any major events that occur after the emergency starts. For example, if the person
stops breathing, loses his/her pulse, passes out, etc.
Then, begin to assist the victim:
1. You, the Provider, stay with the victim. A person in distress should never be left alone.
2. Get someone to help you. Call out for help. You should stay with the victim, and have
another person at hand to assist you. This assistant (the first responder) is responsible for getting
a medically qualified person (clinic instructor, oral surgery resident, code team, equipment, etc.) to
assess and care for the victim.
3. Remove the victim from harm. If the victim is light-headed, assist him/her to a horizontal
position. If bleeding, apply pressure to the site. If attached to an electrical cord, pull the cord out
from the receptacle. If seizing, assist to the floor unless seated in a dental chair.
4. First responder stays at the emergency site and delgates the following responsibilities:
a. Call Oral Surgery and/or Code 99 Oral Surgery is contacted by dailing 6-6995. Be clear about
the location (floor and bay number). The Oral Surgery Resident and staff and generally present
from 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. For evening clinic there is no oral surgery coverage. Call the TMC
operator at 6-5555. Check for pulse at the neck, watch the chest rise and fall to check for
breathing. If the patient does not have a pulse or is not breathing, a code “99” should
be called and you should initiate cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
b. Get the code cart. The code (crash) cart is a red-wheeled cart kept near the dispensaries on
floors 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8. Be sure to bring the green oxygen tank(kept near but separate from
the code cart). Having the cart at hand will save valuable time when the expert help arrives.
c. Get the Emergency Box from the dispensary. It contains the regular and large BP cuff,
stethoscope, ammonia and liquid sugar. Use the contents to assist the Provider.
d. Contact the Faculty and Practice Assistant The faculty will assist in patient care.
e. Call Tufts Police at 9-6911. The police will coordinate patient transportation to ER when needed.
f. Send someone to the front and back elevators to direct the Oral Surgery Team and the Code 99
Teams to the emergency site.
g. Crowd control
Keep the area clear. Emergencies attract crowds, crowds interfere with those trying to help the
victim. Order all those not actively helping the victim to stand back.
For all emergencies: An incident report must be filed in the office of the Dean of Clinics, DHS-3, and
if the victim is a patient, a case note should be made in the clinic electronic record. Patient follow-up
and outcomes of the emergency is conducted by the Director of Medicine
32
MEDICAL EMERGENCIES PROTOCOL SUMMARY
If the patient is spontaneously breathing and is maintaining a pulse and blood pressure:
1. Call the R.N. and oral surgeons on the fifth floor, extension 6995.
2. State: “There is a medical emergency on the _____ floor, operatory number _____.
3. Call Campus Police, , extension 6-6911. State that the emergency is at the Dental Tower.
4. Notify the reception desk, faculty and the Practice Assistant of your location.
5. Station someone in the reception area by the stairway to direct the emergency team to the
emergency area.
6. The oxygen delivery system, stethoscope and sphygmomanometer should be available at the
operatory.
OR
If the patient is not breathing and not maintaining a blood pressure:
1. Dial extension 6-5555 and repeat as follows:
“Code 99, there is a medical emergency on the _____ floor, dental tower, adult/pediatric patient”. The
Team will be directed to the site by a person stationed at the door connecting Proger Hospital to the
Dental Tower.
2. Keep your phone clear--the CODE operator in the hospital will call back to check the arrival of the
team within one minute of your first call.
3. Call Campus Police: 6-6911.
4. Alert Oral Surgery at extension 6-6995.
33
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine Needle-stick/Percutaneous Incident Protocol
The exposure site should be cleaned with soap and water and flushed liberally.
During Day
Clinic
Report incident to instructor or
supervisor and contact Dr. Ganda's
office immediately to facilitate your
referral to employee health. Dr.
Ganda's office is located on DHS-3,
Room 323, extension 6-4055. In
the event Dr. Ganda is not readily
available, contact the Department
Administrator (DHS 320, extension 66814) or the Practice Coordinators.
During
Evening
Clinic
During Vacation
Period
Report incident to the Practice Coordinator or supervisor.
Dr. Ganda should be notified the next day.
The designated faculty, O.S.R.N. or
Dept. Administrator will...
Report incident to the R.N., in Oral
Surgery, located on DHS-5, extension
6-6518. If unavailable, contact Dr.
Ganda’s Department Administrator in
room 320, DHS-3, extension
6-6814, who will facilitate your referral
to employee health.
...assist the student/employee in completing the TUSDM NSIP Incident Report form. The Incident Report will
detail the route and circumstances of exposure, the name and address of the source patient and the
name of the source patient's attending physician.
For NSIP’s during day clinic
or vacation period
For NSIP’s during evening
clinic
The designated person will contact the Emergency Room (x5566)
attending physician and inform him/her about the accident. The
student/employee and source patient will proceed with the Incident
Report to the TMC Emergency Department.
The student/employee and source patient will proceed with the
Incident Report to the TMC Employee Health Service; (E.H.)
located at Proger 6 North, 6-5480. The employee health
attending or nurse practitioner will obtain the patient’s consent
for blood draw and testing for HIV, Hepatitis, B, and hepatitis, C.
The student/employee will leave the patient at E.H. and
proceed to Proger 1 Outpatient Registration Desk to have a
TMC Medical Record Card issued. Student/employee will then
RETURN to E.H. for blood draw and testing. Business hours are
Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 4:30 PM. Incident Report
forms are available at every group practice and with Dr.
Ganda’s Program Administrator. The potentially exposed person
will receive exposure assessment, medical attention and
counseling (if deemed necessary) at TMC Employee Health
Service. Infection disease consultations are also available
through the Employee Health Service
The student/employee and source patient will register at the
Emergency Department. Exposure assessment, medical attention
and treatment will be provided by the attending physician
designated for that day.
Subsequent to the Emergency Department visit, test
results of student/employee and source patient will be
sent to the NEMC Employee Health Service.
The Employee Health Service will contact the student/employee to convey test results. The source patient's test results will be sent to Dr.
Ganda's office. Dr. Ganda will, in turn, direct the test results to the source patient's physician with a cover letter. In the event that the source
patient has no primary care physician, Dr. Ganda will then contact the patient directly. Ms. Debbie Quinn, Counselor, will be contacted if
necessary, should counseling be needed.
Follow-up visits for the student/employee will be carried out by the TMC Employee Health Service, Proger 6 North.
A copy of the Incident Report and the source patient’s blood test results will be kept on file at Dr. Ganda's office. A copy of the Incident Report
will be sent to the Biosafety Officer, Dept. of Environmental Health & Safety, Posner Hall 1, Boston Campus. The names of the source patient
and student will not be included as the Safety Office will use the information only for summary and presentation of frequencies, types and
procedures involving accidents to the Dental School Risk Management Committee.
Any accident requiring medical treatment is logged as
an OSHA 200 reportable incident. This is done by the
Risk Management Office in Medford.
Referrals to additional resources for counseling or
treatment purposes can be made through Dr.
Ganda's office.
34
Infected Health Care Worker (IHCW) Protocol*
The infected health care worker will be accorded the same respect and support that is provided any other
health care worker. The IHCW protocol is to protect and assist the infected health care worker (IHCW) in
the work environment. The HCW is a student, staff or faculty whose activities involve physical contact
with patients or with blood/body fluids from patients in the health care setting. Infections, both acute and
chronic with high level of infectivity and/or transmissibility will be assessed including, but not limited to:
pneumonia, mumps, measles, chicken pox, TB, hepatitis, and AIDS.
1. The IHCW will contact the Designated Faculty (DF)**, upon his/her earliest notification that they
have an infectious condition and will consider it his/her moral and social responsibility to make this
contact.
2. The DF with, if necessary, the assistance of the expert panel, will establish the health status of the
IHCW and his/her susceptibility or their patients’ susceptibility to infectious disease.
3. The DF with, if necessary, the assistance of the expert panel, will establish if immediate temporary
isolation from the health care environment is needed.
4. The DF with, if necessary, the assistance of the expert panel, will establish the functional ability of
the IHCW to perform assigned tasks or regular duties.
5. The DF with, if necessary, the assistance of the expert panel, will establish if illness interferes
significantly with the IHCW’s ability to provide quality care.
6. The DF with, if necessary, the assistance of the expert panel, will determine if specific patients are
more vulnerable to infection.
7. The DF will confirm compliance of IHCW with established universal precaution guidelines to prevent
transmission of disease.
8. The DF, with the assistance of the Panel, will establish if the involved IHCW performs “invasive
procedures” and implement appropriate guidelines as established by the school.
9. The DF will ensure compliance of the IHCW with practice limitations, if recommended.
10. The DF will inform the IHCW regarding the resources available through the expert panel.
11. The DF will contact the expert panel in a confidential manner after obtaining the written consent of
the IHCW, if additional advice or support is required.
12. Access to information from the “expert panel” will be made with the option of anonymity should the
IHCW so desire.
13. Using the option of anonymity, the IHCW through the DF can discuss with the panel his or her
situation, the varying action steps and the potential ramifications without fear of involuntary
disclosure and negative consequences.
14. Access to professional counseling will be available for the IHCW through the DF or school appointed
psychiatrist or legal counsel in the event of an occupationally acquired infection.
15. The DF will maintain (a) periodic monitoring of the IHCW on a case-by-case basis through various
options—reports by the IHCW or the IHCW’s personal physician; (b) all records regarding the IHCW
in strict confidence.
**Dr. Ganda has been designated the primary contact. In the event Dr. Ganda is unavailable, Dr.
Papageorge should be contacted.
*Compiled from Massachusetts department of Public Health Guidelines on HBV and HIV.
35
PAYMENT POLICIES AND PROCEDURES FOLLOWING ACCIDENT OR
NEEDLESTICK INJURY
The purpose of this section is to make you aware of payment policies and procedures in the event of an
accident or needlestick injury while you are completing clinical degree requirements.
For billing purposes, when seeking treatment for accidents or injuries incurred while completing clinical
requirements, you must present your own health insurance information. Accidents or injuries include
needlesticks, exposures to blood or body fluids, injuries obtained in clinical work, and exposures to
infectious diseases. Any deductible or co-payment is your responsibility.
Needlestick Injuries
You will be responsible for the initial payment of all insurance co-pays and charges by the hospital.
However, the Dental School will reimburse students for up to $500.00 for costs incurred from needlestick
injuries. In order to be reimbursed, you must retain copies of your payments (for associated medical visits
and medications) and provide this documentation to the Dean of Student Affairs.
Students enrolled in the TUFTS Health Plan are no longer required to obtain a referral for Emergency
Room service. If you are enrolled in an alternate health plan, you must follow the claims procedures
required by your insurance company.
Students are not eligible for Workers’ Compensation benefits from Tufts University or any affiliated
teaching hospital or clinic in which they are assigned while completing clinical requirements. You must be
an employee in order to receive Workers’ Compensation benefits. Hospital personnel sometimes
misinform students regarding eligibility for Workers’ Compensation. You should note on any accident
report form that you are a student and not eligible for Workers’ Compensation. This will facilitate the
correct processing of the claim. When medical claims for students are submitted to Workers’
Compensation, the process often takes several weeks or months before they are properly submitted to the
student’s health insurance company. As a result of the delay, your insurance company may refuse to pay
a claim that was not submitted within the required time frame.
Students who incur an exposure to blood or body fluids through the skin, eye or mucous membrane while
working on a clinical rotation should follow the protocol printed on the previous page. To facilitate
treatment at Tufts Medical Center, it is recommended that you obtain a hospital card in advance from
patient registration and carry the card with you at all times.
Questions regarding this policy can be addressed to Debbie Quinn, Director, Student Advisory & Health
Administration at 617-636-2700 or Dr. Kanchan Ganda, Director of Medicine at 617-636-4055.
PUBLIC SAFETY AND RELATED POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
The Tufts University Police Department is headquartered on the Medford/Somerville campus with stations
on the Boston and Grafton campuses. On June 17, 2005, the department was awarded accreditation
status by the Massachusetts Police Accreditation Commission. The Commission voted to make Tufts the
eighteenth department in the Commonwealth to receive this prestigious recognition. Only one other
campus law enforcement agency in Massachusetts is accredited. To achieve accreditation, the Department
demonstrated its compliance with over 300 standards covering a broad range of organizational and
operations policies and procedures. Included in its full complement of 74 members are the director of
public and environmental safety, 2 captains, 2 lieutenants, 10 sergeants, 1 corporal, 18 police officers, 3
parking and traffic officers, 8 dispatch/desk officers, 2 assistant desk officers and 23 campus security
officers. Tufts police officers are trained at state-recognized law enforcement training academies, and
they participate in ongoing in-service and specialized training programs. Many members of the police
department have degrees in criminal justice and related fields.
The Tufts University Police Department receives its authority from the Commonwealth of Massachusetts.
All Tufts police officers are considered special state police officers under provisions of Massachusetts
36
General Law Chapter 22C, Section 63. Officers assigned to the Medford/Somerville and Boston campuses
may, at times, be designated as deputy sheriffs in Middlesex and Suffolk counties, respectively. Officers
assigned to the Grafton campus are also designated as special police officers in the towns of Westborough
and Grafton.
Generally, Tufts police officers are authorized to make arrests for criminal offenses in or upon lands or
structures owned, used, or occupied by the university, or in places where university business is conducted.
This authority extends beyond the confines of the various campuses as determined by the acquisition of
local special police status, deputy sheriffs' authority or by previous court decisions.
The university police enjoy a strong professional relationship with the state and local law enforcement
agencies where our campuses are located. Cooperative programs and information exchanges are ongoing
priorities. Through this reporting relationship, the Tufts police relay to the university community
information on crimes that may pose a threat to students or employees on any of the campuses.
Operational and technical support is mutually provided when necessary.
The Tufts Police Department is committed to the philosophy of Community Policing and will assign police
officers to work as community liaisons to various faculty, staff and student groups to create and support
valuable police/community partnerships.
Alcohol and Drug Enforcement Policies and Education Programs
The illicit use of drugs and alcohol can seriously impair the health and safety of members of the Tufts
community and their families. The university is committed to addressing and preventing illicit drug use
and alcohol abuse within the university community. There are substantial health risks and legal
consequences that stem from alcohol and drug abuse. All students and employees are urged to read the
information that follows.
I.
Health Risks
Alcohol and substance abuse are a national public health concern.
II.
Counseling and Treatment for Alcohol and Drug Abuse
The university encourages Tufts students and employees with alcohol and substance abuse problems to
seek assistance and treatment. At Tufts, a variety of resources exist where further information can be
obtained about alcohol and substance abuse and their treatment.
For students on the Boston and Grafton campuses, confidential counseling is available from the following:
Ms. Debbie Quinn, Student Health Advisory Office
Massachusetts Dental Society
Commission on Drug and Alcohol Dependency
617-636-2700
1-800-342-8747 or 508-480-9797
In addition, the Office of the Dean of Students within each of the schools and the university chaplain's
office are available for referrals to other resources in the University and community.
III.
Standards of Conduct
The unlawful possession, use, or distribution of illicit drugs and alcohol by students on Tufts University
property or as part of university activities is prohibited.
IV.
Disciplinary Sanctions
The university will impose disciplinary sanctions on students and employees who violate the standards of
conduct described above. Among the sanctions that may be imposed are the following: warning,
probation, suspension, dismissal, and/or referral to appropriate governmental authorities for civil and
criminal prosecution. The university may also require completion of a rehabilitation program in connection
with a disciplinary matter.
V.
Local, State, and Federal Sanctions Concerning Alcohol and Drugs
Local, state, and federal laws make the illegal use of drugs and alcohol a criminal offense. Conviction can
37
lead to imprisonment, fines, and other penalties. Cities and towns in Massachusetts prohibit public
consumption of alcohol and impose fines for violation. The Metropolitan District Commission also prohibits
public consumption of alcohol in its parks and public recreational areas.
Boston and other cities and towns surrounding the various Tufts campuses have ordinances forbidding the
possession of an open container of alcohol on any public street by a person of any age. Anyone choosing
to violate such ordinances can be subject to arrest.
Massachusetts’s law prohibits the sale or delivery of alcoholic beverages to persons under age 21. The
penalty for violating this law may be a fine of up to $2,000 or imprisonment for up to one year, or both.
Misrepresenting one's age or falsifying an identification to obtain alcoholic beverages is punishable by fine
and/or imprisonment, and loss of license for one year. The penalties for the first conviction of driving
under the influence of alcohol under Massachusetts’s law can include a fine of up to $5,000 or
imprisonment for up to two and one-half years, or some combination. An individual also may have his or
her license revoked.
Massachusetts imposes criminal penalties for the possession and/or distribution of controlled substances
or drugs without valid authorization, with penalties varying as to the type of drug. Sale and possession of
"drug paraphernalia" is illegal in Massachusetts. Under both Massachusetts and federal law, penalties for
possession, manufacture, and distribution are greater for subsequent conviction, and include mandatory
prison terms, with the full minimum term being served.
Massachusetts makes it illegal to be in a place where heroin is kept and to be "in the company" of a
person known to possess heroin.
Persons convicted of drug possession under state or federal laws are ineligible for federal student grants
and loans for up to one year after the first conviction and up to five years after the second. The penalty
for unlawful distribution of drugs is loss of benefits for five years after the first conviction and for a longer
period after the second. Under federal law, penalties may be doubled when a person at least 18 years old
distributes drugs within 1,000 feet of a public or private elementary or secondary school, or a public or
private college, to persons under age 21. These penalties include a mandatory one-year prison term. See
Appendix E for Tufts University Drug-Free Campus Program information.
Access to Facilities
Although Tufts encourages the local community to use its facilities, this policy presents unique challenges
in maintaining safety and security on all three campuses. There are a few general rules in place meant to
prevent unauthorized access to university buildings and property. Floor entry doors to the Posner
residence hall are locked at all times. Only students with keys and those with legitimate business inside
residence halls are allowed entry. All others are considered intruders, and residents are urged to report
their presence to the Tufts police immediately. Duplicating keys and propping doors open are violations of
university rules, and violators may be disciplined. Access to academic, administrative, and clinical
facilities varies by use and location. Again, only those with legitimate business are allowed entry. The
university police station commander approves all requests for exterior door keys. Department managers
and, subsequently, the station commander approve requests for interior door keys.
Sexual Assault
Tufts University encourages any victim of sexual assault to report the assault to the university police. The
police will assist in obtaining emergency medical care and crisis counseling, and in securing important
evidence of the assault. The police will also file reports with the appropriate jurisdiction. The university
police are available for consultation regarding these processes whether or not a victim wishes to proceed
with any type of adjudication.
Victims who may be reluctant to report to the university police are strongly encouraged to report the
incident to the dean of students for their school. The dean's office can answer questions about university
resources and procedures available to victims. A report, whether made informally to the dean of students
or formally to the university police, does not commit the victim to a specific course of action (or any
course of action).
38
The Dean's Office will inform victims of their options both through the School of Dental Medicine’s Ethics,
Professionalism, and Citizenship Committee and other university processes, and in the criminal court
system of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts. The dean's office will also assist the victim in notifying
the proper law enforcement authorities, including on-campus and local police; assist in obtaining
counseling services, both on and off campus; and advise students of options available in changing
academic and living situations.
Reporting Crimes
The most recent copy of the Tufts Public Safety crime report can be found at the following internet
address: http://publicsafety.tufts.edu/downloads/safetybrochure2009.pdf
Members of the Tufts community are encouraged to report all crimes to the Tufts University Police
Department. Members of the community may report crimes by visiting the university police station on the
Boston campus or by calling (617) 636-6610, or ext. 6-6610 on campus. If police or emergency medical
services are needed, call 6-6911 from any house phone.
Emergency telephones are available. They are either the general-use wall phones found in administrative
and clinical buildings, or outdoor telephones with a direct link to campus police. These outdoor telephones
are all marked by a blue light above them.
Reporting crime is important because it allows us not only to reassess security controls and patrol
strategy, but also to develop better methods of crime prevention.
University police officers investigate complaints filed by community members and pursue investigations to
their most reasonable conclusion.
Follow-up investigations may be conducted by detectives, with support from local, state, or federal law
enforcement agencies when necessary.
The interests of the victim are always our primary concern. The Tufts police recognize the importance of
confidentiality and of protecting the identity of a victim in the course of a successful investigation. In
criminal matters, that means the victim's preferences greatly influence the way in which a case is
prosecuted.
The university has a number of alternatives at its disposal to adjudicate inappropriate behavior, whether it
is of a criminal nature or not.
In addition to pursuing cases through the courts, the university uses an internal judicial structure to
decide on specific issues unique to university life.
If a member of the Tufts community is alleged to have been involved in criminal conduct, deans and other
administrators will be notified when deemed necessary and where the law permits.
Security and Maintenance
Tufts University is like a small city with a large and mobile population. The upkeep of university buildings
and property falls to the Facilities Department.
The Tufts police, in cooperation with Facilities and Dean of Students offices, conduct frequent security
surveys, lighting surveys, and inspections of electronic security systems in an ongoing effort to examine
the need for modification and to elevate the level of campus protection.
Channels of internal communication exist to facilitate the repair or improvement of security systems on
campus. The Facilities Department recognizes the importance of responding promptly to requests that
involve security issues.
Security Awareness Programs
During orientation students are informed of services offered by the Tufts police. Video and slide
presentations outline ways to maintain personal safety and residence hall security. Students are also told
about incidents of crime on campus and in surrounding neighborhoods. Periodically during the academic
39
year the Tufts police, in cooperation with other university organizations and departments, present crime
prevention awareness sessions on sexual assault (rape and acquaintance rape); theft; vandalism; and
educational sessions on personal safety and residence hall security, among other topics. A common
theme of all awareness and crime prevention programs is to encourage students and employees to be
aware of their responsibility for their own security and the security of others.
LOST AND FOUND PROTOCOL
The University is not responsible for lost or misplaced items. It is the students’ responsibility to ensure
that their equipment and personal items are accounted for and kept secure at all times. Students are
reminded to make a final check of their belongings before leaving their workstation in the preclinical area
or the lab. If an item is lost, students should first check with any classmates who were seated nearby, and
retrace their steps to their last known location, in an effort to recover the item.
If a student loses an instrument he or she should check the dispensary, which is also the location for
returning any found instruments. Other lost items should be turned in to the Office of Student Affairs, who
will send an email notifying the school. Items unclaimed by the end of the day will be turned over to
Campus Security on the first floor of the M&V building. The item will be logged and retained for up to one
year. Items unclaimed after this time will be disposed of according to existing law.
SMOKE FREE INDOOR AIR POLICY
Policy: Smoking is prohibited in all facilities of Tufts University School of Dental Medicine with the
exception of designated private resident rooms within the Posner residence hall.
Definitions:
Smoking - The burning of any type of lighted pipe, cigar, cigarette, or any other smoking equipment,
whether filled with tobacco or any other substance or material.
Facility - Any enclosed area of a structure, or portion thereof when such structure is owned and/or being
occupied or operated, by Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. This is inclusive of University owned
and/or operated vehicles and outdoor group seating facilities.
Outdoor group seating facilities - Any outdoor seating arrangement whereby people sit in close proximity
(shoulder-to-shoulder to one another).
Residence Hall - Any structure designated by the University as a residence hall or dormitory. The smokefree indoor air policy shall apply to all areas within the residence hall except designated private resident
rooms.
STUDENT AND FACULTY DRESS CODE
The personal appearance and demeanor of every person affects, either directly or indirectly, the care and
management of patients. The image communicated to patients through professional attire and
appearance, behavior and interaction will influence their perceptions of the quality of care they will receive
at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, and their confidence in the person providing the care. A
professional presentation is an essential component in upholding the standards of excellence set by
TUSDM and the dental profession.
One should also keep in mind personal protection and patient safety. Follow the Infection Control manual’s
guidelines for wearing person protective equipment as set forth in the Universal Procedures for Infection
Control at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine.
Clinic Attire
 Blue gowns (students) or green gowns (faculty) must be worn over appropriate clothing when
treating patients. Tie behind the neck - high enough to cover your clothing. They should not be
40









worn outside the Dental Clinic areas such as to the cafeteria, restroom, etc. Picture ID’s should be
clipped onto gown and be prominently displayed.
Students must wear a tailored or collared shirt (preferably with a tie) or turtleneck. No T-shirts,
jeans (of any color), or shorts are permitted. Professionally appropriate skirts at knee length or
longer are acceptable.
Clean shoes, leather sneakers or surgical clogs should be worn. Open toed shoes such as sandals
or Crocs must not be worn.
Appropriate socks or stockings are required. Socks must fully cover legs during seated clinical
procedures (no peds or tennis socks).
Hats are not allowed in clinic.
Body hygiene is required so that offensive body odor is avoided.
Strong perfumes and colognes may be offensive to others, therefore avoid excessive use. Heavy
application of make-up should also be avoided.
Jewelry should not be worn on hands or wrists. Dangling earrings are not permitted.
Nails must be clean, short and rounded. Long artificial nails are not permitted. Cover all wounds on
the hands/fingers with a protective bandage.
Long and medium length hair (touching shoulders) must be tied or pinned back. Beards and
moustaches are acceptable when well groomed.
Preclinical and Fourth Floor Laboratories
 Long, buttoned laboratory coats or yellow gowns should be worn with clipped-on picture ID’s
prominently displayed. During patient treatment periods, blue gowns are acceptable in laboratory
areas.
 Casual, neat clothing may be worn. Clean jeans are permitted, but NOT in patient contact areas.
 Shorts must not be worn.
 Sandals and open toed shoes must not be worn.
 Jewelry should not be worn on hands or wrists. Dangling earrings are not permitted.
 Long and medium length hair (touching shoulders) must be tied or pinned back for safety reasons.
 No hats allowed.
Dental Building (when not treating patients)
 Casual, neat clothing may be worn. Clean jeans are permitted, but NOT in patient contact areas.
Shorts must not be worn.
 Blue gowns (students) or green gowns (faculty) are not allowed outside clinical areas (i.e. rest
rooms, food areas, offices, waiting rooms, libraries, seminar rooms, laboratories, or outside the
TUSDM building). Yellow gowns are for laboratory use only.
 Hats are not allowed.
Enforcement
Violations of the above code in the clinical areas will affect the clinical grade. All faculty and senior
management personnel are able to enforce the dress code. Repeated violations will be referred to the
Associate Dean for Clinics and may result in dismissal from the clinic. Violations in the preclinical area
should be reported to the Director of the Preclinical Laboratory. Blue gowns or green gowns worn outside
of clinical areas should be reported to the Infection Control Coordinators.
41
RESOURCES
Student Advisory & Health Administration Office, SAHA
The Student Advisory & Health Administration Office is located at 200 Harrison Avenue on the 4th
floor of Posner Hall. Office hours are Monday - Friday, 9:00 a.m. - 5:00 p.m.
Counseling and Mental Health Services
The Student Advisory & Health Administration Office provides short-term, confidential
counseling/advice for evaluation of personal or school-related problems. Consultation is strictly
confidential and no information will be released without the student’s written consent.
Appointments are available by calling the Student Advisory & Health Administration Office at 617636-2700, or emailing Debbie Quinn, [email protected]. Her office is located in Posner Hall
at 200 Harrison Avenue, on the 4th floor. Referrals for psychotherapy, psychiatric evaluations
and/or long-term therapy can be made through Debbie Quinn.
Payment for behavioral health or psychiatric services outside of the University is the responsibility
of the student. Students enrolled in the student health insurance plan, Harvard Pilgrim Health Care
Insurance Company (HPHC)/United Healthcare Student Resources (UHCSR), have a $15 copayment for eligible mental health visits. There is no limit on eligible mental health visits for nonbiologically-based and biologically-based mental disorders per academic year. For covered Mental
Health benefits refer to the Certificate of Coverage. Assistance in locating a mental health provider
is available from Debbie Quinn or, if enrolled in the student insurance plan,
at: https://www.UHCSR.com.
Health Insurance
The Commonwealth of Massachusetts requires health insurance coverage for all students enrolled
in a three-quarter to full time program in higher education. Tufts University offers a
comprehensive student health insurance plan that meets the State and University requirements.
The student health insurance plan, underwritten by HPHC Insurance Company, an affiliate of
Harvard Pilgrim Health Care (HPHC), and administered by United HealthCare StudentResources
(UHCSR), includes primary and emergency care, major medical coverage, a prescription plan, eye
care, mental health benefits and many other services. When making decisions regarding health
insurance, students should be aware there is no health service clinic available to Tufts University
Boston Campus students.
The student health insurance plan is available to all matriculated health sciences students and their
eligible dependents. Eligible dependents include: spouse, domestic partner, or dependent(s) under
the age of 26.
Each semester, students are charged one-half of the annual insurance cost at the Individual rate.
Two-person or family health insurance coverage is available at an additional cost. Depending on
the date of enrollment, full payment for two-person or family coverage is required at the time of
enrollment.
Open Enrollment for the student plan is September 1 st – 30th of each academic year. This provides
a once-a-year opportunity for students to apply for enrollment or add dependents without a
qualifying event. There is a grace period of thirty (30) days beyond the open enrollment date in
which to apply. To apply for coverage during Open Enrollment student must complete an online
Enrollment Form at: https://studentcenter.uhcsr.com. Insurance ID cards will be received within 7
to 10 business days of enrollment.
Unless there is a qualifying event, students are not eligible to apply for coverage or add a
dependent(s) at any other time of the academic year. Qualifying events include: change in marital
status; birth or adoption of a child; or loss of alternate insurance through no fault of the student or
dependent. Enrollment Form must be submitted within sixty (60) days of the qualifying event.
42
Students should contact the Student Advisory & Health Administration Office for information on
applying and the prorated payment amount.
Students must reapply for the student health insurance coverage each academic year. Unless there
is a change of status, the insurance coverage continues through August 31 st of the current
academic year. The effective date of enrollment for new students is the first day of orientation, not
the date of enrollment form.
Waiving the Student Health Insurance
State Law and University Policy require all students to carry health insurance when enrolled in a
three quarters to full time program in higher education. The student health insurance plan is not
intended to replace the student’s current coverage. Students are not required to enroll in
HPHC/UHCSR plan and may waive the student plan by completing a Waiver Form. Students must
waive the student health insurance coverage each academic year.
Completion of a Waiver certifies participation in a health insurance plan that meets or exceeds the
coverage required by Massachusetts General Law. Information regarding the State’s minimum
qualifications for a health insurance plan can be found at: http://medicine.tufts.edu/Who-WeAre/Administrative-Offices/Student-Advisory-and-Health-Office/Student-Health-Insurance.
To waive the student plan during Open Enrollment, September 1 st – 30th, complete a Waiver at:
https://studentcenter.uhcsr.com. Use your insurance card to answer all the questions on the
waiver. Once approved, you will receive an email confirmation and your student account will be
credited for the health insurance cost. Students whose waivers are denied will be automatically
enrolled in the HPHC/UHCSR insurance plan.
Students who do not take action to either waive or enroll by September 30th, or whose waiver has
been denied, will be automatically enrolled in the HPHC/UHCSR insurance plan. The online
enrollment or waiver option is not available after September 30th. However, students are able to
waive the school health insurance plan at any time during the academic year. For waiver
instructions after September 30th please contact the SAHA Office at 617-636-2700 or 617-6362701.
Student Health Insurance Policy for Students on Leave of Absence
Students enrolled in the student insurance plan who have been granted a leave of absence are
eligible to continue enrollment for up to one year from the effective date on which the leave
begins. A Leave of Absence Health Insurance Coverage Contract must be signed and submitted to
the Student Advisory & Health Administration Office in order to keep the insurance coverage.
Students electing to continue insurance coverage must pay in full prior to leaving and must adhere
to payment deadlines for subsequent semesters.
While on leave, full payment for fall semester premiums are due by August 15 th and spring
semester premiums are due by February 15 th. Students who return on or before the one-year’s
leave of absence may continue with uninterrupted coverage. Enrollment in the student insurance
plan will be canceled if the student fails to pay the premium, or if the student does not return at
the end of one-year’s leave of absence.
Prior to beginning a leave of absence students must contact the SAHA Office at 617-636-2701 for
information regarding payment procedures and benefit information.
Student Health Insurance Policy for Withdrawn or Dismissed Students
Boston and Grafton Health Sciences students, who are withdrawn or dismissed and who are
enrolled in the student health insurance plan, have the option of either cancelling their health
insurance or continuing enrollment in the plan for up to sixty (60) calendar days following their
withdrawal or dismissal date. To continue enrollment the student must be a matriculated student
43
for at least 31 days prior to the withdrawal or dismissal. The student has fifteen (15) calendar days
from his/her withdrawal or dismissal date to notify the Student Advisory & Health Administration
Office of his/her intent by completing a Withdrawal or Dismissal Health Insurance Cancellation
Form and by ensuring that full payment has been made. Students cancelling insurance coverage
earlier than the end of the current insurance semester will receive a prorated credit based on the
date of cancellation, if applicable.
Failure to notify the Student Advisory & Health Administration Office by submitting the required
form and to complete payment within the fifteen (15) day period will result in the student’s health
insurance policy being cancelled on the date of Withdrawal or Dismissal from Tufts University.
Student Health Insurance Policy for Graduating Students
Students graduating in the spring and summer have the option of continuing the student health
insurance coverage through August 31st of the year in which they graduate. Students graduating at
other times during the year may keep the student insurance until the end of the term for which the
insurance cost is paid.
Students canceling coverage earlier than the maximum time allowed will receive a prorated credit
for the remainder of the semester billing period.
Insurance Conversion Policy for Graduated or Withdrawn Students
Graduating students are not eligible to continue enrollment in the student health insurance plan
under the Federal Law known as the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act (COBRA), as
this law applies to employees only.
Students remaining in the State of Massachusetts have the option of obtaining health insurance
coverage through the Commonwealth Connector. More information can be found at:
www.mahealthconnector.org
Immunization Requirements
In order to be in compliance with Massachusetts State Law and University policy, all students must
submit The School of Dental Medicine Immunization Form to the Student Advisory & Health
Administration Office by the given deadline. The form must be signed by a Health Care
Professional, or equivalent medical documentation must be attached to the form. The form can be
printed from the following website, http://medicine.tufts.edu/saha.
If you are unable to provide documentation of past immunizations, you will need to provide
laboratory evidence of immunity, or be vaccinated again. Questions regarding immunization
requirements should be directed to the SAHA Office, at 617-636-2712.
Upon notification from the Student Advisory & Health Administration Office, students are required
to update immunizations as mandated by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts and Tufts
University and those recommended for healthcare workers by the Centers for Disease Control and
Prevention (CDC).



As a condition of matriculation, the following immunization documentation is required prior to the
program start date:
Tetanus Diphtheria Acellular Pertussis (Tdap): One dose of the adult Tdap vaccine, unless
current Td booster is less than 2 years old. If current Td booster is less than 2 years old wait to
receive Tdap vaccine.
Measles, Mumps and Rubella (MMR): Two doses of measles, mumps and rubella vaccine or
positive antibody titers.
Tuberculosis Test: Mantoux skin test given within one year prior to start date and updated
annually. If tuberculin positive, documentation of a past positive test must be submitted. A chest
x-ray or QuantiFERON-TB Gold Test report, dated within one year of the student’s start date, must
44




also be submitted. (A history of BCG vaccine is not acceptable as proof of being tuberculin
positive. You must provide documentation of a past positive tuberculosis test in addition to a chest
x-ray or QuantiFERON-TB Gold test report within one year prior to start date.)
Varicella (chicken pox): Physician verification of year of disease, positive antibody titer, or two
doses of varicella vaccine.
Hepatitis B: Three doses of hepatitis B vaccine and positive surface antibody titer (blood work).
Dental students must be tested for presence of infection (HBsAg) prior to vaccination or if
restarting series, and testing for immunity (anti-HBs) within six months following the 3 doses. If an
incoming student tests positive for the presence of surface antigen titer (HBsAg) and HBV DNA,
matriculation will not be allowed.
Meningococcal: One dose of vaccine within five years prior to start date or a signed State Waiver
Form.
Influenza: Annual Seasonal Influenza vaccine required for all students.
COUNSELING CONTACTS
Counseling of students is a major focus in the School of Dental Medicine. A diverse student body of 725
students, ranging in age from 21 to 49 years, representing 25 to 30 countries and from varied economic
circumstances, generates numerous requests for personal, academic, financial, and career counseling, and
less frequently, psychiatric consultation. Students in need of information or counseling frequently contact
one of the individuals listed below who are designated by their positions to play a primary role in student
counseling. These individuals may provide counseling themselves or may refer the student to the most
appropriate resource, either to a faculty or staff member for informal counseling or to the Student
Advisory and Health Administration Office, Out-Patient Adult Psychiatric Services or the emergency room
(if critical situations arise).
Tufts has a large number of faculty and administrators who are available to discuss problems with
students when the need arises. A list of suggested contacts is provided below.
Personal Counseling/Guidance
Ms. Debbie Quinn, Student Advisory and Health Administration Office
4th Floor Posner Hall, 636-2700
Dr. John Van Pruitt MD, 59 Temple Place, Suite 400; Boston, MA 02111, 357-5542
Academic Counseling/Advising
Robert Kasberg, Associate Dean for Student Affairs, 636-6539
Dr. Michael Thompson, Chair of Student Promotions Committee (SPC), 636-3775
Progress in Meeting Clinical Degree Requirements & Remediation
Dean for Academic Affairs, 636-6622
Robert Kasberg, Associate Dean for Student Affairs, 636-6539
Dr Michael Thompson, Chair of Student Promotions Committee (SPC), 636-3775
Career & Research Advising
Robert Kasberg, Associate Dean for Student Affairs, 636-6539
Katherine Vosker, Associate Director of Student Affairs, 636-0887
Research
Dr. Gerard Kugel, Associate Dean for Research, 636-4299
Professor Eileen Doherty, Director of Predoctoral Research, Chair of Research Committee &
Faculty Advisor to Bates-SRG and Andrews Research Honor Society, 636-6870
Patient Management Issues/Practice Coordinators
Dr. James Hanley, Associate Dean for Clinical Services, 636-6873
Dr. Charles Rankin, Chair Diagnosis and Health Promotion, 636-0927
45
CHAPLAINS
Naila Baloch, Muslim Chaplain
Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop St. 781-665-0474
Lynn Cooper, Catholic Chaplain
Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop St. 617-627-2044
Rachel Petttengill, Protestant Chaplain
Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop St. 617-627-209781
Rabbi Jeffrey Summit, Jewish Chaplain and Director,
Granoff Family Hillel Center
617-627-3242
RELIGIOUS SERVICES-2012
BUDDHIST:
Wednesdays, 8:30-10 AM, Goddard Chapel and
Sundays, 7PM, The Rabb Room, Lincoln-Filene Center
[email protected]
CATHOLIC:
Sundays, 10:00 PM, Goddard Chapel
Lynn Cooper, Catholic Chaplain, 617-627-2044
[email protected]
CHRISTIAN SCIENTIST:
Meetings, Tuesdays, 6:30-7:30 PM, Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop St.
John (Barrett) Sparkman – [email protected]
HINDU:
Meetings to be announced*
[email protected]
JEWISH:
Conservative, Fridays, 5:30 PM. (6 PM DST)
Granoff Family Hillel Center
Reform, Fridays, 5:30 PM. (6 PM DST)
Rabbi Jeff Summit, Hillel, 617-627-3242
[email protected]
MUSLIM:
Prayer Service, Fridays, 1PM
The Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop Street, Medford
Naila Baloch, Muslim Chaplain, 617-627-2065
[email protected]
PROTESTANT:
Protestant Worship Service, Sunday, 7PM, Goddard Chapel
Rachael Pettengill-Rasure, Protestant Chaplain, 617-627-2097
[email protected]
TCF (Tufts Christian Fellowship), Thursdays, 6:30-9:45 PM
Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop Street
Charles Skold
ase.tufts.edu/tcf
UNITARIAN UNIVERSALISTS:
Meetings, Thursday, 8-9 PM
Interfaith Center, 58 Winthrop St.
[email protected]
46
HEALTH SCIENCES BURSAR’S OFFICE
Tufts University bills tuition and fees electronically via Tufts eBill. New students will receive
preliminary information in May or June through their Admissions Office, outlining the Tufts eBill enrollment
and billing process. Beginning in June, new students will receive a specific email notice with instructions
on how to set up a Tufts eBill account. Once a student’s account has been set up, others (i.e. parents)
may be invited by the student to view and/or pay the bill.
Fall semester bills are issued in the first week of July and are due in the first week of August. Spring
semester bills are issued in the first week of November and are due in the first week of December. The
specific due date each semester will be noted on your bill.
You may also pay online by electronic check. If you choose not to pay online, payments should be mailed
with the payment coupon to Tufts University, Health Sciences Bursar’s Office, P.O. Box 414090, Boston,
MA 02241. Payments may also be made in person at the Bursar's Office.
All students must be financially cleared in order to register and attend classes. Please note that accounts
not paid or settled by the due date may be subject to a 10% late payment fine.
Other services provided by the Bursar’s Office include the issuance of student account refund checks, sale
of MBTA Semester passes, distribution of petty cash including MBTA pass quarterly discounts, and
distribution of work-study paychecks.
The Bursar’s Office is located on the first floor of Posner Hall at 200 Harrison Avenue, Boston MA. Office
hours are 9am-4pm, Monday through Friday. For questions about your bill, please contact the Bursar’s
Office directly. You may also visit our website at http://finance.tufts.edu/bursar/ for answers to most
frequently asked questions and full contact information.
47
TUFTS UNIVERSITY HIRSH HEALTH SCIENCES LIBRARY
Eric D. Albright, MLS, Director
Arthur M. Sackler Center for Medical Education
145 Harrison Avenue
Boston, MA 02111
Homepage: http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl
Email: [email protected]
Fax: 617-636-4039
Administration: 617-636-2481
IT Service Desk: 617-636-2947
Circulation: 617-636-6706
Reference/Education: 617-636-6705
Collections Management: 617-636-2448
STAFFED HOURS
Library Service Desk
IT Service Desk
Monday-Thursday: 7:45 a.m. – 11:00 p.m.
Monday-Thursday: 9:00 a.m. – 6:00 p.m.
Friday: 7:45 a.m. – 7:00 p.m.
Friday: 9:00 a.m. – 7:00 p.m.
Saturday: 10:00 a.m. – 7:00 p.m.
Saturday: Closed
Sunday: 12 noon – 10:00 p.m.
Sunday: Closed
For holidays and changes, please consult http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/about/hours.html.
FACILITIES
The Hirsh Health Sciences Library (HHSL) spans the fourth through seventh floors of the Sackler Center.
The library may be entered via any of these floors from the elevators or stairs. A bridge connects the
fourth floor of Sackler to the third floor of the Dental Building. The fourth floor houses the Library Service
Desk, Reference and Reserve collections, current journals, leisure reading collection, public computers
with Internet access, study areas and the Food 4 Thought café. A house phone is located on the east end
of the building, near the main elevators, and a bulletin board is located across from Security at the bridge
to the Dental Building.
The fifth floor houses the circulating book collection, study carrels and the IT Service Desk. The two
microcomputer labs and multimedia classrooms are available for teaching and individual or group study.
The lab facilities provide access to Internet applications, a variety of standard word-processing,
spreadsheet, database and presentation-graphics programs and other software that support the curricula
of the health sciences schools. The IT Service Desk, staffed by Library Systems Office employees and
student workers, provides support for students’ personal computers. To reserve a room, please contact
the IT Service Desk at [email protected] or call 617-636-2947. For more information, see
http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/computing/computing.html.
The sixth floor houses the library’s staff offices, the beginning of the bound journal collection (A-B titles of
print-only subscriptions, print copies of some journals also received electronically and older volumes) and
a photocopy room. The Allan D. Callow Room (also known as the Special Collections Room) contains a
collection of works on the history of science and medicine, imprints prior to 1914 and historical artifacts
that may be viewed by contacting the Library Administration Office (617-636-2481). A house phone is
located on this floor in the central library staircase.
The seventh floor houses the remainder of the bound journal collection (C-Z titles of print-only
subscriptions, print copies of some journals also received electronically and older volumes), study rooms,
classrooms, study carrels and a photocopy room.
POLICIES
Some library services are provided on a cost-recovery basis. Payment for fees can be made by check
accompanied by a Tufts ID card or by Tufts Interdepartmental Requisition. Library employees may neither
accept cash for payment nor make change. Copy/print cards can be purchased at the Add Value Machine
48
on the 4th floor. Monies may also be added to University IDs at the Add Value Machine or online at:
http://www.jumbocash.net.
The library operates within the constraints of the U.S. Copyright Law in regard to the photocopying of
printed materials and interlibrary loans and within license restrictions for electronic materials.
Please turn off the ringer on cellular telephones and pagers before entering the library. Urgent calls can
be made or received in the library’s stairwell.
Protective gowns, lab coats, masks, gloves, caps and shoe covers are not permitted in the library. Please
dispose of such items properly before entering.
Suggestions or comments regarding the library’s policies, services and collections are welcome. Send
them by email to [email protected] from a Tufts email account, and the library will respond promptly.
PRIVILEGES
If not pre-registered at orientation, students can register in the library’s system with their Tufts ID, which
may be obtained from the Tufts Police Department at 136 Harrison Avenue. Upon registration, the Tufts
ID will also function as a library card. The activated ID card is valid for access and borrowing at all Tufts
University libraries. For further information on other Tufts libraries, please visit
http://www.library.tufts.edu or inquire at the Library Service Desk (617-636-6705).
Students are eligible to receive support for their personal computers and mobile devices at the IT Service
Desk on the fifth floor. Some of the services provided are software installation, virus removal and
registration to use the Tufts network. Please visit http://support.hhsl.tufts.edu/ for more information or
inquire at the IT Service Desk (617-636-2947).
Thirty Apple laptops are available for students to borrow for use within the library. On weekdays, laptops
may be checked out from the IT Service Desk on the fifth floor before 6pm and from the Library Service
Desk on the fourth floor after 6pm, except on Fridays. On weekends the laptops are checked out from the
Library Service Desk on the fourth floor.
As a user of the Tufts University Hirsh Health Sciences Library, you accept responsibility for the return of
all materials borrowed from any of the Tufts University Libraries or from other libraries through document
delivery. All fees incurred for lost, damaged or late items must be paid, and failure to pay such fees may
result in a loss of library privileges, an attachment of wages, or additional charges on term bills. You
agree to abide by all HHSL policies and you are responsible for copyright compliance as well as Tufts
University policies concerning the responsible use of resources.
Other Tufts Libraries
Tisch Library (Medford Campus)
Ginn Library (Medford Campus)
Webster Family Veterinary Library (Grafton Campus)
617-627-3460 (or x73460 )
617-627-5021 (or x75021)
508-839-7958 (or x87958)
Boston Library Consortium
Tufts University is a member of the Boston Library Consortium (BLC), an association of research and
academic libraries in New England. While only a Tufts ID is required for admittance to most Consortium
libraries, Consortium cards are necessary for access to certain restricted libraries and for borrowing at
most institutions. Tufts faculty, staff and students may apply at the Library Services desk for these cards
at no cost. Member institutions include:
Boston College
Boston University
Brandeis University
49
Marine Biological Laboratory Woods Hole Oceanographic Institute
Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Northeastern University
State Library of Massachusetts
Tufts University
University of Connecticut
University of Massachusetts--Amherst, Boston, Dartmouth, Lowell
UMass Medical Center
University of New Hampshire
Wellesley College
Williams College
For more information on the BLC, please consult http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/services/BLC.html or
contact the Library Service Desk (617-636-6705).
Other Libraries
Francis A. Countway Library of Medicine
Harvard Medical School
10 Shattuck Street
Boston, MA 02115
Reference: 617-432-2134
Upon presentation of a valid Tufts ID, faculty and students of the medical, dental and veterinary schools
may have access but not borrowing privileges from the Countway Library.
Law Library
New England School of Law
145 Stuart Street
Boston, MA 02116
Reference: 617-422-7299
Upon presentation of a valid Tufts ID, faculty, staff and students of the Tufts health sciences schools may
have access but not borrowing privileges from the Law Library.
SERVICES
Circulation & Reserve
Registered faculty, staff and students may borrow circulating books for four weeks with two renewals and
are responsible for returning them on time. For each lost or damaged item, the charge levied amounts to
the replacement cost plus a $15 processing fee. Borrowing privileges may be suspended for borrowers
with overdue books or unpaid bills.
Reserve books designated as an overnight copy may be borrowed after 4:00 p.m. on weekdays for
overnight use and on Fridays for weekend use. Reserve books are due by 9:00 a.m. the following school
day. Only one reserve book may be borrowed at a time for overnight/weekend use. Certain texts in high
demand are kept behind the Library Service Desk and may be recalled when needed.
Collections & Electronic Resources
The Tufts Catalog (http://library.tufts.edu/) lists books, journals, databases, audiovisual materials and
other works held by the Tufts libraries in Boston, Grafton and Medford. The catalog links directly to a
large collection of electronic books and full-text journals, most of which require a Tufts email account for
access. Clicking on a journal title allows access to a list of the available volumes or its vendor’s search
engine. Ovid databases and PubMed should be accessed from the HHSL homepage, as this will link users
to all Tufts’ licensed journals at the article level. Full text can also be accessed through the FindIt@Tufts
link located on the results screens of our licensed resources.
50
For more information about electronic journals, please consult
http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/resources/ejalpha.html. To arrange for consultations regarding your
research needs, please contact Information Services by phone at 617-636-6705 or by email at
[email protected].
Suggestions for book purchases and journal subscriptions may be made using the online form at
http://www.library.tufts.edu/hsl/services/order_form.html or by calling 617-636-2448.
Document Delivery & Interlibrary Loan
Members of the Tufts community can obtain books, audiovisual materials and journal articles from other
libraries through interlibrary loan by registering with our interlibrary loan system, ILLiad:
http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/services/docdel_illiad.html. This online system enables you to order
and track requests and view/print articles. Students may request up to twenty articles or books per
academic year at no charge.
For further information, please contact Document Delivery at 617-636-3787 or email [email protected].
IT Service
The Library Systems Office and IT Service Desk maintain all the public computers in the library and serves
as first-tier support for computer questions. The library’s public computers are able to perform a variety
of functions, including workstations variously equipped with scanners, CD/DVD burners and USB ports.
The labs within the library are open for computer-assisted instruction, personal computing, Internet
access and web-based email. The IT Service Desk, which is also located on the fifth floor, provides
services such as software installation, virus removal and registration to use the Tufts network. Please visit
http://support.hhsl.tufts.edu for more information or inquire at the fifth-floor IT Service Desk (617-6362947).
Printing, Copying & Scanning
Black-and-white photocopiers operated by JumboCash debit from the student ID or a guest card are
located on all floors of the library. The basic charge for a B&W copy is 10 cents per page. Guest cards
may be purchased at anytime from a card dispenser (PHIL Station) with cash, by Tufts or Tufts Medical
Center requisition, weekdays from 9:00 a.m. to 4:45 p.m, or by check through Dining Services.
Jumbocash can also be added with a credit card online at www.jumbocash.net. For further information,
please consult http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/services/photoServices.html.
Color laser print stations are located on the 4th and 5th Floors. Black-and-white printers are located on the
4th and 5th Floors. Patrons can send print request(s) from all public computers in the library. Charges for
printing, which must be paid by JumboCash debit from the student ID or a guest card, are 10 cents for
each B&W page (15 cents duplex) and 30 cents for color (45 cents for duplex).
A self-service scanner is available in Room 524. For further information about printing, copying and
scanning, please consult http://www.library.tufts.edu/hhsl/services/photoServices.html.
Educational and Information Services
Library staff are available Monday through Friday from 7:45 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. to answer research and
reference questions. Librarians provide research support via customized literature searches or instruction
of biomedical databases such as MEDLINE, research support for Faculty, information and reference
support for course projects, support and instruction for bibliographic management software like RefWorks
and EndNote and help obtaining full-text articles via the library’s website.
Please see our website to learn about the full range of resources and services the Hirsh Health Sciences
Library provides to support research, curriculum and patient care information needs. Mobile web users
can also access this information via our mobile web page where they can connect to resources optimized
for mobile web browsing.
51
To arrange for research or education consultations, please call 617-636-6705, or email at [email protected].
For information literacy curriculum support for courses, please contact Gail Hendler,
[email protected].
TUSK (Tufts University Sciences Knowledgebase)
The Tufts University Sciences Knowledgebase (TUSK) is a curriculum database/knowledge management
system which provides access to a full complement of curricular material. Available to Tufts students,
faculty, and staff at http://tusk.tufts.edu, it includes text, slide collections, images, digital video,
shockwave files, synchronized multimedia, recorded lectures, quizzes, cases, weekly course schedules and
online course evaluations. TUSK users may create personal collections of TUSK material and annotate any
document or image. Students are also able to create personalized Flash Card decks for studying and selfassessment. When users logon with their Universal Tufts Login Name (UTLN) and password, TUSK displays
pertinent announcements, current courses, posted evaluations and discussion boards. Electronic
discussions between students and course directors facilitate communication about class material. Students
may request discussions for their class, as well as their own collaborative My Group areas on TUSK. In
addition, student authors/editors sometimes assist faculty with uploading material to TUSK. To request the
creation of a discussion group for a course, a collaborative My Group area, or to request authoring
privileges, please send an email to TUSK User Support at: [email protected].
Wireless Computing
Tufts faculty, staff and students who register their laptop computers may then use them to connect to the
campus network and the Internet on all Tufts campuses. Laptops may be registered at the IT Service
Desk, Sackler 5: Monday – Friday, 9am – 6pm. For further information, please consult
http://www.library.tufts.edu/hsl/computing/laptops.html.
LIABILITY INSURANCE
All Tufts Dental students are insured for professional liability through the University's professional liability
policy. This policy provides coverage during activities at Tufts and at approved externship sites. It does
not cover licensure examinations or any other clinical experience not directly related to the curriculum.
PARKING
Tufts Medical Center Parking and Transportation Department
274 Tremont Street Garage, 1st floor
636-5580
Monday- Thursday, 7:00am-6:00pm
Friday, 7:00am-4:00pm
Parking spaces are available for all Tufts University students at the Traveler’s Lot (this is near the
Teradyne building on Harrison Avenue). Valid parking decals are required in the Tufts Medical Center
parking facilities. Parking decals are available at no charge upon presentation of your student I.D. and car
registration at the Parking Office, located at 274 Tremont Street.
Please Note: Students are issued only one DECAL per school year. For the 2010-2011 academic year, all
students will be assigned to the Traveler’s Lot.
Rate: Monday thru Friday-$4.75 per day payable by coupon only. Cash will not be accepted.
Coupons: Coupons are available for purchase in the Parking Office, located at 274 Tremont Street, and at
the Bursar’s Office, located at 200 Harrison Avenue, for $23.75 per book. Each book contains 5 coupons
(purchase limit of 4 books at a time.)
Weekends: All students may park in the Tremont Street Garage for $4.75 per weekend day (payable with
a coupon or $7.50 cash)
Parking Regulations for Tufts University Students
52
Parking is permitted only with a currently valid Tufts Medical Center parking decal. Both your vehicle
registration, to prove car ownership, and a Tufts identification card must be presented to the Parking
Office in order to obtain a decal for one car per school year.
Departure and re-entry into the parking garage is not allowed on the same parking sticker. If you do have
occasion to leave the garage, a new sticker must be used upon re-entry. Parking decals are not
transferable. Anyone who uses a lost, stolen or fraudulent decal will be subject to loss of parking
privileges.
Questions regarding parking should be directed to the Parking Office at (617)636-5580.
Parking in Boston
Parking around Tufts Medical Center is forbidden or limited by one-hour meters. There is no legal parking
in one spot for longer than two hours anywhere in Boston. Unpaid tickets are listed in computer files and
cars with Massachusetts or out-of-state registration have been towed or rendered immobile with the
“Denver Boot.”
Motorcycles
Motorcycles can be left in the parking garage located at 274 Tremont Street for $8.00 per day. You must
have your registration and student I.D. to get a parking card from the Tremont Street Garage. If your
motorcycle is registered out-of-state you must file with the campus police just as out-of-state car owners
must file. Our-of-state owners need not register before obtaining cards.
Bicycles
Bicycles can be left in a bicycle cage at the Parking Garage at 274 Tremont Street by paying $3 and
receiving a key for the bicycle room. The $3 fee is refunded when the key is returned.
FACILITIES
Facilities is located on the first floor (dorm side) of Posner Hall. This department is responsible for
maintenance and upkeep of the buildings and grounds of the Boston campus including Posner Hall. Any
maintenance problems should be reported to Facilities at 6-3535; after hours and on weekends, please
call the Campus Police at 6-6610.
ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
The Departments of Environmental Health and Safety, and Risk Management are responsible for all
aspects of safety and insurance, industrial hygiene, right-to-know compliance, employee and student
environmental health and safety, fire safety, risk management and loss control. For information or
assistance, please call 636-3615.
All accidents and/or injuries involving students, even those that seem minor, must be reported to the
Campus Police and to the faculty supervisor.
TUFTS UNIVERSITY HEALTH SCIENCES CAMPUS BOOKSTORE
116 Harrison Avenue
617-636-6628
Monday, Tuesday & Thursday, 8:30 a.m.-5:00 p.m.
Wednesday, 8:30 a.m.-6:00 p.m.
Friday, 8:30 a.m.–4:00 p.m.
Tufts University Health Sciences Bookstore is your destination for textbooks and course required supplies.
The Bookstore stocks textbooks, medical reference and review books, lab supplies, burs, teeth, school
supplies and snacks. The bookstore also carries TUSDM merchandise including sweatshirts, t-shirts, mugs,
and fine gifts. Please ask a bookseller for any out of stock items, they can be ordered for you.
53
The bookstore will have all textbooks ready for purchase prior to the start of classes. You can stop by the
bookstore to purchase books, or log on to www.tufts-med.bkstore.com to order books, which you may
then pick up at the bookstore or have shipped to your home. Out of stock textbooks can be special
ordered upon request. Textbooks may be returned or exchanged during the first week of class.
Return Policy



A full refund will be given in the original form of payment if textbooks are returned, with receipt,
during the first week of class.
A full refund will be given in the original form of payment if textbooks are returned, with proof of
schedule change and receipt, during the first 30 days of class.
No refunds will be given without receipt, or if textbooks are not in original condition.
Payment
The bookstore accepts cash, checks, Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, Traveler’s Checks,
and Barnes & Noble gift cards. Credit card holders must be present for purchases. Students may not use
another person’s credit card. Barnes & Noble gift cards are available at the bookstore, Barnes & Noble
stores, or at www.barnesandnoble.com.
DIRECTORY OF STATE AND NATIONAL DENTAL ASSOCIATIONS
American Dental Association
211 East Chicago Avenue
Chicago, IL 60611
800-621-8099
website: http://www.ada.org
American Dental Education Association
1400 K St. NW
Suite 1100
Washington, D.C. 20005-2403
website: www.adea.org
American Student Dental Association
211 East Chicago Avenue, Suite 1160
Chicago, IL 60611
Membership Records: 800-621-8099
website: http://www.asdanet.org
Massachusetts Dental Society
2 Willow Street, #200
Southborough, MA 01745
508-480-9797, 800-342-8747
website: www.massdental.org
National Board of Dental Examiners
Commission on National Dental Examinations
American Dental Association
211 East Chicago Avenue
Chicago, IL 60611
Contact Person: Judy Friend
800-621-8099
website: www.ada.org
54
Massachusetts Board of Registration in Dentistry
239 Causeway Street, 5th Floor
Boston, MA 02114
617-727-9928
website: www.mass.gov/dph/boards
North East Regional Board of Dental Examiners
8484 Georgia Avenue
Suite 900
Silver Spring, MD 20910
Telephone Number: (301) 563-3300
Fax: (301) 563-3307
website: www.nerb.org
DIRECTORY OF PROFESSIONAL ACADEMIES
American Association of Endodontists
211 E. Chicago Ave., Suite 1100
Chicago, IL 60611-2691
Phone: 800/872-3636 (North America) or 312/266-7255 (International)
Fax: 866/451-9020 (North America) or 312/266-9867 (International)
E-mail: [email protected]
American Association of Orthodontists
401 North Lindbergh Boulevard
St. Louis, MO 63141-7816
Phone: 314-993-1700
Fax: 314-997-1745
American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry
211 East Chicago Avenue, Suite 1700
Chicago, IL 60611-2637
(312) 337-2169
Fax (312) 337-6329
American Academy of Periodontology
737 N. Michigan Avenue, Suite 800
Chicago, IL 60611-6660
Phone: 312-787-5518
Fax: 312-787-3670
American College of Prosthodontists
211 E. Chicago Ave., Suite 1000
Chicago, IL 60611
312-573-1260
By Fax: 312-573-1257
By E-mail:
[email protected]
American Academy of Fixed Prosthodontics
Office of the Secretary
31 Emory Road
Winnipeg, Manitoba
55
R3T 3K9
Canada
Toll Free (888) 220-9386
Fax (204) 275-1285
E-mail [email protected]
American Academy of Maxillofacial Prosthetics
Dr. Steven P. Haug
Executive Secretary/Treasurer
1121 West Michigan Street
Indianapolis, IN 46202
Tel: 317-274-5571
Fax 317-278-2818
Email: [email protected]
American Academy of Orofacial Pain
19 Mantua Road
Mount Royal, NJ 08061
Tel: (856) 423-3629
Fax: (856) 423-3420
American Academy of Craniofacial Pain
1901 North Roselle Road, Suite 920
Schaumburg, IL. 60195-3187 USA
Email: [email protected]
http://www.aacfp.org
Main: 847- 885-1272
Toll Free: 800-322-8651
Fax: 847-885-8393
OUTSIDE USA
AACP Central Office: 0101 (847) 885-1272
Fax: 0101 (847) 885-8393
American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons
9700 West Bryn Mawr Avenue
Rosemont, IL 60018-5701
847-678-6200
800-822-6637
56
DIVISION OF ADVANCED AND GRADUATE EDUCATION
ACADEMIC AFFAIRS, POLICIES AND PROCEDURES
Advanced Education Certificate Programs
Craniomandibular Disorders & Orofacial Pain
Endodontics
General Practice Residency
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Orthodontics
Pediatric Dentistry
Periodontology
Prosthodontics
Graduate Programs
Master of Science
Dental Distance Education—Master of Science
Oversight
Each Advanced and Graduate Education program is overseen by the Program Director. In turn, all are
overseen by the Advanced and Graduate Education committee, which has charge of all matters and policies
related to curriculum and research leading to the degree of Master of Science. The committee is also
responsible for coordinating, organizing and evaluating interdepartmental postgraduate level courses
necessary for specialty certification and other postgraduate clinical training programs. The Committee assists
as necessary the directors of the Advanced Education programs in developing the didactic and clinical
curriculum for their respective specialty programs and has overall responsibility of coordinating the schedules
of the advanced and graduate education curricula.
The Advanced and Graduate Education Committee consists of the directors of all existing Advanced
Education programs (or their designate) and includes representation from all departments, the Director of
the Dental Distance Education Program, one graduate faculty member from another school within the
University and one student member each from the advanced education and graduate programs. In
addition, the committee includes include four faculty members elected by the Executive Faculty, at least
two of whom are to be graduate faculty. Representatives from the Office of Admissions and Office of
Registration serve ex officio without vote.
Courses
The academic year is from July 1 to June 30. The calendar is divided into two semesters, Fall (F), and
Spring, (S), with a shorter, intensive summer term in July and August (A). Each Advanced Education
program has specific required courses, in addition to interdepartmental courses which make up the
Advanced and Graduate curriculum. These are:
DEGR201A Biostatistics IA: Introduction to Biostatistics
DEGR203A Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
DEGR204A Successful Research Strategies (online)
DEGR206F Biostatistics IB: Principles of Biostatistics
DEGR210F Clinico-Pathologic Conferences in Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology (online)
DEGR211F Management of the Medically Compromised Dental Patient
DEGR213F Temporomandibular Disorders I (Occlusion)
DEGR214F Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology
DEGR215S Topics in Molecular & Cell Biology
DEGR216A Oral Microbiology
57
DEGR217S Advanced Head & Neck Anatomy
DEGR218S Advanced Head & Neck Anatomy, Laboratory Dissection
DEGR219F Biomaterials II
DEGR220S Multidisciplinary Approach to the Diagnosis & Management of TMD & Orofacial Pain
DEGR222S Dental Pharmacology
DEGR223A Immunology
DEGR224A Applied Nutrition in Dentistry
DEGR230F Biomaterials I
DEGR231S Bone Biology
DEGR232F Growth & Development
DEGR233F Dental Sleep Medicine
DEGR234F Neuroanatomy, Neurophysiology & Neurological Assessment of Orofacial Pain
DEGR235F Pain Assessment & Management
DEGR236S Physical Medicine for Craniofacial Pain
DEGR237S Orthopedic & Neurological Assessment of the Cervical Spine & Upper Extremity
DEGR238F Pharmacotherapeutics for Pain
DEGR310SP Independent Study
Student Evaluation and Quality Standards
With the advice of the advisor and/or program director, students in Advanced Education or the Master of
Science program at TUSDM must declare at the time of course registration whether they will be taking a
course for credit or audit. Students may withdraw from a class at or before the third class meeting,
without notation on the student’s transcript. Withdrawal from class after the third meeting will result in
the notation “W” on the transcript. While the appearance of the “W” notation is a neutral indicator,
students should keep in mind that a number of “W”’s on a transcript could have a negative connotation to
a reviewer.
Credit
1. Students taking courses for credit are required to attend all classes unless excused by the
instructor. Students should make every effort to notify the course director in advance. Excused
absences include:
Emergencies such as serious illness or death in immediate family
Serious personal illness
Attendance at an approved meeting
Interviews
Wedding in immediate family or when member of wedding party
Jury duty
Religious holiday
It is the responsibility of the student to arrange to make up missed course work. Students will face
disciplinary action for signing attendance sheets for classmates. Students who miss 50% of classes
owing to unexcused absence will be given the grade of “I” or Incomplete.
2. All course requirements will be fulfilled as specified by the instructor. Requirements may include
exams, homework assignments, classroom participation, etc. Course requirements should be fully
explained to all students at the first class meeting.
3. Upon completion of the course requirements, a quality grade for course participation will be given.
This grade will be entered on the student’s permanent transcript. If the course requirements have
not been completed by the time final grades are submitted to the Assistant Director of Registration,
the student will receive a grade of “I”, or Incomplete. Incompletes must be converted to a quality
58
letter grade by the end of next grading period, or the “I” grade will automatically be changed to an
“F” (failure).
4. Students may withdraw from a course by the third class meeting, with no notation on transcript.
Withdrawal from a course after the third class meeting will result in a notation of “W” on the
transcript.
Audit
1. Students auditing will attend all classes as if they were taking the course for credit.
2. At the discretion of the instructor, auditors may take selected exams on course materials for the
purpose of feedback to the student and instructor only. No grade will be submitted. It is the
responsibility of the instructor to be aware of the level of understanding and/or performance of all
students, including auditors.
3. Upon completion of the auditing requirements, student will receive the designation “N”, for no
grade, on his or her transcript. This indicates that the student has completed the course, but not
for letter grade or credit.
4. Students may withdraw from the course at any time, but the designation “W” will appear on the
permanent transcript.
Grading
All graduate and advanced education courses will result in a quality grade for each student receiving
course credit. All courses are given for a letter grade, unless designated Pass/Fail. Pass/Fail is not
available as an option. The designation “N” (standing for No Credit) will be used for courses that have
been audited. The only grades permitted on the transcript are as follows:
A: 96-100
A-: 91-95
B+: 87-90
B: 83-86
B-: 80-82
C+: 76-79
C: 73-75
C-: 70-72
D: 60-69
F: <60
P: Pass. This grade is only given for certain designated courses and is not available as an
option. Credit for a course with a grade of “P” is counted, but the grade is not factored into
the GPA.
I: Incomplete. This is a temporary grade which must be replaced by a quality grade by the
end of the next grading period. Failure to complete the course by this time will result in the
automatic conversion of the grade to F.
N: No credit. This is the designation for a completed audit. This designation may also be
used in a course which lasts over more than one grading period. The designation “N” will
appear on the transcript at the completion of one section, with the grade awarded only on
the completion of the course (for example, Critical Evaluation of Scientific Literature I & II).
W: Withdrawal. Used to note withdrawal after the third meeting from any course taken for
credit or audit.
Clinic time will be evaluated by the program director or designate and be included in the student’s
transcript with the notation “H” (honors), “P” (pass) or “F” (fail). These grades will not factor into the
grade point average, though credit will be given.
59
Master of Science candidates are required to maintain an average cumulative GPA of 3.0, and may not
have more than one grade of C or any grade of F on the academic transcript. Students who do not fulfill
these requirements will be placed on academic probation. The Director of Advanced and Graduate
Education, in collaboration with the student’s principal advisor and the Advanced and Graduate Education
Committee, will determine the conditions of probation and any possible remediation. Students in Advanced
Education programs are required to remediate any course that they receive a grade of F. Grade point
average requirements are set by the respective program directors and may be different among programs.
Re-examination Policy
Students receiving a grade of C or lower in any class may apply for re-examination. In order to ensure
timely implementation of the re-examination, course directors should submit projected final grades to the
Office of Advanced and Graduate Education within two weeks after the final examination. The Office of
Advanced and Graduate Education will notify the students (and their program directors) by email directly
if a pending final grade renders them eligible to apply for re-examination. Students have 7 calendar days
from the receipt of notification to request re-examination. The re-examination cannot be scheduled later
than 6 weeks after the final examination. Course directors are encouraged, though not required, to offer
re-examination if petitioned. In case of a delay in submission of the grades or other unanticipated events,
the re-examination will be scheduled on a date mutually agreed by the course director and the student(s)
and after approval by the Director of Advanced and Graduate Education. The highest grade a student can
receive via re-examination is a B-. Re-examination will be considered only as a final exam, will cover the
entire course and the grade received as a result of a re-examination will replace and/or supersede any
other grade(s) received during the course (including mid-term examinations). It is possible therefore for a
student with a C who opts for a re-examination and receives an F to fail the course. The format of the reexamination will be at the course director's discretion; however, oral examinations require the presence of
a member of the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee in addition to the examiner and the
student. The format of the re-examination for any given course can change from year to year at the
course director's discretion. Course directors are encouraged, but not required to provide tutoring or any
other assistance to the students requesting a re-examination. Course directors will submit final grades to
the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education, which will take responsibility for providing them to the
Registrar in a timely fashion, for entering into the student’s official transcript.
Course Evaluations
Course evaluations afford students the opportunity to offer feedback, positive or negative, pertaining to all
of their courses. Students are required to complete course evaluations once they have completed any
course. Evaluations are posted on TUSK and the evaluations due from the student are listed on the left
side of the page once the student has logged in. While feedback and comments are made available to
course directors, all responses are anonymous and all feedback is kept strictly confidential.
Academic Probation and Dismissal
Master of Science candidates who do not maintain a B- average will be placed on academic probation,
which will be recorded on the student’s transcript. The Director of Advanced and Graduate Education, in
collaboration with the student’s principal advisor and the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee,
will determine the conditions of probation, including the length of probation period and means by which
performance may be improved. During the probation period, students may not transfer to another
advanced education program at TUSDM, and may not receive an academic degree. MS students will be
placed on academic probation if:



The student receives a grade of F
The student receives more than one C
The student’s GPA is less than 3.0
60
Students may be asked to withdraw, or be dismissed from the Master of Science program under the
following circumstances:





receiving three grades of less than B
receiving more than one F
failing to convert a grade of F to a passing grade. An F cannot stand on a degree candidate’s record
upon recommendation of the student’s principal advisor and the Director of Advanced and
Graduate Education to the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee.
upon determination by the Ethics, Professionalism and Citizenship Committee and/or Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine Executive Faculty of unethical behavior, on campus or off,
while enrolled.
Students in Advanced Education programs may be placed on probation or dismissed by their respective
program directors. The program director may consult with the Advanced and Graduate Education
Committee before implementing his or her decision. Students may also be dismissed by the Ethics,
Professionalism and Citizenship Committee if found guilty of unethical behavior.
Any student dismissed from an Advanced Education program or the Master of Science Program has the
right of appeal. Appeal must be initiated by written request within 30 days to appear before a special
meeting of the AGEC, the agenda of which will be limited to the appeal. The student may be represented
by counsel. Further appeal to the Executive Faculty of TUSDM would also be possible.
Leave of Absence
A Leave of Absence may be obtained by petitioning the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee, the
Director of Advanced and Graduate Education, or the student’s program director. Terms of individual
Leaves of Absence are considered on a case-by-case basis. Extensions to the five-year maximum Master
of Science program duration may be given at the time a leave is granted.
Medical Leave of Absence
In instances of serious physical and/or psychiatric illness, wherein members of the faculty believe that a
student should not continue his or her studies, and the student cannot or will not request a leave of
absence, the Dean, in consultation with the appropriate administrators, may elect to place the student on
medical leave of absence. Medical leave of absence should not exceed one calendar year. At any point in
the year the student may request termination of leave and re-entry into his or her program, provided the
Student Advisory and Health Administration Office and/or the administrative psychiatric consultant can
verify in writing that the student’s health permits it. Medical leave may be extended for up to an additional
year based on the recommendations of the medical professionals referred to above. After two years, the
student will be withdrawn if unable to continue. He or she may apply for re-admission at a later date. If
admitted, the Director of Advanced and Graduate Education and/or the student’s Program Director will
determine the student’s entry point into the curriculum.
Withdrawal
A student who wishes to withdraw voluntarily from the program may do so by notifying the Director of
Advanced and Graduate Education or his/her program director in writing. The student will be withdrawn as
of the date the letter is received. It should be noted that if the student should wish to return to the Master
of Science program at a later date, he or she will have to petition the Advanced and Graduate Education
Committee for re-admission.
The official date of withdrawal will determine the computation of costs and refunds. Those who fail to
notify the Director in writing will receive an official withdrawal date, which is the last known date that the
student attended classes.
61
Course Syllabi
Interdepartmental Courses
Biostatistics IA: Introduction to Biostatistics (DEGR201F)
Course Director
Dr. Matthew Finkelman
617-636-3449
1 Kneeland St. room 638
[email protected]
Tuesday/Friday, 12:30 p.m.-2:00 p.m., July (Summer semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for 1st year Advanced Education students and a core course for Master
of Science students. It provides 1.0 graduate credit. The course consists of seven 90-minute lectures, and
one 90-minute final examination. It provides an introduction to the basic principles of statistics that are
necessary to perform dental research. All course material (syllabus, lecture presentations, and
assignments) is available on TUSK (www.tusk.tufts.edu).
Course Goals and Objectives:
The goal of this course is to introduce the graduate students to the concepts required to perform dental
research.
By the completion of the course, students should be able to:
 understand statistical reasoning
 set up a dataset
 calculate basic statistics
 present results in a clear, meaningful way
Outcome Measures:
Attendance/participation
Homework
Final examination
10%
30%
60%
Note: To receive full credit, all assignments must be turned in when due. 10 points will be deducted for
each day late.
Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry (DEGR203A)
Course Director
Dr. Wanda Wright
Department of Public Health & Community Service
617-636-3646
DHS 1534C
[email protected]
Monday/Wednesday, 8:30 a.m.-10:00 a.m., July (Summer semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental, 12-hour, one credit course for 1st year Advanced Education students and a
core course for the MS students. The course information and lectures are posted on TUSK.
Course Goals and Objectives
Goals
 Introduce the student to the basic principles and methods of epidemiology and demonstrate their
applicability to dentistry
62

Enable the student to begin to critically interpret literature relevant to dental professionals as well
as to provide a structure method for evaluating date and conclusions.
Outcome Measures:
Graded Homework Assignments:
Homework is intended to provide practice questions and to reinforce concepts. Students are expected to
complete the homework assignments on their own and submit the assignments on time. Please see the
course schedule for homework due dates.
Final examination
The final examination is conducted as a “closed book” examination and thus no materials (besides pens,
pencils or calculators) are permitted to be brought in by the student or otherwise used by the student
during the examination.
Your overall grade for the course will be computed based on the weights listed above. Your transcript will
reflect a letter grade and are generally assigned as follows:
A:
96-100
A-:
91-95
B+:
87-90
B:
83-86
B-:
80-82
C+:
76-79
C:
73-75
C-:
70-72
D:
60-69
F:
<60
Successful Research Strategies (DEGR204A)
Course Director
Dr. Paul Stark
75 Kneeland St. Suite 105
617-636-3743
[email protected]
Summer semester
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for all Advanced Education students and a core course for the MS
students. It provides 1.0 graduate credit for MS students. The course provides an overview of the ethical
background and administrative procedures necessary for any research project involving human subjects.
The course consists of 4 hours of lecture material, which is available on TUSK, as well as the successful
completion of an online examination, which is also on TUSK. In addition, students need to complete 6
hours of online lectures and associated CITI examination. For more information see the Tufts University
Health Sciences Campus Institutional Review Board (IRB) website at: http://tnemcirb.tufts.edu/
Course Goals and Objectives
The educational goal of this course is to introduce the graduate students to the ethical dilemmas involving
human subject-related research as well as the implementation of safeguards put in place by the
Institutions to assure the well-being of research subjects.
By the completion of the course, students should:
 Understand the ethical responsibilities of a clinical researcher and the role of the Institutional
Review Board
 Be familiar with basic principles of clinical research
 Be familiar with basic forms and terminology used in research projects involving human subjects at
Tufts
 Be able to direct their questions to the appropriate individuals at TUSDM and the IRB.
63
Outcome Measures
Attendance is mandatory for all Advanced Education residents and Master of Science candidates. Upon
completion, students will be instructed to complete additional educational requirements as determined by
the IRB. Successful completion will result in a grade of Pass for the course.
Biostatistics IB: Principles of Biostatistics (DEGR206F)
Course Director
Dr. Matthew Finkelman
617-636-3449
1 Kneeland St., room 638
[email protected]
Friday, 11:30 a.m.-1:00 p.m. (Fall semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for 1st year Advanced Education students and a core course for the
Master of Science students. It provides 1.5 graduate credits. This course consists of eight 90-minute
lectures, three 60-minute computer sessions, one 90-minute midterm examination, and one 90-minute
final examination. It builds on the introductory class that is a prerequisite for this course. The focus of
this class is obtaining a deeper understanding of the statistical methodology necessary to perform oral
health research. All course material (syllabus, lecture presentations, and assignments) is available on
TUSK (www.tusk.tufts.edu).
Goals/Objectives
The goals of this course are to provide the graduate students with the skills required to read and
understand the oral health literature, as well as to be able to perform commonly used statistical tests.
By the end of this course the students will be able to:
 Select the correct test to perform
 Carry out the statistical analyses
 Interpret the findings
Outcome measures
Attendance & participation
Problem sets
Midterm examination
Final examination
10%
30%
25%
35%
Note: To receive full credit, all assignments must be turned in when due. 10 points will be deducted for
each day late.
Clinicopathologic Conferences in Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology (DEGR210F)
Michael A. Kahn, DDS – Course Director
Department of Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology
617-636-6510
Online course (Fall semester)
Description
This is an online pass/fail course, intended for first and second year Advanced Education and Master of
Science students. The course provides 1.5 graduate credits to MS students. All relevant course material
will be uploaded on TUSK. The course will be posted and active on TUSK for a specific time period which
will be announced at the beginning of the Fall semester; failure to complete the course by the stated
deadline will result in an automatic failure.
Course Goals and Objectives
64
This postdoctoral level course in oral and maxillofacial pathology is intended to enhance the postdoctoral
dental student’s differential diagnosis skills by building upon their basic knowledge of oral and maxillofacial
conditions and diseases.
By conducting the online course in a clinicopathologic conference format, based on head and neck lesions’
clinical and/or radiographic appearance, the residents will:
 be able to identify various lesions of the head and neck area that they are likely to encounter in
their practice and establish a differential diagnosis
 be able to recall critical facts about these lesions that would help them develop an appropriate
treatment plan or referral
 sharpen their critical thinking skills
Outcome Measures
The course is exclusively online with a pass/fail format. Each student is required to sequentially take each
of the course's 9 units. Each unit is composed of a series of unknown cases with a short history provided.
Each case has a series of multiple choice questions which must be answered correctly before proceeding
to the next unit. Once the student has completed all 9 units successfully the student will earn a passing
grade in the course.
Management of the Medically Compromised Dental Patient (DEGR211F)
Course Director
Kanchan Ganda, M.D.
Dept. of Public Health and Community Service
[email protected]
Tuesday 12:00 noon-1:30 PM (Fall Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course, intended for first year Advanced Education and Master of Science
students. It provides 1.5 graduate credits to MS students. The intention is for the competent students to
apply the patient management skills and guidelines in the day-to-day management of the medically
compromised dental patient as they transcend through their clinical training program and beyond. Course
content will be derived from Dentist's Guide to Medical Conditions and Complications, Kanchan Ganda,
M.D., Wiley-Blackwell publishers.
Course Goals and Objectives
The educational goal for this course is to provide the student with the knowledge to evaluate systemic
health problems and appropriately apply this knowledge in a future clinical setting.
At the completion of the course, student will:
 Recognize the clinical presentation of common systemic conditions and medical emergencies.
 Understand the deviations from normal.
 Appreciate concepts of medical management and suggested dental modifications.
 Understand laboratory tests used to evaluate specific disease states of special interest to the
dentist.
 Recognize and interpret clinical laboratory tests and medical therapeutics associated with common
systemic conditions.
 Be able to identify the need for further investigation and modify dental care, when needed.
Outcome Measures
Student evaluation is determined by performance on a “case-based” multiple choice examination. A letter
grade is provided (A/B/C/F).
Temporomandibular Disorders I (Occlusion) (DEGR213F)
Course Directors
Dr. Noshir Mehta ([email protected])
Craniofacial Pain Center
Dept. of General Dentistry
65
Friday 8:00-9:30 AM, September through December (Fall Semester)
Description
This is an interdepartmental course, intended for first and second year Advanced Education and Master of
Science students. It provides 1.5 graduate credits to MS students.
Course Goals and Objectives
This course is designed to give an overall biologic perspective of dental and craniofacial function. The 16
hours will provide a unique look at the evidence behind the historical concepts and changes taking place in
the light of new evidence. The student will learn to look at dental occlusion as individual to each patient
that does not change from specialty to specialty.
At the completion of the course, student will:
 Understand the concept of Neuromuscular Physiology of function and dysfunction.
 Understand the differences in Centric relation, Centric occlusion and neuromuscular occlusions as
they apply to the physiology of mastication.
 Be able to examine patients in a three dimensional maxillo mandibular relationship.
 Be able to diagnose three dimensional imbalances in the maxillo mandibular relationships.
 Be able to design treatments for such imbalances based on their own specialties.
Outcome Measures
 Interclass discussions.
 Final exam, which is a MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION
 EXAMINATION. Questions will cover topics from lectures and handouts. Students are expected to
take notes since the handouts may not cover all the exam material.
Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology (DEGR214F)
Course Director
Aruna Ramesh B.D.S., D.M.D., M.S.
[email protected]
Monday 12:00 noon-1:00 PM, September through December (Fall Semester)
Description
The Post-Graduate Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology course is an interdepartmental course intended for first
year Advanced Education students. It provides 1.0 graduate credit to Master of Science students. The
course consists of twelve 60-minute lectures and one 60-minute case-based examination. The course
provides a brief overview of imaging in dentistry. The course begins with lectures on radiation physics,
biology and protection and proceeds with principles of radiographic interpretation and generation of
differential diagnosis. The course also focuses on digital imaging and advanced imaging modalities in
dentistry and their interpretation. Most relevant course material is available on TUSK.
Course Goals and Objectives:
The educational goal of the course is to provide the Advanced Education and Graduate students with
pertinent information that will help them understand the basics of digital radiography and advanced
imaging modalities in dentistry. The course also includes lectures on principles of radiographic
interpretation which will enable them to critically review radiographic pathology and provide a differential
diagnosis.
The Specific Objectives are for the students to:



Understand the intraoral and extraoral digital radiographic system and software program (MiPACS)
used at TUSDM so that they are able to carry out their clinical responsibilities efficiently.
Understand the basic principles of digital radiography and various advanced imaging modalities
available in dentistry today and their applications
Understand principles of radiographic interpretation and generation of a differential diagnosis
66
Outcome Measures
 The student will be evaluated based on the following:
 Radiographic Assignment: Obtaining a diagnostic Full mouth survey and panoramic radiograph in a
patient (constitutes 25% of final grade)
 Final Examination: A case-based 25 question exam (constitutes 75% of final grade).
A letter grade will be provided at the end of the course
Topics in Molecular and Cell Biology (DEGR215S)
Course Director
Dr. Addy Alt-Holland
[email protected]
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course intended for first year advanced education students as well as
graduate students whose research involves cellular and molecular biology techniques. This course provides
2.5 graduate credits. The course includes 11 meetings In addition, there will be one three hours tour
(“field trip”) of select Core facilities at Tufts. The classroom lectures are grouped into five units. Units 1-2
focus on elementary principles of cells and genomes and the internal organization of the cell that
determines its behavior and function. Units 3-4 explores cell behavior in multicellular systems, and focus
on physiologic and pathologic phenomena in epithelial tissues and the immune system. During these units
principles of experimental tools for investigating cell behavior and function in the laboratory will be
discussed.
The tour in selected Core Facilities at Tufts in Unit 5 is designed to enhance the information learned in
class by exposing the students to the powerful molecular and cell biology methodologies and tools in
advancing scientific and clinical work and also to introduce students to the research capabilities and
opportunities at Tufts.
Most relevant course material (lecture slides, reading assignments, homework assignments) are available
on TUSK.
Lectures will be given by Dr. Alt-Holland and invited guest speakers Dr. Thomas Van Dyke and Dr.
Toshihisa Kawai (Forsyth Institute, Boston).
Outcome Measures
Weekly assignments
Case presentation and paper
Final exam
40%
30%
30%
Weekly assignments: After each lecture (and before the beginning of the next one) using the material
discussed in class and in the recommended text books, the students will submit 3 multiple-choice
questions with one correct answer for each. Students are required to explain the correct answer in a short
paragraph (5-8 sentences).
Case presentation and paper: Students will select a case/topic that they encountered in the clinic or
during literature reading, and prepare a short power point presentation presenting the case and explaining
how they could implement the background and tools they learned during the course to better address that
issue. The goal of this assignment is to implement the material learned in class in critical scientific analysis
of topics/cases that the students are exposed to in their work, and share ideas between classmates that
could potentially lead to future collaborations, publications and grant submissions. This presentation
should also be summarized in a one page “Research Proposal” that includes the title, case/topic, aim(s),
methods/analyses and potential outcomes. A sign-up sheet for selecting the presentation date (in June 16
and June 23) will be circulated at the start of the course. The specific topic choice has deliberately been
left flexible so as to allow this assignment to overlap as much as possible with the student clinic/research
67
work or interest. Further details about format and approach of this presentation will be discussed at the
beginning of the course.
Final exam: This exam will be based on multiple-choice questions that the students submitted in their
weekly assignments along with multiple-choice questions written by the course director and guest
lecturers. It will be held on our last class meeting.
Oral Microbiology (DEGR216A)
Course Director
Dr. Stanley C. Holt
The Forsyth Institute
[email protected]
Monday/Wednesday 10:00-12:00 PM, July/August (Summer semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course, intended for first or second year advanced education and Master of
Science students. The course provides 1.5 graduate credits to MS students. Lecture slides and other
relevant course material will be posted on TUSK.
Course Goals and Objectives:
The objectives of this course are to provide an understanding of the role of microorganisms in the
progression of dental caries, periodontal and endodontic infections. The course will also discuss the hostparasite relationship, and the mechanisms by which selected bacterial species gain access and cause hostassociated problems.
At the end of the course the students will be able to understand:
 principles of host-parasite relationships
 the structure and function of gram-positive and gram-negative bacterial species involved in oral
infections
 the role of dental biofilm in oral infections
 the microbiology of dental caries
 the microbiology of periodontal and endodontic infections
 the role of the host in oral infections
Outcome Measures:
Course outcome measured by two examinations. Class participation is factored into the final grade as 10%
of the outcome. A letter grade is provided.
Advanced Head and Neck Anatomy (DEGR217S)
Course Director
Tracy E. Maloney D.M.D., M.S.
Dept. of Orthodontics, DHS-12
617-636-6887
Friday 11:30 AM–1:00 PM, January through April (Spring Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for 1st or 2nd year Advanced Education and Master of Science students.
This course provides 2.0 graduate credits to MS students. All of the images for fascial planes and the
pterygopalatine fossae as well an online syllabus can be found on TUSK.
Course Goals and Objectives:
Goal
The goal of this course is to educate the resident in the pertinent Head and Neck Anatomy as it relates to
the practice of dentistry. The final lecture includes a series of clinical slides which relates the anatomic
knowledge to actual clinical cases. Examples: (cavernous sinus thrombosis, fascial plane infections,
submandibular infections, submandibular spontaneous bleeding, internal carotid artery/cavernous sinus
68
fistula with Horner’s syndrome as well as tissue lysis along facial veins due to endodontic irrigant injected
through a tooth apex.)
Objectives
The resident will be able to understand:
 The osteology of the skull, with reference to muscular attachments, cranial nerves and blood
supply of the head and neck. (lecture #1)
 The anatomy of the nasal cavity and ancillary structures, the special sense of smell with emphasis
on blood supply to this region.(lecture#2)
 The anatomy and function of the temporomandibular joint with its relationship to the primary
muscles of mastication, temporal and infratemporal regions.(lectures #2,#4)
 The anatomy of the neck: anterior and posterior triangles and their contents.(lecture #3)
 The face and parotid regions, with emphasis on the muscles of facial expression, motor branches of
CN VII and sensory branches on CNV.(Lecture #4)
 The blood supply of the head and neck with emphasis on anastomoses as well as end arteries.
(lecture #5)
 The venous drainage of the head and neck. The meninges and venous sinuses particularly the
cavernous sinus.(lecture #6)
 The lymphatic drainage of the head and neck with emphasis on metastasis. (lecture#6)
 The pterygopalatine fossae, the osteology and connections to other regions of the skull. The path
of V2, the pterygopalatine ganglion, CNVII and the 3rd part of the maxillary artery.(lecture #7)
 The anatomy of the fascial planes, potential fascial spaces and the pathway of infection from the
oral cavity to the mediastinum.(lecture#8)
 The structure and function of the cranial nerves with emphasis on CNV and CNVII.(lectures
#7,9,10.11.12)
 The structure and function of the autonomic nervous system.(lectures#7,9,10.11.12)
 The anatomy of the orbit (vision).(lecture#8)
 The anatomy of the oral cavity, tongue, palate, pharynx, larynx and submandibular
region.(lectures # 3,4,10)
Outcome Measures:
Grades are based on a midterm (40%) and final exam (60%). Grades will be recorded as A/B/C or F.
Advanced Head and Neck Anatomy, Laboratory Dissection (DEGR218S)
Course Director
Tracy E. Maloney D.M.D., M.S.
Dept. of Orthodontics, DHS-12
617-636-6887
Friday 1:30-4:30 PM, January through April (Spring Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for 1st or 2nd year Advanced Education and Master of Science students
in surgical residency programs. This course provides 3.5 graduate credits to MS students. All of the
images for fascial planes and the pterygopalatine fossae as well an online syllabus can be found on TUSK.
Course Goals and Objectives:
Goal
The goal of this course is to train the resident in the dissection of a hemisected human cadaver head.
Objectives
The resident will be able to dissect, visualize and identify:
 The osteology of the skull, with reference to muscular attachments, cranial nerves and blood
supply of the head and neck. (Lab #1)
 The anatomy of the nasal cavity and ancillary structures, the special sense of smell with emphasis
on blood supply to this region (lab#8)
69











The anatomy and function of the temporomandibular joint with its relationship to the primary
muscles of mastication, temporal and infratemporal regions. (Lab #3, #4)
The anatomy of the neck: anterior and posterior triangles and their contents. (Lab#5, #6)
The face and parotid regions, with emphasis on the muscles of facial expression, motor branches of
CN VII and sensory branches on CNV. (Lab #2)
The blood supply of the head and neck with emphasis on anastomoses as well as end arteries. (All
labs)
The venous drainage of the head and neck. The meninges and venous sinuses particularly the
cavernous sinus. (All labs)
The pterygopalatine fossae, the osteology and connections to other regions of the skull. The path
of V2, the pterygopaltine ganglion, CNVII and the 3rd part of the maxillary artery. (Lab #9)
The anatomy of the fascial planes, potential fascial spaces and the pathway of infection from the
oral cavity to the mediastinum. (Lab#9)
The structure and function of the cranial nerves with emphasis on CNV and CNVII. (Lab # 1, 2, 3,
4, 8, 10, 11, 12)
The structure and function of the Autonomic nervous system. (Lab #2, 8, 13)
The anatomy of the orbit (vision) (lab #11)
The anatomy of the oral cavity, tongue, palate, pharynx, larynx and submandibular region (lab#
10, 12)
Outcome Measures
Grades are based on a midterm (40%) and final exam (60%). Grades will be recorded as A/B/C or F.
Biomaterials I (DEGR230F)
Course Director
Roya Zandparsa, D.D.S., M.Sc., D.M.D
Department of Prosthodontics and Operative Dentistry
617-636-2117
[email protected]
Wednesday 10:30 a.m.-12 p.m., September & October (Fall Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for 1st or 2nd year Advanced Education students or Master of Science
students who have an interest in dental material properties and applications. The course provides 1.5
graduate credits to MS students. This course is designed to provide background knowledge of the
structure and properties of various materials, their composition, chemistry, reaction, biocompatibility and
other characteristics.
Course Goals and Objectives
The educational goal of the course is to give students an overview of the physico-chemical characteristics
and potential applications of biomaterials that are widely used in dentistry.
At the end of the course, the students are expected to have a background of biomaterials science, so that
they:
 can describe the principal properties of major biomaterials
 have an overview of materials and their properties
 have the ability to relate the properties of the materials to clinical technique and efficacy
 have knowledge of the general composition of biomaterials
 have the ability to use the basic knowledge acquired from this course to critical thinking in the use
of materials on patients’ clinical care.
Outcome Measures
The final exam will consist of approximately 50 questions devoted to Biomaterials Science I. Questions will
be derived from lecture, handouts, and the required text. Examinations are comprehensive and will
include questions in all areas pertaining to science of biomaterials and its applications.
Mechanism for determination of final grade: Attendance (10 %), Final Exam (90 %).
70
Successful completion of the course is dependent upon achieving a passing grade.
The grading scale is as follows:
A:
A-:
B+:
B:
B-:
C+:
C:
C-:
D:
F:
96-100
91-95
87-90
83-86
80-82
76-79
73-75
70-72
60-69
<60
Re-examination may be granted in the case of a course failure. The course director is responsible for
determining the appropriateness of granting a reexamination.
All examinations must be taken as scheduled on the course calendar. Failure to adhere to this policy
without an acceptable excuse will be viewed as “unprofessional behavior.” This could result in action by
the office of the Academic Dean. In the event of failure to present to an examination, a make-up
examination may be administered at a later date if the student is able to present an excuse that is
acceptable per TUSDM policies.
Changes may occasionally be necessary and will be made at the discretion of the course director.
Biomaterials II (DEGR219F)
Course Director
Roya Zand Parsa, D.D.S., M.Sc.
Department of Prosthodontics and Operative Dentistry
617-636-2117
[email protected]
Wednesday 10:30 AM-12 PM, October-January (Fall/Spring Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for 1st or 2nd year Advanced Education students or Master of Science
students who have an interest in dental material properties and applications. The course provides 1.5
graduate credits to Master of Science students. In an effort to present Biomaterials as an applied science,
the course will be presented on the following lecture topics: An Introduction on Restorative Biomaterials,
Composite Resins, Biomaterials of Implant, Dental Cements and Casting Alloys, Impression Materials,
Gypsum and Investment Products, Acrylic Resins, and Dental Ceramics.
Course Goals and Objectives:
The educational goal of the course is to give students an overview of properties and applications of the
most commonly used dental materials.
At the end of the course, the students are expected to:
 be able to describe the principal properties of the most commonly used dental materials
 be able to relate the properties of these materials to clinical technique and efficacy.
 have knowledge of the general composition of dental materials
 have the ability to use the basic knowledge acquired from this course to critical thinking in the use
of materials on patients clinical care.
Outcome Measures
There will be approximately 50 questions devoted to Biomaterials Science I. Questions will be derived
from lecture, handouts, and the required text. Examinations are comprehensive and will include questions
in all areas pertaining to science of biomaterials and its applications.
71
Mechanism for determination of final grade: Attendance (10 %), Final Exam (90 %).
Successful completion of the course is dependent upon achieving a passing grade.
The grading scale is as follows:
A:
A-:
B+:
B:
B-:
C+:
C:
C-:
D:
F:
96-100
91-95
87-90
83-86
80-82
76-79
73-75
70-72
60-69
<60
Re-examination may be granted in the case of a course failure. The course director is responsible for
determining the appropriateness of granting a reexamination.
All examinations must be taken as scheduled on the course calendar. Failure to adhere to this policy
without an acceptable excuse will be viewed as “unprofessional behavior.” This could result in action by
the office of the Academic Dean. In the event of failure to present to an examination, a make-up
examination may be administered at a later date if the student is able to present an excuse that is
acceptable per TUSDM policies.
Changes may occasionally be necessary and will be made at the discretion of the course director.
Multidisciplinary Approach to the Diagnosis and Management of TMD and Orofacial Pain
(DEGR220S)
Course Directors
Dr. Noshir Mehta ([email protected])
Craniofacial Pain Center
Dept. of General Dentistry
Friday 8:00-9:30 AM, January through April (Spring Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course, intended for first and second year Advanced Education and Master of
Science students. It provides 1.5 graduate credits to MS students.
Course Goals and Objectives:
This course is designed to introduce the student to the overall aspects of Orofacial pain and
Temporomandibular Disorders. It is also designed to look at the biologic interrelationships of the head,
face and neck as they relate to dental occlusion and the interdisciplinary approach to chronic pain.
At the completion of the course, student will:
 Understand the scope of the problem of chronic pain in the TMD and orofacial structures.
 Understand the dentist’s role in head, neck and facial pain.
 Be able to understand history, symptoms and be able to examine the head, neck and facial
structures for pain related problems.
 Be able to understand the role of biopsychosocial interactions in chronic pain.
 Be able to interpret radiographs and MRIs of the TM Joint.
 Be able to understand the interaction of dental occlusion on chronic head, neck, and face pains.
Outcome Measures
Final exam, which is a MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION EXAMINATION. Questions will cover topics from
lectures and handouts.
72
Dental Pharmacology (DEGR222S)
Course Director
Michael L. Thompson, M.S., Ph.D.
Dept. of General Dentistry
617-636-3775
[email protected]
Thursdays, 12:00-2:00 p.m., April through June (Spring Semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course, intended for first year graduate students in clinical residencies, as
well as Master of Science students. This course provides 2.0 graduate credits to MS students. All reading
materials will be posted to TUSK.
Course Goals and Objectives:
The educational goal of this course is to provide an update to students on the most commonly used
medications in dental practice.
Following completion of the course, the student should be
 familiar with drugs commonly used by dentists and their patients (lectures 2, 3, 4, 8, and 9)
 able to correctly prescribe analgesics and antibiotics (lectures 2, 8, and 9)
 able to appreciate the impact of a patient’s medications on dental management (reinforced during
each lecture but most specifically in lecture 5 and 10)
 familiar with important drug interactions and how they affect patient management (reinforced
during each lecture but most specifically in lecture 10)
Outcome Measures:
The grade will be based on the results of 2 written exams which constitute 2/3 of the grade. The
remaining 1/3 comes from the daily quizzes. Grades will be letter form.
Immunology (DEGR223A)
Course Director
Dr. Geoffrey Sunshine
Tel: 617-488-2303
[email protected]
Tuesday/Thursday, 8:00-10:00 a.m., July/August (Summer semester)
Course Description
The course, intended for first year graduate students in clinical residencies and in the masters program,
comprises 9 120-minute sessions: 7 lectures, a review, and exam. Each lecture and review session
contains a 10-minute break. This course provides 1.5 graduate credits to MS students. The lectures are
grouped into two major sets: first, basic mechanisms in the immune response, which focuses on the key
cell types and mediators of the innate and adaptive immune responses. In the second half of the course,
problems of immune system function and practical applications of immunological knowledge to different
diseases with relevance to the oral cavity are described. Most course materials, particularly lecture slides,
are available on TUSK. Where appropriate, selected handouts e.g. recent relevant papers, are provided at
the beginning of lectures.
Course Goals and Objectives:
The educational goal of this course is to provide an understanding of basic and clinical concepts in
immunology for professionals who treat oral diseases of any type. Its additional aim is to provide graduate
students with a grasp of new and fundamental immunological information–such as the importance of the
level of CD4+ T cells in HIV positive individuals and how to treat autoimmune diseases--that has
permeated every aspect of contemporary society.
The specific objectives for the students are:
 know the roles of the key cells, receptors, and mediators involved in immune defenses;
73









understand the difference between innate and adaptive immunity, and know how innate and
adaptive immune systems interact;
understand the difference between immunity mediated by T and B lymphocytes, and know the
functions of different classes of antibody molecules;
understand how antibody molecules are used to treat diseases;
understand the role of major histocompatibility complex (MHC) gene products in the immune
response;
be able to distinguish between the function of CD4+ and CD8+ T lymphocytes in the immune
response to pathogens; understand the different roles of subsets of CD4 + T cells;
have developed an understanding of how and why vaccination prevents disease;
recognize why we are tolerant to “self”, and how tolerance breaks down in autoimmunity;
appreciate the consequences of faulty immune responses in hypersensitivity conditions and
immune deficiency syndromes;
understand the unique features of secretory immunity and osteoimmunology (interactions of the
immune system with bone cells), and know the immune responses involved in some periodontic
and endodontic diseases.
Outcome Measures:
Students will be evaluated based on the outcome of the exam taken in the final session. The final grade
will be a letter (A/B/C/F). The review session prior to the exam will include information on the exam
format, which in previous years has predominantly been a multiple choice test. Examples of the types and
level of multiple choice questions to be found in the test are provided at the end of each chapter in the
recommended textbook.
Students who fail the course or who receive a C grade and wish to improve their grade will be allowed to
take a re-examination. The format of the re-examination is at the discretion of the course director but
previously has involved essay writing. Re-examination grades are final and cannot be higher than B-.
Students who fail the re-examination will be required to retake the course.
Applied Nutrition in Dentistry (DEGR224A)
Course Director
Carole A. Palmer Ed.D., R.D., L.D.N.
Head, Division of Nutrition and Oral Health Promotion
Department of Public Health and Community Service
617-636-6808
[email protected]
Monday/Wednesday 11:30 a.m.-1:00 p.m., July (Summer semester)
Course Description
This course is designed for Advanced and Graduate Education students who should have had some basic
nutrition education in their prior academic career. The course provides 1.0 graduate credit to MS students.
During the course, we will review current nutrition guidelines and standards, show how they relate to
dentistry at various stages of the life cycle, and discuss how they can be applied to improve general and
dental health for oneself, family, and patients.
Course Goals and Objectives
Goals
 To provide a review of the principles of applied nutrition, including recent advances in nutrition and
disease prevention and nutrition goals for health promotion.
 To provide the student with an understanding of the relationships between nutrition and oral health
through the life cycle.
 To provide students with a methodology and experience in conducting a diet screening and
evaluation and providing diet counseling to appropriate patients.
Objectives
After participating in the Clinical Nutrition Course, the student will be able to:
74


Discuss how diet and nutrition can affect and be affected by oral health.
Discuss the underlying rationale for the development of dietary standards and their current status
including: Recommended Dietary Allowances, Dietary Guidelines, new labeling laws.

Discuss the pertinent nutrition issues common to dental patients throughout the life cycle

Discuss the role of nutrition in the management of specific disorders such as oral cancer, AIDS,
diabetes mellitus, and eating disorders.

Describe the important components of diet assessment and counseling for dental patients.
Outcome Measures
Students will receive a letter grade for the course, which will be based upon one written quiz, in-class
presentation, written paper, as well as class attendance and participation.
Bone Biology (DEGR231S)
Course Director
Jake Chen, D.D.S., Ph.D.
Room 643, DHS
617-636-2729
[email protected]
Tuesday 12:00 noon-1:00 PM, January through April (Spring Semester, every other year)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course, intended for first and second year Advanced Education and Master of
Science students. It provides 1.0 graduate credit to MS students. Each lecture will contain three major
components: (1) a review of basic and classic knowledge on the topic; (2) updates of the latest
development of research in the area, and (3) relevance to dental research of different disciplines.
Course Goals and Objectives
The educational goal of this course is to provide the advanced education students with an overview of
structures of mineralized tissues including bone, cartilage and tooth. It will also discuss the differentiation
of a variety of bone cells including osteoblast, osteocyte and osteoclast. Bone genes expression and
regulation and signal transduction pathways will also be covered. Translational studies in this area, e.g.,
regenerative dental medicine, bone tissue engineering, osteonecrosis of the jaw and osseointegration of
implants will be briefly introduced.
At the completion of the course, students will:
 be familiar with the basic biology of bone and other mineralized connective tissues including
enamel, dentin and cementum, at both morphological as well as cell and molecular biological levels
 be exposed to the basic science research in this rapidly moving area
 be involved in active and creative thinking in generating testable hypothesis and appropriate
methodology for their future research in their respective dental specialties and disciplines.
Outcome Measures
A letter grade will be provided, which will reflect student performance in the final examination (70%),
attendance (20%) and class participation (10%).
Growth and Development (DEGR232F)
Course Director
Dr. Barry Briss, Orthodontics
Dr. Stanley A. Alexander, Pediatric Dentistry
Monday, 8:00–9:30 AM, September-December (Fall semester)
Course Description
75
This is a one-credit, interdepartmental course intended for first year post-graduate residents; required for
residents from the Orthodontic and Pediatric Dentistry departments and open to Master of Science
students and other Advanced Education departments. It consists of 8 weekly lectures and one final exam.
The course is designed to provide the Advanced Education student with in depth knowledge of growth and
development of the craniofacial complex, jaws, and teeth. Upon completion of the course, the student
should:
1. Understand somatic growth and postnatal human development.
2. Understand the psychological make-up of the child and adolescent.
3. Know the processes and theories regarding facial growth.
4. Know the development of the dentition and arches.
5. Be able to assess growth with the various means available.
6. Understand endocrinology of the growing child and be aware of normal and pathological changes
due to altered glandular control.
7. Be familiar with dysmorphogenesis.
Proficiency in this course will be attained after the participation and completion of the required seminar
presentations, objective written examination, and through the application of growth and development
principles during patient care. A letter grade will be provided( A/B/C/F).
Goal of Course
To provide the student/resident with in-depth knowledge of the growth and development of the jaws,
dentition, face and craniofacial complex.
To provide the student/resident with the skills and ability to apply this knowledge,
in a clinical or academic setting in the diagnosis, treatment planning, and treatment of the orthodontic
and/or pediatric dental patient.
Objectives of Course

To provide the student/resident with the knowledge to and understanding of normal and abnormal
growth of the jaws, dentition, face and craniofacial complex.

To provide the student/resident with the ability to distinguish between normal and abnormal
craniofacial and dental growth and development.

To provide the student/resident with the knowledge of those factors which can modify and
influence the growth of the jaws, dentition, face and craniofacial complex.

To provide the student/resident with the skills to assess the growth stages of the
orthodontic/pediatric dental patient and to plan the appropriate timing and sequencing of
treatment.
Attendance Policy
The course attendance is strongly encouraged. Students are responsible for the contents of each lecture,
even if they are absent. Course hand-outs will be given at each lecture and are pertinent study materials
along with the suggested reading list and textbooks used on the final exam. If a student is absent
(unexcused or excused) more than 3 lectures, he or she will be required to retake the course the following
year.
Outcomes assessment
One final exam will be given at the end of the course to evaluate each student. The multiple choice exam
will provide grades on a A,B,C,F format and will be based on attendance, lecture hand-outs, and the
76
provided reading list from textbooks and literature. Online course evaluations will also be offered at the
end of the course.
Dental Sleep Medicine (DEGR233S)
Course Director
Dr. Leopoldo Correa
Thursday, 12-1:30 p.m., September-December (Fall semester)
This is an interdepartmental course, consisting of 11 hours of lecture and 6 hours of rotation. It provides
1.5 graduate credits.
Neuroanatomy, Neurophysiology & Neurological Assessment of Orofacial Pain (DEGR234F)
Course Director
Dr. Steven Scrivani
Tuesdays 8:00-9:30 a.m. (Fall semester)
Course description
This is an interdepartmental course which will review the pertinent neuroanatomy and neurophysiology of
the head, face and neck region with particular attention to the trigeminal system. In addition, the course
will cover the comprehensive diagnostic evaluation of a patient with orofacial pain with particular attention
to the neurological assessment. The differential diagnosis of orofacial pain will also be reviewed. It
provides 1.5 credits.
Pain Assessment & Management (DEGR235F)
Course Director
Dr. Ronald Kulich
Monday, 8-9:30 a.m. September-December (Fall semester), plus alternative scheduled sessions for outof-class lectures and clinical assessments. (Please contact instructor to review expectations for out-ofclass assignments)
Course description
This is an overview course of the current clinical science with respect to biobehavioral factors in the
assessment and treatment of chronic pain conditions. Several guest lecturers and discussants are included
in the program. With updates from the current scientific literature, the content is based on the
International Association for the Study of Pain Core Curriculum. The course topics address areas of key
competency required for Pain Medicine and related board certification exam content. This program also is
designed to meet program criteria for the orofacial pain fellowship program
Case-based discussions are included to aid the student in integrating course material into their clinical
training and practice. Students also are required to complete competency assessments within the
Craniofacial Pain and Headache Center at Tufts School of Dental Medicine.
Outcome measures
Multiple choice examination covering course content: 30 points
Class attendance: 20 points
Facial Pain and Headache Grand Rounds Attendance: 30 Points (2 points per lecture: maximum 15
lectures)
Two within-clinic psychological assessments covering a minimum of 80% required content: 10 points each
Academic Pain Lectures outside of Tufts (see instructor for list):3 points per lecture, maximum 3 lectures
Physical Medicine for Craniofacial Pain (DEGR236S)
Course Director
Dr. George Maloney
Orthopedic & Neurological Assessment of the Cervical Spine & Upper Extremity (DEGR237S)
77
Course Director
Dr. William Cooke
Tuesday, 8-9:30 a.m. September-December (Fall semester)
Course description
This course is designed to train the graduate dental medicine specialist in the anatomy and physiology of
the cervical spine and upper extremity region. It will also train the clinician in the proper history and
physical examination techniques for the comprehensive evaluation of patients with craniofacial pain and
headache disorders. It provides 1.5 graduate credits.
Pharmacotherapeutics for Pain (DEGR 238F)
Course Director
Dr. Steven Scrivani
Thursday, 8:00-9:30 a.m. (Spring semester)
Course Description
This course will review and update the following areas of pharmacotherapeutics for dentistry:
 Anatomy and physiology of acute and chronic pain
 Pharmacological principles
 Pharmacological management of acute and chronic pain
 Analgesic therapy for common orofacial pain disorders
 Side effects and contraindications of pharmacotherapy for pain
 Common drug-drug interactions
Course Objectives
 To review the mechanism for acute and chronic orofacial pain
 To update the pharmacological management of orofacial pain
 To review and update the drug-drug interactions in common dental practice
Biology of Saliva & Salivary Glands
Course Director
Dr. Driss Zoukhri
Day and time TBA (spring semester)
Course Description
This course will give students an understanding of the fundamental biology of the salivary glands, the
health benefits of saliva, and the etiology, pathogenesis, and impact of salivary gland diseases on oral
health. The course will cover the regulation of salivary gland physiology ranging from development to
neural and hormonal control of salivary output. Emphasis will be put on salivary gland diseases as well as
current and emerging treatments using tissue engineering and stem cells. The potential use of saliva as a
diagnostic tool not only for oral diseases but for other systemic diseases will also be discussed.
Course Goals and Objectives
Outcome Measures
Master of Science Courses
Critical Evaluation of Scientific Literature (DEGR302F)
Course Director
Dr. Paul Stark
Wednesday, 4:30-6:30 p.m. September-December (Fall semester)
Course Description
78
This course consists of ten 2-hour seminars. During each seminar, one article selected by the course
director is discussed in detail and critiqued based on a series of questions (see addendum A, paper critique
template). Only articles from peer-reviewed journals are selected, from the dental as well as the
biomedical literature. The format of the seminar is a discussion among all students.
This is core course intended for Master of Science students and provides 2.0 graduate credits. Most
relevant course material (reading assignments, homework assignments) is available on TUSK. In addition,
selected handouts may be provided at the beginning of each lecture.
Course goals and objectives
This course will discuss the methods for evaluating the merit of a scientific paper. Emphasis will be placed
on the design of the study, the analysis of the data collected, and the interpretation of these data. Upon
completion of the course, students should be able to critically evaluate manuscripts published in peerreviewed scientific journals.
Outcome measures
Participants will be graded based on:
Class participation
Written critiques
50%
50%
Research Methodology (DEGR205A)
Ms. Jessica Goetz, MPH
Tuesday/Thursday, 10:00 a.m.-11:30 a.m., July (Summer semester)
Course Description
This is an introductory course discussing the practical considerations for designing and conducting a
research project. It consists of 8 90-minute meetings. Its focus is on how to start with an idea and have it
progress through the different stages of the research process, from devising a research question to
conducting the study and writing-up the results. Information on available library resources and the IRB
process will also be covered. No prior exposure to research will be assumed. This is core course intended
for Master of Science students and provides 1.0 graduate credit.
Course goals and objectives
In this course, students will acquire an understanding of the process of conducting dental research.
Participants will be able to apply the scientific process to an idea and turn it into a research project.
Completed homework assignments from this course will culminate in a strong research proposal draft.
Outcome measures
Six homework assignments (90%)
Class participation and attendance (10%)
Integrated Research Experience (DEGR2241F, 241S)
Ms. Jessica Goetz, MPH
Tuesday, 12:30-2:00 p.m. September-December, January-April (fall and spring semesters)
Course Description
Course goals and objectives
Outcome measures
Epidemiology & Biostatistics II (DEGR301S)
Dr. Matthew Finkelman
79
Dr. Wanda Wright
Course Description
Biostatistics component: This is a practical course that covers advanced statistical techniques needed to
conduct and understand dental research. We discuss how to select the appropriate statistical technique,
perform the analysis, and interpret the results. Students will also receive hands-on practice using the
statistical software SPSS.
Epidemiology component: The epidemiology component will provide a basic and broad overview to clinical
research. The student will gain an understanding of how to develop clinical research questions including
protocol design and the factors that should be considered in initiating a clinical research study.
Prerequisites
Each student should have successfully completed an introductory Biostatistics and epidemiology course
and have begun to plan a research project.
Readings
Students will receive weekly optional readings in the Biostatistics portion of the class.
Content
This course will extend and advance the material covered in Biostatistics I and Epidemiology. Biostatistics
topics include two-way ANOVA, logistic regression, the Kruskal-Wallis test, advanced categorical data
analysis, SPSS, and how to randomize subjects. Epidemiology topics include the recruitment of study
participants, regulatory issues, data management, and defining measures and instruments. Each student
will do a short presentation about his/her research project.
Expectations:
1. Attend all lectures and actively participate in class discussions.
2. Demonstrate an understanding of the material on assignments, the thesis design presentation, and the
final examination.
Performance Evaluation:
Participants will be graded based on:
Attendance & class participation
Homework
Thesis design presentation
Final examination
10%
20%
20%
50%
Note: To receive full credit, all assignments must be turned in when due. 10 points will be deducted for
each day late.
80
APPENDIX A
Department pages
Graduate Programs
Master of Science
Dental Distance Education—Master of Science
Advanced Education Certificate Programs
Craniomandibular Disorders & Orofacial Pain
Endodontics
General Practice Residency
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Orthodontics
Pediatric Dentistry
Periodontology
Prosthodontics
81
MASTER OF SCIENCE PROGRAM
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine offers a program of study and research leading to the
degree of Master of Science to all scholars qualified to proceed into graduate study. Applicants
must hold an approved bachelor’s degree or the equivalent, may or may not hold a dental degree,
and may or may not be interested in dental specialization. Evidence must be shown of excellent
scholarship, research potential, and a career interest in academic dentistry.
The Master of Science program is a two year program combining a rigorous academic curriculum
comprised of at least 22 credits of didactic study with 18 credits of thesis scholarship and research,
leading to the degree of Master of Science in Dental Research.
Administration
Paul C. Stark, M.S., Sc.D.
Director, Division of Advanced and Graduate Education
617-636-3743
[email protected]
Susan Brown
Staff Assistant
617-636-3753
[email protected]
The Office of Advanced and Graduate Education is located at 75 Kneeland St., Suite 105.
Application procedures
Candidates may apply to the Master of Science program only, or pursue the degree concurrently
with one of the postgraduate specialty certificate programs. Candidates who wish to pursue a
Master of Science degree concurrently with a specialty certificate or fellowship program may apply
to the Master of Science program during their first year of residency, or apply to both during the
admissions process. To apply during residency, candidates should provide the Director of Advanced
and Graduate Education with a completed application, (available on request from the Office of
Advanced and Graduate Education), a letter of support from his or her program director or
department chair, and a current TUSDM transcript. While as a general rule grades should be B or
better, students applying to the MS program are permitted to have one grade of C, if there is
evidence of superior performance in other courses. The applications of students who have two or
more grades of C will be considered on a case by case basis, and such students may be admitted
provisionally. The deadline for application is March 1, for matriculation on July 1.
Individuals may also choose to pursue the Master of Science degree without also taking part in a
specialty certificate program. Such individuals should provide the Director of Advanced and
Graduate Education with a completed application, letter of intent, current CV, and transcripts from
the institutions of higher education attended. TOEFL scores, when appropriate, are also required.
The minimum TOEFL score is 90 on the internet based test, with a minimum of 25 on the written
section, 24 on the spoken section, 21 on the reading section and 17 on the listening section. The
International English Language Testing System (IELTS) exam may be substituted for the TOEFL,
with a minimum score of 7.0. Candidates should apply by March 1 of the year they wish to
matriculate.
As of July 2011, TUSDM offers a combined Doctor of Dental Medicine/Master of Science program.
The program will allow a select group of D.M.D. candidates the opportunity to enroll in the Master
of Science program, earning both degrees in five years. First year students in good standing are
welcome to apply. A mentor and research project must be identified and students should have a
minimum GPA of 3.0. Two letters of recommendation and a personal statement should be
submitted with the application.
Program Length
82
The Master of Science program a minimum of two years with a maximum of five. Individuals
enrolled concurrently in specialty-Master of Science program take a minimum of three years to
successfully complete both components. It should be noted that, while some courses count toward
both the specialty certificate and the Master of Science degree, the Master of Science program is
independent and students should plan their schedules to ensure that they will have time to both
attend classes and perform their research.
Program Cost
Students taking part in the Master of Science program only are charged the customary tuition rate
for two years. Students concurrently enrolled in a certificate program will be charged an additional
25% of tuition for the two years they are enrolled in the Master of Science program. Students who
do not complete the program in two years will be charged a continuation fee, which will be a
percentage of the tuition fee, determined by status and prorated by quarter.
Continuation Status
If at the end of two years a Master of Science student has at least 18 didactic credits and 4 thesis
research credits, he or she is eligible to enroll quarterly under continuation status for up to an
additional three years, rather than enroll full-time (and at full tuition). Per the recommendation of
the student’s advisor, continuation status can be full-time, half-time, or part-time, and costs will be
assessed accordingly. Quarters are approximately 11 weeks in length and correspond to the four
degree dates (September, November, February and May). Fees will be assessed and charged by
quarter, as follows:
Full-time: 25% of tuition per quarter
Half time: 12.5% of tuition per quarter
Part-time: 5% of tuition per quarter
International students
International students may have to register as full-time and pay the higher cost owing to visa
requirements, even if not in residence full-time while on continuation status.
Registration
Students matriculating in the Master of Science program must fill out a Registration form for every
year he or she is enrolled in the program, whether full or part-time. Registration in the Master
program is separate from registration in any other program. Registration is for one year.
83
Activity
Select advisor
Deadline
November 1 – year 1. Advisor's primary
appointment should be TUSDM
Select committee and thesis topic
November 1 – year 1. Committee should consist
of at least three other members, all can be from
TUSDM. It is strongly recommended that one
member be a statistician, or that when
necessary, content is reviewed by a statistician.
Meet with full committee, develop research
proposal
December 1-year 1.
Submit 3-5 page Research Proposal to Office of December 1–year 1.
Advanced and Graduate Education, to be
presented to AGEC for approval
Develop Research Protocol
Winter – year 1. A protocol with a clear
background, hypothesis, materials and methods
and statistical analysis section should be
developed.
Defend Research Proposal to Thesis Committee Spring – year 1. Proposal documents and room
assignments should be distributed to committee
and Office of Advanced and Graduate Education
at least one week before defense date.
Submit application to IRB (for research on
human subjects or teeth) or IACUC (if animal
subjects are being used). No research may
begin before approval.
Conduct research
Spring – year 1. Work with Department of Dental
Research Administration on IRB submission.
Schedule Thesis Committee meetings
At least once every 4 months.
Present research at Research Day
June – year 2.
Conduct thesis defense
June 30, year 2. Thesis documents and room
assignments should be distributed to committee
and Office of Advanced and Graduate Education
at least one week before defense date.
Summer – year 1 and throughout year 2.
84
Benchmarks
While students should make every effort to adhere to the deadlines detailed above, the Office of
Advanced and Graduate Education acknowledges that it is not always possible. However, the
following benchmarks will be strictly enforced:
Master of Science students must submit a research proposal to the Advanced and Graduate
Education Committee by June 30 of their first year in the program. Those who do not will not be
permitted to enroll in classes for the next semester (summer).
Master of Science students must complete the protocol defense by December 31 of their second
year in the program. Those who do not will not be permitted to enroll in classes for following
semester (spring).
Forms
All forms that students need to submit to the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education can be
obtained at the office (75 Kneeland St., suite 105), or found on TUSK (www.tusk.tufts.edu).
The Advisor
A faculty member is selected by October 1 of the first year to serve as Advisor. Only a TUSDM
faculty member with an appointment of Assistant Professor or above, with significant research
experience, is a suitable choice for principal advisor. (A full-time faculty member from TUSDM or
another institution who does not have these qualifications may still serve as co-advisor, along with
an appropriate TUSDM faculty member). The Advisor serves as the Chair of the student’s thesis
committee, mentors the student, assists the student in identifying and pursuing a research topic,
and in preparation of the thesis.
The Thesis Committee
The function of the thesis committee is to work with the student regarding:
 selection of courses pertinent to the objectives of the student’s educational program
 evaluate the thesis research proposal
 consultation and advice on research design, methods and techniques
 critical review of the research in progress
 consultation and advice on thesis writing
 attendance at the thesis defense
Students should work with the advisor to identify and select the thesis committee. The committee
must have at least three members, (your advisor does NOT count as a member of your
committee). One committee member should be a statistician. Any faculty member with a rank of
Assistant Professor or above may serve on the thesis committee. Once the committee is
established, submit a signed “Advisor/Committee Acceptance Form” to the Office of Advanced and
Graduate Education.
Progress Reports
Master of Science students are encouraged to meet with their committee frequently, but MUST
meet with the committee before submitting the Research Proposal for approval to the Advanced
and Graduate Education Committee. After that, plan to meet with your full committee at least once
every four months. Meetings must be in person. Students should bring a Progress Report Form to
the meeting and submit the signed progress report to the Office of Advanced and Graduate
Education.
During a student's course of study and research, all members of the Thesis Committee
should be available for consultation and advice. In order to facilitate communication, a dedicated
group is set up in TUSK as soon as the advisor and committee are selected. Students are
encouraged to use this resource for informal discussions and feedback with their committee on
their work in progress.
85
Course Requirements and Credit
The Master of Science program requires a minimum of 22 didactic credits and 18 research credits,
for a total of 40 credits. One credit is equal to 12 contact hours. Individual programs of graduate
study and research should be developed by the student in close collaboration with his or her
advisor.
The following 8 core courses (a total of 13.5 credits), are required for all Master of Science
students:
Biostatistics IA
Biostatistics IB
Biostatistics & Epidemiology II
Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
Integrated Research Experience
Critical Evaluation of Scientific Literature
Successful Research Strategies
Research Methodology
1.0
1.5
2.5
1.5
3.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
credit
credits
credits
credits
credits
credits
credit
credit
The remaining 9.5 didactic credits may be taken as electives. Graduate level courses are available
at the School for Dental Medicine, the School of Medicine, the Sackler School of Biomedical
Sciences, the Nutrition School and Tufts University Graduate School of Arts and Sciences. Students
should be guided by their research interests and thesis topic when designing an elective
curriculum. It is also possible to undertake a program of independent study, for up to four credits.
Contracts for independent study must be approved by the Director of Advanced and Graduate
Education and filed in the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education.
Research
Students are required to obtain a minimum of 18 research credits. Credits are awarded as follows:
Thesis Research
Research Day
Research protocol
Thesis document
Thesis defense
6
2
2
4
4
credits
credits
credits
credits
credits
Research Funds
The Office of Advanced and Graduate Education can assist students in obtaining materials, services
or software that is unavailable at the Dental School and is necessary for their research. Up to
$1,000 worth of such materials may be purchased on the students’ behalf. The Research Proposal
must be approved prior to making your request. These funds may not be used for editing
services, to defray costs associated with ordering bound thesis copies, or for travel to conferences.
Research Days
The Division of Advanced and Graduate Education holds a Research Day in early June for Master of
Science candidates who are either enrolled as Master of Science students only, or who are enrolled
concurrently with an Advanced Education program that does not have its own research day. Oral
presentations are given, with the top presenters going on to present at an interdepartmental
research day at the end of June. Representatives from postgraduate departments will give oral
presentations. Participation at Research Day is mandatory for Master of Science students, whether
it is to present or to attend. Performance is not graded, credit is given. Credit will not be given if
the student does not attend, or if his or her presentation is found to be below standard for a
graduate student.
86
Writing Requirements
There are 5 documents that students need to write while in the Master of Science program:
1) Research Proposal
2) Research Protocol
3) IRB application
4) Thesis
5) Manuscript, to be submitted to a peer-reviewed journal.
All work that a student produces must be original. If a student wants to utilize material that has
been published elsewhere, then that material needs to be referenced. Taking credit for
another’s work without the appropriate reference is considered plagiarism, a serious
ethics infraction. A useful reference source is “MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers”.
All documents prepared by the student should be double-spaced, using Times New Roman 12point font, with page numbers in the lower right corner, except where specified.
There is a significant amount of overlap between the 5 documents, as outlined in the table below.
The manuscript is not included in the table, as its requirements are specific to the journal.
87
Section
Length
Abstract
Introduction
Significance
Aim(s)
Hypotheses
Research Design
and Methods
Research
Proposal
3 – 5 pages
NA
1- 2 pages
Short literature
review
Concise statement
Research
Protocol
20 – 50 pages
NA
5- 20 pages
Expanded literature
review
Alternative only
1 – 2 pages
Future tense
Design and brief
methods
Inclusion/exclusion,
recruitment
Concise statement
IRB Protocol
Thesis
5 – 15 pages
NA
1 – 2 pages
Similar to
Research Proposal
Concise
statement
Alternative only
2 – 5 pages
Future tense
Similar to
Research Protocol
Similar to
Research Protocol
Similar to
Research Protocol
Analytic plan
NA
30 – 70 pages
350 words
5 – 20 pages
Similar to
Research Protocol
Concise statement
Variables
Outcome
Statistical Analysis
Results
NA
NA
Alternative only
2 – 5 pages
Future tense
More detailed
methods
Add sample size
calculation
Add predictors and
confounders
Analytic plan
NA
Descriptive Results
NA
NA
NA
Analytic Results
NA
NA
NA
Discussion
NA
1 – 3 pages
Future tense
NA
Discussion of
Results
NA
Hypothetical
discussion of
potential
implications of
findings
NA
Limitations
NA
NA
NA
Future Research
NA
NA
NA
Conclusion
NA
NA
NA
Timeline
Budget
References
Tables & Figures
Appendices
IRB Forms
0.5 pages
0.5 pages
Sequential order
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Sequential order
As needed
As needed
NA
NA
NA
Sequential order
NA
NA
As needed
Study Design
Study Sample
Alternative only
2 – 5 pages
Past tense
Revise as needed
to accommodate
changes that took
place during study
implementations.
Change to past
tense.
3 – 10 pages
Describe study
sample
Results of
statistical analysis
3 – 10 pages
Past tense
Discussion based
on results.
Interpretation of
findings.
Comparison to
other work.
Discuss any
weaknesses
Suggestions for
future research
0.5 – 1 page
summary of the
“take-home”
message
NA
NA
Sequential order
As needed
As needed
NA
Note: Some additional sections are required for the IRB application that are not listed above. For a
complete list, visit the IRB website at: http://tnemcirb.tufts.edu/
88
1) The Research Proposal (3–5 pages)
This proposal is a three to five page document which is submitted to the Office of Advanced and
Graduate Education and reviewed by the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee. The
Research Proposal should be submitted electronically (via email) to the OAGE. The advisor should
be copied on the email. The AGEC reviews the feasibility and merit of the proposed research
before the student initiates any research activities. The structure of the Research Proposal is as
follows:
Student’s name and department
Proposed title
Advisor’s name
Introduction: Literature Review and Significance of Research (1–1.5 pages)
Discuss the problem to be investigated as well as the rationale for this research. Describe the
current body of knowledge on the topic and how the research project adds to it.
Specific Aims and Hypothesis (0.5 pages)
State what the research is expected to accomplish. Include the hypothesis and specific objectives
of the project. Your aims should contain some comparative words.
Research Design and Methods (1–2 pages)
Include an overview of the experimental design and a description of methods for how the data will
be collected, analyzed and interpreted. State the primary outcome and how it will be measured.
Be sure to describe the study population and state the inclusion and exclusion criteria.
Timeline (0.5 pages)
Describe the process required to satisfactorily complete the proposed research project and
estimate the amount of time needed to complete each step.
Budget (0.5 pages)
Estimate the costs associated with the research project and how those costs will be covered.
References (length as needed)
Cite every article mentioned in the Research Proposal. References should be denoted by a
superscripted number, ordered consecutively in the order that they first appear in the document.
Each reference must contain the name of the author(s), the title of the paper, the name of the
publication, the volume, date and page range.
If the project is approved by the AGEC, then the student can move on to preparing the Research
Proposal.
2) Research Protocol (20–50 pages)
The Research Protocol is a comprehensive, 20-50 page document that describes, in detail, the
justification for the proposed research project, the current body of knowledge on the topic and how
the research adds to that body. In addition, the Research Protocol describes the exact process that
will be followed for conducting the study and analyzing the data collected from the study.
The structure of the Research Protocol is as follows:
Title page (1 page)
Project Title
Student’s name and department
Names and titles of all members of thesis committee (1 page)
Table of Contents (length as needed)
List of Tables, if appropriate (length as needed)
89
List of Figures, if appropriate (length as needed)
Main Body of Protocol
Introduction: Literature Review & Significance of Research (5 – 20 pages)
Discuss the problem to be investigated as well as the rationale for this research. Describe the
current body of knowledge on this topic and how this research project adds to it. Make a case for
why this research should be conducted. Include a discussion of all pertinent work and reference all
articles discussed.
Specific Aims and Hypothesis (1 page)
A thorough discussion of what the research is expected to accomplish. Include the hypothesis and
specific objectives of the project.
Research Design and Methods (2–5 pages)
Include a detailed description of the experimental design and the methods for data collection.
State the primary outcome and how it will be measured. Be sure to describe the study population
and state any inclusion and exclusion criteria. A detailed discussion of the statistical analysis and
interpretation is required. In addition, reference every instrument or device that is used throughout
the course of the project. The power calculation and sample size justification should be included in
this section.
Discussion (1 – 3 pages)
Describe the potential impact of the study. Include the ramifications of the study findings being
significant or not.
References (length as needed)
Cite every article mentioned in the Research Protocol. References should be denoted by a
superscripted number, ordered consecutively in the order that they first appear in the document.
Each reference must contain the name of the author(s), the title of the paper, the name of the
publication, the volume, date and page range.
After the student has written the Research Protocol, he or she needs to defend the protocol during
a 30 minute oral PowerPoint presentation to the Thesis Committee. At least 1 week prior to the
proposal defense, the student needs to circulate the Thesis Protocol to the Thesis
Committee and the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education. Failure to do so may
result in a postponement of the proposal defense. After the oral presentation, the Thesis
Committee examines the student on his or her knowledge of the subject matter and the proposed
research project.
If the student successfully passes the Oral Protocol Defense, then the student meets with
representatives from the Department of Dental Research Administration to prepare the necessary
paperwork (IRB or IACUC application) to begin the study. After the study has been approved, the
student can undertake the research project.
Every three to four months the student is required to hold a Thesis Committee Meeting, where all
members of the Thesis Committee meet with the student and are updated as to the progress of the
research.
After the research has been completed, the student will write and defend the Thesis.
3) The Thesis
The thesis is a culmination of an original investigation leading to new information. The thesis
should characterize, in a scholarly manner, the importance of this information as it applies to the
field of study. The thesis should reflect the methodology, techniques, statistics and literature
background used, as well as scientific logic necessary for acceptance of the results and conclusion.
At least 1 week prior to the thesis defense, the student needs to circulate the Thesis to
90
the Thesis Committee and the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education. Failure to do
so may result in a postponement of the thesis defense.
The structure of the Thesis is as follows:
Title page (1 page-centered)
Project Title
Student’s name
“Thesis submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirement for the degree of Master
of Science”
Tufts University Seal
“Tufts University School of Dental Medicine”
Student’s department
Names and titles of all members of thesis committee (1 page)
Abstract (1 page–350 words or less, double spaced)
Acknowledgments (optional)
Table of Contents (length as needed)
List of Tables (length as needed)
List of Figures (length as needed)
Main Body of Thesis
Introduction: Literature Review and Significance of Research (5 – 20 pages)
Discuss the problem that was investigated as well as the rationale for this research. Describe the
current body of knowledge on this topic and how this research project adds to it. Make a case for
why this research was conducted. Include a discussion of all pertinent work and reference all
articles discussed.
Specific Aims and Hypothesis (1 page)
A thorough discussion of what the research was expected to accomplish. Include the hypothesis
and specific objectives of your project.
Research Design and Methods (2 – 5 pages)
Include a detailed description of the experimental design and the methods for data collection.
State the primary outcome and how it was measured. Be sure to describe the study population
and state any inclusion and exclusion criteria. A detailed discussion of the statistical analysis and
interpretation is required. In addition, reference every instrument or device that was used
throughout the course of the project. The power calculation and sample size justification should be
included in this section.
Results (3 – 10 pages)
Present the findings generated from the research. The findings should be presented both in
paragraph form and as tables or figures.
Discussion (3 – 10 pages)
Describe the implications of the findings presented in the Results section. Put the findings of this
study in context of other similar studies. Be sure to include a subsection for Limitations.
Conclusion (0.5 – 1 page)
Describe the overall ramifications of the research project. State what can be deduced from the
project as a whole. Include a discussion of the next steps for future work.
91
References (length as needed)
Cite every article mentioned in the Thesis. References should be denoted by a superscripted
number, ordered consecutively in the order that they first appear in the document. Each reference
must contain the name of the author(s), the title of the paper, the name of the publication, the
volume, date and page range.
Appendix (or Appendices, as needed)
The Appendix is for material that may need to be included, but does not coincide with any specific
section of the Thesis. For example, if a questionnaire was used for data collection, a copy of the
questionnaire should be included in the Appendix.
Spacing and Margins
All text material and preliminary pages, including the abstract should be double-spaced. Notes,
bibliographic references, and long quotations may be single-spaced. The document should be
arranged as if it were to be single-sided. The left margin should be 1½ inches wide, the right
margin, as well as top and bottom margins, should be one full inch.
Pagination
The title page would be lowercase Roman numeral “I” but is not typed. Subsequent pages should
be typed as “ii”, “iii”, etc., until the thesis proper is reached. The first page of the thesis proper is
Arabic “1” and repeats the title only. Pagination appears within the one-inch margin recommended
about ¾” from the top and right-hand edges of the paper or ¾” from the bottom edge of the
paper, centered. Pagination that includes pages such as “10a”, “10b”, etc., should be avoided.
Style and Documentation
It is crucial that theses written by students at the Tufts University School of Dental Medicine have a
consistent style. As a result, all theses should adhere to the American Medical Association Style
format. More information about the specifics of the style can be found at
www.amamanualofstyle.com, and a copy of the AMA Manual of Style is available in the Office of
Advanced and Graduate Education. All questions of style and technique should be discussed with
the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education and resolved before the preparation of the final
thesis document.
Thesis Defense
After the student has written the Thesis, he or she needs to conduct a thesis defense--a public, 45
minute oral PowerPoint presentation. The Thesis Committee should all be in attendance. At least 1
week prior to the thesis defense, the student needs to circulate the Thesis to the Thesis
Committee and the Office of Advanced and Graduate Education. Failure to do so may
result in a postponement of the thesis defense. After the oral presentation, the Thesis
Committee examines the student on his or her knowledge of the subject matter and the research
project. The following four learning outcomes should be achieved:
Ability
Ability
Ability
Ability
to
to
to
to
critically evaluate scientific literature
independently conduct a research study
interpret the results of an experiment
contextualize conclusions
Copyright Information
The thesis is considered published once it has been placed in the university archives.
If the material has not been copyrighted, it is placed in the “public domain,” which means that the
material may be copied, sold, or used without permission of the author and with no payment to the
author. If the writer’s intent is to commercially publish the thesis, use it as a basis for future
articles or otherwise try to profit from its content, the material should be copyrighted. University
92
Microfilm International (http://www.umi.com) maintains pertinent copyright information and can
provide information on intellectual property issues. During the electronic submission process,
students may have ProQuest/UMI file for copyright on their behalf. For further information about
copyright registration, consult the Library of Congress website http://www.copyright.gov/.
Thesis Submission
Once the thesis defense has been successfully completed, (Form A), and the required changes
made to the thesis document (Form B), the thesis will be submitted electronically to ProQuest
(http://www.etdadmin.com/tuftsdentm). Simply create an account and follow the submission
instructions. Students must order at least two bound copies for the Office of Advanced and
Graduate Education and his or her Advanced Education department, though students may order as
many personal copies as they like.
In addition, the thesis must be submitted for publication to a peer-reviewed journal (Form C). The
thesis does not have to be published before the degree is granted, but must be submitted.
Students who have not submitted their thesis to ProQuest will not be presented to the Executive
Faculty for approval, have their names submitted for approval to the Board of Trustees, or be
permitted to participate in Commencement.
Disseminating the results of the thesis project is an integral part of the research experience.
Therefore, theses should be written with publication in mind and the structure should mirror a
peer-reviewed manuscript. The thesis must be submitted to a peer-reviewed journal after
the thesis defense. The student will not be presented to the Executive Faculty for
approval until the thesis has been submitted.
4) The Manuscript
The impact of the student’s research is limited unless the information is disseminated to other
members of the scientific community in that field. As a result, it is a requirement to submit the
thesis for publication in a peer-reviewed journal before the degree of Master of Science
will be conferred.
The primary distinction between the Thesis and the Manuscript (aside from length) is the audience
for each. The Thesis should be written for a very narrow audience with a wide range of interests,
whereas the Manuscript should be written for a larger audience with a very specific interest in the
research topic.
The format of the manuscript will need to adhere to the guidelines for authors for the specific
journal to which the manuscript is being submitted. In general, the following steps should be
taken to make the Thesis appropriate for submission to a journal. The Literature Review should be
significantly shortened to focus on the most salient and relevant articles. However, the Specific
Aims and Hypothesis should still be the paragraph that concludes the Introduction. The Research
Design and Methods section should remain virtually intact. There should be slightly more detail
with regard to study design and statistical analyses in the Thesis than in the Manuscript. The
information presented in the Results section of the Thesis may be divided into more than one
manuscript. If so, the Introduction, Results, Discussion and Conclusion sections should be
condensed accordingly.
Authorship
All members of the thesis committee, as well as anyone who has provided significant contribution
to the research, should be included as a co-author on the manuscript. If there are doubts about a
person’s contributions, that person should decide if he or she belongs as a co-author. The authors’
names are typically listed in order of contribution, with the exception of the advisor, who is usually
the senior member of the research team and therefore listed last.
93
Completion
The academic requirements for the degree of Master of Science will have been completed following
successful attainment of a minimum of 22 semester hours of approved graduate study and 18
semester hours of thesis research, scholarly defense of thesis, and the submission of the
“Certificate of Fitness” form, also known as Form A, the “Approval of Thesis for Binding” form, or
Form B, and the “Submission of Thesis for Publication”, or Form C; and submission of a final
approved and corrected thesis document to ProQuest. A minimum of three members of the
student’s thesis committee must be present for the thesis defense. In addition, students need to
clear administratively. Once both the academic (turning in forms A, B and C) and the
administrative (completing a clearance form from Student Services) requirements have been met,
the Chair of the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee will present the student’s name to
the Executive Faculty for approval of the Dean and Trustees of Tufts University. The Trustees will
confer the degree at the next degree date. The actual diploma will be mailed about 2 months after
that date. Be sure to leave a correct mailing address with the Assistant Director of Registration, to
ensure that the diploma arrives promptly. Students who complete their requirements and receive
their degrees on the August, November, February or May degree dates are welcome to take part in
the University Commencement ceremonies in May if they wish.
94
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN OROFACIAL PAIN
Postdoctoral education in temporomandibular disorders and related head, neck, and orofacial pain
is a full-time two-year interdisciplinary certificate program with an option of a third year leading to
a Master of Science degree. The program is designed to provide students with the latest theories in
chronic pain management from both a dental and a medical perspective.
Clinical training is conducted on a one-on-one basis at the Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep
Center, an interdisciplinary center utilizing multiple current approaches to diagnosis and treatment.
The center is the largest university-based center in the United States and is an acknowledged
leader in the field. The faculty consists of dental medicine specialists, physician specialists and
other health care providers such as psychologists, chiropractic physicians, licensed acupuncturists,
occupational therapists, physical therapists and social workers, all with training and expertise in
pain, who are involved in the teaching and clinical practice of pain management.
The students learn how to evaluate and diagnose utilizing state-of-the-art clinical technology. The
training also includes pain-control modalities such as pharmacotherapy, biobehavioral
interventions, electromyographic (EMG) biofeedback techniques, oral appliance therapy, triggerpoint injections, psychological intervention, anesthetic nerve blocks, and computerized occlusal
analysis. The Center incorporates additional alternative and complementary medical modalities
such as acupuncture, acupressure, herbal therapies, nutritional counseling and chiropractic
remedies. The students supplement their clinical training with medical lectures through such
specialties as neurology, psychology, anesthesia, otolaryngology, radiology, oral and maxillofacial
surgery, oral and maxillofacial pathology and other pain-related specialties.
In addition to the clinical training, students in the three year program construct a research
proposal as part of their preparation for their research and thesis, which is essential for completion
of the Master of Science requirements. Faculty areas of research interest include, but are not
limited to, gross anatomy, histology, dental occlusion, neurology, psychology, muscle function,
pharmacological trials, complementary medicine, functional brain imaging, temporomandibular
joint surgery, rehabilitation motion devices, and many more.
Upon successful completion of the Master of Science program, students will be qualified to
participate in the clinical aspect of temporomandibular disorders and orofacial pain management,
to take the exam for board certification in orofacial pain, and to pursue independent research.
Students also learn how to run an interdisciplinary pain practice or program and how to interact
with a variety of health professionals.
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine offers one of the most forward-looking educational
environments in dental medicine in the country. Since its founding in 1868, Tufts University School
of Dental Medicine has been committed to excellence in education, research, patient care, and
community service.
At Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, research and teaching are complementary, producing
professionals who possess the analytical capacity and the spirit of inquiry to deal with an everincreasing knowledge base and rapid technological changes.
By treating patients in the school's teaching clinics and through a variety of externships at hospitals
and government sponsored dental clinics around the country, Tufts dental students understand not
just how to apply science to practice, but how to employ compassion in the treatment of human
illness.
The students and faculty at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine benefit from the university's
commitment to interdisciplinary teaching, research and practice. Located in the heart of Tufts
Health Sciences campus in downtown Boston, the school shares resources and research
breakthroughs with Tufts University School of Medicine, Cummings School of Veterinary Medicine,
95
Friedman School of Nutrition Science and Policy, and the Sackler School of Graduate Biomedical
Sciences.
The school is dedicated to training doctors of dental medicine as expert clinicians with strong
biomedical backgrounds. Tufts University School of Dental Medicine is directly affiliated with several
hospitals for the care of medically compromised patients and surgical in-patient management on a
comprehensive basis.
Tufts Medical Center
Tufts Medical Center is a world-class academic medical center offering outstanding patient care to
both adults and children, teaching generations of future physicians the most advanced medical
science and breaking new ground with ongoing, innovative research.
Tufts Medical Center and Floating Hospital for Children serve as the principal teaching hospitals for
Tufts University School of Medicine, which ranks in the top five percent of institutions nationwide
receiving National Institutes of Health research funding.
Physicians offer advanced medical science and services in every major specialty and subspecialty
and an integrated, interdisciplinary approach to the diagnosis and management of patients with
complicated diseases. All full-time physicians at Tufts Medical Center and Floating Hospital for
Children hold faculty appointments at Tufts University School of Medicine. As the oldest permanent
medical facility in New England and one of the first in the nation, the 451-bed Medical Center is the
principal teaching hospital for Tufts University School of Medicine, where all full-time Medical
Center physicians hold faculty appointments.
Tufts Medical Center offers compassionate, patient-centered care, where a team approach ensures
both complete and thorough consideration of treatment options. Patients value the personal, caring
touch offered by Tufts Medical Center physicians and staff. Each patient has a specially designated
primary nurse who coordinates nursing care, provides patient education and facilitates discharge
planning.
We strive to heal, to comfort, to teach, to learn, and to seek the knowledge to promote health and
prevent disease. Our patients and their families are at the center of everything we do. We dedicate
ourselves to furthering our rich tradition of health care innovation, leadership, charity and the
highest standard of care and service to all in our community.
The Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep Center
The Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep Center specializes in the diagnosis and treatment of
complex painful disorders of the head and neck region. The mission of our Center is to provide a
comprehensive diagnostic evaluation, a concise and coordinated management plan in a holistic,
integrated biomedical patient-focused manner. Your care will be coordinated and supervised by one
of our pain specialists who will provide clear and effective communication between patient, family,
and their other physicians and health care practitioners.
Our Center’s multidisciplinary staff consists of pain specialists from numerous medical and dental
disciplines. These include:
Dental Medicine –
Restorative Dentistry
Endodontics
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology
Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology
Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery
Oral Medicine
Orofacial Pain
Orthodontics
Pediatric Dentistry
Periodontics
Temporomandibular Disorders
Acupuncture
Behavioral and Clinical Psychology
Chiropractic Medicine
Complementary and Alternative Medicine
Headache Medicine
Integrative Medicine
Medicine
Neurology
Occupational Therapy
Pain Medicine
Physical Therapy
Rehabilitation Medicine
Sleep Medicine
Conditions treated at the Craniofacial Pain,
Headache
96
and Sleep Center includes numerous complex pain disorders, such as, but not limited to:
Burning Mouth Disorder
Cervical (Neck) Disorders
Chronic Regional Pain Syndrome (CRPS)
Headaches
Movement Disorders of the Head, Face, and Neck
Musculoskeletal Pain Disorders
Neuropathic Pain Disorders
Temporomandibular Joint Disorders (TMD)
Teeth-related Pain Disorders
Oral Pain Disorders
Trigeminal Neuralgia
Treatment at the Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep Center includes a variety of procedures
designed to eliminate or control pain, restore function, and improve overall well-being and quality
of life. Treatments offered at our Center consist of:
Acupressure
Acupuncture
Biofeedback and Behavior Modification
Cognitive Behavioral Therapy
Diet & Nutritional Therapy (Complementary Medicine)
Electromyographic Analysis
Exercise Program
Home Care Instructions
Injection Therapy
Medication Therapy
Occupational Therapy
Occlusal Therapies
Orthopedic Jaw Appliances -Mouth Guards
Physical Therapy
Relaxation Therapy
Relaxation Training
Rehabilitation Program
Sleep Medicine
Department Administration
Department Chair, AE Program Director: Noshir R. Mehta, D.M.D., M.D.S., M.S.
Administrative Assistant: Christopher Gifford
Web: http://www.orofacialpain.com
Program Faculty
Noshir Mehta, D.M.D., M.D.S., M.S., F.I.C.D., F.A.C.D., Director of the Craniofacial Pain
Center; Professor and Chairman of the Department of General Dentistry at Tufts Dental
School.
Clinical Specialties: Diagnosis and management of temporomandibular disorders, orofacial pain and
head and neck pain from a full body perspective and the interaction of the dental occlusion in
musculoskeletal dysfunction.
Board Certification: Diplomate of the American Board of Orofacial Pain and a Fellow of the
American College of Dentists, and the International College of Dentists.
Education: Tufts University School of Dental Medicine.
Postgraduate Training: Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, 1973.
Tofool Al-Ghanem, D.M.D., M.S. Instructor
Brijesh Chandwani, B.D.S., Instructor
Clinical Specialties: Diagnosis and Treatment of Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial Pain
Education: Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
William J. Cooke, D.C., C.C.S.P., Assistant Clinical Professor
Chiropractic Orthopedist, Head of Orthopedic Rehabilitation
Clinical Specialties: Sports Medicine / Orthopedics
Board Certification: Sports Medicine, Board Eligible: Orthopedics
97
Education: University of Alabama; Life Chiropractic College
Postgraduate Training: National Chiropractic College
Leopoldo Correa Vasquez, B.D.S., Assistant Professor
Clinical Specialties: Diagnosis and Treatment of Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial Pain,
Sleep Medicine
Education: Facultad de Odontologia, University of Veracruz, Mexico
Shuchi Dhadwal, B.D.S., Instructor
Ronald J. Kulich, Ph.D., Assistant Clinical Professor, Consulting Psychologist
Clinical Specialties: Psychological Assessment of Chronic Pain
Education: Case Western Reserve University; Purdue University, Dept. of Psychological Sciences
Postgraduate Training: Brown University Medical School
Chao Lu, D.D.S., Instructor
George Maloney, D.M.D., Associate Professor
Clinical Specialties: Diagnosis and Treatment of Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial Pain.
Acupuncture
Board Certification: Diplomate of the American Board of Orofacial Pain
Education: University of Massachusetts at Amherst, B.S. in Biology; University of Pennsylvania,
D.M.D.
Postgraduate Training: General Practice Residency, Worcester City Hospital. Temporomandibular
disorders and orofacial pain Residency, Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. Masters of
Science in Acupuncture.
Steven J. Scrivani, D.D.S., D.Med.Sc., Associate Professor, Craniofacial Pain Center
Clinical Specialties: Headaches, trigeminal neuralgia, neuropathic facial pain, neurological
disorders, burning mouth, trigeminal nerve injuries, salivary gland disorders, jaw functioning
disorders, complementary and alternative medicine for pain
Education: Columbia University
Postgraduate Training: Columbia University, School of Dental and Oral Surgery- Doctor of Dental
Surgery (D.D.S), 1980; The Mount Sinai Hospital Medical Center, Department of Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery Training Program, 1981-1982; Harvard Medical School/ Harvard School of
Dental Medicine- Doctor of Medical Science (D.Med.Sc), 1993-1998; Department of Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery-Massachusetts General Hosptial Fellowship in Orafacial Pain Medicine
(Certificate), 1993-1997
Teresa Sienkiewicz, M.S., P.T., M.Ed., Clinical Instructor
Egilius L.H. Speirings, M.D., Ph.D., Clinical Associate Professor
Departmental Training Programs
The Craniofacial Pain Center offers a wide variety of Residency Programs, as well as Distance
learning options. These programs are designed to fulfill the needs of graduate dentists interested in
specializing in this field, either on a full-time or part-time basis. For tuition information, please
contact the Center.
Certificate Program—2 years
The Center offers a full-time Certificate Program in Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial
Pain. This program prepares dentists in the management of complex orofacial pain patients
through a multidisciplinary approach. With hundreds of new patients every year, and two years to
follow up cases, this program provides residents with a unique clinical experience. Clinical training
is done at the Craniofacial Pain Center. Residents have an extensive exposure to Orofacial Pain
patients on a daily basis. This forms 70% of the resident's scheduled time. Residents learn how to
diagnose and treat orofacial pain patients from a multidisciplinary approach. Interactions between
98
residents and other faculty members including orthodontists, pain specialists, neurologists,
psychologists, physical therapists and surgeons form the basis for establishing treatment plans and
managing pain patients.
Residents have extensive training in diagnostic imaging (radiography, CT scan, MRl, MRA, etc.) for
the head and neck area, electromyography, computerized dental occlusal analysis, electrical
anesthesia and diagnostic injections. Treatment modalities commonly used at the Craniofacial Pain
Center include intraoral appliances, pharmacology, psychology, physical therapy.
Postgraduate Courses form the didactic part of the students' studies and include courses given at
the School of Dental Medicine such as Temporomandibular Disorders & Orofacial Pain, Oral &
Maxillofacial Radiology, Medicine, Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology, Dental Occlusion, Head and Neck
Anatomy, Growth and Development, Nutrition, Research Methods, Biostatistics, and CPR.
Residents also receive courses and seminars at the Craniofacial Pain Center. These range from
literature review sessions and board review seminars to patient conferences visiting lecturers and
research meetings
Master of Science–3 years
In addition to the Certificate Program, Tufts School of Dental Medicine offers a third year leading to
the Master of Science Degree from Tufts University.
This has didactic and research requirements in addition to the clinical part. The didactic section of
the degree requires that the resident completes 22 credit hours of courses toward the M.S. degree,
taken in association with Masters candidates from other dental specialties. Some of these courses
may be completed in the first two years (Certificate). The resident is also required to construct an
original research proposal as part of his/her preparation for the research and thesis. This is
essential for the completion of the M.S. requirements.
Research may be in a clinical or basic area relating to temporomandibular disorders and orofacial
pain, including gross anatomy, histology, dental occlusion, neurology, psychology, muscle function,
pain control to name a few. Upon successful completion of the M.S. program, a resident should be
qualified to participate in the clinical aspects of temporomandibular disorders and orofacial pain
management, pursue an academic position and conduct independent research.
The residents also learn how to run a multidisciplinary pain practice or program and how to interact
with the various health professionals. Residents have the opportunity to follow-up their patients
throughout the three years.
Fellowship Program—1 year
The Fellowship Program is designed for the dentist interested in additional clinical training in
Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial Pain. The majority of a Fellow’s time is dedicated to
patient care in the Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep Center under the supervision of the
faculty. Fellows are required to attend department courses, seminars, literature and textbook
review, and patient conference sessions.
Mini-Residency
The Mini-Residency Program is a one day per week program for one year. The morning session is
directed toward lectures and seminars in Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial Pain. Health
care professionals are invited to lecture in different aspects of pain management each week. Case
presentations and patient interviews are also part of the program, with an hour dedicated to the
Research Club in the morning. The participants are provided with a broad view of current
approaches in the diagnosis and treatment of the orofacial pain field. The afternoon session is
directed toward patient evaluation and treatment under guidance of the Pain Center's faculty.
99
Visiting Dentist Program
The Visiting Dentist Program is customized to each individual dentist's needs. Visiting dentists will
participate in most lectures, seminars and events taking place at the Center during their visits, and
observe clinical management and treatment with the faculty and residents. Participants are
encouraged to take part in discussions and patient interviews.
Dental Distance Education-Master of Science
The Dental Distance Education (D.D.E.) Master of Science (M.S.) is a blended distance program for
practicing dentists who want to do research and expend their knowledge in the field of Craniofacial
Pain. Adhering to the same requirements and standards as the existing Master of Science, this
three year program is designed to allow dentists to obtain a Tufts M.S. degree from any location in
the world.
The Master of Science degree is a scientific research degree that does not have a clinical
component. Required courses include Epidemiology, Statistics, Review of Literature and Scientific
Writing. Participants complete a rigorous research project and research thesis. In addition there is
an extensive Continuing Education course in Craniofacial Pain—both through the distance format
and hands-on during meetings in Boston.
The program uses a combination of interactive web environment, lectures on CD and close
interaction with faculty. Participants have 8 weeks of sessions in Boston spread over the 3 year
course. Foreign students must comply with student visa regulations.
Advanced and Graduate Education Core Courses
Year 1
Advanced Head and Neck Anatomy
Behavioral Sciences: Pain Assessment and Management
Biostatistics IA: Introduction to Biostatistics
Biostatistics IB: Principles of Biostatistics
Research Methodology
Dental Pharmacology
Dental Sleep Medicine
Diagnosis and Management or Temporomandibular Disorders and Orofacial Pain
Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
Management of the Medically Compromised Dental Patient
Neuroanatomy, Neurophysiology and Neurological Evaluation of Pain
Occlusion
Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology
Successful Research Strategies
Orthopedics
Pharmacotherapeutics for Orofacial Pain and Headache
Physical Medicine for Craniofacial Pain
Year 2
Master of Science Core Courses
Biostatistics & Epidemiology II
Critical Evaluation of Scientific Literature
Scientific and Technical Writing
Departmental Courses
Behavioral Medicine
Case Presentations
Complementary and Alternative Medicine
Craniofacial Pain and Headache Board Review
Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep Center Grand Rounds
100
Craniofacial Seminar Series
Dental Sleep Medicine
Diagnostic Imaging
Headache Medicine
Literature Review
Clinical Requirements
Comprehensive Case Report (Minimum of 1 case per month)
 American Board of Orofacial Pain format
 Must include clinical pictures/radiographs/psych history
 Should be co-signed/co-authored with a Faculty member
Comprehensive Psychological Evaluation (Minimum of 1 per month)
 Dr. Kulich
 All cases must include psychological assessment
 Can be a part of #1, but has to be assessed by Dr. Kulich
Comprehensive Biobehavioral Medicine Evaluation (Minimum of 3 per year)
 Dr. Kulich
 Biofeedback evaluation and training
 Cognitive behavioral evaluation and training
Behavioral Workshop Training (Minimum of 1 complete group session)
 Dr. Kulich
 Must be documented
Neurological Examinations ( Minimum of 1 per month)
 Can be a part of #1, but has to be assessed by Dr. Spierings or Dr. Scrivani.
Orthopedic Evaluation (Minimum of 1 per month)
 Dr. Cooke
 Initial orthopedic patient evaluation
 Must be documented
Orthopedic Review
 Tuesday morning series – Dr. Cooke (see schedule)
Topic Review
 Thursday morning seminar series – Dr. Scrivani (see schedule)
Literature Review
 Thursday morning seminar series – Dr. Chandwani (see schedule)
Formal Case Presentations
 Thursday mornings seminar series – Dr. Kulich (see schedule)
MGH Grand Rounds (Mondays 12-1)
 Write up a summary report for presentation
 Should be about 1 page
 1 summary report every 4 per month (3 per year)
Postdoctoral Program Requirements
In order to complete the program and qualify for graduation, you must document the following
requirements:
1. Successful completion of all Postdoctoral core curriculum courses.
2. Successful completion of all Departmental courses.
3. Successful completion of all clinical requirements.
101
4. Successful completion of Departmental written examinations (2 per year).
5. Successful completion of Departmental oral case-based examinations (1 per year – 4-6
cases).
6. Successful completion of developing a scholarly manuscript for submission for publication
and/or presentation at Tufts University Research Day or at a national meeting. This
manuscript or presentation must be supervised by one of the faculty.
7. Satisfactory review by the Faculty–Student Evaluations every 4 months.
**You must achieve a grade of “B” (80%) or better in all courses**
Graduation Requirements
For Fellowship and Certificate programs: Completion of all required courses.
For Master of Science program: Completion of courses and a Master of Science research project
and dissertation.
Other Departmental policies
This section can include information regarding absence, vacation and any other department-specific
policies.
Attendance
Attendance for all didactic and clinical requirements is mandatory. In addition, you must be
present on-time for all required didactic and clinical activities. Tardiness is not acceptable and will
be considered an absence. If you are late without an acceptable excuse, ½ day will be subtracted
from your vacation time.
Vacation
You will receive 20 vacation days and no personal days during an academic year (July 1 through
May 30th). Any personal or sick days out of the Center will be subtracted from your 20 vacation
days. If you have used up all the 20 vacation/personal/sick days and you have a medical or
personal event for which you need to take off, you can take up to 4 days more. You will be
required to make up these allowable 4 days at the end of the year. Under any circumstances, if
you end up taking more time off than 24 working days, you may have to repeat a semester at your
expense.
You will need to coordinate your vacation days with your fellow postdoctoral students so that the
clinic is properly staffed. You must fill out a “Vacation Request Form” and have the time out
approved by Dr. Mehta or Scrivani. Once approved, your vacation time must also be registered
with Dr. Dhadwal .
Sick/Personal Time
If you will be out of the Center for a personal or sick day you must notify Drs. Chandwani, Scrivani
or Mehta as soon as possible. If you are unable to reach any of the above, please leave a message
with the answering service.
Dr. Scrivani – 203-218-9509
Dr. Mehta – 781-704-5849
Answering Service – 617-636-6817
Clinical Attire
You are required to abide by the general policy of the School of Dental Medicine regarding proper
professional attire. You must also abide by the Infection Control Policy of the School of Dental
Medicine when treating patients in the patient care areas of the Craniofacial Pain, Headache and
Sleep Center.
Departmental Research and Publications
Sponsored Research
102


The Effectiveness of Pulsed Radio Frequency Current on Knee Pain; Energex Systems, 2006
Effectiveness and Safety of Over The Counter Night Guard Bruxguard for Dental Concepts,
2005
 The Effectiveness of Orthosonix Energex Device on TMD Pain and ROM, Orthosonix
Inc., 2001
 The Effect of Topical Theraflex® on TMJ and Masseter Pain, NABOB Rx, 2001
 Clinical Protocol to Compare the Effectiveness of Dental Bleaching Agents, 3M
Corporation, 2000
 Effect of Resistance Exercise System on Stomatognathic Myofascial and Cervicospinal
Muscle Pain Associated with TMDS, Tasmark Inc., 2000
Textbook
Mehta NR., Maloney G, Bana D, and Scrivani, S. Head, Face, and Neck Pain. In publication Wiley
Press 2008
Chapters in Major Textbooks
Mehta N, Scrivani SJ, Maciewicz R: “Dental and Facial Pain” In Benson HT, Rathmell JP, Wu CL,
Turk DC, Argoff CE (eds.): Raj’s Practical Management of Pain, 4th ed., Elsevier, Philadelphia, PA.,
2007
Mehta N, Maloney GE, Bana D, Scrivani SJ, Kulich R, Maciewicz R: “An Integrative Approach to the
Diagnosis and Treatment of Head, Face and Neck Pain” In Mehta N, Maloney GE, Bana D, Scrivani
SJ (eds): Head, Face and Neck Pain: Science, Evaluation and Management. 1st ed., John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., Hoboken, NJ, 2008 (in press)
Scrivani SJ, Mehta NR, Keith DA, Stiles A, Maciewicz RJ, Kulich RJ: “Facial Pain” In Ballantyne JC,
Rathmell JP, Fishman SM (eds.): Bonica’s Management of Pain, 4th Edition, Lippincott Williams &
Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA., 2008 (in press)
Scrivaini S, Mehta. NR, Keith D et al; Chapter of “Orofacial Pain” in Bonica Textbook of Pain 2008
Mehta NR, Scrivani S: “Temporomandibular Disorders” Chapter in Raj Textbook of Pain 2008
Mehta NR: Chapter on “Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint: Internal Derangement” in Merck
Manual 2008 in publication
Mehta NR; Chapter on “Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint: Internal Joint Derangement” in
Merck Manual, March 2003
Web Based
Temporomandibular Disorders: Google Knol 2008
Tooth Pain: Google Knol 2008
Bruxism: Google Knol 2008
Dental Mouth Guards: Google Knol 2008
Journals
Mehta NR: Chapter on “Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint: Internal Derangement” in Merck
Manual 2008 (in press)
Mehta N, Abdallah A, Lobo Lobo S, Ceneviz C, Correa L.: “Three-Dimensional Assessment of Dental
Occlusion (Occlusal Fencing): A Clinical Technique” Inside Dentistry; 2006 p. 2-5
Mehta N, Maloney GE, Bana D, Scrivani SJ (eds): Head, Face and Neck Pain: Science, Evaluation
and Management – An Interdisciplinary Approach. 1st ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, NJ,
2009 (in press).
Mehta N, Scrivani SJ, Maciewicz R: Dental and Facial Pain. In Benson HT, Rathmell JP, Wu CL, Turk
DC, Argoff CE (eds.): Raj’s Practical Management of Pain, 4th ed., Elsevier, Philadelphia, PA., 505527, 2008.
103
Mehta N, Scrivani SJ: An Integrative Approach to the Diagnosis and Treatment of Head, Face and
Neck Pain. In Mehta N, Maloney GE, Bana D, Scrivani SJ (eds): Head, Face and Neck Pain: Science,
Evaluation and Management. 1st ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, NJ, 2009
(in press).
Ceneviz, C., Mehta, N., Forgione, A., Abdallah, E., Lobo-lobo, S., Mavroudi, S.: “The Immediate
Effect of Changing Mandibular Position on the EMG Activity of the Masseter Temporalis
,Sternomastoid and Trapezius Muscles” Cranio October 2006, Vol 24., No. 4237-244
Zawawi KH, Al-Badawi EA, Lobo SL, Melis M, Mehta NR.: “An Index for the Measurement of Normal
Maximum Mouth Opening” Journal Canadian Dental Association, pp. 737-741, Vol. 69 Issue 11,
December 2003
Melis M, Lobo SL, Ceneviz C., Zawawi K., Al-Badawi E, Maloney G, Mehta N.: “Atypical Odontalgia:
A Review of the Literature” Headache, pp. 1060-1074, Vol. 10 Issue 10, Nov-Dec 2003
Scrivani SJ, Mehta NR, Keith DA, Stiles A, Maciewicz RJ, Kulich RJ: Facial Pain. In
Ballantyne JC, Rathmell JP, Fishman SM (eds.): Bonica’s Management of Pain, 4 th Edition,
Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA., 2009 (in press).
Scrivani SJ, Mehta NR, McGeeney B: Headache and Craniofacial Pain. In Carr D, McNicol E (eds.):
The Busy Clinician’s Guide to Pain. International Association for the Study of Pain, IASP Press,
Seattle, Washington, 2009 (in press).
Chandwani B, Maloney GE, Mehta NR, Scrivani SJ: Chronic Daily Headache: Case Report of One
Subgroup. J Mass Dent Soc. 56:20-23, 2007.
Borsook D, Moulton E, Pendse G, Morris S, Cole S, Aiello-Lammens M, Scrivani S Becerra LR:
Comparison of Evoked verses Spontaneous Tics in patients with trigeminal neuralgia (Tic
Doloreaux). J Molecular Pain, 3:34, November 6, 2007.
Chandwani B, Kulich RJ, Andrew L, Scrivani SJ: Tapering Chronic Opioid Therapy in Chronic
Neuropathic Facial Pain – An Interdisciplinary Approach: Case Report. J Opioid Therapy. 4:167173, 2008.
Scrivani SJ, Keith DA, Kaban LB: Temporomandibular Disorders – Medical Progress. New England J
Med, 359:2693-2705, December 18, 2008.
Scrivani SJ, Chandwani B, Keith DA, Kahn M, Heilman C: Woman with Severe Facial Pain –
Clinicopathological Conference. Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Path Oral Rad Endo, 107:151-156, 2008.
Scrivani SJ, Kulich RJ, Maciewicz RJ: Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging (fMRI), Expert
Testimony and Pain: Role in the Courts? Pain Medicine, 10:373-380, 2009.
Scrivani SJ, Cole S, Wallin D, Moulton EA, Wasan AJ, Lockerman L, Bajwa Z, Becerra L, Borsook D:
fMRI Evaluation of Lamotrigine on Trigeminal Neuropathic Pain: Pilot Study. Pain Medicine. 2009.
Chandwani B, Ceneviz C, Scrivani SJ, Mehta NR: Incidence of Bruxism in a Temporomandibular
Disorders Population. General Dentistry, 2009 (submitted).
Chandwani B, Kulich RJ, Mehta NR, Scrivani SJ: Smoking Cessation in the Dental Setting – A
Practical Approach. J Dental Education, 2009 (submitted).
Lobo-Lobo S, Chandwani B, Kulich RJ, Mehta NR, Scrivani SJ: A model for the management of comorbid sleep disorders with orofacial pain. Clin J Pain. 2009 (submitted).
104
Rochman D, Ray S, Kulich RJ, Mehta N., Driscoll S. Validity and utility of the Canadian
Occupational Performance Measure in a craniofacial pain center. Occupational Therapy Journal of
Research, 28, 1, 2009.
Kulich RJ, Mehta N, Mathews E, Scrivani. Persistent facial pain: Recollections from antiquity
through the present. Headache, the Journal of Head and Face Pain. (in press)
Kulich RJ. Behavioral and psychological aspects of pain, Chap11 In Abdi, S, Chopra P, Smith H.
Specialty Pain Medicine Board Review. McGraw-Hill (in press).
Rochman D L., Ray S. A., Kulich R.J., Mehta N.R., Driscoll S.: “Validity and Utility of the Canadian
Occupational Performance Measure as an Outcome Measure in a Craniofacial Pain Center”: OTJR
Occupation Participation and Health. Vol 28, No. 1 p. 4-11 Winter 2008
Mehta N, Abdallah A, Lobo Lobo S, Ceneviz C, Correa L.: “Three-Dimensional Assessment of Dental
Occlusion (Occlusal Fencing): A Clinical Technique” Inside Dentistry; 2006 p. 2-5
Sakaguchi K, Mehta, N., Abdallah E, Forgione, A., Hirayama H., Kawasaki, T., Yokoyama, A.:
“Examination of the Relationship between Mandibular Position and Body Posture” Cranio October
2007 Vol 25. No. 4.237 - 249
Chandwani B, Maloney GE, Mehta NR, Scrivani SJ: “Chronic Daily Headache: Case Report of One
Subgroup” J Mass Dent Soc. 56:20-23, 2007
Scrivani SJ, Lobo-Lobo S, Chandwani B, Kulich RJ, Mehta NR: “Assessment of Sleep Disorders in
Patients with Chronic Orofacial Pain” Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Path Oral Rad. 103 (6), 795, June
2007 (Abstract)
Scrivani SJ, Kulich RJ, Bindayel N, Chandwani B, Mehta NR: “Neuropathic Pain Scale Base Rates in
Orofacial Pain Population” Oral Surg Oral Med Oral Path Oral Rad. 103 (6), 795, June 2007
(Abstract)
Scrivani SJ, Lobo-Lobo S, Chandwani B, Kulich RJ, Mehta NR: “Assessment of Sleep Disorders in
Patients with Chronic Orofacial Pain” Bates-Andrews Day Research Journal, Tufts University School
of Dental Medicine, 60, 2007 (Abstract)
Chandwani B, Ceneviz C, Scrivani SJ, Mehta N: “Bruxism and Temporomandibular Disorders – A
Strong Link” Bates-Andrews Day Research Journal, Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, 6061, 2007 (Abstract)
Chandwani B, Maloney G, Mehta N. Scrivani SJ: “Case Series: Phantom Tooth Pain” Bates-Andrews
Day Research Journal, Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, 61, 2007 (Abstract)
Scrivani SJ, Kulich RJ, Bindayel N, Chandwani B, Mehta NR: “Neuropathic Pain Scale Base Rates in
Orofacial Pain Population” Bates-Andrews Day Research Journal, Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine, 63-64, 2007 (Abstract)
Chandwani B, Ceneviz C, Scrivani SJ, Mehta NR: “Bruxism: High Incidence but Low Self-Reporting”
Cranio, 2007 (in press)
Ceneviz, C., Mehta, N., Forgione, A., Abdallah, E., Lobo-lobo, S., Mavroudi, S.: “The Immediate
Effect of Changing Mandibular Position on the EMG Activity of the Masseter Temporalis,
Sternomastoid and Trapezius Muscles” Cranio October 2006, Vol 24., No. 4237-244
Kulich RJ, Driscoll S, Scrivani SJ, McAlary P, Mehta N: “A Survey of Medico-Legal Practices Among
Pain Specialists” Pain Medicine 5(1):98-103, 2004.
Scrivani SJ, Mehta N, Mathews ES, Maciewicz R: “Clinical Criteria for Trigeminal Neuralgia” Letter to
the Editor. Oral Surg, Oral Med, Oral Path. 97:544-555, 2004
105
Kulich RJ, Driscoll S, Scrivani SJ, McAlary P, Mehta N: “A Survey of Medico-Legal Practices Among
Pain Specialists” Pain Medicine 5(1):98-103, 2004
Scrivani SJ, Mehta N, Mathews ES, Maciewicz R: “Clinical Criteria for Trigeminal Neuralgia” Letter to
the Editor. Oral Surg, Oral Med, Oral Path. 97:544-555, 2004
Al-Badawi EA, Mehta N., Forgione AG, Lobo SL, Zawawi KH.: “Efficacy of Pulsed Radio Frequency
Energy Therapy in Temporomandibular Joint Pain and Dysfunction” The Journal of Cranio, pp. 1020, Vol. 1, January 2004
Kulich RJ, Dyer J, Driscoll S, Mehta N. “Managing Pain for the Elderly” J. Mass Dental Society, pp.
75-80, Vol. 52, Issue 1, Spring 2003
Kulich RJ, Driscoll J, Prescott JC Jr, Pelletier NJ, Driscoll S, Cooke W, Correa L, Mehta NR. “The
Daubert Standard, a Primer for Pain Specialists” Pain Med. Pp. 75-80, Vol. 4, Issue 1, March 2003
Chakfa AM, Mehta NR, Forgione AG, Al-Badawi EA, Lobo SL, Zawawi KH.: “The Effect of Stepwise
Increases in Vertical Dimension of Occlusion on Isometric Strength of Cervical Flexors and Deltoid
Muscles in Nonsymptomatic Females” The Journal of Cranio, pp. 264-273, Vol. 20 Issue 4, October
2002
Melis M, Zawawi K, Al-Badawi E, Lobo Lobo S, Mehta N.: “Complex Regional Pain Syndrome in the
Head and Neck: A Review of the Literature” J. of Orofacial Pain, pp. 93-104, Vol. 16 Issue 2 Spring
2002
Kulich RJ, Kreis PG, Fishman SM, Prescott JC, Pelletier MJ, Bennett P, Mehta NR. “Forensic Issues in
Pain, Review of Current Practice” Pain Practice p. 119-135, Volume 1, Issue 2 2001
Kulich, R., Kay, E., Gibbons, M., Mehta, N.: “Treating the Injured Worker: Incentives to Reduce
Care” American Pain Society Bulletin, pp. 7-9, Vol. 11, Number 1, January-February 2001
Pradham, N., White, G., Mehta, N., Forgione, A.: “Mandibular Deviations in TMD and non-TMD
groups Related to Eye Dominance and Head Posture” The Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry, pp.
147-155, Vol. 25, Number 2, 2000
Mehta, N., Forgione A., Maloney G., and Greene R.: “Different Effects of Nocturnal Parafunction on
the Masticatory System: The Weak Link Theory” The Journal of Cranio, pp. 280-285, Vol. 18,
Number 4, October 2000
Abstracts/Graduate Advisory Abstracts
Mehta N.R., Forgione A.G., and Correa L.P.: “Pain Ratings of 200 Treated TMDs Patients” Presented
at the Annual IADR Meeting in Hawaii, March 2004 Abstract #1191
*Driscoll S.E., Kulich R., and Mehta N.: “The Efficacy of Meditation Based Stress Reduction for TMD
Symptoms” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in Hawaii, March 2004
Hayes C., Chew P., Antczak-Bouckoms A., White B.A., Mehta N.R. and Lau J.: “Variation of Surgical
Procedures for TMD: Analysis of Utilization Patterns” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in
Hawaii, March 2004.
Chew P., Hayes C., Antczak-Bouckoms A., Mehta N.R., White B.A. and Lau J.: “Using Hospital
Databases to Examine TMD Utilization Patterns: Methodological Issues” Presented at the Annual
IADR Meeting in Hawaii, March 2004
Montine R., Hayes C., Antczak-Bouckoms A., Mehta N.: “Systematic Review of Arthroscopic TM
Dysfunction” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in San Antonio, Texas, March 2003
106
Saposnik M., Hayes C., Antczak-Bouckoms A., Mehta N., Lau J,: “Systematic Review of Surgical
Treatment of Temporomandibular Joint Dysfunction” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in San
Antonio, Texas, March 2003
Robinson M., Hayes C., Antczak-Bouckoms A., Mehta N., Lau J.: “Systematic Review of NonSurgical treatments to TM Disorder” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in San Antonio, Texas,
March 2003
Al-Muhanna M., Mehta N.R., Forgione A.G., Al-Badawi E.A., Zawawi K.H.: “Effect of Splint Design
on Head Posture and Cervical Symptoms” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in San Diego,
California, March 8, 2002. Abstract #2336
Driscoll S., Kulich RJ, Mehta N.: “Prevalence of TMJ Symptoms Within a Population of General
Stress Management Referral” Presented at the International Association for the Study of Pain in
San Diego, California, 2002
Kulich RJ, McAlary P, Driscoll S, Mehta N.: “Forensic Practice by Pain Specialists, A Survey of
Current Practice Patterns and Review of the Current Standard of Care” Presented at the
International Association for the Study of Pain in San Diego, California, 2002
*Alghamdi J., Mehta N. (presenter) and Forgoine A.: “The Effectiveness of Multi-faceted Treatment
of TMDs:
500 Patients Drawn from a Pool of 5,000” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in Chicago, March
2001
*Alghamdi J., Mehta N., and Forgione A.: “Relationship between TMDs Pain, Somatization, Anxiety,
Depression and SF-36 Scores” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in Chicago, March 2001
*Shata R., Mehta N., and Forgione A.: “Active Resistance Exercise for TMD Related Tension Pain”
Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in Washington, April 2000. Journal of Dental Research, Vol.
, Abstr.#
Brandman D., Mehta N., and Forgione A.: “Coping Strategies, SF-36, SCL-90 in Mild and Severe
TMD Pain.” Presented at the Annual IADR Meeting in Washington, April 2000. Journal of Dental
Research, Vol. , Abst.#
107
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN ENDODONTICS
Program Information
The Advanced Education Program in Endodontics has as its goals: to prepare the student for
eligibility for the American Board of Endodontics, to prepare the student to be a competent
professional clinician who has an in depth understanding of the science and practice of
endodontics, to prepare the student for teaching and for the evaluation of the endodontic
literature. Service in organized dental activities, emergency care and volunteer teaching is
fostered with patient-centered education and a commitment to excellence.
Our curriculum, which provides excellent clinical training, integrates the health sciences with
clinical experience and utilizes modern technology. Our success is based on maintaining a strong
faculty and staff, supported in their commitment to teaching, on-going development, research, and
student service.
Department Administration
Dr. Daniel B. Green
Professor and Chairman
(617) 636-6797
[email protected]
Ms. Patricia Morrow
Department Administrator
(617) 636-6796
[email protected]
Mrs. Jennifer Mulligan
Secretary
(617) 636-3765
[email protected]
Program Faculty
Professor
Daniel B. Green, D.D.S.
Dr. Green is a Professor and Chairman of the Department of Endodontics. He attended the
University of Cincinnati, received a D.D.S. from the University of Pennsylvania and a Certificate in
Endodontics in 1961 from Albert Einstein, Philadelphia. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Robert B. Amato, D.M.D.
Dr. Amato is a Professor of Endodontics and Director of Postgraduate Endodontics. He attended
Rutgers University, received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also
Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 1983. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Charles Rankin, D.M.D
Dr. Charles Rankin is a Professor of Endodontics and Director of Predoctoral Endodontics. He
attended Salem State College, received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
and also a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 1986. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Clinical Professor
Thomas F. Winkler III, D.M.D.
108
Dr. Winkler is a Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Tufts University, received a D.M.D.
from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and a Certificate in Endodontics and M.S.D. from
the VA Hospital and Indiana University in 1970. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Vangel R. Zissi, D.M.D.
Dr. Zissi is a Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended the University of New Hampshire,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 1967. He is certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
Associate Professor
Virginia Karapanou, D.M.D., M.S.
Dr. Karapanou is an Associate Professor of Endodontics. She received a D.D.S. from Aristotelion
University (Greece), she attended Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and received a
Certificate in Endodontics in 1994, a D.M.D. in 2001 and a Master of Science in 2007. She is
certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
Associate Clinical Professor
Ayman Aboushala, D.M.D., M.S.
Dr. Aboushala is an Associate Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He received a D.D.S. from Baath
University (Syria). He attended Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and received a Master
of Science degree in 1996, a Certificate in Endodontics in 2004 and a D.M.D. in 2006. He is board
eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Elliot Goldberg, D.D.S.
Dr. Goldberg is an Associate Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Brandeis University,
received a D.D.S. from Northwestern and a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts University School
of Dental Medicine in 1976. He is educationally qualified for the American Board of Endodontics.
Leslie Miller, D.D.S.
Dr. Miller is an Associate Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Syracuse
University, received a D.D.S. from Temple University and a Certificate in Endodontics from Harvard
University in 1974. He is certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
Jan Rozen, D.D.S.
Dr. Rozen is an Associate Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended the University of Illinois,
received a D.D.S. from Loyola and a Certificate in Endodontics from Boston University in 1970. He
is certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
Assistant Professor
Addy Alt-Holland, Ph.D.
Dr. Alt-Holland is an Assistant Professor of Endodontics. She attended Bar-Ilan University,
received a Master of Science degree and a Ph.D. from Bar Ilan University.
Assistant Clinical Professor
Bella Batsevitsky, D.M.D.
Dr. Batsevitsky is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Forsyth at
Massachusetts College of Pharmacy & Healthy Sciences, received a D.M.D. from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 2011. She is board
eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Brooke Blicher, D.M.D.
109
Dr. Blicher is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Colgate University,
received a D.M.D. from Harvard University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 2009. She is board eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Philip Cabrera, D.M.D.
Dr. Cabrera is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Memorial University of
Newfoundland, received a D.D.S. from Dalhousie University and a Certificate in Endodontics from
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine in 1993. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Steven Corliss, D.M.D.
Dr. Corliss is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Boston College, received
a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from
Tufts in 1990. He is certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
Natalie Delivanis, D.M.D.
Dr. Delivanis is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attdended Mestovio National
Technical University, received a D.M.D. from National and Kapodistrian University and a Certificate
in Endodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine in 2011. She is board eligible for
the American Board of Endodontics.
Kelsey Evelyn, D.M.D.
Dr. Evelyn is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended the University of
Michigan, received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate
in Endodontics from Tufts in 2007. She is board eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Elina Fooks, D.M.D.
Dr. Fooks is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Brandeis University,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 2003. She is board eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Maryanne Irwin, D.M.D.
Dr. Irwin is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Boston College, received a
D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from
Tufts in 2008. She is educationally qualified for the American Board of Endodontics.
Jitka Janicek, D.M.D.
Dr. Janicek is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Palacky University,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 1989. She is educationally qualified for the American Board of
Endodontics.
Michael Joseph, D.M.D.
Dr. Joseph is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended the University of
Pennsylvania, received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a
Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 2006. He is board certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Steven Kaminsky, D.M.D.
Dr. Kaminsky is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Brandeis University,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 1979. He is educationally qualified for the American Board of
Endodontics.
Arnold Maloff, D.M.D.
Dr. Maloff is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended the University of
Pittsburgh, received a D.M.D. from the University of Pennsylvania and a Certificate in Endodontics
110
from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine in 1980. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Charles Millstein, D.M.D.
Dr. Millstein is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Brandeis University,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, a Certificate in Endodontics
from the University of Pennsylvania in 1967 and a M.P.H. from Harvard University in 1980. He is
educationally qualified for the American Board of Endodontics.
Douglas Moll, D.M.D.
Dr. Moll is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Tufts University, received a
D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from
Tufts in 1991. He is certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
Gregory Odierna, D.M.D.
Dr. Odierna is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended College of the Holy
Cross, received a D.M.D. from Harvard University School of Dental Medicine, and a Certificate in
Endodontics from the University of California at Los Angeles in 2000. He is educationally qualified
for the American Board of Endodontics.
Christina Pastan, D.M.D.
Dr. Pastan is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Wheaton College,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 1994. She is educationally qualified for the American Board of
Endodontics.
Shawn Record, D.M.D.
Dr. Record is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended the University of Florida
at Gainesville, received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, and a Certificate
in Endodontics from Tufts in 1993. He is educationally qualified for the American Board of
Endodontics.
Craig Saltzman, D.M.D.
Dr. Saltzman is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended State University of New
York, Geneso, received a D.M.D. from Boston University Goldman School of Dental Medicine, a
Certificate in Endodontics and a Masters Degree in Oral Science from University of Buffalo in 1999.
He is educationally qualified for the American Board of Endodontics.
Steven Saunders, D.M.D.
Dr. Saunders is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Boston College,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, a Certificate in Public Health
and a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 1980. He is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
H. Randolph Scott, D.D.S.
Dr. Scott is a Clinical Instructor of Endodontics. He attended the Morehouse College, received a
D.D.S. from Meharry Medical College and also a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine in 2009. He is board eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Eric Shapiro, D.D.S.
Dr. Shapiro is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Suny at Buffalo, received
a D.D.S. from Suny at Buffalo School of Dental Medicine, and a Certificate in Endodontics from
Suny at Stony Brook in 2004. He is educationally qualified for the American Board of Endodontics.
David Singer, D.M.D.
Dr. Singer is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. He attended Hobart College, received a
D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from
Tufts in 2000. He is certified by the American Board of Endodontics.
111
Ronit Smolyar, D.M.D.
Dr. Smolyar is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Semmelwise University
(Hungary) where she received a D.M.D. She received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 2002. She is certified by the
American Board of Endodontics.
Raina Trilokekar, D.M.D.
Dr. Trilokekar is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Nair Dental College
where she received a B.D.S. and an M.D.S. She received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts in 1988. She is certified by the
American Board of Endodontics.
Deborah Tung, D.M.D.
Dr. Tung is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Wellesley College,
received a D.M.D. from the University of Pennsylvania and a Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine in 1997. She is certified by the American Board of
Endodontics.
Emina Zaganjori, D.M.D.
Dr. Zaganjori is an Assistant Clinical Professor of Endodontics. She attended Tufts University,
received a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in
Endodontics from Tufts in 2005. She is board eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Clinical Instructor
Elizabeth Jones, D.M.D.
Dr. Jones is a Clinical Instructor of Endodontics. She attended Providence College, received a
D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and also a Certificate in Endodontics from
Tufts in 2012. She is board eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Andrea Shah, D.M.D.
Dr. Shah is a Clinical Instructor of Endodontics. She attended California Polytechnic State
University and received a D.M.D. from Harvard University School of Dental Medicine, and a
Certificate in Endodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine in 2012. She is board
eligible for the American Board of Endodontics.
Coursework
Interdepartmental Courses
Biomedical Sciences
Biostatistics 1A Introduction
Head and Neck Anatomy–lecture
Immunology
Management of the Medically Compromised Dental Patient
Epidemiology and Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
Clinicopathologic Conferences in Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology
Microbiology or Oral Infections
Bone Biology
Oral Microbiology
Biostatistics 1B Principles of Biostatistics
Implant Dentistry
Cellular and Molecular Biology
Clinical Sciences
112
Dental Pharmacology
Infection Control
Interdepartmental Case Presentation/Treatment Planning Seminar
Medical Emergencies
Oral and Maxillofacial Radiology
Orofacial Pain
Practice Management
Endodontic Clinical Case Review Seminar
Endodontic Literature Review
Principles and Guidelines in Research Involving Human Subjects
Clinical Instruction
Clinical and Educational instruction is provided by the entirety of the Department.
Expectations
1. All students are expected to be in attendance at all required courses.
2. Each course director may choose the method for evaluation.
3. Each spring semester you will be examined utilizing the following methods:
a. Written examination to assess accumulation of knowledge. This will be in essay
form.
b. Oral Examination utilizing a format similar to that used by the American Board of
Endodontics (ABE).
c. Presentation of cases in the American Board of Endodontics (ABE) format.
Endodontic Case Review
On a rotational basis, each week one postgraduate endodontic student will present all of his/her
cases to faculty and fellow students. The format will utilize slide and/or power point projection.
Each case should precipitate discussion. You will be evaluated on these cases and your
presentation.
The format will parallel the information requested for case presentation to the American Board of
Endodontics to qualify for oral examination. This format is available on disc from the American
Board of Endodontics.
Literature Review
On a rotational basis, each student, working with the director, is responsible for the assembly and
organization of the literature review by subject.
The procedure is as follows:
1. Review with the Director the previous bibliography to determine which articles are to be
selected.
2. Conduct a computer assisted library search using “key words”, “usual journals” to develop
an updated bibliography. These articles are to be reviewed by the Director to determine
which should be added to the current review.
3. Develop a new bibliography and assign on a rotational basis, articles to be assigned for
purposes of abstract. Thus, each article will be abstracted and these abstracts will be
organized with the assigned literature review.
4. The student assembling the review will generate objectives which will be discussed,
embellished and increased during the actual session.
113
5. All of the articles will be photocopied for each student by our copy center. One copy
remains on file and two additional copies are generated for the Director. See Pat Morrow for
details (budget code).
6. This entire document will be placed in a binder: a. Bibliography,
b. Objectives, c. Abstracts and d. Original articles and placed in the endodontic library.
Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar
Second year postgraduate student will choose a topic to be presented to the Interdisciplinary
Treatment Planning Seminar. This is done in lieu of case presentation in order to instruct the other
postgraduate students. The procedure is as follows:






Review with the Director the previous bibliography to determine which articles are to be
selected.
Conduct a computer assisted library search using “key words” “usual journals” to develop an
updated bibliography. These articles are to be reviewed by the Director to determine which
should be added to the current review.
Develop a new bibliography and assign on a rotational basis, articles to be assigned for
purposes of abstract. Thus, each article will be abstracted and these abstracts will be
organized with the assigned literature review.
The student assembling the review will generate objectives which will be discussed,
embellished and increased during the actual session.
All of the articles will be photocopied for each student by our copy center. One copy remains
on file and two additional copies are generated for the Director. See Pat Morrow for details
(budget code).
The entire document will be placed in a binder: A. Bibliography; B. Objectives; C. Abstracts
and D. Original Articles, and placed in the Endodontic Library.
Lecturing Assignments
Each second year student will be assigned 30 minutes of lecture material to be delivered to second
year predoctoral dental students during their preclinical course. The lecture will be developed
using Power Point graphics and will be stored on the Tufts Web Site for student review.
Second year postgraduate students will choose a topic to be presented to the Interdisciplinary
Treatment Planning Seminar. This is done in lieu of case presentation in order to instruct the other
postgraduate students.
Schedules
Clinic Schedule
Each student will present a monthly schedule to the appointment desk, one month in advance,
listing available clinic time for appointment scheduling. This is imperative in order to receive
patients for treatment. All patient appointments will be confirmed the day prior by telephone by
you.
In the beginning, for six weeks, only one appointment per clinic period will be scheduled after
which all appointments will be scheduled for 1½ hours or less.
The clinic clerk will receive a transfer referral form from undergraduate referrals to be retained in
our clinic. Information for outside referrals to include: referring dentist’s name and telephone
number, patient’s name and telephone number, tooth number to be treated and insurance carrier.
Those insured by Massachusetts Health Plan (Medicaid) must be preauthorized. In order to file for
preauthorization, the dentist must submit a full mouth series of radiographs.
Teaching Schedule in the undergraduate dental clinic
114
All students, as part of their program, are scheduled for a teaching assignment in the
undergraduate dental clinic. The schedule is devised on a rotational basis and you are advised to
be on time in order to assist the students for signatures permitting distribution of equipment,
anesthesia and x-rays.
Evening Clinic
All students are assigned to evening (4:30-7:30) clinic on a rotational basis. You may, however,
trade assignments but you must notify the staff assistant, Ms. Patricia Morrow. Each student, at
present, is paid for this service. All dental students must have completed their clinic activities by
6:45 in order to have time to record their activities. No dental student shall remain in the
clinic unsupervised.
Emergency Rotation
One student is assigned per week to the emergency rotation. Your duties are as follows:
1.
Assist in the diagnosis, treatment and instruction of all tooth related pain and to diagnose
orofacial pain.
2.
If the case is determined to be beyond the capabilities of the attending predoctoral dental
student you are advised to take over the case for emergency care only.
Vacation Policy/Absence Policy
The University and Tufts University School of Dental Medicine schedules closure of the clinics in
August and reopening after Labor Day, a spring break for predoctoral and one for postdoctoral
students. The school clinics are closed on such days as: President’s Day, Martin Luther King Day,
Columbus Day, and Patriot’s Day. In addition, clinics are closed over the Christmas-New Year
winter holiday.
Any other request for absence must be discussed with and approved by the director. Also, a form
must be completed stating that all of your assignments have been covered and that course
directors of other biomedical and clinical courses have approved your absence.
Our postgraduate clinic will be closed during the American Association of Endodontists Meeting and
you are strongly encouraged to attend.
School’s Instrument Rental Policy
Specifically, these rented instruments must be accounted for at receipt and at return. You must
present your I.D. card and an encounter form in order to receive instruments. These instruments
must be returned before 12:00 noon of the next day or you will be assessed $50.00. You will be
charged for missing instruments.
The Endodontics Department follows the guidelines for clinic operation set forth by the School of
Dental Medicine, the Infection Control Committee, OSHA requirements and HIPAA policies (Health
Insurance Portability and Accountability Act). Infection Control Manual available upon request.
Moonlighting
Private practice during evenings, weekends and holidays is permitted providing:
1.
That you are responsible to be in school during clinic hours (leaving early is discouraged).
2.
That your performance is not negatively affected.
3.
That you act independent of the university (licensed, insured for malpractice).
4.
That you or your employer does not misrepresent by referring to you as a certified
endodontist. Other terms inappropriately used by employers are also discouraged, i.e. “our
endodontist”, “our specialist”.
115
Department of Public Health
Advanced Education Program in General Practice Residency in
Dentistry
The Tufts University General Practice Residency Program (GPR) was founded in 1976. It is
conducted with the cooperation and participation of its sponsoring institution, Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine (TUSDM), Tufts Dental Facilities (TDF), and Tufts Medical Center (TMC).
There are currently four resident positions in the PGY 1 program and one resident position in the
PGY 2 program and one fellowship position in the PGY 3 program.
Rotation participation provides the residents with diverse clinical and educational experiences. At
the TDF clinics in outlying suburban areas, residents receive training in the diagnosis and treatment
of oral disease, with an emphasis on prevention and restoration, for patients with multiple
disabilities and limitations. Through TDF, the residents also participate in the largest OR dental
rehabilitation program for special needs patients in the country. The clinical rotation at TUSDM
emphasizes crown and bridge, restorations, and treatment of the general population with complex
dental needs. At TMC, the residents receive training in emergency care. The residency program
also has an anesthesia rotation at Franciscan Children’s Hospital, and an Emergency Medicine
rotation at TMC. Specialty clinical and seminar rotations provide the residents advanced training in
history and physical diagnosis, conscious and IV sedation, periodontal surgery, endodontic therapy,
oral surgery, TMD, implantology, and practice management.
Completion of the Tufts GPR Program will prepare the graduate to:
 Act as a primary care provider for individuals and groups of patients. This includes the
planning, coordination and provision of multidisciplinary comprehensive oral health care for
a wide variety of patients, including patients with special needs.
 Apply the exposure to advanced dental treatment modalities provided during the residency
training to the practice of dentistry.
 Have a working knowledge of mental retardation, mental illness, and physical disabilities
and the impact these conditions have on the provision of comprehensive dental care.
 Function effectively within the hospital and other health care environments. This includes
the ability to provide general dentistry services for a patient who has been placed under
general anesthesia.
 Function effectively as a member of an interdisciplinary health care team.
 To provide emergency oral health care.
 To promote disease prevention and oral health promotion for patient in the clinical
environment as well as the community.
 Manage the delivery of oral health care by applying concepts of patient and practice
management. This includes anxiety and pain control management, patient consent, staffing
coordination, for the provision of care to the general population as well as the special needs
population.
 To understand the fundamentals of quality care and the concept of quality assurance.
 Apply scientific principles to learning and oral health care. This includes using
comprehensive literature review, critical thinking, evidence or outcomes-based clinical
decision-making and technology-based information retrieval systems.
 Utilize the values of professional ethics, patient’s rights, lifelong learning, patient centered
care, adaptability, and acceptance of cultural diversity in professional practice.
Department Administration
Department of Public Health
Interim Department Chair: Noshir Mehta, D.M.D., MSc.
Division Head for Special Care: Darren Drag, D.M.D.
Office: 781-899-6020
116
GPR Program Director: Gina M. Terenzi, D.M.D.
Office: 617-636-6816
Fax: 617-636-3888
GPR Administrative Assistant: Elizabeth Costa
Office: 617-636-2163
Program Faculty
Full and Part-time Faculty with Administrative, Academic and Clinical responsibilities
within the General Practice Residency.
Dr. Gina Terenzi, Program Director, Associate Professor, holds a B.A. in Biology and D.M.D.
from Boston University. She received certification in General Practice Residency from St. Francis
Hospital and Medical Center in Hartford, CT and Certification for Chief in General Practice Residency
from Carolinas Medical Center in North Carolina.
Faculty
The following Faculty enjoy clinical responsibilities for the General Practice Residency Program.
Hana Sadi, B.D.S.
Jennifer Rubel, D.M.D.
Laila Von Andrian, D.M.D.
Richard Miller, D.M.D.
Joel Perlman, D.M.D.
Andre St. Germain, D.M.D
Darren Drag, D.M.D.
Paola Pabon, D.M.D.
Kallen Hull, D.M.D.
Anastacia Foufas, D.M.D.
Thomas Bjornson, D.M.D.
Joseph O’Donnell, D.D.S.
Gary Warrington, D.M.D.
Robert Kaplan, D.M.D.
Alan Pan, D.M.D.
John Morgan, D.D.S.
Karen Chang, D.M.D.
Robert Mandell, D.M.D.
Morton Rosenberg, D.M.D.
Coursework
Interdepartmental Courses
Formal Courses for the GPR include:
History and Physical Diagnosis
Course Director, Dr. Elisabeth Wilder
Nitrous Oxide Certification
Course Director, Dr. Morton Rosenberg
Advanced Cardiac Life Support Certification
Tufts Medical Center
Clinical Research Studies
Departmental Courses
Periodontal Seminar Program
The goals and objectives of this curriculum are to allow the resident to:
 Diagnose and treatment plan periodontal status.
 Perform initial therapy for periodontal oral care.
 Re-evaluate periodontal health for surgical therapy.
 Analyze critically periodontal literature and its relation to current concepts in periodontics.
117
Practice Management Seminar Program
The goals and objectives for this curriculum will allow the resident to:
 Understand business plan concepts
 Understand behavior management and its impact on the dental practice
 Understand the need for dental practice systems
 Understand the importance of being a leader
 Transitions from GPR to life after training
Oral Surgery Seminar Program
The goals and objectives for this curriculum will allow the resident to:
 Diagnose and treatment plan the oral surgical needs of patient care both medically and
dentally.
 Understands concepts of and perform exodontia.
 Perform simple pre-prosthetic surgery.
 Understand the initial treatment and management of extra-oral facial trauma.
 Detect and treatment plan initial treatment for intra-oral pathology.
 Treat intra-oral hard and soft tissue lesions of traumatic origin.
Prosthodontic Seminar Program
 The goals and objectives for this curriculum will allow the resident to:
 Diagnose and treatment plan the fixed and removable prosthodontic needs of oral care.
 Appropriate referral when necessary.
 Understand theory and apply practice of current concepts and techniques of fixed and
removable prosthodontics.
 Understand the fundamentals of restoring implants.
 Understand the relationship between occlusion and dental rehabilitation with fixed and
removable prosthetics.
 Understand the necessity of proper treatment planning needs for implant prosthodontics
 Understand diagnostic tools necessary for proper implant treatment planning work ups
 Understand Implant prosthodontic trouble shooting
 Understand Principles of surgical implant placement from patient selection to surgical
technique
Endodontic Seminar Program: The goals and objectives for this curriculum will allow the resident
to:
 Be exposed to current concepts in pulpal therapy and modalities of treatment.
 Appropriate diagnosis and treatment planning for comprehensive and emergency pulpal
care.
 Advanced training in treatment techniques of single and multi-rooted teeth in need of
endodontic care.
Current academic schedules can be accessed on www.tufts.edu/tusk/dental
Clinical Instruction
Clinical instruction for patient care in dentistry and medicine are throughout the year in the
following rotations and resident experiences will enable the resident to perform the listed goals and
objectives:
Advanced General Dentistry Clinic
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, 1 Kneeland St. Boston
30% Clinical Time.
 Expose the residents to professional skills and practice management necessary to function
effectively in the private general practice setting.
 Utilize the resources available within the Dental School for advanced training, one on one, in
dental specialties for practice in comprehensive patient care.
 Train residents in complex dental procedures.
 Train residents in time management.
118


Expose residents to various dental materials not typically used in undergraduate clinics.
Provide opportunities to residents to teach pre-doctoral students within the dental school.
Tufts Dental Facilities, Taunton and Wrentham
30% Clinical Time.
 Expose the residents to professional skills and practice management necessary to function
effectively in a public health center, focusing specifically on special care dentistry. This
includes patient care for those with developmental disabilities, geriatrics, and the medically
compromised.
 Train residents in advanced behavior management
 Train residents in advanced medical management
 Train residents advanced topics for informed consent, guardianship issues, and
interdisciplinary communication.
Operating Room
Lemuel Shattuck Hospital, Jamaica Plain, MA
Franciscan Children’s Hospital, Brighton, MA
North Shore Medical Center, Salem, MA
20% Clinical Time
 Provide experience with informed consent and guardianship issues.
 To manage the patient pre-operatively, operatively, and post-operatively.
 To provide comprehensive dental care under general anesthesia.
 To expose resident to proper hospital procedure and protocol.
 To act as an integral part of an interdisciplinary healthcare team.
 To become proficient with matters regarding informed consent.
 To apply skills obtained in history, physical and medical risk assessment.
Emergency Room On-Call and Consultation Service
Tufts Medical Center, Boston, MA
In-House Call for weeknight and weekend shifts. Approximately 38 Call experiences per resident
per year. Consult Service is for inpatient care for dental needs.
 Treat patient’s intra-oral dental emergencies.
 Manage patients with extra-oral emergencies.
 Anticipate and treat medical emergencies.
 Do initial management of extra-oral trauma.
 Treat intra-oral trauma.
 Interdisciplinary care with the Department of Oral Surgery
 Act as a primary care provider for patient's oral health as it relates to medical health.
 Apply knowledge of patient's physical and mental disabilities and their impact on
comprehensive dental care in order to consult appropriately.
 Act as a member of an interdisciplinary healthcare team.
Oral Surgery
TUSDM, Department of Oral Surgery
One Week Rotation, 40 hours of training: Summer Semester
 To extract teeth.
 To extract uncomplicated impacted third molars.
 To perform uncomplicated pre-prosthetic surgery.
 Treat complications of intra-oral surgery.
 Treat complications of extra-oral surgery.
 Perform simple biopsies of oral tissues
 Establish risk assessment for dental treatment.
Gelb Oro-Facial Pain Clinic
TUSDM
One Week Rotation, 35 hours of training: Spring Semester
 Understand anatomy of the TMJ and its relationship to TMD.
 Diagnose and treat uncomplicated TMD.
119

Assess and manage facial pain.
Anesthesiology
Franciscan Children’s Hospital, Brighton, MA
Two Week Rotation, 80 Hours of training. Winter Semester
 Evaluate the patient pre-operatively.
 Assess the effects of pharmacological agents.
 Perform venipuncture technique and administration of intravenous agent.
 Understand and perform patient monitoring, airway management, anesthetic induction and
intubation, administration of anesthetic agents, prevention and treatment of anesthetic
emergencies, and assessment of patient recovery from anesthesia.
 Anticipation of Medical Emergencies and treatment protocols for medical emergency
management
Emergency Medicine
Tufts Medical Center, Boston
Two Week Rotation: 80 hours of training. Fall Semester.
 Taking, recording and interpreting a complete medical history
 Understanding the indications of and interpretations of laboratory studies and other
techniques used in the diagnosis of oral and systematic diseases
 Understanding the relationship between oral health care and system diseases
 Interpreting the physical evaluation performed by a physician with an understanding of the
process, terms and techniques employed
 Using the techniques of physical examination (i.e., inspection, palpation, percussion, and
auscultation)
 Anticipation of medical emergencies and treatment protocols for medical emergency
management
Promotion and Graduation Requirements
Promotion and graduation requirements are in keeping with a Residency Agreement Policy for
Program participation, participation in the Individual Education Plan process for resident progress
and evaluation, as well as completion of the Steps for Success program for best practice technique
and quality of patient care. All other requirements for promotion and receipt of certificate at
program end are in keeping with the Tufts University School of Dental Medicine Student Handbook.
A sample of the resident agreement can be accessed on the TUSK system.
Schedules
Samples of Course, Patient Care Conferences and current clinic schedules can be accessed on the
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine TUSK system. Clinic and rotation participation are
routinely from 8:30 a.m.–4:30 p.m.
Departmental Research and Publications
Residents are required to participate in the Annual Bates Andrews Research day for presentation of
table clinic projects. Projects are assigned at the beginning of the academic year and presented on
Bates Day with occurs in February/March. Publications although not required are encouraged.
General Information
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine General Practice Residency is a stipend position.
Student fees for supplies, books and activities may apply. Please see a sample of this information
located in the TUSK system for Resident Agreements.
Medical insurance is available, and required for participation by Massachusetts state law. Premium
cost to the resident is in keeping with University student health plans.
Departmental policies for time off may be accessed via TUSK. The GPR Program has two weeks
paid leave. The first week is selected for the resident and the second week is upon request during
the spring semester. No vacation time can be taken in the last program month, June. Paid
holidays are per the University Master Calendar, where no clinic duties are scheduled, unless the
120
resident is scheduled for on-call services. Both Clinic and On Call schedules are assigned at the
beginning of the year for the entire year in advance. All other time off is in keeping with University
policies and the Program Director. Due to the multi-facility nature of the Program, the use of a car
is required for program participation.
The TUSDM GPR program is a multi-facility educational experience as described above in detail. All
residents are House officers at the below institutions. Residents must be eligible to practice
dentistry as a graduate from an accredited dental school from within the United States or Canada.
Temporary Intern Licensure is available for practice in Massachusetts pending application
requirements and approval.
TUFTS MEDICAL CENTER HOSPITAL (TMC): The primary teaching hospital of the Tufts Medical and
Dental Schools. Its mission is to provide multidisciplinary health care, mostly of a tertiary nature,
to a broad patient population. As a world-renowned teaching hospital its educational priorities
include training undergraduate and graduate medical and dental students, providing in-depth
residency training in medical specialties and maxillofacial surgery, oral pathology and general
dental practice. TMC seeks to advance and promote medical and scientific knowledge through
basic and clinical research, and to apply this knowledge to promote health and prevail over disease.
TMC has a rich tradition in excellent health care delivery, health care innovation, teaching, research
and community service. The Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and its programs, both at
the pre-and postdoctoral levels, are an integral part of TMC. The institutions are adjacent to one
another and share an access interface on all floors.
LEMUEL SHATTUCK HOSPITAL: A state funded public health hospital located in the Metropolitan
Boston area. The Lemuel Shattuck Hospital’s mission is to provide comprehensive health care and
support services, which meet the health and social needs of the surrounding community. The
institution provides operating room facilities for the Tufts program for special needs. The
institution also provides funding so that the resident is able to provide comprehensive dental care
to the hospitals outpatient population in its own clinic.
FRANCISCAN CHILDREN’S HOSPITAL: A Metropolitan Boston area charitable institution, run by the
Franciscan Order, that is dedicated to providing care to children, most with severe mental or
physical disabilities, 21 years of age or younger. This institution provides operating room facilities
for the Tufts program for special needs.
121
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN ORAL AND
MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY
Program Information
The Advanced Education program in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery is a four year program and
provides the resident with a broad academic background in biomedical sciences and surgical
principles, in the diagnosis and management of medically compromised patients, and the
fundamental knowledge, principles and surgical skills in the treatment of major and minor Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery problems.
The academic and clinical aspects of this program complement each other and fulfill all the
requirements established by the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery and the Council
on Dental Education of the American Dental Association.
During the four years of training, residents are exposed to the basic and applied sciences–in
particular pathology, laboratory medicine, physical diagnosis, medical sciences, pharmacology,
surgical anatomy, general surgery, and anesthesiology. Special emphasis is placed on major and
minor oral surgery, as well as broad experience in out- and in-patient general anesthesia. The
residents are required to attend lectures, seminars, conferences, and clinics at the University and
affiliated hospitals. The resident participates actively as a member of the oncology team at Tufts
Medical Center in the management of head and neck tumors. The second year of the program is
entirely devoted to general surgery, general anesthesia, and surgical specialties including
otolaryngology. The major teaching hospital of Tufts University School of Dental Medicine is Tufts
Medical Center Hospital.
The student is required to participate in basic and/or clinical research, leading to publication and
presentation of their research. Academic credits received during the four years may be directed
toward an M.S. degree, but time beyond the four years will be necessary to complete the
requirements for the M.S. degree.
Emphasis is placed upon training the residents to the standards for Board certification. Thus,
residents are well prepared for Board examination and it is expected that they successfully achieve
Board certification.
To broaden the scope of the trainee’s experience and maximize education experience, there are
off-service rotations that the resident has an opportunity to participates in. There are annual
rotations to Honduras and India. While on these rotations, the resident participates fully in the
evaluation, treatment planning and treatment of cleft lip and palate patients, trauma, and
pathologic entities. Participation in these rotations is offered to senior residents in good standing
with their academic and clinical requirements.
Mission statement
The Department of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine is
committed to providing high level effective care for patients and is dedicated to the education of
pre-doctoral and post-doctoral students. The department treats the full-scope of Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery problems including extraction of erupted and impacted teeth, trauma to the
teeth and jaws, benign and malignant neoplasms, congenital and development maxillofacial
deformities, orthognathic surgery and reconstruction, and placement of dental implants.
Department Administration
Program Director and Chair of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery:
Maria B. Papageorge, D.M.D., M.S.
Contact information Phone: (617) 636-6515
e-mail: [email protected]
122
Department Manager:
Marilyn Peterson
Contact Information Phone :(617) 636-0843
e-mail:[email protected]
Administrative Assistant:
Contact Information Phone: (617) 636-0857
e-mail:
Program Faculty
Full-time Faculty
Dr. Maria B. Papageorge is a tenured Professor, Chair and Director of the advanced education
program in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery. She is also Assistant Dean for Hospital Affairs and Chair
of the Department of Dentistry at Tufts Medical Center. She has been on the faculty in the
department of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery since 1986. She received her Bachelor of Arts degree
from Wellesley College, and her D.M.D. degree and M.S. degree from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine. She completed her Advanced Education Training in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery
and a fellowship in Cancer and Reconstructive Surgery from Tufts and Tufts-New England Medical
Center. Dr. Papageorge is a Diplomate of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons,
Fellow of the American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, the International College of
Dentists, and the Pierre Fauchaud Academy. Her extensive research and clinical interests include
cancer, maxillofacial reconstruction, orthognathic surgery, and implant surgery.
Dr. Morton Rosenberg is a Professor in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery and Head, Division of
Anesthesia and Pain Control. He is also Assistant Professor of Anesthesiology at Tufts University
School of Medicine, and has been on faculty since 1975. Dr. Rosenberg received his D.M.D. degree
from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and his residency in Anesthesia at Tufts-New
England Medical Center. A nationally recognized leader and educator in dental sedation and
anesthesia, he has published extensively in the dental and medical literatures. He is currently on
the Board of Directors of the American Dental Society of Anesthesiology.
Dr. Constantinos Laskarides is Assistant Professor and Director of the pre-doctoral program in
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery. He has been on faculty since 2006. He received his D.M.D. degree and
his PharmD degree from the University of Athens, Greece. He completed his Advanced Education
Training in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery at Tufts University and Tufts-New England Medical Center
and his IS D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. Dr. Laskarides is a Diplomate of
the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery. His clinical interests include facial cosmetic
and orthognathic surgery, advanced implant and maxillofacial reconstructive surgery, and primary
cleft lip and palate repair. He participates annually in surgical expeditions to the third world for the
treatment of children with cleft lip and palate.
Dr. Daniel Oreadi is Assistant Professor in Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery. He received his DMD
degree from Universidad Central de Venezuela, School of Dentistry in Caracas, Venezuela in 2000.
He completed his Advanced Education Training in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery at Tufts University
and Tufts Medical Center in 2009 and a Fellowship in Head and Neck Tumor and Reconstructive
Surgery at the University of Tennessee Medical Center, Knoxville, TN in 2010. His clinical interests
include cancer and reconstructive surgery, orthognathic surgery, advanced implant and
maxillofacial reconstructive surgery, and management of head and neck trauma patients.
Dr. William Gilmore is Associate Professor and has been on faculty since 1979. He received his
Bachelor of Science Degree from Boston College and his D.M.D. from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education Training at Tufts. Dr. Gilmore is a
Diplomate of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Fellow of the American Society
of Dental Anesthesiology, and a member of the American Dental Association, Mass Dental Society,
American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons. Dr. Gilmore primarily teaches in the predoctoral program.
123
Dr. Roger B. Galburt is a Clinical Professor and Director of the Implant Center, and has been on
the faculty since 1977. He received his Bachelor degree from the Universtiy of the City of New York
Brooklyn College, and his D.D.S. from New York University College of Dentistry. He completed his
Advanced Education training in Prosthodontics at Harvard University School of Dental Medicine. He
is a consultant and examiner with the Northeast Regional Board of Dental Examiners. He is also a
member of the American Dental Association, South Shore Dental Society, and American College of
Prosthodontics.
Part-time Faculty
Dr. Richard Sorbera is Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1967. He received his
Bachelor of Science Degree from Boston College and his D.D.S. from Georgetown University School
of Dentistry. He completed his Advanced Education Training at Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine. Dr. Sorbera is a Diplomate of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons,
Fellow of the American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, Fellow of the American
College of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons. Dr. Sorbera directs the outpatient general anesthesia
clinic.
Dr. Lou Rissin is Associate Clinical Professor and director of the implant fellowship and has been
on faculty since 1996. He received his Bachelor of Arts degree from the University of Vermont and
his D.M.D. from the University of Pennsylvania School Of Dental Medicine. He completed his
Advanced Education Training in Prosthodontics at Harvard School of Dental Medicine. Dr. Rissin is a
Diplomate of the American Board of Prosthodontics.
Dr. Shibly Malouf is Associate Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1968. He received
his Bachelor of Science Degree from Bates College and his D.D.S. from Temple University School of
Dentistry. He completed his Advanced Education Training in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery at the
University of Virginia School of Medicine and Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. Dr. Malouf
is a Fellow of the American College of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, Fellow of the International
Society of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, and Fellow of the American Dental Society of
Anesthesiology. Dr. Malouf primarily teaches in the pre-doctoral program.
Dr. Edward D'Eramo is Associate Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1974. He
received his Bachelor of Science Degree from Boston College and his D.M.D. from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education Training at UCLA-VA Medical
Center. Dr D'Eramo is a member of the American Dental Association, Southern California Academy
of Oral Pathology, American Dental Society of Anesthesiology, Massachusetts Dental Society, and
Massachusetts Society of Oral Surgeons. Dr. D'Eramo primarily teaches in the pre-doctoral
program.
Dr. Lewis Estabrooks is Associate Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1970. He
received his Bachelor of Science Degree from the University of Rochester and his D.M.D. from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education Training at Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine, New England Medical Center and Boston City Hospital. Dr.
Estabrooks is a Member of the Maine Dental Assocation, American Dental Association, American
Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, Fellow American Dental Society of Anesthesia. Dr.
Estabrooks, primarily teaches in the advanced education program.
Dr. Laith Azzouni is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 2009. He
received his BDS from the University of Jordan Faculty of Dentistry in 2000 and his DMD from the
University of Pennsylvania School of Dental Medicine in 2004. He completed his Advanced
Education Training in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery from Montefiore Medical Center, in NY in 2008.
Dr Azzouni is a Diplomate of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery. Dr. Azzouni
teaches in both the pre-and post-doctoral programs.
Dr. Peter Theoharides is Assistant Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1990. He
received his Bachelor of Science Degree from Boston College, and his D.M.D. from the University of
Pennsylvania School of Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education Training at Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine. Dr. Theoharides is a Diplomate of the American Board of Oral
124
and Maxillofacial Surgeons, Fellow of the American board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery,
American Dental Association, Massachusetts Society of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons and
Massachusetts Dental Society. Dr. Theoharides primarily teaches in the pre-doctoral program.
Dr. Mahmoud El-Hadidy is Assistant Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 2004. He
received his D.D.S. from Al-Azhar University Faculty of Dental Medicine and his BDS for Alexandria
University Faculty of Dentistry. He studied Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery at Tufts University of
Dental Medicine from 1979 to1981 and completed a fellowship in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery at
the University of Illinois from 1984 to 1985. He received a Specialty Diploma from Al-Azhar
University Faculty of Dental Medicine, Cairo, Egypt and his D.M.D. from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine. Dr. El-Hadidy is a member of the American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial
Surgeons, Massachusetts Society of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, American Dental Association,
Massachusetts Dental Society, International Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons,
Academy for Osseointegration, International Association for Dental Research. Dr. El-Hadidy
primarily teaches in the pre-doctoral program.
Dr. Christopher Maller is Assistant Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1988. He
received his Bachelor of Science Degree and Master of Science from the University of Maine and his
D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education
Training at Wm. Beaumont Army Medical Center and Surgical Anesthesia at Boston City Hospital.
Dr. Maller is a Diplomate of the American Society of Dentist Anesthesiologists, and Fellow of the
American Dental Society of Anesthesia. Dr. Maller teaches pain control in the pre-doctoral program.
Dr. Lawrence Herman is Assistant Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 1974. He
received his Bachelor of Science degree from McGill University, Montreal and his D.M.D. from the
University of Pennsylvania. He completed his Advanced Education training at Albert Einstein College
of Medicine and Kings College Hospital and Dental School, London, England. Dr. Herman is a
Diplomate of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, and Fellow of the American
Dental Society of Anesthesiologists. Dr. Herman participates annually in surgical expeditions to the
third world for the treatment of children with cleft lip and palate.
Dr. Hamid Esbah-Tabatabaei is a Clinical Instructor and has been on the faculty since 2008. He
received his Bachelor of Science degree from Elizabeth College and his D.M.D. from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine. He completed his advanced education training at Lincoln
Medical and Mental Health Center. Dr. Esbah-Tabatabaei is a Diplomate of the American Board of
Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, and a Fellow of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial
Surgeons and American Society of Dental Anesthesiology. Dr. Esbah-Tabatabaei primarily teaches
in the pre-doctoral program.
Dr. Nicholas G. Capobianco is a Clinical instructor, and has been on faculty since 2011. He
received his Bachelor of Science from Fairfield University and his D.D.S. from Saint Louis University
School of Dentistry. He completed his Advanced Education Training at the University of Maryland
Hospital, Hospital Empleados, and The Worcester City Hospital. Dr. Capobianco is a Retired Life
member of the American Dental Association. He is also a member of the American Association of
Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons and The Rhode Island Dental Association. Dr. Capobianco teaches
in the pre-doctoral clinic.
Dr. Marcin Jarmoc is a Clinical Instructor and has been on faculty since 2011. He received his
Bachelor of Science Degree from the University of Florida and his D.M.D. from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education Training at Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine and TUFTS Medical Center. He is a member of the American Dental
Society, American Academy of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, Massachusetts Society of
Anesthesiology and the Omicron Kappa Upsilon National Dental honor Society. Dr. Jarmoc teaches
in the pre-doctoral and post- doctoral programs and practices the full scope of Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery.
Dr. James Kraus is a Clinical Instructor and has been on faculty since 2011. He received his
Bachelor of Science Degree from Saint Michael's College and his D.M.D. from Tufts University
125
School of Dental Medicine. He completed his Advanced Education Training at Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine and TUFTS Medical Center. Dr. Kraus completed a one year fellowship in
Pediatric and Adult Cranio-Maxillofacial Surgery at the Royal Children's Hospital; Royal Melbourne
Hospital and Epworth Medical Center, Melbourne, Australia. He is a member of the American
Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, American College of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons,
International Society of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons, Australian & New Zealand Association of
Maxillofacial Surgeons and the American Trauma Society.Dr. Kraus teaches in the pre-doctoral and
post-doctoral programs. He practices the full scope of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery with special
interest in Cranio-Maxillofacial Surgery.
Dr. Joseph Leibovici is a Clinical Instructor and has been faculty since 2009. He received his
Bachelor of Science degree from Rugters University and his D.M.D. from the University of Medicine
and Dentistry of New Jersey. He completed his advanced education training at Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine. Dr. Leibovici is a Diplomate of the American Board of Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgeons, and Fellow of the American Board of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons and
American Society of Dental Anesthesiology. Dr. Kiely primarily teaches in the pre-doctoral program.
Emeritus Faculty
Dr. Lonnie H. Norris is Professor of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Emeritus and Dean Emeritus.
He was appointed Interim Dean in 1995 and Dean from 1996 to 2011. He is a tenured professor
and has been on faculty since 1980. He received his Bachelor of Arts degree from Fisk University
and his D.M.D. and MPH degrees from Harvard University School of Dental Medicine, and Harvard
School of Public Health. His Advanced Education training in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery
certificate was awarded from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, Tufts-New England
Medical Center and Boston City Hospital. Dr. Norris is a Diplomate of the American Board of Oral
and Maxillofacial Surgery, Fellow of the American Association of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgeons,
International College of Dentists, the American College of Dentists, the American Academy of
Dental Science, and the Pierre Fauchard Academy.
Dr. H. Chris Doku is Distinguished Professor Emeritus. He was on faculty from 1970 until 1999.
He received his Faculty of Science Certificate of Physics, Chemistry and Biology and as his DDS
degree from the University of Istanbul. He completed his Advanced Education training in Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgery at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and in General Anesthesia at St.
Francis Hospital, Hartford, CT. He also received his D.M.D. degree from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine. Dr. Doku served as Chair and Director of the advanced education program in Oral
and Maxillofacial Surgery from 1965 to 1999. He also served as the Assistant/Associate Dean for
Hospital Affairs, Chairman of the Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Department, Coordinator Tufts
General Practice Residency Program in Dentistry. Dr. Doku is a Diplomate of the American Board of
Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Fellow of the American Dental society of Anesthesiology, Fellow of
International Association of Oral Surgeons, Fellow of the American Association of Oral and
Maxillofacial Surgeons and Fellow of the International College of Dentists.
Required Courses
 Physical Diagnosis
 Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology
 Head and Neck Anatomy and Laboratory Dissection
 Principles of Orthognathic Surgery and Orthodontic preparation
 Evidence based implant dentistry
 Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation
 Advanced Cardiac Life Support
 Advanced Trauma Life support
Departmental Courses and Conferences
 Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Course
 Clinico-Pathological Conferences
 Combined Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery/orthodontic treatment planning seminars
 Resident presentations
126




Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery/Implant treatment planning seminars
Treatment planning conferences
Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery /ENT trauma conferences
Head and Neck Tumor conferences
Graduation Requirements
 Successful completion of all academic and clinical requirements.
 Completion of research project with presentation and submission for publication.
Departmental Research and Publications
Current active research projects include:
 Development of sleep-related breathing disorders.
 Prospective randomized control trial of 2 different sedation sequences for removal of 3 rd
molars.
 Evaluation of Soft and Hard tissue alterations around implants placed on the anterior
aesthetic area of the maxilla that have been restored with the use of the medialized
platform technique.
 Incidence of infra-orbital and superior alveolar nerve paresthesia following Le-Fort I
osteotomy.
 The role of Facial Characteristics in the development of obstructive sleep apnea syndrome.
 Evaluation of Postoperative edema and pain following third molar extractions after the
application of non-diathermy pulsed electromagnetic field therapy.
 Postoperative assessment of Maxillo-Mandibular Advancement as an effective treatment for
obstructive sleep apnea syndrome.
 A Comparison of Immediate Implant Placement following Tooth Extraction with NonImmediate Implant Placement and Associated Outcomes as documented by a Five-Year
Retrospective Case-control Analysis.
Selected recent departmental publications:
Papageorge, MB, Chapman, RJ. Reconstruction of Craniofacial Function using Osseointegrated
Implants in Patients with Mandibular Defects. Chapter in Osseointegration-Multidisciplinary
Treatment, Quintessence, 287-320, 2005
Al-Sebaei, M, Gagari, E., Papageorge, MB. Mandibular Distraction Osteogenesis: A Rabbit Model
Using a Novel Experimental Design. J Oral Max Surg, 63 (5): 664-672, 2005
Papageorge, MB, Etiology of Oral Cancer in the Young Patient: Is Tongue Cancer becoming the
Other Cancer in Women? Chapter in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Clinics of North America,
Elsevier Saunders, 19(2): 163-171, 2007
Kraus, J, Oreadi, D, Shastri, K, Rosenberg, M. Perioperative management of a patient with short
chain acyl-CoA Dehydrogenase deficiency. J Oral Maxillofac Surg, 66:2164-2165, 2008
Domingos Ribeiro-Junior, P, Magro-Filho, O, Shastri, Papageorge, MB. In Vitro Biomechanical
Evaluation of the Use of Conventional and Locking Miniplate/Screw Systems for Sagittal Split
Ramus Osteotomy, J Oral Maxillofac Surg 68(4); 724-730, 2010
Jarmoc, M, and Shastri, K, Davis, F. Anisocoria Following Open Reduction and Internal Fixation of a
Mandible Fracture under General Anesthesia: A Case Report. J Oral Maxillofac Surg 68 (4); 898901, 2010
Demetriades, N, Chang, DJ, Laskarides, C, Papageorge, MB. Effect of Mandibular Retropositioning,
with or without Maxillary Advancement, on the Oro-Naso-Pharyngeal Airway and Development of
Sleep-Related Breathing Disorders. J Oral Maxillofac Surg, 68 (10):2431-2436, 2010
127
Lucca, M, Shastri, K, McKenzie, S, Kraus, J, Finkelman, M, Wein, R. Comparison of treatment
outcomes associated with early versus late treatment of mandible fractures: a retrospective chart
review and analysis, J Oral Maxillofac Surg, 68 (10):2484-2488, 2010
Lucca, M., D’Innocenzo, R.Kraus, J, Gagari, E, Hall, J, Shastri, K, Ameloblastic Carcinoma of the
Maxilla: A Report of Two Cases. J Oral Maxillofac Surg, 68 (10):2564-2568, 2010
McKenzie, S, Rosenberg, M. Paradoxical Reaction Following Administration of a Benzodiazepine, J
Oral Maxillofac Surg, 68:3034-3036, 2010
John, V, Papageorge, MB, Jahangiri, L,Wheater,M, Cappelli, D, Frazer, R, Sohn, W.
Recruitment, Development, and Retention of Dental Faculty in a Changing Environment.
JDE, 75(1): 82-89, Jan 2011
Kraus, J, Papageorge, M, Vocal Cord Paralysis after Orthognathic Surgery, Annals of Maxillofacial
Surgery,1(2):166-168, 2011
Smart Ryan J, DMD, MD, Marsh Shawn DMD, Rosenberg Morton DMD. Intraosseous Access in Oral
and Maxillofacial Surgical Practice, J Oral Maxillofac Surg, 2011
Laskarides C, Goldstein R, Malcmacher L:.Botox therapy in the dental practice.
Educ Dent. 2011 Apr;32(3):10-1.
Compend Contin
Reti R, Navarro P, Shastri K, Oreadi D. Case of multiple keratocystic
odontogenic tumors. J Mass Dent Soc. 2011 Winter;59(4):36-9. PubMed PMID:21446619
Rosenthal M, Oreadi D, Kraus J, Bedi H, Stark PC, Shastri K. Comparison of
preoperative computed tomography and surgical findings in maxillofacial
infections. J Oral Maxillofac Surg. 2011 Jun;69(6):1651-6. Epub 2011 Jan 21.
PubMed PMID: 21256641.
Oreadi, D., Carlson, ER. Ablative Oral / Head and Neck Surgery. Book Chapter in Management of
Complications in Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Michael Miloro and Antonia Kolokythas. WileyBlackwell 2012
128
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN ORTHODONTICS
Program Mission Statement and Philosophy
It is the mission of the department of orthodontics to train dentists in the specialty of orthodontists
in accordance with the guidelines set forth by the American Dental Association Commission on
Dental Accreditation for Advanced Education Programs in Orthodontics and Dentofacial
Orthopedics. Further, it is our mission to train dentists to be qualified to achieve Board Certification
by fulfilling the requirements set forth by the American Board of Orthodontics, the American
Association of Orthodontists and the ADA Commission for Accreditation for Advanced Dental
Educational Program in Orthodontics.
The program educates the student/resident in the biomedical, clinical and applied sciences
appropriate to the diagnosis and treatment of patients who exhibit a wide variety of malocclusions
and craniofacial problems which are reflective of the types of patients seen in the private practice
of orthodontics. In addition, the program trains the student resident in all areas of quality,
comprehensive care of the patient. This training includes, but is not limited to, the use of a wide
variety of fixed and removable appliances, the use of orthopedic appliances, treatment of both the
adult and child patient, treatment of patients with congenital anomalies, patients that are dentally
compromised, patients that require a multidisciplinary approach to treatment, as well as patients
requiring orthognathic surgery. The program also trains the student/resident to have in depth
knowledge, understanding and familiarity with the entire range of topics related to the specialty of
orthodontics and to gain the skills to be proficient in the application of this knowledge in the
practice of orthodontics. In the areas of research, the program trains the student/resident to be
able to study and understand the scientific literature and to think critically. The student/resident is
trained in research methodology and design in order that he/she can successfully complete a
clinical research project and an associated paper of publishable quality.
The postdoctoral Orthodontic program at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine is a two year
program which emphasizes the clinical aspects of the specialty leading to a Certificate in
Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. The program admits eight students/residents per year a
majority of whom will follow the two year clinical track. In addition, a student/resident may choose
a three year track leading to a Certificate in Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics and a Master
of Science Degree. The program also fulfills all requirements of the American Board of Orthodontics
for certification upon graduation.
The program trains students/residents in all aspects of clinical orthodontics including, but not
limited to:







adult treatment
treatment of the adolescent
early and interceptive treatment
orthognathic surgery
TMD
cleft palate and other dentofacial anomalies
dentofacial orthopedics.
The program encourages students/residents to pursue further individual advancement in clinical
orthodontics, research, and academia. The latest in technology is an integral part of the program
and of the course of study; this includes a paperless record system, digital radiography, 3D cone
beam imaging, digital photography and the use of digital cephalometrics.
During their first year of training each student/resident is assigned approximately 40 new patients
who exhibit a wide variety of malocclusions indicative of those types of problems seen in the
129
private practice of orthodontics. During the second year of their training each student/resident
accepts transfer patients from the graduating class to round out their case load of 80-90 patients.
Students/residents work closely with individual or multiple faculty members who are assigned to
each individual patient. While we believe in a traditional approach to diagnosis, treatment planning
and mechanotherapy, each faculty member has the latitude and freedom to explore his/her own
particular method of treatment. We believe that this is a major strength to our program. Ours is a
diverse and dedicated faculty consisting of excellent practitioners/teachers from the greater
metropolitan Boston area, most of whom have been here for many years and many of whom are
Board Certified in orthodontics. We believe in introducing new approaches, new materials and new
appliances into the program, but we also believe in providing our students/residents with a solid
background in traditional orthodontics. Simply stated, we believe in the fundamentals of wire and
appliance fabrication combined with new techniques.
Biomedical Sciences
Epidemiology
Head and Neck Anatomy
Growth and Development
Radiology, Biostatistics
Oral Pathology
Occlusion
Temporomandibular Disorders
Medicine
Genetics
Bone Biology
Applied Clinical Sciences
Cephalometrics
Diagnosis and treatment planning
Biomechanics
Occlusion Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation
Speech Physiology and Therapy
Implantology
Practice Management
Clinical Orthodontics
Orthodontic History
Machnaotherapy
Child Psychology
Clinical Photography
Digital Radiography
Interdisciplinary treatment
Cleft Palate and Dentofacial Anomalies
Analysis and Treatment of Malocclusions
Biomaterials
Biomechanics
Clinical Thesis
Combined Surgical Orthodontics Treatment
Practice Administration
Adult Orthodontics
Review of Orthodontic Literature
Aligners
Nutrition
Pain Control
Special Courses
Great Lakes Orthodontic Laboratories in Buffalo, New York
A one week intensive laboratory course in the fabrication of removable appliances, orthopedic
appliances, laboratory materials and related topics.
130
Tweed Course at the Tweed Foundation in Tucson, Arizona
A two-week intensive course in orthodontic diagnosis, treatment planning and mechanotherapy.
The orthodontic course of study at Tufts builds on a solid background in the basic biomedical
sciences and related applied clinical sciences and applies that knowledge to the diagnosis and
clinical treatment of patients with a diverse range of malocclusions. Daily seminars focus on case
analyses encompassing the different orthodontic modalities, as well as offering a comprehensive
review of important current and historical literature. The department invites guest lecturers to
supplement the basic course content, encourages students/residents to attend outside courses to
increase their overall knowledge in the field, and stresses research studies and technical exercises.
All students/residents are required to take the written examination of the American Board of
Orthodontics in the second year of study. In addition, students/residents are trained and
encouraged to initiate the final step towards Board certification by taking the clinical examination of
the American Board of Orthodontics upon graduation.
The program emphasizes the use of the Edgewise arch mechanism and its variations, such as the
straight wire Alexander appliance and other treatment modalities such as Korn and Wilson
mechanics. Students/residents treat selective patients with removable and functional appliances.
The program also trains students to diagnose and analyze patients with combined orthodontic,
prosthetic, and periodontal problems in concert with other postgraduate departments. Our
students/residents interact with their peers in other postgraduate department such as
Periodontology, Prosthetics, Pediatric Dentistry, The Craniofacial Pain Center and Oral Surgery in
the diagnosis, treatment planning and execution of treatment plans for patients who present with
complex malocclusions requiring an interdisciplinary approach to treatment.
We are making advances in the research aspects of our program. The three-year combined
Certificate/Master’s program allows one or two students/residents to explore the area of research
in which they are interested. Collaboration with other departments in the University is encouraged.
Each student/resident is required to complete a clinical research project as part of the requirement
for graduation. Certain of these projects have resulted in publication in juried journals such as the
American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics.
Department Administration
Program Faculty
Full-time
Dr. Barry S. Briss is Professor and Chairman of Postgraduate Orthodontics. He has been a
member of the orthodontic faculty since 1970. He received a Bachelor of Arts degree from
University of Massachusetts-Amherst, his DMD and Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine and is a Board Certified orthodontist. He serves as The President-Elect
and Northeastern Director of the American Board of Orthodontics.
Dr. Georgios Kanavakis has been a faculty member since 2011. He received his D.D.S at
Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, Thessaloniki, Greece, had postgraduate education in Orofacial
pain and Temporomandibular disorders at Tufts University, School of Dental Medicine, a Certificate
in The Craniofacial Pain, Headache and Sleep Center at Tufts University, School of Dental Medicine,
a Master of Science at Tufts University, School of Dental Medicine and a Certificate in Orthodontics
and Dentofacial Orthopedics from Tufts University, School of Dental Medicine.
Part Time
Dr. David Cabeceiras is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1991. He earned a Bachelor of Science Degree from Providence College, a DMD and a
Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He is a Board Certified
Orthodontist and maintains a full-time private practice south of Boston.
Dr. Carl Carlamere is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1983. He earned a Bachelor of Science Degree from Villanova University, a DDS from
131
Georgetown University and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine. He maintains a full-time practice north of Boston.
Dr. Vicky Cartsos is an Associate Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic faculty
since 2005. She received D.M.D. degrees from the University of Athens School of Dentistry and
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine, a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine and a Master of Science degree from Tufts.
Dr. Peter Cressman is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1985. He is on the Cleft Plate team at Tufts New England Medical Center and oversees
the care of patients with craniofacial anomalies such as cleft palate. He earned a Bachelor of
Science Degree in Biology from Lafayette University, a DMD from the University of Pennsylvania
and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He maintains a
full-time private practice south of Boston.
Dr. Eugene Eagles is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1997. He earned a Bachelor of Arts Degree from Tufts University, a D.M.D. from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Boston University. He is
a Board Certified orthodontist who is retired from full-time practice.
Dr. Thomas Fischer is an Assistant Clinical Professor and recently joined the faculty in 2008. He
earned his Bachelor of Science Degree from the University of Notre Dame, his DMD from the
University of Pennsylvania and his MS in orthodontics from Marquette University. He is a Board
Certified orthodontist and maintains a full time private practice in Burlington, Vermont.
Dr. Bahram Ghassemi is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the
orthodontic faculty since 2002. He is the former Chairman of the Orthodontic Department in
Teheran, Iran. He is a dual degree specialist having earned his Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry
from Boston University and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine. He is a Board certified orthodontist and maintains a full-time practice in the greater
Boston area.
Dr. Richard Graham has been a Faculty member since 2011. He has received his B.S. from Tufts
University, his D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine and his certificate in
orthodontics from Albert Einstein/Montefiore Medical Center. He maintains a private practice in
Wesley Chapel, NC.
Dr. Unae Han is an Assistant Clinical Professor and joined the faculty in 2010. She earned a
Master of Public Health from the Harvard School of Public Health, a DMD (Cum laude) from The
Harvard School of Dental Medicine and a Master of Science Degree and Certificate in orthodontics
from the University of Michigan School of Dentistry. She is a Board certified orthodontist and
maintains a private practice in a community west of Boston.
Dr. James Kane is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1982. He is a dual degree specialist have earned a Bachelor of Science Degree from
the University of Massachusetts (Amherst), a DMD, a Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry and a
Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He maintains a full-time
private practice west of Boston.
Dr. Harold Kaplan is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1971. He earned a Bachelor of Arts Degree from Columbia University, a DMD and a
Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He is the Chairman of
the Admissions Committee for the department and is a Board Certified orthodontist. He maintains a
full-time private practice north of Boston.
Dr. Marcel Korn is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the faculty since
1972. He earned a Bachelor of Science Degree from the University of Massachusetts (Amherst), a
DMD and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He is a
132
Board Certified orthodontist and maintains a full-time private practice in Boston.
Dr. Leon Klempner is a visiting lecturer and Clinical Instructor and has been a member of the
orthodontic faculty since 2002. He earned a Bachelor of Arts Degree from Adelphi University, a
DDS from the University of Maryland and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School
of Dental Medicine. He is a Board Certified orthodontist and maintains a full-time private practice
on Long Island, New York.
Dr. Matthew Miner is an Associate Clinical Professor, has been a member of the faculty since
2009 and directs a variety of research projects. He earned his Bachelor of Arts Degree at Colby
College, his DDS at New York University and complete hi orthodontic training at the Harvard School
of Dental Medicine. He is a Board Certified orthodontist and maintains a full time practice in
Dedham, Massachusetts.
Dr. Tracey Maloney is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been on the orthodontic faculty
since 1995. She is a member of the Dental School faculty and is a teacher of gross anatomy at the
Post-graduate level. She earned her Bachelor of Science Degree, a DMD, a Certificate in
Orthodontics and a Master of Science Degree from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. She
maintains a full-time private practice south of Boston.
Dr. Roland Nentwich is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 2002. He earned a Bachelor of Arts Degree from Holy Cross, a DDS and a Master of
Science Degree from SUNY Buffalo School of Dental Medicine and a Certificate in Orthodontics from
the University of Rochester. He maintains a full-time private practice west of Boston.
Dr. Carl Perlmutter is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1975. He earned a Bachelor of Science Degree from the University of Vermont, a DMD
and Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He maintains a fulltime private practice west of Boston.
Dr. Peter Phan has been a faculty member since 2011. He received his Bachelor of Arts degrees
from Rutgers University and University of California, his DMD from Tufts University School of
Dental Medicine and his Certificate in Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine. He maintains a private practice south of Boston.
Dr. Hugh Phillis is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the or6thodontic
faculty since 1980. He earned a Bachelor of Science Degree from Pennsylvania State University, a
DMD and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He is a
Board Certified orthodontist and maintains a full-time practice in Nashua, New Hampshire.
Dr. Charles Ruff is an Assistant Clinical Professor and joined the faculty in 2008. He earned a
Bachelor of Science degree in Chemical Engineering from Manhattan College, his DMD and
Certificate in orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He is a Board Certified
orthodontist and maintains a practice in Waterville, Maine.
Dr. Leo Spyrou is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty for 6 years. He is a dual specialist having earned both a Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry
and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He maintains a
full-time private practice west of Boston.
Dr. Eric Serfaty is a Visiting Lecturer and has been a member of the orthodontic faculty since
2003. He earned a Certificate in Orthodontics and a Master of Science Degree from Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine. He maintains a full-time private practice in Paris, France.
Dr. Lokesh Suri is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 2003. He received a BDS degree from Maulara Azad Medical College, a D.M.D. and
Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. In addition, he
received a Master of Science degree from Tufts.
133
Dr. Parul Taneja is a Clinical Instructor and had joined the orthodontic faculty in 2003. She
earned a BDS Degree from Mangola University in India, a DMD from Boston University and a
Masters in Orthodontics from the University of Oklahoma. She is in a full-time private practice in
the Boston area.
Dr. Robert Wilson is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the orthodontic
faculty since 1978. He earned a Bachelor of Arts Degree from Yankton College, a DDS from Case
Western Reserve University and a Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine. He maintains a full-time private practice north of Boston.
Dr. Gui Zhang is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the faculty since 2001.
She earned a DDS and a Master of Science Degree from West China University and a DMD and a
Certificate in Orthodontics from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. She maintains a fulltime private practice west of Boston.
Contact information
Department Number
Paula Wheeler (administrative assistant)
Patricia Stoney (administrative assistant)
Paula Manowitz (department manager)
617 636-6887
617 636-0955
Coursework
Interdepartmental Courses
Epidemiology
Head & Neck Anatomy
Growth & Development
Radiology
Biostatistics
Oral Pathology
Temporomandibular Disorders I (Occlusion)
Temporomandibular Disorders II
Medicine
Bone Biology
Departmental Courses
Applied Nutrition
Course Type:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. Carole Palmer
Timing:
1st & 2nd years
Contact Hours:
4
Format:
seminar/lecture
Content
 Diet recommendations for health promotion
 Nutrition and oral health issues through life cycle (teens, adults, elders)
 Nutrition and oral health issues through life cycle (pregnancy and children)
 Nutrition-related disorders of dental patients and their management
Goals/Objectives
 To provide a review of the principles of applied nutrition, including recent advances in
nutrition and disease prevention and nutrition goals for health promotion.
 To provide the student with an understanding of the relationships between nutrition and oral
health through the life cycle.
 To provide students with a methodology and experience in conduction a diet screening and
evaluation and providing diet counseling to appropriate patients
134
After participating in the Clinical Nutrition course, the student will be able to:





Discuss how diet and nutrition can affect and be affected by oral health
Discuss the underlying rationale for the development of dietary standards and their current
status including recommended dietary allowances, dietary guidelines, new labeling laws
Discuss patient nutrition issues common to dental patients throughout various phases of the
life cycle
Discuss the role of nutrition in the management of specific disorders such as cancer, AIDS,
diabetes mellitus, and eating disorders
Describe the important components of diet assessment and counseling for dental patients
Outcome measures (evaluation method)

Online course and faculty evaluation
Behavioral Sciences (speech therapy, child psychology)
Course Type:
Applied Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. David Chedekel (Child Psychologist), Linda Diaz (Speech Pathologist
Timing:
years 1 & 2; four 1½ hour sessions (every other year)
Contact Hours:
6
Format:
seminar/lecture
Content


Speech—the course contains topics which familiarize the student/resident with the basic
knowledge and understanding of the normal production of sounds, tongue function, lip
function etc. The early development of the structures related to speech is reviewed as is
their relationship to mastication. In addition, there is a review of abnormal function, habits
etc. as they relate to the formation of malocclusion. Corrective measures are described.
Child Psychology--The student/resident is provided insight into the psycho-social aspects of
the youngster from early development through adolescence. Topics are related to the
everyday practice of orthodontics and provide insight into the relationship of developmental
stages to issues of cooperation in the treatment of the adolescent. At a second seminar,
topics related to atypical family settings and other non traditional settings is discussed in
order to gain insight into gaining patient trust and confidence. Lastly, there is a discussion
of child abuse and the orthodontist’s role and responsibility.
Goals/Objectives
 To gain familiarity with the nature of speech and abnormal habits as they relate to the
management of the orthodontic patient.
 To provide familiarity with the psycho-social aspects of the young orthodontic patient.
Emphasis is upon the adolescent patient with regard to psychological development and
social behavior, peer pressure, family setting etc.
Outcome measures
 Course Evaluations
 Feedback from residents
Biomechanics
Course Type:
Faculty:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Content

Applied Clinical Sciences
Parul Taneja, B.D.S., D.M.D., M.S.
8 hours
Seminar
Introduction to Biomechanics–definitions, scalar and vector quantities, force, moment of
force, center of rotation, center of resistance, types of tooth movement, determinate and
indeterminate systems, cantilevers.
135







Deep Bite Malocclusions–Class II div 1, Class II div 2, aesthetic considerations, methods of
corrections (intrusion arches etc), application of basic concepts to understand type of tooth
movement, limitations of treatment mechanics, guidelines to recognizing mechanics that are
appropriate for individual cases.
Open Bite Malocclusions–Etiology, MEAW, TADS and their mechanics, role of extractions and
mechanics employed.
Non-Extraction Treatment–Case selection, Use of elastics–limitations, biomechanics of
distalizing appliances.
Extraction Treatment–Case selection, Sliding mechanics, Loop mechanics, Role of friction,
Control of Anchorage.
Non-surgical treatment of Class III malocclusions–Early treatment and growth modification,
alternating expansion-constriction, RPHG.
Finishing and Detailing
Final Examination
Associated Reading
Mulligan TF, Common Sense Mechanics Article Series, JCO 1979-1980
Contemporary Orthodontics, 4th Edition, William R. Proffit, Henry W. Fields, David M. Sarver
Orthodontics – Current Principles and Techniques, 4th Edition, Thomas Graber
Goals/Objectives
This a basic biomechanics course for the first year residents. The aim of the course is to introduce
the student to basic concepts, terminology and to an enable an understanding of the biomechanics
of tooth movement. Common problems that manifest themselves (in the vertical and transverse
planes) with Class I, II or III malocclusions are addressed in a series of lectures. The biomechanics
of tooth movement is discussed in these scenarios. All lectures include cases to exemplify most of
the mechanics under discussion. At the end of the course the student should have comprehension
of basic biomechanical principles, recognition of the forces in play in determinate systems,
sequencing mechanics correctly during treatment, the ability to differentiate between desirable and
undesirable forces when different mechanics are used in a clinical situation and apply concepts
learnt to maximize efficacy of these mechanics.
Outcome measures
 Class participation: 25%
 Assignments/Final Examination: 75%
 Online evaluation
ABO Literature Review
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Drs. Briss, Cartsos, Suri
Timing:
January 3rd-April 3rd of 2nd year
Contact Hours:
28.5 hours
Format:
Seminar
Content
The residents have scheduled seminars to review in detail the 76 Journal Articles which
the ABO recommends as a reading list. A total of 8 journal are presented and reviewed by each of
the residents at each session to the faculty assigned to moderate the article review. Textbook
chapters which the ABO suggests are also reviewed in these seminars.
Associated Reading:
ABO reading list
Goals/Objectives
The purpose of this course is to provide the student/resident with depth of knowledge in
regard to the orthodontic specialty. It aims to prepare the student/resident for the written
examination for board certification. This course is intended to give a broad and most current
perspective of the orthodontic theory and principles.
136
Outcome measures
The student/resident is evaluated by the ABO written exam (Phase II) for board certification taken
in April. A computerized course departmental evaluation is also given to the students at the end of
the curriculum.
Cephalometrics
Type of Course:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Clinical Sciences
Drs. Briss, Cartsos, Suri, Maloney
Summer session & 1st year
Seminar
Content
During the summer session specific seminars are conducted to teach the residents the variety of
cephalometric analyses which are used in the program. In addition, a separate seminar is
conducted to review osteology and bony landmarks and relating them to radiographic images. The
basic analyses include, but are not limited to, Steiner, Tweed, Margolis, Downs, Wits, etc. In
addition, the student/residents are introduced to basic soft tissue analyses such as Holdaway,
Steiner, Rickets soft tissue analyses. Separate sessions are conducted in hand tracing landmarks
on hard copy radiographs. Once the resident is capable of identifying these points and drawing the
various planes, they are instructed in digitizing radiographs on the Dolphin soft tissue program.
During the remainder of their
training, other analyses (i.e. surgical VTO,
etc.) are introduced and discussed relative to diagnosis and treatment planning.
Associated Reading: Textbooks--Profitt; Graber/Vanarsdall; Jacobson
Goals/Objectives
The purpose of this course is to provide the resident with in-depth knowledge of cephalometrics as
it relates to growth and development, diagnosis, treatment planning, mechanotherapy and its
effects on the craniofacial complex. In addition, the course is designed to provide the resident with
the skills to become proficient in landmark identification, development of reference planes and
hand/digital tracing of cephalometric radiographs.
Outcome measures
The resident is graded on his/her tracing exercises. In addition, an assessment of the quality of the
tracings is considered in the overall grading of their initial diagnostic records taken on the first
numbers of patients assigned to each resident.
Cleft Palate: Management of Patients in a Clinical Setting
Course Type:
Applied Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. Peter Cressman, Michael Lewis, M.D.
Timing:
1st & 2nd years
Contact Hours:
Format:
Seminar
Content
Surgical correction of the cleft lip/palate patient at birth. Discussion of anatomy, types of clefts,
and the team approach to correction. Indications and timing for secondary (alveolar) bone grafting.
Genetics and etiology is reviewed in the Growth and Development and Genetics courses.
Considerations with regard to etiological factors
Associated Reading: Appropriate readings in the review of the literature.
Goals/Objectives
Achieve an understanding of the orthodontic management of the cleft-lip/palate patient.
To recognize the importance of inter-disciplinary coordination and the orthodontists role on the
oro-facial anomalies team.
137
Clinical Orthodontics
Type of Course:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Clinical Sciences
Orthodontic faculty
years 1 & 2
Seminar/lecture/patient care
Content
This is a comprehensive course including the entire range of topics related to the clinical practice of
orthodontics. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to, topics listed below.
 Dentofacial Orthopedics
 Early Treatment
 Headgear Therapy
 Invisalign
 Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning (Adult Orthodontics)
 Mechanotherapy
 Orthodontic History
 Temporary Anchorage Devices
 Anchorage
 Use of elastics
 Removable appliances
 Functional appliances
 Fixed appliances therapy
 Diagnosis and treatment planning
 Diagnostic records
 Cephalometrics
All related topics are include in seminars and lectures throughout the course of study. The
knowledge gained is applied directly into the clinical practice of orthodontics as the resident treats
his/her patients. Instruction continues at chair side by close supervision of the care by the faculty.
Associated Reading
Includes all appropriate reading assignments (journals & texts) throughout the entire course of
study which apply to the clinical study of orthodontics. Reference is made to the copies of the
curriculum, reading list, ABO reading list, texts, etc. as evidence of the wide range of topics
covered.
Goals/Objectives
 To provide in-depth knowledge of all topics related to clinical orthodontics
 To provide the resident with the ability to apply the knowledge gained in the didactic
portion of the course of study to the practical application of these principles in the practice
of clinical orthodontics
 To teach the resident to be proficient in the treatment of patients
Outcome measures
 Formal prospective case presentations and displays of four cases presented halfway through
the course of study
 Final case presentation and display of ten cases a the completion of the course of study
 The oral mock board examination
 ABO written examination performance
CPR and Advanced
Type of Course:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Life Support
N/A
Dr. Ganda and staff
Every other year
N/A
lecture/participation
138
Content
All students/residents, faculty and support staff involved in the direct provision of patient care are
recognized in basic life support (B.L.S.), including cardiopulmonary resuscitation and are able to
manage common medical emergencies.
All students/residents, staff and faculty involved in the direct care of patients are certified for
Healthcare Provider Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (HCP CPR) every other year under the
supervision of the Director of Medicine. Staff and faculty HCP CPR is scheduled by the Director of
Medicine’s office. Individuals are required to have CPR certification every two years. A two week
schedule is emailed to all participants for sign-up. The CPR certifications are then conducted every
evening including weekend to cover all full and part-time staff and faculty.
Any faculty member or student/resident who does not take the school’s course must show proof of
his/her certification to the appropriate school authority.
All participants complete an on-line American Heart Association (AHA) HCP CPR exam. At the end
of exam, a printed certificate verifies successful completion. This certificate needs to be presented
to continue with the hands-on portion of the HCP CPR certification. A video demonstrating the
clinical presentations and management of common medical emergencies encountered in the dental
setting is shown to all HCP CPR participants. The CD also outlines the TUSDM Emergency Protocols
that need to be implemented during these emergencies.
Students, staff and faculty submit copies of their current certification card if certification has been
obtained outside of the School. A log of CPR certification of all students, staff and faculty is
maintained in the Medical Director’s Office
The Director of Medicine provides an annual presentation on TUSDM’s Emergency Protocols to the
entire student, staff and faculty involved in patient care as part of the annual Risk Management
and Safety Seminar. The School's Oral Surgery and Code 99 Emergency protocols are discussed in
detail.
Mock emergencies are also periodically conducted, at least twice per month, at different locations
in the Predoctoral and Postgraduate Clinics. Following each mock emergency, immediate
outcomes assessment is provided directly to the participants and by email to the entire School, if
deemed necessary by the Director of Medicine.
Each floor is equipped with an Emergency Code Cart and each dispensary has an "emergency box"
containing a regular sized, large sized and pediatric blood pressure cuff, stethoscope, ammonia
inhalants and a liquid sugar container. Every participant is shown the contents of the box and its
use. This box can be used for emergencies by any member of the School.
The School’s emergency protocol is posted next to every telephone on the clinical floors and at
specific known sites on the non-clinical floors. The emergency protocol is incorporated in the
clinical manual, student manual, faculty handbook, risk management manual and operatory
bulletin boards.
Additionally a laminated synopsis of HCP CPR and TUSDM emergency protocols is provided to every
student and faculty. This can be easily clipped to the School’s ID badge.
Associated Reading: CPR Booklet (American Red Cross)
Goals/Objectives:
Proficiency in CPR
Outcome measures: Written/Practical tests
Diagnosis & Treatment Planning
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Drs. Briss, Diamond, Suri, Spyrou, Giarrusso
Timing:
years 1 & 2; Thursday morning; 1 ½ hours/ session
139
Contact Hours:
Format:
seminar
Content
This is a case based (problem based) seminar. On a rotational basis, each student/resident is
required to present a case of interest which is under treatment. First year students/residents are
required to present hew assigned cases and second year residents are asked to present cases in
progress. Discussions are held amongst the residents, and monitored by the faculty, regarding the
entire range of subject related to diagnosis and treatment planning.
Associated Reading: Textbooks—Profitt; Graber/Vanarsdall
Journals—Articles appropriate to the subject from the program’s reading list and library collection
Goals/Objectives
 to provide a forum for each resident to learn how to present a case before an audience of
his/her peers
 to teach the resident the proper formatting of a formal case presentation
 to teach the resident how to conduct a seminar
 to provide the resident with the in depth knowledge of the entire range of subjects,
integrating relevant clinical, biological and behavioral science into patient treatment, and
relating it to them in the diagnosis and treatment planning of the patient’s problem
 to provide the resident with the understanding of patient management, risk management
and other practical topics relative to the practice of orthodontics.
 to train the resident in the appropriate use of complete data bases to provide a strong
foundation for diagnosis, treatment planning, treatment consultation, treatment and
retention of the patient.
Outcome measures
 evaluation of the residents’ understanding of the subject by assessing his/her ability to
present the material
 evaluation of the residents by assessing their participation in the discussions and their
ability to answer questions posed by the faculty.
Diagnostic Records
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Drs. B. Briss, D. Briss, Brockman, Suri, Cartsos
2nd year residents, Dental school staff
Timing:
Summer session
Contact Hours:
Format:
Seminar/lecture/patient care
Content:
This is a concentrated course in taking diagnostic records. Topics include the following:
 Axium training (paperless record systems)
 Clinical digital photography
 Digital radiography
 Digital study casts (Orthocad)
 Dolphin imaging (image capturing and manipulation, digitization of
radiographs, etc.)
 Impression technique
 Study cast trimming
 Hand tracing radiographs
Goals/Objectives
 To train the resident to produce Board quality diagnostic records.
 To train the resident taking digital photographs and the computer manipulation of digital
intraoral and extraoral photographs
140

To train the resident to be skilled and proficient in impression technique, study cast
fabrication and model trimming so that he/she can produce Board quality casts.
 To train the resident to be proficient and skilled in
 both hand tracing and digitizing lateral and frontal radiographs.
 To train the residents in the aspects of Dolphin Imaging and OrthoCad
technology so that they become proficient and skilled in their use.
Outcome measures (evaluation method):
 At the completion of the summer session, the residents are required to
submit as many sets of records that they have completed for
evaluation and grading. Those aspects of the records which do not
meet Board standards are redone.
 Residents who do not produce Board quality study casts are not
allowed to move on to digital study casts.
Great Lakes Orthodontic Lab Course
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Brian D. Williston, C.D.T.
Timing:
years 1; Fall semester; Four day session; 8 hours/day
Contact Hours:
32
Format:
seminar/laboratory
Content
This is an intense laboratory training course consisting of four eight hour sessions. The residents
are trained to construct a variety of removable and fixed appliances. In addition, they are trained
in soldering technique, for appliance fabrication, and wire bending technique. Use of state-of-the
art laboratory equipment is stressed in order to allow the resident to use similar equipment in the
orthodontic clinic laboratory.
Goals/Objectives





to gain proficiency in soldering technique
to gain proficiency in the use of laboratory equipment
to fabricate high quality removable and fixed orthodontic appliances:
transpalatal bars, orthopedic appliances, etc
to gain proficiency and skill in the use of up-to-date orthodontic
materials
to gain proficiency in laboratory wire bending technique
Outcome measures
The residents’ appliances are evaluated by inspection upon their return from the course. The
quality of the training is excellent and the resident verbal reviews of the course are excellent.
Infection Control
Type of Course:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Applied Clinical
Orthodontic Faculty
1&2
seminar/lecture
Interdisciplinary Diagnosis and Treatment Planning
Type of Course:
Clinical Science
Faculty:
Dr. David Briss, Dr. Timothy Hempton (periodontlogy),
Dr. Kang (prosthodontics), Dr. Maria Papageorge, (oral surgery)
Timing:
1st & 2nd years
Contact Hours:
Format:
Seminars, continuing education courses and scheduled regional and national
meetings.
In school, the format is a case-based discussion and review using cases from orthodontic
141
faculty offices and cases from offices of specialists in other disciplines.
Content
The content varies depending upon the particular department faculty member making the
presentation. For example, the periodontist will present topics such as canine exposure and guided
tissue regeneration. The prosthodontist would discuss bite registration.
Associated Reading
Appropriate selections from scientific literature may be referenced and reading may be assigned
based upon the particular topic of the day, (varies according to case.) Appropriate journal articles
(Kokich etc.)
Goals/Objectives
To provide the students/residents with an in depth knowledge of the concepts and practical aspects
of treating patients with complicated dental problems which requires a multi-specialist approach
Outcome measures: online evaluations
Laboratory Technique
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Drs. Briss, Diamond, Suri, Brockman, and staff
Timing:
Summer Session 1st year
Contact Hours:
64
Format:
seminar/laboratory
Content
Wire bending, soldering, loop design and fabrication, introduction to biomechanical principles
related to loops, Tweed ideal arch exercise, archform arch coordination and symmetry. Introduction
to basic properties of wire, use of pliers relative to basic wire fabrication is given. Residents are
taught to fabricate the ‘classical” Tweed ideal archform. Residents are given a summer break
assignment to complete and pass in all wire bending and soldering exercises upon their return to
school in the fall. Residents are
required to complete and submit completed sets of ideal,
coordinated round and rectangular archforms for grading.
Associated Reading: Classical articles on ideal Archform, Bonwill/Hawley, Tweed
Goals/Objectives
 To provide the resident with the basic understanding of wire properties and differences in the
effect of a variety of wires in tooth movement.
 To introduce the concepts of wire fabrication and creating archform and coordination with
archwires.
 To introduce ideal archform as a concept as it relates to stability in the final result.
 To provide a basic understanding of the nature and technique of soldering stainless steel wires.
 To begin to develop the skills in wire bending and manipulation.
Outcome measures (evaluation method):
Wire bending exercises, soldering exercises and the Tweed ideal arches are graded.
Leveling & Aligning (.018) Typodont Course
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Drs. Briss, Brockman Suri, Cartsos, Diamond
Timing:
Year 1--Tuesday morning; 1 ½ hours/session
Contact Hours:
Format:
seminar/laboratory
Content
Each resident will be required to set up his/her individual typodont in the form of a patient who has
a Class II, division 1 malocclusion with bimaxillary crowding, deep overbite and ectopically erupted
cuspids. The case will also be set up with all four first bicuspids having already been extracted. A
142
power point presentation will accompany the technique exercise portion of the course so as to
demonstrate to the student/residents the variety of leveling wires and techniques used in a typical
extraction case. In addition, the presentation will demonstrate the techniques for retraction of
cuspids, use of loops, use of rectangular wires for space closure, use of Class II elastics, use of
Class II mechanics, use of headgear for anchorage support, bite opening mechanics and other
techniques for uprighting individual teeth and correction of the adverse results of space closure.
The initial exercise will involve the placement of Nitinol wires as initial leveling wires. The wires will
be completely engaged and NOT tied back. The purpose of this exercise is to demonstrate to the
resident, as the wax is heated and softened, the negative effects of these wires as they are allowed
to express themselves. The anticipated result will be forward movement of the incisors and initial
loss of anchorage. The remainder of the course will require the student/resident to design,
fabricate, place and active a series of stainless steel wires to accomplish leveling. In addition, the
resident will learn methods of retracting ectopically erupted canines using moderate to maximum
anchorage principles.
Goals/Objectives
The purpose of this course is to provide the resident with the knowledge, understanding and skill of
the mechanotherapy of initial leveling and alignment of an orthodontic malocclusion. In addition, it
is the goal to provide the student/resident with the ability to understand anchorage, retraction
mechanics and tooth control during initial leveling and alignment. During the course, the resident
will be taught what negative effects orthodontic appliances can have upon the dentition as the
appliance express their forces.
Literature Review
Type of Course:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Clinical Sciences/Biological Sciences/Research
Drs. Diamond, Kaplan
Years 1 & 2; Friday morning; 1 ½ hours/session
seminar
Content
Current major scientific journals (AJODO/Angle/Seminars in Orthodontics)
Goals/Objectives
The intent of these sessions is to train the residents to read the scientific literature, to analyze
article content and to think critically about what they are reading. An additional goal is to train the
resident to apply the knowledge they gain in their core and associated clinical courses to their
analysis and understanding of statistics, research methodology and scientific paper design.
Outcome measures (evaluation method)
Assessment of the residents understanding of the material is based upon the faculty members’
judgment of student/residents’ participation and contribution to the discussions.
Oral Pathology
Course Type:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Clinical Sciences
Dr. Michael Kahn
1st & 2nd years: (every other year)
4
seminar/lecture
Content
A case based review of the typical diseases of the oral cavity. A review of disease entities specific
to orthodontic treatment. Clinical slides accompanied by text and discussion of the entire range of
lesions found on the lips on the tongue and in the oral cavity.
Associated Reading: N/A
Goals/Objectives
 To provide the students/residents with an understanding of the diseases of the oral
143




cavity, the tongue and the lips.
To teach the student/residents how to recognize disease entities of the oral cavity,
lips and tongue.
To teach the students/residents about the causes (local, systemic) associated with
lesions of the oral cavity, lips and tongue.
To relate these disease entities to the specific patient population seen in the typical
orthodontic practice.
Topics:
systemic diseases
syndromes
auto-immune diseases
tumors
localized causes of diseases of the oral cavity
Outcome measures
Online course and instructor evaluations
Orthodontic/Oral Surgery Rounds
Course Type: Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. Barry Briss; Dr. Maria Papageorge; Postdoctoral
students/residents
Timing:
1st & 2nd years
1 hour seminars held on the second Wednesday of each month
Contact Hours:
6 hours
Format:
Seminar
Content
A case based seminar/discussion session moderated by the chairs of Orthodontics and Oral
Surgery. Cases which are either jointly treated by both departments are presented by the residents
treating those cases. Each department, on an alternating week schedule, presents a case requiring
orthodontics and orthognathic surgery and discussed from all aspects of patient management. This
course leads into the formal course which begins in the second semester.
Goals/Objectives
To provide the students/residents with an in depth knowledge of the management of the
orthodontic/orthognathic surgical patient. To have a practical understanding of the nature of
treating these patients in all aspects of the treatment. To create a better working relationship
between the departments and to improve the communication amongst the faculty and residents.
Outcome measures
 online evaluation
 the associated final examination given at the end of the formal orthodontic/orthognathic
course
Orthodontic/Orthognathic Surgery
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Drs. Briss, Papageorge, Suri, Cabaceiras, Cartsos, Laskarides, Shastri
Timing:
Years 1 & 2; Wednesday morning; 1 ½ hours/session
Contact Hours:
16.5
Format:
seminar/lecture
Content
 Introduction to adjunctive orthodontics
 Pre-surgical Orthodontics
 Model surgery
 Diagnosis and Treatment planning for dentofacial deformities for function and esthetics. The
team approach.
 SARPE
 Maxillary and midface deformities
144









Surgical techniques for Le-Fort I and MFA
Orthognathic case presentation
Mandibular deformities
Surgical technique for mandibular Osteotomies. Cosmetics of the chin
Management of skeletal and occlusal deformities of hemifacial microsomia.
Costochondral graft/Distraction
Osteogenesis
Pre-operative, intra-operative and post-operative care of the surgical patient
Post-op orthodontics and stability
Final examination
Associated Reading
Text readings seminars: the residents will be required to read assigned text sections.
Goals/Objectives
To provide the Orthodontic resident with the knowledge and expertise to diagnose, treatment plan
and treat adult patients who present with complex problems that cannot be treated with
orthodontics alone. The resident will be trained to communicate and work closely with the surgeon
in the treatment of these cases.
This series of seminars and lectures is designed to present an overview of the current status and
progress made in facial reconstruction and orthognathic surgery. This seminar series will include
resident participation in presentation of current
Orthodontic-surgical cases, with discussion on both the orthodontic preparation of the patients,
along with surgical treatment planning and procedures for correction of dento-facial deformities.
The course will consist of 11 sessions which are 1-1/2 hours each and a final examination.
The interdisciplinary art and science of correcting dentofacial deformities by surgery and
orthodontics, is described, based on sound diagnostic and biological principles.
The surgical anatomy and physiopathology related to the masticatory apparatus, facial soft tissue
and skeleton and the effect of surgical interventions upon growth and development is presented.
The interdependence and modifications induced by surgery on function, esthetics and long term
stability, based on current research is emphasized.
Surgical techniques are presented to better understand the physiopathology of the masticatory
apparatus.
Outcome measures
Final examination (written) on diagnosis and treatment planning of a case.
Postural Orthodontics for Children and Adults
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. Marcel Korn
Timing:
1st & 2nd year
Contact hours:
24 hours
Format:
lecture/hands-on laboratory participation
Content
A concentrated lecture and laboratory course in the design and fabrication of functional appliances.
Material is presented to provide knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
 Early treatment
 Eruption science
 Muscular training
 Functional philosophy
 TMD
 Interdisciplinary treatment
145

Practice management & marketing
Reading:
Literature on functional, surgery, eruption
Goals and objectives
 To provide knowledge and understanding to the students/residents on incorporating
“postural” orthodontics concepts and “muscular” training techniques into the practice of
orthodontics into mechanical orthodontics.
 To provide the students/residents with the basic skills in appliance fabrication and
understanding of their use in particular situations.
Outcome measures
Online course and instructor evaluations and continuing education evaluations.
Practice Management, Risk Management
Faculty:
Dr. Phillis, Dr. Perlmutter
Timing:
years 1 & 2
Year 1 (one hour once/month)
Year 2 (1½ hour once/month)
Contact Hours:
28
Format:
Seminar
Content:
 Initial examination, diagnostic record taking, case presentation techniques.
 Banding/bonding, communicating with parents regarding cooperation issues, communicating
with generalists and other specialists, progress report, parent letters, early treatment.
 Patient transfers
 Computers, digital technology, management systems
 Staff issues, hiring, wages, firing, health insurance, etc.
 Office overhead
 Supplies, dealing with companies.
 Marketing the practice.
Associated Reading: AAO Practice Alternatives Materials
Goals/Objectives
To teach the students/residents about issues related to the management and administration of a
private practice in orthodontics. Topics such as marketing, technology, organization,
communication, etc. are reviewed and discussed.
Outcome measures (evaluation method):
Student/resident evaluation (on line)
Successful Research Strategies (DEGR204A)
Course Director
Dr. Paul Stark
DHS 639
617-636-3743
Thursday, July 2, 9:00 a.m.-1:00 p.m. (Summer semester)
Course Description
This is an interdepartmental course for all Advanced Education students and a core course for the
MS students. It provides 1.0 graduate credit for MS students. The course provides an overview of
the ethical background and administrative procedures necessary for any research project involving
human subjects. The course consists of 4 hours of lecture material, which is available on TUSK, as
well as the successful completion of an online examination, which is also on TUSK. In addition,
students need to complete 6 hours of online lectures and associated CITI examination. For more
information see the Tufts University Health Sciences Campus Institutional Review Board (IRB)
146
website at: http://tnemcirb.tufts.edu/
Course Goals and Objectives
The educational goal of this course is to introduce the graduate students to the ethical dilemmas
involving human subject-related research as well as the implementation of safeguards put in place
by the Institutions to assure the well-being of research subjects.
By the completion of the course, students should:
 Understand the ethical responsibilities of a clinical researcher and the role of the
Institutional Review Board
 Be familiar with basic principles of clinical research
 Be familiar with basic forms and terminology used in research projects involving human
subjects at Tufts
 Be able to direct their questions to the appropriate individuals at TUSDM and the IRB.
Outcome Measures
Attendance is mandatory for all Advanced Education residents and Master of Science candidates.
Upon completion, students will be instructed to complete additional educational requirements as
determined by the IRB. Successful completion will result in a grade of Pass for the course.
Tweed Foundation
Type of Course:
Faculty:
Timing:
Contact Hours:
Format:
Course
Clinical Sciences
Tweed Foundation Faculty
years 1; Spring Semester; 11days; 8 hour sessions/day
100
seminar/ laboratory
Content
This is a full course in diagnosis (Tweed Merrifield Philosophy), treatment planning and orthodontic
technique. Topics covered are listed as follows: appliance design, soldering and precision wire
bending, directional force systems, and correction of various malocclusions. Full laboratory
technique treating a variety of malocclusions on typodonts.
Associated Reading
Residents are required to bring cases from their clinical patient load to discuss, diagnose and
treatment plan.
Goals/Objective
This course is designed with the following objectives:
Appropriate readings are reviewed as part of the overall coursework in the program.
To provide a basic understanding in diagnosis and treatment planning
 To train the resident to be proficient in all aspects of appliance fabrication.
 To provide in depth knowledge of treatment mechanics
 To provide in depth knowledge of appliance design and force systems
 To provide experience in the correction of a variety of malocclusions using basic principles.
Outcome measures (evaluation method):
An informal report, in the form of a letter, from one of the Tweed Foundation directors is sent to
the program director informing him of how the residents performed during the course. Feedback is
solicited from the residents upon completion of the course. The skills and knowledge gained at this
course is evaluated informally as the faculty interacts with the residents during their continued
treatment of their patients. Wire bending skills, fabrication of appliances and knowledge about
concepts (i.e. anchorage etc.) is determined through treatment in the clinic and in discussions in
seminar on related topics. The quality of the training is excellent and the resident verbal reviews of
the course are excellent.
147
Tweed Ideal Archform
Type of Course:
Applied Clinical
Faculty:
Orthodontic Faculty
Timing:
1&2
Contact Hours:
10
Format:
seminar/lecture/laboratory
Content
The course consists of a formal presentation of the concepts of the ideal archform. The construction
of the individualized archform fabrication using Dr. Tweed’s method is reviewed. A step by step
process is used to guide each student/resident through the steps to produce an customized ideal
archform chart Additional topics include, arch form, stability, wire design, wire bending, 1 st,2nd 7 3rd
order bends etc.
Associated Reading
Tweed Text, Bonwill articles on ideal archform, Hawley articles Profit text, grabber text.
Goals/Objectives
 To provide the basic understanding of the “concept” of the ideal arch.
 To provide the understanding of arch coordination
 To provide the understanding of 1st.2nd & 3rd order bends
 To provide an understanding of the need for 1st order bends in the standard edgewise
appliance.
 To provide the student/resident with the skills to bend and manipulate
round and rectangular stainless steel wire and to have the ability to form those wires into sets of
ideal, coordinated arches.
Outcome measures
 The complete charts are graded.
 Both sets or ideal coordinated arches (.016, .016x.022) are graded for form, symmetry and
coordination and accuracy with regard to the idealized chart.
The Wilson 3D Arch
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. Robert C. Wilson
Timing:
year 1; Friday afternoon
Contact Hours:
6
Format:
seminar/laboratory
Content:
Hands on technique:
 Basic wire bending techniques
 Discussion of uses of a lingual arch
a. holding lower arch length
b. saving “E” space
c. saving space from premature loss of primary teeth
 Following the directions put forth in the assigned text book
 Hands on fabrication of wire
 Hands on adjustments of wire control of torque, tipping, rotation of molars and incisors
 Use of extensions movement of 2nd molars
 Use of the Wilson Transfer System
Associated Reading
Enhanced Orthodontics, Drs. William and Robert Wilson
Goals/Objectives
To gain knowledge in the use of the Wilson 3S arch appliance
To become proficient in the fabrication of the appliance
148
Outcome measures (evaluation method)
A written quiz at completion of the session
Wilson Lingual Arches and Palatal Arches
Type of Course:
Clinical Sciences
Faculty:
Dr. Robert Wilson
Timing:
year 1; Friday afternoon
Contact Hours:
6
Format:
seminar/laboratory
Lecture combined with hands-on technique Palatal arches and Multiaction Palatal Arches
Content




Discussion of uses of a palatal arch and multiaction palatal arch
a. hold upper molar position
b. rotate upper molars
c. slight distalization of upper molars
Hands on fabrication of wires
Hands on adjustments of wires control expansion, torque, tipping, and rotation
Distalizing Maxillary Molars with the Wilson Bimetric Distalizing ArchBasic wire bending
techniques
a. discussion- of uses of a Wilson Bimetric Distalizing Arch
b. demonstrate and discuss
c. indications & contra-indications
d. show use in mixed dentition
e. demonstrate- effects on functional and skeletal changes
f. demonstrate- long term results and stability
g. hands on fabrication of wires
h. hands on adjustments of wires
i. Control expansion, torque, tipping, and rotation
Associated Reading:
Enhanced Orthodontics, Drs. William and Robert Wilson
Goals/Objectives
To gain knowledge in the use of the Wilson 3S arch appliance
To become proficient in the fabrication of the appliance
Outcome measures
A written quiz at completion of the session
Clinical hands on test on molar rotation and torque
Clinical- hands on test on molar rotation and tip and extrusion
Clinical Instruction
A brief description of the scope and time allotted for clinical instruction can be presented. Examples
of common clinical procedures can also be listed.
Schedules
Schedules and curriculum may be reviewed in the program syllabus which is available in the
orthodontic department.
Departmental Research and Publications
Any active research projects can be listed, along with funding information, if available. Also a list of
selected departmental publications (5-10) in the past 2-3 years can be included.
Rules and Regulations for Residents
Attendance
149
Attendance in classroom seminars and in clinic is mandatory. The ADA guidelines for granting
certification in the specialty of orthodontics stipulate that a resident must complete a minimum of
24 months and 3700 hours of didactic and clinical study. It is expected that residents will be in
attendance except for scheduled vacation periods, outside courses and seminars and scheduled
professional meetings pertinent to the educational process. Absence due to illness or other special
circumstances requires the approval of the chairman of the department.
In addition to treating patients in the clinic, residents are expected to attend core curriculum
courses, write research papers and pursue other academic interests within the department. If a
resident is away from the immediate clinic area for a prolonged period, he/she must inform a staff
member where they can be reached.
Excessive tardiness and absenteeism will not be tolerated. Residents are expected to be at the
university and are expected to be on time for all scheduled events, classes, seminars, laboratory
and clinic sessions. Exceptions may include illness, religious observances, weddings, funerals and
other important family occasions, or weather conditions, which force school closure.
Attendance at department seminars, clinic sessions and courses will be monitored.
The department’s policies with regard to these issues are summarized as follows:
Morning seminars begin at 8:00 AM, with occasional seminars scheduled at other times. Residents
who arrive late may not be allowed to attend. Missing a one-hour seminar is considered a one-hour
unexcused absence. Eight missed seminars may be considered the equivalent of a full day of
unexcused absences to be made up or added to the length of the program and may result in a
delay in awarding the certificate.
The orthodontic department relies on a volunteer staff of orthodontists who donate their valuable
time away from busy practices to come to the Dental School to teach. Some travel great distances
to be at school. Arriving late is discourteous and can be disruptive if a seminar has already begun.
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine Core Courses
Postgraduate residents are required by Tufts University and ADA policy to receive training in
certain areas of basic sciences. Excessive absenteeism, poor performance or failure in these
courses can result in the withholding the certificate. Exceptions will not be made. Exemptions or
auditing of these courses will not be permitted unless there are extenuating circumstances.
Vacation Policies, Sick Leave and Personal Time Off
The Orthodontic Department follows the vacation schedule set by Tufts University. At the discretion
of the chairman, time off for residents to attend professional meetings or continuing education
courses may be permitted. STUDENTS ARE EXPRESSLY FORBIDDEN TO EXTEND THEIR VACATION
PERIODS BEYOND THE LIMITS SET BY THE DEPARTMENT. It is expected that all travel will be
completed within the allotted vacation period. Reservations for transportation should be made far
enough in advance so as to avoid problems. Exceptions may be permitted at the discretion of the
department chairman. Abuse of vacation privileges may reflect poorly on the overall evaluation of
a resident and may result in the withholding the certificate.
A resident who is excessively absent and does not fulfill the minimum hourly ADA requirement for
training will be required to make up any lost time before a certificate is awarded.
The department should be notified of absence from the clinic due to illness. Patients should be
notified and rescheduled in order to avoid his/her appearing in the clinic when the doctor is absent.
The department is aware that each resident requires a certain amount of time to conduct personal
or professional business. This may be especially true during the second year of training when
residents are in the process of finding practice locations. In anticipation of this situation, each
resident will be given personal days at the discretion of the chairman. A written request for these
absences must be submitted to the department manager.
150
Attendance at Professional Meetings and Courses Outside of the University
The department endeavors to provide residents with opportunities to attend courses and lectures
outside of the University. Since other orthodontic programs are available in the New England area,
an attempt will be made to take advantage of such resources to broaden the education of
residents. However, it is important to keep in mind that the majority of a resident’s orthodontic
education will occur within the Tufts department. While we recognize the importance of exposing
residents to other treatment philosophies, teaching the basics of this specialty to Tufts residents
within a two-year program presents a challenge. Excessive time away from the clinic makes the
teaching process that much more difficult. Furthermore, time away from the clinic is time away
from Tufts patients. The Chairman has the sole responsibility for deciding which outside courses
residents will take. RESIDENTS ARE NOT PERMITTED TO SET THEIR OWN AGENDAS IN TERMS OF
SELECTING OUTSIDE COURSES. When arrangements have been made for residents to participate
in an outside program and the clinic is closed, attendance is mandatory. It is the prerogative of
the department to examine residents on material presented at such courses and meetings. If a
resident chooses not to attend a particular course or meeting, he/she is required to be at school
either seeing patients (when faculty are available) or doing other scholarly activities (research
papers, reading, etc.).
Requirements for Promotion and Graduation
 Attendance at scheduled events, seminars, classes, and clinic.
 Faculty Evaluation
 Satisfactory oral and written examinations
 Satisfactory completion of mock board examination (2 nd year)
 Satisfactory completion of research paper (2nd year)
 Satisfactory presentation of 10 cases (2nd year)
 Satisfactory completion of core courses
 Each resident is required to take and pass the Phase II (written) of the American Board of
Orthodontics.
 Completion of all patient transfers following appropriate protocols.
Substandard performance or failure in one or more of these areas may result in the withholding the
certificate until the standards are met.
Assignment of Patients
It is the sole responsibility of the department to assign patients to residents. A system is in place
to assign patients in an orderly and equitable manner. While it is virtually impossible to assure that
every resident will treat every possible type of malocclusion, the department will endeavor to
provide the residents with as broad a base of patients as possible. Residents are NOT permitted to
exchange patients or choose instructors without the express permission of the Chairman and/or the
instructor originally assigned to the case. This includes the transfer of patients from graduating
second-year residents to first year residents. A system exists for the equitable transfer of patients
in this circumstance, and will be outlined at the appropriate time.
Each resident will also be assigned one or more instructors in order to provide exposure to the
broad range of treatment philosophies of our faculty. It is advantageous to work with as many
different instructors as possible. The sole responsibility for patient and instructor assignments rests
with the department staff and faculty. If it becomes necessary to change the day that a patient
comes to the clinic, the problem should be discussed with the instructor assigned to the patient
BEFORE a change can be made. A formal transfer, involving the original instructor should take
place.
From time to time, depending upon the need to attract new patients to the clinic, free screenings
will be scheduled. While an attempt is made to schedule these during normal school hours, it is not
always possible to do so. On these occasions, sessions may be scheduled late in the day or on a
Saturday morning. At these times, residents and faculty may be asked to participate on a rotating
basis.
Patient Records
Patient records are legal documents and are the property of Tufts University School of Dental
151
Medicine. It is University policy that the instructor(s) assigned to the case must sign the recorded
case note at the conclusion of the day's treatment. Faculty signatures are required on all matters
relating to the case, including diagnosis, treatment plan, extraction orders, radiographic surveys,
or any other aspect of treatment. No treatment may be rendered without faculty permission. No
patient may be dismissed from the clinic without a case note signed by the faculty member(s)
assigned to that case. Failure to follow these guidelines could result in legal action against the
Department and/or the University. The University has instituted a paperless system. Appropriate
safeguards and procedures are in place to assure that all required signatures are obtained during
the treatment of our patients.
Each record must contain a fully completed and SIGNED medical history, which should be updated
at least once a year. A signed informed consent form and a truth in lending form are required as
well. All diagnostic records should be present, along with a properly completed yellow treatment
card. In addition, once in place, all information that is required for the department’s computer
database must be entered into the system by the residents.
Furthermore, according to University policy, patient records must remain in the Dental School
building at all times. The Orthodontic Department has a state-of-the-art record storage system.
Records are to be kept in the designated room. Records, model boxes laboratory work and such
may not be kept in individual cubicles and failure to abide by this policy is in direct violation of
HIPAA regulations. Residents are asked to pull out of storage only the records of the patients to be
treated on a particular day. All records must be returned to the storage room at the end of each
day.
Quality of Patient Records
Diagnostic records for orthodontic patients are expected to conform to American Board of
Orthodontics standards. These include properly trimmed, finished, and soaped study casts,
properly oriented and exposed cephalograms, panorexes, periapical and bite-wing radiographs,
properly oriented facial photographs (facial frontal, facial profile, and smiling), and properly
oriented and exposed intraoral photographs. Hard copies (printouts) of digital photographs are
required for case analysis with instructors and for patient/parent case presentations. Records must
be prepared to Board standard before consultation with a faculty member. If records are
incomplete or of substandard quality, the resident will not be allowed to begin treatment until the
records meet the required standard.
Patient records must be available during every patient visit for review by the faculty member(s)
assigned to the case.
Patient Care, Appliance Fabrication and Activation
During the early stage of residency it is important that the faculty closely monitor a resident’s
work. It is necessary for the faculty to check a resident’s work prior to placement and activation of
an appliance in the patient's mouth. This includes but is not limited to the selection of molar
bands, placement of brackets, fabrication of archwires, headgears, intraoral elastics, and other
treatment auxiliaries. All treatment rendered in the clinic must conform to the guidelines set forth
by the ADA requirements for postgraduate education. At no time are residents permitted to render
treatment without faculty supervision. "Rendering treatment" includes, but is not limited to; fitting
molar bands; cementing brackets; fabricating and activating archwires; fabricating, adjusting or
activating headgears or other treatment auxiliaries; removing fixed orthodontic appliances; placing,
adjusting or discontinuing retainer treatment.
Residents are not permitted to schedule patient appointments during scheduled classroom or
seminar time, during scheduled continuing education courses or during professional meetings, or at
any other time when instructors will not be present in the clinic. Residents are not permitted to
schedule patients before or after clinic hours. Normal clinic hours are weekdays 9:00 A.M. to noon,
1:00 to 5:00 P.M. There are no weekend clinic hours. However, residents are permitted to perform
laboratory work at their convenience, including weekends.
A resident who violates these guidelines may be suspended from the clinic.
152
Referral Policy
It is department policy that all patients under active treatment who require adjunctive
procedures be referred by formal written letter. Both the resident and the instructor assigned to
the individual patient for whom the procedure is to be done must sign the letter. In situations
where the instructor on the case is not available, it is permissible to ask another instructor to sign
the letter.
Clinic Facilities and Policies
The Orthodontic Department follows the guidelines for clinic operation set forth by the University
and by the ADA, OSHA and HIPAA regulations. While there are unique aspects to orthodontic care,
the Department expects you to follow these guidelines as closely as is practically possible. Most of
the department’s equipment is expensive and requires constant care. Although the department has
janitorial services, it is the resident’s responsibility to exercise common sense when using clinic
equipment. The last resident to use x-ray equipment at the end of the day is reminded to turn it
off. Certain rooms must be kept locked (i.e. ceph room) after their use. Plaster trimmers must be
cleaned thoroughly after each use. Sterilizing areas and ultrasonic cleaners should be kept neat
and clean. A full-time assistant is in charge of these facilities and has the authority to implement
the department policies in this area.
Operatories are to be kept clean and free of personal supplies. The Infection Control department is
the governing board in this regard and enforces school policy. Any resident who violates these
regulations may be suspended from the clinic.
In keeping with policy guidelines, parents, relatives, and friends of patients are not allowed to
remain in the treatment areas. Anyone accompanying a patient must wait in designated waiting
areas outside the clinic. Should a conference be necessary a patient and parent and /or guardian
may be seen in either the Shapiro Library or the Margolis Room.
Research
All research is to be carried out under the direction of a faculty member who is assigned to the
project. On an individual basis, if a resident wishes to work with a particular faculty member the
resident is required to have approval of the chairman. The faculty member assigned to a project
will act as the Principle Investigator and the resident will act as the Principle Researcher. According
the rules and regulations of the Tufts Medical Center Investigative Research Board (IRB), residents
are not allowed to be the Principle Investigator on any project. It is the responsibility of both the
Principle Investigator and the Principle Researcher of any project to follow the rules and regulations
set forth in the IRB guidelines and HIPAA regulations. This applies especially with regard to seeking
IRB approvals, exemptions etc, for projects. In addition, according to IRB regulations, the
Chairman of the Program is required to maintain files with regard to all research projects. All
research within the department becomes the sole property of the Department of Orthodontics. In
the event material from research projects is published, the Principle Investigator and the Principle
Researcher will receive appropriate credit. The Resident/Principle researcher will be designated as
the Principle Author and the faculty Advisor/Principle Investigator will be second author.
Teaching Responsibilities
As part of their training, residents are expected to participate in the teaching process. The faculty
believes that the experience of teaching adds to the experience of the educational process and
prepares the resident for teaching and lecturing often associated with the private practice of
orthodontics. This aspect of training encompasses teaching at both the pre-doctoral and postdoctoral levels. In the pre-doctoral areas, residents will conduct seminars, from time to time, on
diagnosis and treatment planning. In addition, residents are expected to assist the faculty in
conducting the pre-doctoral laboratory exercises associated with the second year orthodontic
program. In the post-doctoral areas, the second year residents will tutor the first year residents in
certain of the operating systems in the clinic and assist them in clinical procedures as directed by
the faculty.
Clinic Dress Code and General Conduct
Orthodontic residents are expected to appear neat and professional both in and out of the clinic.
Male residents must wear a collared shirt and tie (jacket is not necessary). For female residents,
153
professional dress (pants or skirts, blouses, or dresses) is appropriate. At no time are jeans or
sneakers to be worn. Residents are expected to behave in a professional manner both in clinic
and in other areas of the school.
Supplies
Supplies for the treatment of patients are stored in the front desk business area. The staff is
responsible for maintaining an adequate supply of materials for all residents. Residents are allowed
access to the supplies, but are asked to use discretion when taking what they need for each
appointment. Taking extra supplies, or stocking your own supplies, is costly, deprives other
residents of the supplies they need and is absolutely prohibited. In the event that you see that
stock of an item running low, please inform the staff so that the item can be reordered and
restocked. If items are allowed to be depleted or to run out, it presents a difficulty for other
residents. The staff is here to help the clinic run efficiently and is to be treated with the respect.
Working Outside the Orthodontic Program
Residents with appropriate state licensing have traditionally been allowed to practice general
dentistry in their spare time. Residents with appropriate licensing may also practice dental
hygiene, dental assisting or orthodontic assisting. This permission does not include practicing
orthodontics. Residents are expressly forbidden from practicing orthodontics outside of the
program. Any resident found practicing orthodontics in violation of this rule may be subject to
immediate dismissal.
Due Process
The department of orthodontics follows the procedures and policies of the university with regard to
due process and adjudication of academic and disciplinary complaints. Each resident is encouraged
to read and familiarize himself/herself with the subject of due process in the university student
handbook. The department has its own Committee on Ethics.
Rights and Responsibilities
The student’s responsibilities within the orthodontic department are outlined above. Students in the
orthodontic department have all rights applicable to all students in the dental school as outlined in
the student handbook. Each student is encouraged to read and familiarize himself/herself with
student rights.
Patient Confidentiality (HIPPA)
The orthodontic department abides by the school policies on patient confidentiality. Residents are
requested not to discuss information regarding his/her patients in public areas. Discussions about
patient information should be held quietly within an individual operatory or in a private area away
from the general clinic.
Failure to adhere to the rules of the Department may result in the withholding of the certificate or
dismissal from the Orthodontic Program.
Any questions regarding Orthodontic Department policy should be directed to the Chairman of the
Department.
Departmental Research and Publications
Shalish M, Shusterman S, Will LA. Malposition of unerupted mandibular second premolars in
children with unilateral cleft lip and palate. Angle Orthod 2007; 77:1062-1066.
Giddon DB, Anderson NK, Will LA. Psychological and behavioral responses associated with
mechanical tooth movement. Sem Orthod 2007; 13:212-219.
Ronay V, Miner RM, Will LA, Arai K. Mandibular arch form: the relationship between dental and
basal anatomy. Am J Orthod Dentofac Orthop 2008; 134:430-438.
Berco M, Rigali PH, Miner RM, Anderson NK, Will LA. Accuracy and reliability of linear cephalometric
measurements obtained from cone beam computed tomography scans of a dry human skull. In
press, Am J Orthod Dentofac Orthop, 2009.
154
Lamichane M, Rigali PH, Anderson NK, Will LA. A comparison of linear and angular measurements
from compressed cone beam CT scans and traditional cephalograms. In Press, Am J Orthod
Dentofac Orthop 2009.
Ball R, Arai K, Will LA, Miner RM. Comparison of the dental and basal arch forms in Class I and
Class II patients Accepted for publication, Am J Orthod Dentofac Orthop, 2008.
Berco M, DeLuca S, Rigali PH, Miner RM, Giddon DB, Anderson NK, Will LA. A Protocol for
Orienting CBCT Scans into Natural Head Position. In revision, American Journal of Orthodontics
and Dentofacial Orthopedics.
Suri, L. Huang, G. English, J.D. Jr. Owen, S. Nah, H.D. Riolo, M.L. Shroff, B. Southard, T.E. Turpin
DL. Topical fluoride treatment. American Journal of Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics.
135(5):561-3, 2009 May.
Hardy, T.C. Suri, L. Stark, P. Influence of patient head positioning on measured axial tooth
inclination in panoramic radiography. Journal of Orthodontics. (in press)
Marshall, S.D., English, J. Huang, G.J. Messersmith, M.L. Nah, H. Riolo, M.L. Shroff, B. Southard
T.E., Suri, L. Turpin, D.L. Long-term stability of maxillary expansion. American Journal of
Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 133(6):780-1, 2008 Jun.
Bindayel, N. Ullbro, C. Suri, L. Al-Farra, E. Cephalometric Findings in Patients with Papillon-Lefèvre
Syndrome. American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 134(1):138-44, 2008
Jul.
Suri, L. Damoulis, P.D. Le, T. Gagari, E. Expression of MMP-13 (Collagenase-3) in Long Term
Cultures of Human Dental Pulp Cells. Archives of Oral Biology. 53 (2008): 791-799.
Huber, K.L. Suri, L. Taneja, P. Eruption Disturbances of the Maxillary Incisors: A Literature Review.
Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry. 32(3): 221-230, 2008.
Suri, L. Taneja, P. Surgically Assisted Rapid Palatal Expansion-A Literature Review. American
Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 133(2):290-302, 2008 Feb.
Fooladi, B. MacCarthy, T. Maloney, T. Suri, L. Category 4: Class II Division 2 Deep Overbite
Malocclusion. American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 132(2):252-9, 2007
Aug.
Suri, L. Gagari, E. Vastardis, H. Delayed Tooth Eruption: Pathogenesis, Diagnosis and Treatment- A
Literature Review. American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 126(4):432-45,
2004 Oct.
Commentaries:
2006:
de Almeida-Pedrin RR. Pinzan A. de Almeida RR. Ursi W. de Almeida MR. Panoramic
evaluation of mesiodistal axial inclinations of maxillary anterior teeth in orthodontically treated
subjects. American Journal of Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics. 130(1):56-60; discussion
60-1, 2006 Jul.
155
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN PEDIATRIC DENTISTRY
The Advanced two year Certificate Program in Pediatric Dentistry trains dentists in the specialty in
accordance with the guidelines set forth by the American Dental Association and the American
Academy of Pediatric Dentistry. In order to fulfill the mission, the student is educated in the
biomedical sciences and the supporting clinical sciences to the extent that the student is proficient
in providing both primary and comprehensive preventive and therapeutic oral health care for
infants and children through adolescence, including those with special health care needs.
The didactic experiences include course work in the basic and clinical sciences, seminar and
laboratory sessions, an independent, written research project presented to the faculty, and
preparing for the written examination of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry. The clinical
sciences include: outreach community services, operating room services, anesthesia, adolescent
dentistry, pediatrics, medically compromised patients, conscious sedation, hospital dentistry, and
presenting clinical cases to the standards of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry.
Overall, we wish to produce clinically proficient and scientifically adept graduates capable of
diagnosing and treating all types of pediatric patients encountered in specialty practice.
A Master of Science Program is offered for an additional year and includes some of the courses
offered in the Certificate Program.
Academic Courses
 Head and Neck Anatomy
 Pharmacology
 Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology
 Biostatistics 1A & 1B
 Research Methodology
 Applied Nutrition
 Oral Microbiology
 Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
 Bone Biology
 Immunology
 TMJ Disorders
 Occlusion
Departmental Courses
 Craniofacial Growth and Development
 Preventive and Interceptive Orthodontics
 Special Health Care Needs
 Hospital Dentistry
 Conscious Sedation
 Infant Oral Health
 Speech and Language Pathology
 Dental Management of Traumatic Injuries
 Applied Behavior Management
 Pediatric Dentistry Journal Review
 Practice Management
 Clinical Science Core Courses
 Pediatric Dentistry Restorative
 Adolescent Dentistry
 Scientific Methodology/Writing for Research (instead of Airway Management)
 Case Presentation Seminars
 Diagnosis and Treatment Planning
 Theory and Practice of Pediatric Dentistry
156
Department Administration
Stanley A. Alexander, D.M.D.
Professor and Chair
617-636-3898
M. Buchan Power
Staff Assistant
617-636-6902
Program Faculty
Stanley A. Alexander, D.M.D.
Dr. Alexander is Chairman and a tenured professor of the Department of Pediatric Dentistry. He
received his DMD degree from Tufts University and a Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Harvard
University and the Children’s Hospital Medical Center, Boston. He received a Certificate in
Orthodontics from Columbia University. He is a Diplomate of both the American Board of Pediatric
Dentistry and the American Board of Orthodontics.
Dr. Alexander taught at the School of Dental Medicine, Stony Brook University for 28 years, where
he chaired the Department of Children’s Dentistry, and founded the postdoctoral program in
Orthodontics. At Stony Brook, he carried the titles of Distinguished Teaching Professor, (1996) and
Distinguished Service Professor (2006), before he returned to Tufts University to chair the
department. He is also a consultant in the Department of Dental & Oral Surgery at Brookdale
University Hospital Medical Center, Brooklyn, New York.
He has authored more than 60 articles in professional journals and has given many continuing
education courses locally, regionally, and nationally.
Laura Camacho-Castro, D.D.S.
Dr. Camacho-Castro is associate clinical professor. She received her D.D.S. degree from the
University of Puebla, Mexico and specialty training in Pediatric Dentistry from Tufts University. She
is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry. Dr. Camacho-Castro has taught at
Tufts University for more than 15 years and is currently the director of the Medically Compromised
Patient Clinic. She has consulted in over a dozen children’s health care agencies and Outreach
activities regarding dental disease and helped with the inception of the Tufts “Baby” Clinic. She has
authored many articles in the pediatric dental literature and has presented numerous lectures and
continuing education courses at professional national and international meetings.
Leonard Carapezza, D.M.D.
Dr. Carapezza is an associate clinical professor in the Department of Pediatric Dentistry. He
received his DMD degree from the University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey and a
certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Harvard University and The Children’s Hospital Medical
Center, Boston. Dr. Carapezza is a contributing editor to the Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry
and has published numerous articles on Pediatric Malocclusion. He gives courses nationally and
internationally on “Early Treatment of Malocclusion” and is a recognized leader in this area of
Pediatric Dentistry. His experience, knowledge and expertise are shared with the pediatric graduate
students along with maintaining an active private pediatric practice in Wayland, MA.
William B. Chan, D.M.D.
Dr. Chan is an assistant clinical professor and part-time member of the Department of Pediatric
Dentistry. He received his D.M.D. and Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Tufts University.
Dr. Chan has a special interest in malocclusion early intervention and is actively engaged in private
practice in the state of Rhode Island.
Jessica Chiang, B.D.S., M.S.
Dr. Chiang is assistant professor in the Department of Pediatric Dentistry and director of predoctoral pediatric dentistry. She is a Diplomate of the American Board of pediatric Dentistry.
157
Dr. Chiang’s clinical interests are in the treatment of cleft palate in newborns.
Stuart S. Gould, D.M.D.
Dr. Gould is an assistant clinical professor and part-time member of the Department of Pediatric
Dentistry. He received his D.M.D. degree from Tufts University, his Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry
from Tufts-New England Medical Center, and a Fellowship Certificate in Dental Anesthesia from Mt.
Sinai Medical Center, New York. He holds multiple consultant positions at various hospitals in
Massachusetts. Dr. Gould’s primary responsibility to the department is in the supervision of the
sedation clinic in the postdoctoral program.
Mohammed Hassan, B.D.S., M.S.
Dr. Hassan is an assistant professor in pediatric dentistry and a Diplomate of the American Board
of Pediatric Dentistry. He received his B.D.S from the College of Dental Surgery, Karnaoaka, India
and his M.S. degree and certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Tufts University.
Shiow-Jiin Jaw, D.M.D
Dr. Jaw is an assistant clinical professor in the Department of Pediatric Dentistry. She received her
dental degree from the School of Dentistry College of Oral Medicine, Taipei Medical University, and
her Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Tufts University. Her research interests are in the field of
palatal expansion and skeletal anatomy of the face. She is a Diplomate of the American Board of
Pediatric Dentistry.
Maria Kritsineli, D.M.D.
Dr. Kritsineli is an Assistant Clinical Professor in Pediatric Dentistry. She received her DDS degree
from Aristoteleion University, Greece and her Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry and DMD degree
from Tufts University. She is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry. She is
currently the Dental Director of the Cotting School and Nashoba Learning Center. Dr. Kritsineli has
published in the professional journals and has a special interest in Caries Prevention and Preventive
and Interceptive Orthodontics. Dr. Kritsineli is engaged in part-time teaching and maintains a
private practice in Plymouth, MA.
Cheen Y. Loo, B.D.S., Ph.D., M.P.H., D.M.D
Dr. Loo is associate professor in Pediatric Dentistry and Post-doctoral program director. She
received her dental degree from Tufts University, Ph.D. degree from the University of Sydney and
her MPH and Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Boston University. She has authored more than
a dozen professional articles in the scientific journals with a research interest in microbiology. She
is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry.
Nooruddin S. Pradhan, B.D.S., D.M.D., M.S.
Dr. Pradhan is an assistant professor in Pediatric Dentistry. He received his B.D.S. degree from
Liaquat Medical College, Pakistan and his D.M.D., M.S. and Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from
Tufts University. He also holds a fellowship certificate in craniomandibular joint disorders from Tufts
University. Dr. Pradhan is a well-sought speaker on TMJ disorders and has an active research
interest in cariology. He is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry.
Alfred P. Rich, D.M.D., M.D.S.
Dr. Rich is an associate clinical professor and part-time member of the Department of Pediatric
Dentistry. He received his D.M.D. degree, M.D.S., and Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from the
University of Pittsburgh. He has authored multiple publications in the professional literature and
has special research interest in nasal and oral airways. He also has the responsibility for monitoring
the status of the research projects for the postdoctoral program.
Meletia Laskou, D.D.S., D.M.D.
Dr. Laskou is an associate clinical professor and a part-time member of the Department of Pediatric
Dentistry. She received her D.D.S. degree from Aristotle University, Greece and her D.M.D. and
Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from Tufts University. Dr. Laskou is a Diplomate of the American
Board of Pediatric Dentistry. She has authored publications in professional journals; was the former
158
director of the pre-doctoral program; has been engaged in private practice; and teaching in the
department for the past 15 years.
Joseph O’Donell, D.M.D., M.S.
Dr. O’Donnell is an associate clinical professor and a part-time member of the Department of
Pediatric Dentistry. He received his D.M.D. from the University of Pittsburgh, School of Dental
Medicine and his M.S. degree from Tufts University. Dr. O’Donnell has dedicated an important part
of his professional life to children with special needs. He has authored multiple publications in
professional journals, is the former director of the GPR program and is engaged in part-time
teaching and private practice. Dr. O’Donnell is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric
Dentistry.
Arnold Weiss, D.D.S., M.S.
Dr. Weiss is an assistant clinical professor at Tufts University. He received his D.D.S. degree from
New York University College of Dentistry. He received his postdoctoral and his Master of Science
degree in Pediatric Dentistry from Boston University. He has a special interest in the area of Infant
Oral Health, and non-pharmacological behavior management of children. He lectures nationally and
internationally on all aspect of pediatric dental care, personal growth, and the business of
dentistry. Dr. Weiss is actively engaged in private practice and on the Council on Clinical Affairs of
the Academy of Pediatric Dentistry which establishes the clinical guidelines for pediatric
dental care.
David Tesini, D.M.D., M.S.
Dr. Tesini is an Associate Clinical Professor in the Department of Pediatric Dentistry.
He received his D.M.D. degree from Tufts University and his Pediatric Dentistry postdoctoral degree
from Tufts University. He was inducted into fellowship in the Royal College of Surgeons of
Edinburgh, Scotland in 2001. Dr. Tesini has numerous publications in the areas of prevention,
behavior management and patients with disabilities. Dr. Tesini is engaged in part-time teaching
and maintains a private practice in Natick, MA
Gary Warrington, D.M.D.
Dr. Warrington is an Assistant Clinical professor at Tufts University. He received his D.M.D. degree
from Tufts University and his Pediatric Dentistry degree from New England Medical Center Hospital.
He is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric Dentistry and teaches part-time at Tufts
University. Dr. Warrington maintains a private practice in Winchester, MA and has published
multiple articles related to special health care needs children.
Serena Kassam, D.M.D.
Dr. Kassam is an assistant clinical professor in the Department of Pediatric Dentistry. She received
her D.M.D. degree from Tufts University and her Certificate in Pediatric Dentistry from St. Joseph’s
Hospital, Providence, Rhode Island. She is a Diplomate of the American Board of Pediatric
Dentistry. Her research and clinical interests are in the field of hospital dentistry and the early
treatment of cleft lip and palate.
Christina Zervou, D.M.D., MSc
Dr. Zervou is currently an adjunct assistant professor. She received her doctor of dentistry degree
from Semmelweis University, her certificate in Pediatric Dentistry, D.M.D and MSc degrees from
Tufts University. Dr. Zervou has delivered several professional presentations, pubished multiple
papers and has received many awards for her studies. She is a member of multiple American and
European professional and scientific organizations. She has a special interest in Infant Oral Health
Care, Pediatric Esthetic Dentistry and Preventive & Interceptive Orthodontics.
Diba Dastjerdi, D.D.S., D.M.D.
Dr. Dastjerdi received her DDS degree and certificate in pediatric dentistry from Behesti University,
Tehran, Iran and a DMD from Tufts University. She is a clinical instructor in the Department of
Pediatric dentistry. She possesses extensive clinical experience in oral health education and
prevention. Dr. Dastjerdi has written multiple articles related to caries prevalence and received
multiple awards for her academic achievements.
159
Martin Kaplan, D.M.D.
Dr. Kaplan is a clinical instructor in the Department of Pediatric Densitry. He received his DMD
degree from Tufts University and his certificate in pediatric dentistry from the Montefiore Hospital
and Medical Center, New York. His interests are in the area of laser dentistry.
Nour Gowharji, D.D.S.
Dr. Nour Gowharji is a clinical instructor in the department of pediatric dentistry. She received her
DDS from King Abdul Aziz University Jeddah, Saudi Arabia in 2003. She then received her
certificate in pediatric dentistry from Tufts University school of Dental Medicine in 2006. She
became board certified in 2007, and a Diplomate of the American board of pediatric dentistry. She
has numerous publications on assessing skeletal growth and maturity and interests in growth and
development.
Virginia Burns, R.D.H, B.S.
Ms. Virginia Burns is a registered Dental Hygienist with degrees in Biology and Psychology. She
received her dental hygiene degree from the Forsyth School for Dental Hygiene in Boston. Ms.
Burns has extensive experience in children and adolescent oral health education. She is actively
involved in pediatric dentistry outreach and community service, and was involved in the inception
of the Baby Clinic and strengthening the relationships between the Tufts Medical Center
Department of General Pediatrics and the Tufts Pediatric Dentistry Asian Clinic. In 2004, Ms. Burns
was the first dental hygienist to receive membership in the American Academy of Pediatric
Dentistry.
Promotion and Graduation Requirements
Postdoctoral students are required to pass annual written, oral, and clinical promotional
examinations. Research is a requirement of the program and culminates in a written and oral
presentation.
Departmental policies
The 2 year certificate program is in session 12 months a year. Attendance at all functions is a
requirement. Vacation schedules match that of the School of Dental Medicine; however,
postdoctoral students are required to take emergency call which may interfere with scheduled
vacation time. Attendance at scientific and professional meetings of the specialty is strongly
suggested, while presentation of student research at these meetings is encouraged.
160
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN PERIODONTOLOGY
Basic Program Information
It is the mission of the Department of Periodontology to train dentists in the specialty of
periodontology in accordance with the guidelines set forth by the American Dental Association
Commission on Dental Accreditation for advanced education in periodontology and the American
Academy of Periodontology. Further, it is our mission to train dentists being qualified to become
board certified periodontists upon graduation. Within the Tufts University School Dental Medicine,
the Department of Periodontology educates postdoctoral students to a level of competency in the
arts and science of this discipline and to a level of expertise and leadership in the field. In addition,
the Department strives to create an environment, which nurtures the ideals of professional service.
In support of this, the Department of Periodontology provides a diverse didactic, clinical, and
research curriculum that enables the postdoctoral students to recognize clinical health and
periodontal pathology. They are trained to utilize a critical thought process to select appropriate
therapy in the best interest of the patients. Moreover, a clear understanding of various current and
emerging technologies applied in periodontal therapy will be provided at every stage of their
education. The Department faculty will enable the postdoctoral students to understand the
rationale for utilization of periodontal therapy in clinical practice. Postdoctoral students are
provided the theory and practice to perform a wide spectrum of periodontal and implant
procedures. In addition, the Department creates a learning environment where postdoctoral
students develop diagnostic skills and have an opportunity to perform non-surgical and surgical
treatments. Utilizing a private practice model, the Department promotes a symbiotic relationship
between future general dentists and future periodontists. This model facilitates a better
understanding of when to refer therapy to a specialist or when that treatment can be provided by
the general practitioner.
The Department has established a teaching and mentoring philosophy among the postdoctoral
students in their relationships to each other and to the predoctoral students. The postdoctoral
students are encouraged to interact in a mentoring fashion with the predoctoral students. These
interactions occur during the pre-doctoral student rotations in the graduate clinic as well as when
the postdoctoral students are teaching on the pre-doctoral clinic floor. The program also includes
the development of teaching skills both in the classroom as well as with regard to clinical
instruction. The graduate students are trained on how to prepare lectures both in the university
setting as well as for presentations related to professional meetings.
In the interview process, the Chair/Postdoctoral Director sets out five specific goals for every
graduate of the program that graduates of the program are expected to be competent in
periodontology, surgical implantology, teaching, research, and lecturing. Specific programs and
training are in place to accomplish all of these goals. Progress towards these goals is evaluated at
specific points during the program.
Through its talented faculty, diverse curriculum, and competent students, the Department of
Periodontology will be recognized for producing highly skilled clinical periodontists. The
Department works collaboratively with colleagues in general dentistry and the other specialties and
provides effective administration to ensure a patient and student centered environment.
Department Administration
Dr. James B. Hanley
Interim Chair
(617) 636-6531
[email protected]
Therese Kohlman
161
Department Administrator
(617) 636-6531
Fax: (617) 636-0911
[email protected]
Website: http://www.tufts.edu/dental/departments/perio.html
Program Faculty
James B. Hanley, D.M.D. is currently Associate Dean for Clinical Affairs and Associate Professor
of Periodontology at Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. In addition, he was appointed
Chair ad interim of the Department of Periodontology as of March 1, 2012. Dr. Hanley received his
Bachelor of Arts in Natural Science from Assumption College, his D.M.D. and Certificate of
Advanced Education in Periodontology from Tufts.
Dr. Hanley has been a long standing faculty member who has also served in a number of
administrative roles including, Director of Periodontal Clinic Administration, Assistant Dean for
Clinical Affairs and Associate Dean for Clinical Services. Over the years he has served on most
committees at the Dental School and currently chairs three of the school’s standing committees. As
a key member of the Electronic Health Record (Axium) implementation team he contributed to the
effort that enabled Tufts to go “paperless” in 2004.
In addition to being a member of the American Dental Education Association, Dr Hanley is an active
member of the American Dental Association, the American Academy of Periodontology and the
Massachusetts Periodontal Society. He is also a Diplomate of the American Board of
Periodontology and a Fellow of the American College of Dentists, the International College of
Dentists and the American Academy of Dental Science. Recently he received the Tufts University
Provost’s Award for Teaching and Service
Dr. Timothy Hempton is an Associate Clinical Professor at Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine and serves as the Interim Director of the postdoctoral program in Periodontology. He is a
Diplomate of the American Board of Periodontology and presently serves as a consultant for the
American Dental Association Commission on Dental Accreditation. Dr. Hempton has also served as
member of the Education Committee and the Dental Hygiene Committee for the American Academy
of Periodontology. Dr. Hempton is also listed on the AAP's list of recommended speakers for the
topics of non-surgical and surgical periodontal therapy.
Dr. Hempton is a fellow of the American College of Dentists, a member of the
Pierre Fauchard Academy and a recipient of the 2005 American Academy of Periodontology
Teaching and Mentoring award at Tufts University. In 2011, he received the Clinician of the year
award from the Yankee Dental Congress. He also maintains a private practice limited to
Periodontics and Dental Implants in Dedham, Massachusetts
Dr. Wai S. Cheung is an Associate Professor and has been teaching at Tufts since 2002. She
received the D.M.D. Degree, completed her residency in periodontics in the Department of
Periodontology and earned a Master of Science Degree from the graduate school of Tufts
University. Prior to that Dr. Cheung earned her first dental degree from National Yang-Ming
University, Taipei, Taiwan, worked as a general practitioner and later a training fellow in the
section of Periodontics at Taipei Chang-Gung Memorial hospital. She is a Diplomate of the
American Board of Periodontology and a reviewer for the Journal of Periodontology. Currently, Dr.
Cheung is also the President of the Massachusetts Periodontal Society.
Patricia A. Cohen is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the faculty for
seven years. She graduated from the University of Pennsylvania, School of Dental Medicine,
Department of Oral Hygiene. She earned a Bachelor of Science in Health Management at
Northeastern University and a Master of Science Degree in Health Communications from Tufts
University School of Medicine. Patricia has over 35 years of experience in private practice.
162
Dr. Richard S. Doff is an Assistant Clinical Professor and has been teaching at Tufts since 1999.
He received his D.M.D. degree from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine in 1972. He then
practiced general dentistry in the U.S. Air Force for two years. In 1976, he earned his post
graduate certificate in Periodontics and M.S. degree from The Ohio State University College of
Dentistry. In 2010 he retired from the private practice of Periodontics in Needham.
Dr. Charles E. Hawley received his dental degree from the University of Pennsylvania and his
Ph.D. from the University of Maryland. He is currently Clinical Professor, Department of
Periodontology, Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. Previously, Dr. Hawley was Professor of
Periodontics and Microbiology at the Dental School, University of Maryland where he was director of
the post-graduate program in periodontics and was a Colonel in the US Army Dental Corps where
was director of the residency program in periodontics. Dr. Hawley was awarded the Legion
of Merit from the U.S. Army and appointed Professor Emeritus by the University of Maryland. Dr.
Hawley is a Diplomate of the American Board of Periodontology and was elected to the American
College of Dentist, the International College of Dentists, and the Pierre Fauchard Academy.
Dr. Yong Hur received his D.M.D., Periodontal certificate, and Master of Science degree from Tufts
University. He is a Diplomate of the American Board of Periodontology. He has been actively
involved with periodontal research on guided bone regeneration and implant. He currently serves a
reviewer for the Journal of Periodontology and Clinical Advances in Periodontics.
Dr. Natalie Jeong is Assistant Clinical Professor and has been on faculty since 2000. She received
her Bachelor of Science Degree (Biology) and Bachelor of Arts Degree (Psychology) from
Northeastern University. She earned her D.M.D. and her Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts
University. She is a Diplomate of American Board of Periodontology and currently teaches in both
pre-doctoral program and the post-doctoral program. She is a director of Lincoln Dental Study Club
and maintains a full-time private practice limited to Periodontics and Implant surgery in Lincoln,
Massachusetts.
Dr. Paul A. Levi, Jr. is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been teaching at Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine since July, 2003. Prior to that, he taught for nine years at Harvard
School of Dental Medicine. He received his Bachelor of Science Degree from St. Lawrence
University in 1962, a D.M.D. from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine in 1966 and his Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts University in 1971. He is a
Diplomate of the American Board of Periodontology and maintains a private practice in Burlington,
Vermont. He is President of the American Academy of Periodontology Foundation and an examiner
for the American Board of Periodontology.
Dr. Yumi Ogata earned a Certificate in Periodontology and a Master of Science Degree from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine. She is currently an Instructor and teaches in both predoctoral program and the post-doctoral program as a full-time faculty member at Tufts University
School of Dental Medicine. She maintains a part-time practice limited to Periodontics and Implant
surgery in Tufts faculty practice (Tufts Dental Associates).
Dr. Evangelos Papathanasiou is currently a Clinical Instructor and has been a member of the
faculty of the Department of Periodontology since September 2011. He earned a Certificate in
Periodontology and a Master of Science Degree from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine in
June 2011. Dr. Papathanasiou received his dental degree (D.D.S.) from the School of Dentistry of
the Aristotle University of Thessaloniki in Greece. He currently teaches in both pre-doctoral and
the post-doctoral program and participates in several ongoing research projects.
Dr. Andreas Parashis is currently an Assistant Professor in the Department of Periodontology at
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. He received his DDS from the National University of
Athens, Greece, his Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts University and his Doctorate Degree
from the Department of Periodontology, University of Athens, Greece. He is a Diplomate of the
American Board of Periodontology, has authored articles in the International and Greek Journals
and has lectured extensively in seminars and meetings. Dr. Parashis taught for nine years parttime at the University of Athens, was the president, for two terms, of the Hellenic Society of
163
Periodontology and the representative of the society at the European Federation of Periodontology
for ten years. He maintains a part-time private practice limited to Periodontics since 1987 in
Athens, Greece.
Dr. David Rosen is an Assistant Clinical Professor in post-graduate periodontology and has been a
member of the periodontal faculty since 1978. He earned a Bachelor of Science from Syracuse
University, a DMD and Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine, a Master of Education from Boston College and a Master of Business Administration from
Northeastern University. He is a Diplomate of the American Board of Periodontology and the
American Board of Dental Sleep Medicine and maintains a private practice west of Boston.
Dr. Robert J. Rudy received a D.M.D. degree in 1970 from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine. From 1970-1972, he practiced general dentistry in the USAF and pediatric dentistry in
1973 for the city of Boston, Dept. of Public Health. He received in 1975 a post-graduate certificate
in Periodontology from the University of Washington. In September 1975, he joined the faculty of
the department of Periodontology. He was named Associate Clinical Professor in 1985 and Director
of Pre-Doctoral Periodontology in 1995. He maintains a part-time practice in Brookline, MA.
Dr. Tannaz Shapurian is an Associate Clinical Professor and has been a member of the
Periodontology faculty since 2000. She received a BA degree from Bucknell University (Lewisburg,
PA), a D.M.D. and Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts University School of Dental Medicine. In
addition, she received a Master of Science degree from Tufts. Dr. Shapurian is a Diplomate of the
American Board of Periodontology and maintains a private practice limited to Periodontology &
Implants in Boston, MA.
Dr. Esther Wilkins is a Clinical Professor and has been a member of the Department of
Periodontology since 1966. She earned her Bachelor of Science degree from Simmons College,
Boston and her D.M.D. and Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts University School of Dental
Medicine.
Dr. S. Samantha Yamamoto is Assistant Clinical Professor and has been a member of the
periodontal faculty since 1992. She earned D.M.D. and Certificate in Periodontology from Tufts
University School of Dental Medicine. She maintains full-time private practice in Newton and works
as part-time research advisor for private bio-medical research laboratory. She is a Diplomate of the
American Board of Periodontology
Coursework
Interdepartmental Courses
Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology
Management of the Medically Compromised Dental Patient
Clinico-Pathologic Conferences in Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology
Biostatistics IA--Introduction to Biostatistics
Biostatistics IB--Principles of Biostatistics
Principles and Guidelines in Research Involving Human Subjects
Implant Dentistry
Occlusion
From Essential Oral Epidemiology to Scientific Inquiry
Principles of Cellular & Molecular Biology
Oral Microbiology
Advanced Head & Neck Anatomy
Multidisciplinary Approach to the Diagnosis & Management of TMD and Orofacial Pain
Dental Pharmacology
Immunology
Hypnosis Suggestion & the Placebo Response
Bone Biology
Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning
Sedation and Pain Control
164
Medicine (lecture & practicum)
Research Methods & Modalities
Oral Biology I & II
Departmental Courses
Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar
Course Director: Dr. H. Hirayama, Dr. T. Hempton, Dr. D. Green
Monday 8:00-9:30 AM. September through June (Fall and Spring semester)
Course Description:
This course is mandatory for all students enrolled in the Advanced Education Programs in
Endodontics, Periodontology, and Prosthodontics. Postgraduate students from other disciplines
such as Esthetic Dentistry, Implantology, Orthodontics, Pedodontics, TMJ/Myofascial, etc. are
invited and strongly welcome. Faculty participants represent their respective specialties and are
chosen for their experience and interest in this course, as well as for their scheduled availability.
A Surgical Literature Review in Periodontology and Implantology
Course Director: P. Rory O’Neill B.D.S.,D.M.D.,M.Sc.
Wednesday: 8:00-8:50 AM, September through July
Course Goals and Objectives
 To study in depth recent original reports in the art and science of periodontology.
 To use current literature as a “spring-board” to related or applicable background articles.
 To provide a forum where residents may discuss current literature as it may affect the
current/accepted rationale for clinical periodontology.
 To give residents an opportunity to display, in addition to knowledge, understanding of a
given topic in periodontology. To paraphrase an axiom in education: The half-life of
knowledge is approximately 30 days. The half-life of understanding in infinite. To
teach requires understanding.
Literature Review: Periodontology and Dental Implants
Course Director: Dr. Timothy J. Hempton
Additional course faculty: Dr. Charles E. Hawley and Dr. Paul Levi
Monday: 10:00 a.m.-12:00 noon; September through July
Course Description
This is a departmental course intended for first year and second year postdoctoral periodontology
students. The course is a review of the periodontics and implant literature from early classic
articles to current publications. Reading assignments are provided at the beginning of each
semester. In addition, selected handouts are provided throughout the course.
Evidence Based Periodontology and Implant therapy
Course Directors: Dr. Timothy J. Hempton and Dr. Terrence Griffin,
Wednesdays 10:00 a.m.–12:00 noon; September through July
Course Description
This is a departmental course intended for first and second year periodontology graduate students.
Reading assignments will be available on TUSK. In addition, selected handouts will be provided
throughout the course. The course meets every Monday for two hours. Each lecture includes a 10
minute break.
The course includes an examination at the end of the fall term and the end of the summer term.
The AAP in-in service examination is conducted at the end of the spring term.
A Review of Current Literature in Periodontology
Course Director: Charles E. Hawley, D.D.S., Ph.D.
Thursday 8:00–8:50 a.m. September through July
Course Goals and Objectives
165




To study in depth recent original reports in the art and science of periodontology.
To use current literature as a “spring-board” to related or applicable background articles.
To provide a forum where residents may discuss current literature as it may affect the
current/accepted rationale for clinical periodontology.
To give residents an opportunity to display, in addition to knowledge, understanding of a
given topic in periodontology. To paraphrase an axiom in education: The half-life of
knowledge is approximately 30 days. The half-life of understanding in infinite. To
teach requires understanding.
Periodontal Surgery and Morbidity Seminar
Course Director: Dr. Walter H. Meinzer, II
Fridays 8:00-8:50 AM, September through July
Course Description
This is a departmental seminar intended for first/second/third year postgraduate periodontology
students. Relevant course materials (guidelines, presentation schedules) are provided by e-mail or
as handouts directly to the participants. Each seminar session consists of two 20 minute
presentations by an assigned presenter. The format of each presentation is digital projection with
oral presentation supported by pertinent history, clinical findings, clinical photography,
radiographs, narrative and references. Each presentation is followed by an open forum discussion
(guided by the seminar faculty) requiring participation by all students in the seminar. The
presenter has 10 minutes to answer questions from faculty and students. The presenter’s role is to
offer the rationale for the provided treatment as well as decisions made regarding the execution of
the surgical procedure. The students are advised that one of the presented cases should have
included significant challenges which may have resulted in a less than ideal outcome. Problems and
confounding factors associated with this case serve as a springboard to discuss alternative options
for surgical design. The analysis of negative outcomes is a critical component of the discussion.
Students are encouraged to present and examine any problems noted in the utilized techniques
and elaborate on ideas for improvement.
Clinical Instruction
The students spend approximately 60 percent of their time engaged in clinical activity. These
include diagnostic, non-surgical and surgical therapy. The average student also places over one
hundred implant fixtures during the three month period. The graduating students are well
experienced in all forms of soft and hard tissue grafting as well as periodontal plastic surgery. In
addition, residents receive extensive training and experience in site preparation for implants
including soft tissue preparation, sinus lifting procedures, and ridge augmentation.
Promotion and Graduation Requirements
Students are required to successfully pass all departmental and interdepartmental courses. In
addition, the students are required to satisfactorily perform and complete the three final case
presentations at the end of the program. Students are expected to attain all grades of B or above
on all interdepartmental and departmental courses.
Clinically, students have a mandatory attendance policy for the entire three year period of the
residency. If a student misses more than five days yearly in addition to the seven weeks of
vacation per year, the student will be required to repeat the year. The students are required to
place a minimum of 55 implant fixtures and perform 300 periodontal surgical procedures during the
three year program.
Departmental Research and Publications
The department fosters an atmosphere of ongoing, vibrant, and current clinical research. To that
end, a completed clinical research project is required of each graduating resident. The department
has a final case research day where each third year student presents the completed project in
166
which they were involved. Many faculty are also currently pursing clinical research in a variety of
different aspect of periodontology or implantology.
The department is currently involved in several areas of clinical research. The department faculty
is extensively involved with the use of platelet rich plasma in both hard and soft tissue grafting and
wound healing. Currently, the department is involved in projects using a piezoelectric device,
three different types of membranes and several bone grafting materials. There is also some current
research activity exploring the perio-systemic link between periodontal disease and several
systemic disease entities. A sample list of recent publications by the department is listed below.
Shapurian, T., Damoulis, P.D., Reiser, G.M., Griffin, T.J. and Rand, W.M. Quantitative evaluation of
bone density using the Hounsfield index. International Journal of Oral and Maxillofacial Implants
21: 290-297, 2006
Drakos D.E., Griffin, T.J., Damoulis, P.D. (2006) Root coverage of multiple recessions with an
acellular dermal matrix. Clinical approach (Greek - Odostomatologiki Proodos)
Odontostomatological Progress; 60(3)
Gagari, E., Rand, M.K., Tayari, L., Vastardis, H., Sharma, P., Hauschka, P.V. and Damoulis, P.D.
(2006) Expression of stem cell factor and its receptor, c-kit, in oral mesenchymal cells. European
Journal of Oral Sciences 114:409-415
Griffin, T.J., Cheung, W.S., Zavras, A.I., and Damoulis, P.D. (2006) Postoperative Complications
Following Gingival Augmentation Procedures. Journal of Periodontology 77:2070-2079
Griffin, T.J., Engler-Hamm, D., and Cheung, W.S. (2006) Staged Periodontal Plastic Surgery in the
Management of Patients with Complex Dental Problems. Dentistry Today 25(11): 126-129.
Al-Khabbaz, A.K., Griffin, T.J., and Al-Shammari, K.F. (2007) Assessment of Pain Associated with
the Surgical Placement of Dental Implants. Journal of Periodontology 78 :2, 239-246.
Yen, C.A., Griffin, T.J., Cheung, W.S., and Chen, J. (2007) Effects of Platelet Concentrate on Palatal
Wound Healing After Connective Tissue Graft Harvesting. Journal of Periodontology 78 : 4, 601610.
Ferriol, M., Cheung, W.S., Griffin, T.J. (2007) Oral Mini-Implants to Facilitate Orthodontic
Movement of Teeth. Dentistry Today 26(6): 114-119
Hempton, T.J., Nart, J., and Likhari, V. (2007) Restoring Periodontal Support : A Review of Why,
When, and How Inside Dentistry. 3(6)1-8.
Other Departmental policies
The Department of Periodontology also has competency examinations that each student must
complete satisfactorily for promotion or graduation from the program. There are also three final
case presentations encompassing a definitive periodontal case, implant therapy, and a clinical
research project.
All students are required to be involved in a clinical case or research project wh which will result in
a presentation and a publication. It is an objective of the Department to graduate students who
will become active in speaking, teaching and publications as well as becoming master clinicians.
167
DEPARTMENT OF PROSTHODONTICS & OPERATIVE DENTISTRY
ADVANCED EDUCATION PROGRAM IN PROSTHODONTICS
Basic Program Information
Tufts University Postgraduate Prosthodontics has been one of the leaders among Postgraduate
Prosthodontics programs in the nation and known in strength in clinic and laboratory fields.
Complete denture, esthetics and fixed ceramo-metal prosthodontics have been known as
prominent parts of the program. The program has been a combined program of fixed and
removable prosthodontics since beginning of the program. The program has known to have a
strong emphasize in dental laboratory works.
Dr. Hardy founded the Program in 1948. Dr. Phillip Williams kept his philosophy in prosthodontics
especially in complete denture. Dr. Sheldon Stein fostered strength in fixed prosthodontics and
esthetics while maintaining strength and philosophy of complete denture. Dr. Gino Passamonti,
who was one of the students of Dr. Hardy, further added sound foundations of the program in
treatment planning and case management for advanced prosthodontics patients. He was in the
program director’s position for over twenty-four years and considers being “the father of the
program” and many national and international leaders in the field of prosthodontics graduated
under his guidance.
Currently Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama has been the program director since 1994. The program has
maintained tradition and philosophy of Drs. Hardy, Williams, Stein and Passamonti and put
additional emphasis on Esthetics and Implant Prosthodontics. Research has been an additional
emphasis of the program since Dr. Hirayama became the program director. Ten graduates are
granted Master of Science degree since 1998. One of emphasis of the program is CADIAX system
for occlusal and TMD evaluation. Four units are available for everyday clinical use. Additional Jaw
tracking system (Biopack) was introduced from Bioreserch. Biopack consists of 8 channels EMG,
Joint Vibration Diagnosis analysis unit (JVD) and Magnetic Jaw tracking unit (JT 3D).
Future direction of the program is integration of advanced dental technologies such as CAD CAM,
Digital impression technology, Digital image modeling and other Digital technologies into academic
and clinical teachings for enhancement of learning environment while maintaining good sound
foundation and tradition of the prosthodontics program.
Mission Statement
The craniofacial system is likely the oldest of the organ systems. The earliest simple animals were
organized as hollow tubes open at both ends. One end accumulated food, the other end excreted
that which wasn’t used. But nature continued to favor organisms that could find and process food
quicker and easier. In fact it is argued that all the senses were developed to enhance food
gathering and processing. The first sense was smell; it evolved as a mechanism to find complex
organic chemicals or particles that would allow an organism to develop more rapidly and/or live
longer. Touch, sight, and hearing developed later, as did mobility of the animal, a more complex
digestive system, circulatory systems, and protective defenses. All these evolved in fits and starts,
but the goal seemed to be furthering the ability to get food faster and better. Simply put,
increasing complexity and diversity of animal structures were developed for better eating.
Department Administration
Program Director of Postgraduate Prosthodontics:
Hiroshi Hirayama, D.M.D, D.D.S, M.S, F.A.C.P
Contact information Phone: (617) 636-6598
Email: [email protected]
Administrative Assistants:
Jessica Upham
Contact Information Phone: (617) 636-6591
168
Email: [email protected]
Kelly Barnes
Contact Information Phone: (617) 636-6591
Email:[email protected]
Samantha Hafley
Contact Information Phone: (617) 636-6591
Email: [email protected]
Program Faculty
Robert Chapman
Professor
Chairperson, Department of Prosthodontics and Operative Dentistry
Hiroshi Hirayama *
Professor
Division Head Postgraduate Prosthodontics
Program Director, Graduate and Postgraduate Prosthodontics
Kiho Kang*
Associate Professor
Associate Program Director, Graduate and Postgraduate Prosthodontics
Yongjeong Kim
Assistant Professor
Assistant Program Director, Graduate and Postgraduate Prosthodontics
Alaaddin Al-Wazzan
Assistant Professor
Paul Cammarata
Assistant Clinical Professor
Norman Hammer
Clinical Professor
William Heggerick *
Clinical Professor
Albert Intonti *
Associate Clinical Professor
Kenneth Malament *
Clinical Professor
William Maness
Associate Clinical Professor
Vincent Mariano *
Assistant Clinical Professor
Maurice Martel
Clinical Professor
George Maryniuk
Assistant Clinical Professor
Lloyd Miller
Clinical Professor
Julian Osorio
Assistant Clinical Professor
William Papadopoulos
Assistant Clinical Professor
Luis Sarmiento
Assistant Clinical Professor
Marcelo Suzuki
Assistant Professor
Denise Leong Yokota
Clinical Instructor
Pasquale Calvani **
Adjunct Associate Professor
Ernest Hegenbarth
Adjunct Associate Professor
Konstantinos Michalakis *,**Adjunct Associate Professor
Gianluca Paniz **
Adjunct Instructor
Robert Pellecchia **
Adjunct Instructor
Itszack Shoher
Adjunct Research Professor
John Sorenson*
Adjunct Professor
Yasuhiko Kawabe
Adjunct Technical Instructor
Akihiko Yoshida
Adjunct Technical Instructor
* Board Certified Prosthodontist
** Visiting Instructors; they stay for 1 month per year, but are full-time for that month.
Interdepartmental Courses
Oral & Maxillofacial Radiology
Management of the Medically Compromised Dental Patient
169
Clinico-Pathologic Conferences in Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology
Biostatistics IA--Introduction to Biostatistics
Biostatistics IB--Principles of Biostatistics
Successful Research Strategies
Occlusion
Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
Advanced Head & Neck Anatomy
Multidisciplinary Approach to the Diagnosis & Management of TMD and Orofacial Pain
Dental Pharmacology
Immunology
Bone Biology
Biomaterials I
Biomaterials II
Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning
Departmental Courses
Immunology for Postgraduate Prosthodontics
Course Director
Emilio I Arguello, D.D.S., M.S.
Goals & Objectives
This course is intended for first year graduate students in the prosthodontics residency.
Course Materials are given to students in paper handouts
The reference is outlined on each slide, mainly peer-reviewed publications.
Advanced Prosthodontics Treatment Planning Seminar
Course Directors
Dr. William Heggerick, Dr. Paul Cammarata, Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama, Dr. Kiho Kang
Goals & Objectives
This course is intended for all graduate residents in the Postgraduate Prosthodontics residency.
Paper handouts are provided by the presenter
The reference is outlined on each slide, mainly peer reviewed publications.
Fixed Partial Denture
Course Director
Dr. Yong Jeon Kim
Goals & Objectives
To understand and apply the principles of fixed partial dentures in depth level.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Advanced technical fixed prosthodontics I,
Prelinical FPD Laboratory Procedures I
Master cast fabrication (PG Pros. Pre-clinical Exercises)
Course Director
Dr. Kim, Mr. Oishi
Goals & Objectives
To learn and manipulate impression materials and dental stones, make proper master models;
prepare master dies and mount on the semi-adjustable articulator.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Advanced technical fixed prosthodontics I,
Preclinical FPD Laboratory Procedures II
Introduction to porcelain, posterior porcelain-metal complex
Goals & Objectives
170



To make students to be able to wax up and cut back a metal framework for PFM
restorations and to manipulate porcelain.
To make the students to learn the design concept of posterior PFM restorations.
At end of this course the students are able to fabricate an acceptable posterior PFM
restoration on Postgraduate level.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Advanced technical fixed prosthodontics I
Preclinical FPD Laboratory Procedures III
Partial and full coverage gold restoration
Goals & Objectives
To understand the concepts of ideal tooth preparation; become technically competent in the
“clinical” and laboratory aspects of this exercise.
Advanced Fixed Partial Denture Practical course
Class: K’ 2009
Goals & Objectives
To satisfactorily complete at an advanced level a series of practical exercises with the development
of concepts and technical skills in preparation for patient and clinical
management.
Perspectives in Modern Dental Ceramics
Course Director
Dr. Kenneth Malament
Goals & Objectives
To give students an in-depth level of knowledge of Modern Prosthodontics Ceramics and how they
affect treatment planning decisions.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Treatment of Endodontically Treated Teeth
Course Director
Dr. George Maryniuk, Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama
Course Assistant: Mr. Oishi
Goals & Objectives
To provide the students with an understanding of the prosthodontic treatment options and
procedures for treating endodontically treated teeth.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Tooth whitening
Course Director
Dr. George Maryniuk
Goals & Objectives
To provide the students current concepts and techniques of tooth whitening. To make the students
fabricating tooth whitening trays and experiencing tooth whitening.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Advanced technical fixed prosthodontics II
Course Director
Mr. Oishi
Goals & Objectives
 To make the students becoming proficient in manipulation of dental porcelain, experiencing
different types of margin finishing and achieving highly esthetic result by using shoulder
porcelain.
 To make student to be competent on pre-soldering procedure and expose to postsoldering
technique.
171

At end of this course, the students will be able to differentiate types of margin
configurations, apply shoulder porcelain and to perform pre-soldering technique.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Tooth preparation: From single unit to Full
arch preparation
Course Director
Dr. Intonti
Goals & Objectives
To teach students to do efficient and predictable tooth preparations for indirect laboratory
fabricated restorations, and meticulous sequential tooth preparation techniques with emphasis on
control.
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics - Diagnostic Wax-up and Provisionals
Course Director
Dr. Kim
Goals & Objectives
To provide in depth knowledge and concepts of diagnostic wax up and different method of
provisionals on fixed prosthodontics fields.
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar
Course Director
Dr. Hirayama
Goals & Objectives
To provide students an advanced level of prosthodontics case management knowledge, and
treatment modalities and options.
To provide students additional knowledge to fill students’ weakness in the field of Prosthodontics,
and patient and case management through past final cases, students’ complex cases, Drs.
Hirayama’s and Passamonti’s clinical cases, and selected topics. Selection of topic and case will
depend on the students’ weak points and interests. Round table case treatment planning discussion
will be provided during course of the seminar. This is open discussion formatted seminar so that
the students can ask any kind of questions without any hesitation and felling of intimidation by
others. At end of third year students will have well organized applicable prosthodontics, and patient
case management knowledge. The students will prepare for prosthodontics board examinations.
Implant abutment selection: Prefabricated - Customized Implant Abutments –CAD CAM
Abutments
Course Director
Dr. Julian Osorio, Mr. Yukio Oishi
Goals & Objectives
To provide students with current concepts of customized implant abutments.
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review (CPLR)
Course Directors
Drs. Hiroshi Hirayama, Kiho Kang, YongJeong Kim, Albert Intonti, Norman Hammer
Goals & Objectives
To familiarize students with Evidence-based dentistry (EBD) approach to oral health care. EBD
process is based on integrating the scientific basis for clinical care, using thorough, unbiased
reviews and the best available scientific evidence at any one time. To make the students
understanding of the scope, depth and content of literature concerning fixed, removable,
periodontal, implant prosthodontics and dental occlusion including physiology.
Removable Denture
Course Director
172
Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama
Goals & Objectives
To provide students in depth knowledge of theoretical background in removable complete denture
and removable partial denture,
To prepare students ready to apply above mentioned concepts and theories to daily clinics and to
other fields of Prosthodontics disciplines.
To prepare students for American Board of Prosthodontics examinations.
Clinical Complete Denture
Course Directors
Dr. Luis del Castillo, Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama
Goals & Objectives
To demonstrate an advanced level of clinical complete denture construction procedures,
To provide an in-depth level of knowledge in the construction of complete dentures.
Complete Denture Laboratory Course
Course Director
Dr. Luis del Castillo
Goals and Objectives
To provide the students with competency in laboratory skills for complete denture construction.
Advanced Removable Partial Dentures
Laboratory Course and Clinical Demonstration
Course Director
Dr. Luis del Castillo, Dr. Yong Jeong Kim
Goals and Objectives
The goal of the Advanced Removable Partial Denture Laboratory Course and Clinical Demonstration
is to familiarize the student in the fabrication of a removable partial denture. This includes the
theoretical, technical and clinical aspects of this restoration.
Advanced Occlusion
Course Director
Dr. Maurice Martel
Goals and Objectives
To develop conceptual information on occlusion, especially with regard to the nervous system and
TMJ’s and teeth
To establish the relationship of the TMJ’s anterior guidance and occlusal form to function.
Advanced Prosthodontics course-Gnathological wax up course
Course Director
Dr. Heggerick
Goals and Objectives
To make students understand the concepts and techniques of Gnathological wax up, and practicing
on patients’ study casts. At end of this course the students are able to perform Gnathological wax
up on different situations of patient’s mouth.
Advanced Prosthodontics course-Diagnostic Waxing and Occlusal Instrumentation
Course Directors
Dr. Kiho Kang
Goals & Objectives
173
To develop conceptual goals of prosthodontic treatment in the areas of craniofacial esthetics,
functions, occlusion, and physiology.
To facilitate students’ understanding of the history, theory, concepts and techniques,
instrumentation and materials of fixed prosthodontic treatment.
To familiarize students with an approach for treatment planning through
pretreatment clinical evaluation, study cast analysis and diagnostic waxing procedures
Advanced Prosthodontics course-Occlusal Device - Laboratory Hands-on and Lecture
Course Director
Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama and Dr. Denise Leong Yokota
Goals and Objectives
To make the students a competent skill level of laboratory and clinical procedures and an
understanding of the theories of occlusal devices and management of TMD patients.
Research Methodology in Prosthodontics and Biomaterials
Course Director
Dr. Hiroshi Hirayama
Course Description
This is a departmental course for 1st or 2nd year Advanced Education students or Master of Science
students who have an interest in prosthodontics and biomaterial research methods and use of
equipments. This course is designed to provide background knowledge of the research method and
equipments.
Maxillofacial Prosthetics Concepts –Book and Literature Review
Course Director
Dr. Marcelo Suzuki
Goals and Objectives
To establish a basic understanding of the theories and concepts used to treat patients afflicted with
head and neck carcinoma or congenital abnormalities, and trauma victims.
Endodontics for Prosthodontists
Course Director
Dr. Robert Amato, Dr. Jan Rozen
Goals and Objectives
Postgraduate Prosthodontics residents should be able to diagnose, categorize and assess
appropriate treatment modalities for pulpal and periapical disease. They should also be able to
recognize, diagnose and treatment plan periodontal endodontic disease. A discussion of endodontic
success and failure will allow the Prosthodontics student to better assess previous endodontic
treatment and decide treatment options.
Periodontics and Prosthodontics
Course Director
Dr. Kenneth Malament
Goals and Objectives
To integrate the academic and clinical standards of both Periodontics and Prosthodontics, and to
achieve harmony in treatment planning decisions.
Orthodontics for Prosthodontists
Course Director
Dr. Barry Briss (Chairman, Dept. of Orthodontics)
Goals and Objectives
174
To provide the residents in Postgraduate Prosthodontics with a basic understanding of orthodontic
concepts; to train them in the use of Steiner analysis for treatment planning; to give them an
understanding of soft tissue analysis, smile analysis, and the concept of occlusion from an
orthodontist’s point of view.
Advanced Prosthodontics course-Dental Photography
Course Director
Dr. Kiho Kang
Goals and Objectives
The course objective is to cover the clinical aspects of dental intra and extraoral photographs. The
lecture and clinical hands-on practice will cover the topics and techniques including the followings:




the series of photos required for the American Prosthodontics Board examination
the series of photos required for the Prosthodontics Seminar presentation
what common mistakes are to avoid
how to position mirrors, retractors, and patient
Practice management for Postgraduate Prosthodontics I II III
Course Director
Dr. Vincent Mariano
Goals and Objectives
To prepare students for their future practice by making them realizing importance and ways of
practice management.
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 1-4
Course Directors
Drs. Hiroshi Hirayama, Kiho Kang, YongJeong Kim
Course Description
This clinical course, encompassing all three residency years, is designed to provide comprehensive
clinical experience in the broad spectrum of prosthodontics. Patients requiring fixed, removable,
and implant prosthodontic procedures will be examined, diagnosed, treatment planned and treated
by the postdoctoral students under the supervision of clinical faculty. The students will routinely
present their diagnostic findings and treatment plans during multiple formal opportunities for
patient presentation. This level is aimed to treat PDI class 1, 2 and 3 patients and training in
treatment plan and managing of PDI class 4 patients.
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 5-8
Course Directors
Drs. Hiroshi Hirayama, Kiho Kang, YongJeong Kim
Course Description
This clinical course permits advanced clinical experience on management and completion of PDI
class 4 patients. Also focus on management and treatment of advanced cases such as esthetic
demanding cases, TMD related cases and advanced implant cases. Most of these treatment plans
will be multidisciplinary in nature and the resident is encouraged to discuss and coordinate
treatment with other disciplines. They encourage sharing diagnostic information and organized to
come up sequential treatment plan which include mutispecialties.
Graduation Requirements
First Year



Competency and confidence in the application of basic fixed prosthodontic clinical and
laboratory procedures.
Competency in all basic complete denture clinical and laboratory techniques.
Understanding of complete denture anatomy and occlusal concepts.
175

Competency in all basic RPD clinical and laboratory procedures.






Understanding of basic RPD principles, design and function.
Familiarity with overdenture techniques which includes implant overdenture.
Familiarity with immediate denture techniques.
Familiarity with reline/rebase techniques.
Competency in survey crown preparation and fabrication.
Competency in the use of the semi adjustable articulator, positional records, facebows and
familiarity with CADIAX recording, other jaw tracking units, cephalometric analysis,
concepts of occlusion and fully adjustable articulators.
Familiarity with functionally generated path techniques and Gnathological wax up technique.
Familiarity with implant prosthodontics.
Familiarity with diagnosis and treatment of patients with temporomandibular disorders and
facial pain.
Familiarity with maxillofacial prosthetic services for patients with acquired, developmental or
congenital defects.
Familiarity with the prosthodontic literature and its support of and application to treatment,
and Evidence Based Dentistry (EBD) literature search concept and technique.
Develop and present a table clinic at a professional dental meeting.






Second Year











Competency in diagnosis and treatment planning with an understanding of the relationship
of prosthodontics to the various specialties of dentistry in the comprehensive care of
patients.
Competency and confidence in the treatment of combination cases involving fixed,
removable, maxillofacial and dental implant prosthesis.
Competency in the application of the various concepts of occlusion for both fixed and
removable and competent in the use of CADIAX recorders, semi adjustable articulators.
Competency and confidence in the application of advanced prosthodontic laboratory
procedures.
Competency in Gnathological waxing techniques and occlusal concept, and Panky Mann
philosophy and concept.
Competency in the diagnosis and treatment of various Temporomandibular disorders and
facial pain.
Competency in the treatment and follow-up care of patients with maxillofacial acquired
defects.
Competency in the prosthodontic literature and its support of and application to treatment,
and Evidence Based Dentistry (EBD) literature search concept and technique.
Familiarity with the treatment of patients with maxillofacial developmental or congenital
defects.
Identify a Thesis/clinical research project with title and outline completed.
Develop and present a table clinic at a professional dental meeting.
3rd Year






Proficiency in diagnosis and treatment planning with an understanding of the relationship of
prosthodontics to the various specialties of dentistry in the comprehensive care of patients.
Proficiency and confidence in the treatment of combination cases involving fixed,
removable, maxillofacial and dental implant prosthesis.
Proficiency in the application of the various concepts of occlusion for both fixed and
removable and competent in the use of CADIAX and other jaw tracking system, semi and
fully adjustable articulators.
Proficiency and confidence in the application of advanced prosthodontic laboratory
procedures.
Develop and present a table clinic at a professional dental meeting.
Complete a Thesis and/or research project for presentation and publication.
176
Academic Requirements
Postgraduate Prosthodontics program is three year program that may be combined with a possible
Master of Science degree.
Residents MUST complete their program on May 31st of their third year. After June 1 st there will
also be an additional tuition charge for either the Master's degree or a Certificate program.
The resident MUST pass all assigned credited courses. (Necessary courses will be assigned by the
Program Director). "F" grade is NOT acceptable. Two permanent "F" grades will result in resident's
dismissal from the program.
The resident who is enrolled in the Master of Science Program MUST have enough credit hours
according to the guidelines of the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee. No “F” or more
than two "C grades will be permitted per AGEC policy and could result in dismissal from the Master
of Science program.
The students MUST take the part 1 Prosthodontic Board Examination and one of other parts of the
Prosthodontics Board Examination in their third year.
Clinical Requirements
Type of Cases based on ACP Classification of Prosthodontic Patients should include:
Class
Class
Class
Class
1
2
3
4
–
–
–
–
5 cases
5 cases
10 cases
10 cases
Type of Prosthodontic Treatments should include:
FPD
Should include minimum of 2 cases of more than 20 units
Two complete documentations of Part 3 Board cases
3 cases of occlusal reconstruction– including complete single arch reconstruction, altering VDO,
complete posterior reconstruction
3 cases of partial coverage metal restoration–including two gold onlays
5 cases of fixed and removable combination cases– including one complete arch fixed
combination case
Two complete documentation of Part 2 Board cases
RPD
Should include 15 units (including treatment metal framed RPDs)
Should include minimum of 2 different types of attachment RPDs. (Acrylic RPDs will not be counted
toward graduation credit.)
CD
Should include 15 dentures (minimum 5 sets)
Two complete documentations of Part 4 Board cases
Includes types of Conventional CD/OD, Immediate CD/OD, Treatment CD/OD,
Maxillofacial CD/OD/Obturators
Should include at least the following:
5 conventional complete dentures
177
3
1
3
2
4
immediate complete dentures
Removable complete overdenture
treatment complete dentures
laboratory relinings
tissue conditioning cases – direct and indirect methods
Implant
Should include 7 implant cases which include two complete documentations of any part of Board
cases and 4 different types of cases among the following categories;
FCD – porcelain or polymer cemented (C), screw-retained (S) or CS types
IFSR – C, S, CS types
FPD Implant-supported or assisted – C, S, or CS types
RCD Implant-supported
RCD Implant-assisted
RPD Implant-supported or assisted
Occlusion & TMD
The student should pass an oral examination and a competency examination by the end of first and
second year.
Cases should include:
2 cases of fully adjustable instrumentation incorporated with CADIAX
4 cases of adjustable instrumentation
3 cases of equilibration
2 cases of management on occlusion related TMD patient
Maxillofacial Prosthesis
Should be 2 cases
When the student cannot meet above mentioned requirements, the program director will evaluate
total achievement of the student and make a judgment whether the student meets the standard for
the graduation level. The student may be asked to continue the program with the tuition until the
student adequately reaches the standard of the program.
Laboratory Work Requirement
1) All diagnostic works, which include all diagnostic wax ups, and fabrication of provisionals.
Five of more than six units splinted cases must be done by student then may send out to the
commercial laboratory after passing a competency examination.
2) 30 units of Fixed Prosthodontic Laboratory work
Limited number of full gold crown units (no more than 5 units).
All laboratory works for Part 2 Board cases must be done by student. The student must pass
competency examinations by the end of 1 st and 2nd year.
3) Five RCDs, five RPDs, five acrylic RPDs must be done by student.
After passing competency examinations, the student may send them out.
4)
All cast posts & cores
5) 10 Implant custom abutments.
After passing competency examinations, the student may send them out.
6)
All implant removable substructures
Any exemption needs to be approved by the program director.
Partial credit will be calculated based on the case progress of transfer cases.
178
Final Case Presentation & Mock Clinical Board Examinations
A final case presentation (one part of Board cases) on scheduled date and two other parts Board
case presentations and oral examinations before graduation are required as a graduation
requirement.
(A re-presentation is required for persons who obtain a conditional passing grade or a failed
grade.)
Final Case Presentation
The final case MUST contain at least restorations of all posterior teeth to control vertical dimension
of occlusion and can be any of the followings:


Fixed prosthodontics case (ABP Part 3) (No removable prostheses)
Fixed-removable prosthodontics combination case (ABP Part 2)
The following will be needed in order to present the final case:





Approximately 40-50 photos (All mandatory photos by the American Board of
Prosthodontists must be included).
One set of mounted casts with Type VI or V stone pre- and post-treatment.
One set of unmounted casts with white stone pre- and post-treatment.
Two case narrations which include a set of a copy of pre- and post-treatment FMX.
A copy of presentation, a set of unmounted study casts (pre- and post-treatment) and a
copy of the case narration including copy of pre- and post-treatment FMX must be
submitted before graduation.
Mock Clinical Board Examinations
Mock presentations and oral examinations are required for the other two parts of Board cases
before graduation on scheduled dates.
(A re-presentation is required for persons who obtain a conditional passing grade or a failed
grade.)
The Mock presentations consist of 2 different types of presentations from the final case according
to the requirement of the American Board of Prosthodontics (ABP):
Fixed/Removable Prosthodontics Combination Case
Fixed Prosthodontic Treatment
Removable Prosthodontic Treatment
(ABP Part 2)
(ABP Part 3)
(ABP Part 4)
At least one among three cases must contain implant restoration.
The student MUST pass all three parts for his/her graduation. The student MUST have multiple
back up cases in order to secure the graduation requirement.
Schedules
First Year
Summer Session (July–August)
Orientation: Hirayama/Kang/Kim
Student Registration
Internal Student Registration
Instruments Evaluation
Program Orientation
179
Basic Science Courses
Introduction to Advanced Prosthodontics
Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Kim/Hammer/Intonti
Introduction to Clinical Prosthodontics
Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Kim/Hammer/Intonti
 Fixed Prosthodontics I & II
 Ceramics
 Removable Partial Denture
 Removable Complete Denture
 Implant Prosthodontics
 Occlusion and TMD
 Esthetic in Prosthodontics
 Restoration of Endodontically treated tooth
 Treatment and management of Complex cases
 Maxillofacial Prosthesis
Advanced







Occlusion I (Lectures & Techniques)
Fabrication of Preliminary impression and Study Casts
Facebow
Registration of Maxillo-mandibular record
Articulation and Articulator
Occlusal analysis and Modification
Occlusal Wax up
Tooth Morphology
Drs. Kang/Kim
Advanced Fixed Prosthodontics I (Lectures & Techniques)
Tooth Preparation Techniques and Theory
 Partial coverage – Gold and Porcelain Inlay and Onlay
 Full coverage – PFM and All ceramic crowns
 Multiple Units
 RPD and Attachment abutment
Diagnostic Wax up and Provisionals
 Fixed Prosthodontics
Impressions Techniques and Theory
 Hydrocolloid
 Poly-vinyl siloxisan
 Polyether
Evaluation and Cementation of Restorations
Drs. Kim/Kang
Dr. Intonti
Advanced






Mr. Oishi/Dr.Kim
Technical Fixed Prosthodontics I
Fabrications of Master casts
Articulation/Mounting of Casts
Fabrication of Restorations
Wax up, silicone key and cut back
Spruing, investing and casting
Evaluation of castings, finishing and polishing
Related Disciplines Courses
 Biostatistics
 Epidemiology & Critical Thinking in the Practice of Dentistry
Dr. Hirayama
Dr. Kang
Dr. Kang
Dr. Kim
Dr. Stark
Dr. Wright
Fall (September – December) First Year
Basic Science Courses
 Clinicopathologic Conferences in Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology
 Growth and Aging
Related Disciplines Courses
 Diagnostic Radiology
Dr. Ramesh
180


Medicine
Microbiology for postgraduate prosthodontics
Advanced Prosthodontics Courses
 Advanced Removable Prosthodontics I
Removable Partial Denture
Complete Denture
Dr. Ganda
Dr. Arguello
Dr. Hirayama
Advanced Fixed Prosthodontics II
Drs. Kang/Kim
Advanced Clinical Prosthodontics I (Clinical and Laboratory)
Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Kim/Intonti

Examinations and Comprehensive Treatment Planning I
 Evaluation of History and Patient
 Extraoral Examinations
 Intraoral Examinations
 Consideration of other Disciplines
 Diagnosis and Sequential Treatment Planning
 Presentation of Treatment Plans
 Paperwork and Financial Arrangements
Drs. Kang/Kim/Hirayama

Phase I Prosthodontics
 Caries control
 Amalgam and Composite resin restorations
Dr. Intonti

Diagnostic Wax up and Provisionals
 Fixed Prosthodontics
 Removable Prosthodontics
 Implant Prosthodontics
Drs. Kang/Kim

Clinical Prosthodontics Evaluations
 Esthetics
 Phonetics
 Occlusal Plane
 VDO
 Function
 Clinical Occlusal Evaluation and Night guard
Dr. Hirayama

Photography in Prosthodontics
 Extraoral
 Intraoral
 Laboratory
 Research
 Computer
Dr. Kang
Advanced Technical Fixed Prosthodontics II
 Metal Framework design and Metal finishing
 Porcelain
 PFM
 Porcelain Margin
 Pre-solder and Post-solder – Demo/Lecture
Mr. Oishi/Dr.Kim
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review
Drs. Kang/Kim/Hirayama
Seminars
 Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar
Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
 Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar
Drs. Hirayam/Hempton/Green
181


OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar
Advanced Prosthodontics seminar
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Dr. Hirayama
Master of Science Degree/Research
 Topic Selection
 Literature search
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 1
Meetings
ACP
GNYAP
Spring (January–June) First Year
Basic Science Courses
 Anatomy
 Pharmacology
 Bone Biology
Dr. Malone
Dr. Thompson
Dr. Chen
Related Disciplines Courses
 Biomaterials
 TMD
 Medical Emergency and Pain Control
 Research Methodology in Prosthodontics and Biomaterials
 Periodontics and Prosthodontics
 Microbiology for postgraduate prosthodontics
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Dr.
Zanparsa
Mehta
Ganda
Hirayama
Malament
Arguello
Advanced Prosthodontics Courses
Advanced Occlusion
Dr. Martel
Advanced Removable Prosthodontics II
Drs. del Castillo/Calvani
 Complete Denture
 Fabrication of Custom Trays
 Fabrication of Trial Bases and Occlusal rims
 Denture teeth set up – Anatomical, Non-anatomical
 Investing
 Processing
 Remount and Occlusal adjustment– Laboratory and Clinical
 Finishing and Polishing
 Removable Partial denture
Dr. del Castillo
 Fabrication of Custom trays
 Fabrication of Occlusal bases
 Surveyor
 Mouth Preparation
 Altered Cast Technique
Advanced Clinical Prosthodontics (Clinical and Laboratory)
Removable Prosthodontics (Clinical Demonstration & lab)
Drs. del Castillo and Hirayama
 Removable Partial Denture
 Complete Denture
 Tooth preparation
Dr. Intonti
 Final impressions
Dr. Kang
 Tooth whitening
Drs. Marynuck/Al-Wazzan
 Restoration of Endodontically Treated Teeth
Drs. Marynuck and Hirayama
 Direct Cast Post and cores
 Indirect Cast Post and cores
Establishment of Tooth foundation
Dr. Mariano
 Pre-fabricated posts (Endodontically Treated Teeth)
 Tooth Bonding
182
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar
 Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar
 OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar
 Advanced Prosthodontic seminar
Master of Science Degree/Research
Committee selection (Masters Degree only)
Literature Review
Protocol preparation
Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Dr. Hirayama
Dr. Michalakis
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 2
Meeting
AAFP
AO
IADR/AADR
Summer (May-August) First Year
Related Disciplines Courses
 Maxillofacial
Practice Management in Prosthodontics I
Periodontology
Orthodontics
Endodontics
Pre-prosthetic surgery
Dr. Suzuki
Dr. Mariano
Dr. Hempton
Dr. Briss
Drs. Amato and Rozen
OMFS
Advanced Implant Prosthodontics I - Implant abutment selection: Prefabricated - Customized
Implant Abutments –CAD CAM Abutments
Dr. Osorio and Mr. Oishi
Advanced Clinical Prosthodontics (Clinical and Laboratory)
Cementation
 Materials
 Techniques
 Tooth Bonding
 Desensitization
Patient’s Recare and Craniofacial Health Maintenance
Drs. Leong/Sarmiento/Papadopoulos
 Evaluation
 Medical condition and Medications
 Saliva
 Soft tissues
 Hard tissues
 Fixed
 Removable
 Implant
 Occlusion, Parafunctional Habits and TMJ & Muscles
 Fluoride Application
 Night Guard
 Occlusal adjustment
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review
183
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar
OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar
 Material Fatigue in Prosthodontics
 Bruxism
 Altered VDO
 Treatment of Extremely Worn Dentition
 Class II & III
 Perio-prostho
 Combination
 Orthodontics
 Esthetics
Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Dr. Hirayama
U.G. Teaching
Master of Science Degree/Research
Initial Committee Meeting (Masters Degree only)
Completion of Literature Review
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 3
Mock Board Exam
Second Year
Fall (September – December)
Advanced Prosthodontics Courses
Advanced Technical Fixed Prosthodontics III
Porcelain
 Internal Stain Technique – Demo/Lecture
 Captek and Galvano-electroform gold
 All Ceramics (Procera) – Demo/Lecture
Mr. Oishi
Advanced Implant Prosthodontics II
Advanced Occlusion II – Instrumentation Techniques
 Transverse Hinge Axis Location
 Extraoral Tracings
 Fully Adjustable Articulators
Dr. Kang and Kim
Dr. Kang
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar II Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar II
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar II
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar II
Dr. Hirayama
Implantology (surgical aspect)
 Management of complex cases
 Round table (treatment planning)
U.G. Teaching and Recare & Emergency
Master of Science Degree/Research
Pilot study (Master’s Degree Only)
Completion of Protocol
Meeting
184
ACP
GNYAP
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 4
Maxillofacial clinic
Spring (January-April) Second Year
Related Disciplines Courses
Practice Management in Prosthodontics II
Dr. Mariano
Advanced Prosthodontics Courses
Advanced Occlusion
Dr. Martel
Advanced Technical Fixed Prosthodontics IV
Porcelain
 Porcelain Laminate – Demo/Lecture
 Ceramic Inlay and Onlay (Empress) – Demo/Lecture
 CAD CAM
Mr. Oishi/Dr. Al-Wazzan
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar II Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar II
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar II
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar II
Dr. Hirayama
Round table (treatment planning)
U.G. Teaching
Presentation
Yankee Dental Congress
AAFP
AO
Master of Science Degree/Research
Experimental Procedures
Dr. Michalakis
Mock Board Exam
Meeting
Yankee Dental Congress
AAFP
AO
IADR/AADR
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 5
Maxillofacial clinic
Summer (May-August)
Advanced Prosthodontics Courses
Advanced Clinical Prosthodontics (Clinical and Laboratory)
Porcelain veneer
Dr. Heggrick
Attachments
Dr. Hammer
 Fixed Prosthodontics
185


Removable Prosthodontics
Implant Prosthodontics
Advanced Technical Fixed Prosthodontics V
 Attachments
 Milling Technique
Mr. Oishi
Comprehensive Prosthodontics Literature Review
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar II
Drs.Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar II
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar II
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar II
Dr. Hirayama
Clinical Science Courses
Implantology
Maxillofacial Prosthetics
U.G. Teaching
Master of Science Degree/Research
Experimental Procedures
Committee Meeting
Progress Review by Advanced Study Committee
Abstracts due for IADR/AADR in September
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 6
Maxillofacial clinic
Third Year
Fall (September-December)
Related Disciplines Courses
Practice Management in Prosthodontics III
Current Literature Review
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics Treatment Planning Seminar III
Drs.Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar III
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
OMFS –Prosthodontics Implant Seminar III
Drs. Laskakidis/Kim
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar III
Dr. Hirayama
 Round table (treatment planning)
 Esthetics
U.G. Teaching
Master of Science Degree/Research
Experimental Procedures Completed
Statistical Analysis of Results
Committee Meeting
Completion of Thesis
Thesis Defense (Dec-Jan) Master’s Degree only
Research Presentation (Dec-Jan) Non Degree Students
186
Poster presentation
ACP
GNYAP
Meetings
ACP
GNYAP
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 7
Maxillofacial clinic
January-April Third Year
Literature Review
Current Literature (Journal Club)
Esthetics and Advanced Ceramics
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar III Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar III
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
Advanced Prosthodontics Seminar III
Dr. Hirayama
 Round table (treatment planning)
 Esthetics
U.G. Teaching--Students have one Evening Clinical Teaching per week Assignment
Master of Science Degree/Research
Final Thesis Revisions
Development of Publishable Form
Presentations/Meetings
AAFP
IADR/AADR (Mandatory for Master of Science Students)
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic 8
Maxillofacial clinic
ACP Mock Board part one examination
Part one ABP board Exam
ABP board Exam - one part of 2, 3 or 4
Mid April-May Third Year
Current Literature Review
Seminars
Advanced Prosthodontics treatment planning Seminar III Drs. Hirayama/Kang/Heggrick/Cammarata
Inter-Disciplinary Treatment Planning Seminar III
Drs. Hirayama/Green/Hempton
Master of Science Degree/Research (Student must complete these steps by end of April)
Signatures on B form and Final Thesis Deposit (Master’s Students only)
Publishable Form completed and submit for Publication
Advanced Prosthodontics Clinic
Maxillofacial clinic
Mock Board case Presentations –two parts
Final Case Presentations (first Monday of May)
Graduation - End of May (Last Thursday of May)
187
PROGRAM RULES & REGULATIONS--GENERAL INFORMATION
Students’ Privileges:
Access to and use of TUSDM as described in the TUSDM Student Handbook and additional access
and use of Lloyd Miller Postgraduate Prosthodontics laboratory and Philip Williams library for their
educational purpose.
School Hours: 8:00 a.m. - 7:00 p.m. Monday, Wednesday, Thursday
8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Tuesday, Friday



All students are expected to be in the school during school hours.
Unreported absence will be subjected of a warning form.
Student who needs to be absent from school must submit [Student Absent Form] two
weeks in advance.
Clinic Hours:
9:00 a.m. - 7:00 p.m. Monday, Wednesday, Thursday
9:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Tuesday, Friday
Attendance:
Mandatory-all lectures, seminars, clinic and assigned rotations.
CLINIC POLICY
The students must treat all of their patients in the postgraduate prosthodontics clinic. Treatment of
school patients in outside school setting and/or unsupervised treatment in the postgraduate clinic
are NOT permitted in any circumstances. Violation of this policy will result in probation and/or
dismissal of the student from the program.
All clinical activity MUST be finished by the end of daily clinical session – planning and organization
of the clinical session is the key of success.










No impressions are to be made after 6:30 p.m. on Monday, Wednesday, and Thursday and
after 4:00 p.m. on Tuesday and Friday.
No glazing while the patient is waiting. Make a separate appointment.
When students are assigned to Recare/Emergency rotation or Research rotation, they
should NOT schedule any appointments with their own patients.
Students MUST NOT treat any patients without supervision of a faculty member.
Students are responsible to all of their assigned patients.
Students MUST promptly respond in a polite and caring manner to any patient’s complaints,
phone calls, massages and pages and notify the complaint to an attending faculty member.
Students must make a case note regarding the patient’s complaints and responds to the
complaints.
Student who has not seen his/her patient(s) in reasonable clinical period will be subject of
an investigation and/or review of his/her student status.
Any patients' complaints will be filed in [Patient complaint form] and will be subject of
evaluation of student status. Issue of two forms within one month could be subject of
evaluation of student status by the Program Director. Issue of two forms with same reason
or more than three forms within three school months could be subject to establishment of
student's probation status by the Program Director or the Faculty meeting.
Clinic carts are the property of the school - students are NOT to keep their personal
belongings in the carts. The carts will be inspected periodically for neatness and cleanliness,
if not properly maintained, students may be suspended from the clinic.
Compliance to infection control guideline is MANDATORY. See Infection Control Handbook.
Laboratory Work Policy
The cleanliness of the lab is essential for mutual learning environment and your progress of dental
laboratory skills and understanding, especially for the laboratory safety point of view. Any
students, who do not comply with safety and cleanliness matters, and OSHA standards, will be
subject of disciplinary actions which include suspension, probation and/or dismissal from the
program.
188
"Keep the lab clean - clean up after yourself !!!"







All students must perform the minimum requirement of dental laboratory works by
themselves. All laboratory cases done by students must be examined and approved by a
faculty member and/or Mr. Oishi.
Any students must not send out any laboratory works until they complete a minimum of ten
units of FPD by themselves unless they have written authorization by the Program Director.
All students’ lab works must be done is school lab facilities and all patient casts and relative
information must be kept in the school for reviews by faculty members.
All students’ lab works must be evaluated by a faculty member or Mr. Oishi prior to
scheduled appointment. All lab works must be at an acceptable level as a postgraduate
student. If it is not ready for a clinical session, faculty member will ask you to finish before
you see a schedule patient or faculty will dismiss your patient.
No commercial lab work is permitted to do at any time in the postgraduate Prosthodontics
laboratory by the students including former graduates.
A faculty member and the PG business office must authorize cases that are to be sent out to
commercial labs. Upon return of the case it must be examined and approved by the
Program Director and a faculty member.
Unauthorized lab works which are sent outside for part of the lab requirements will result in
suspension, probation or dismissal from school.
Any violations to these guidelines will be reported to the office and may result in a
disciplinary action.
Miscellaneous Policies
 Any non-functional or problems, or missing equipment, computers, and facility MUST be
promptly reported to the Program Director by an e-mail.
 Unattended facility MUST be locked and closed all the time for security reasons.
 No smoking in the school, No food in the clinic and Lab, No chewing gum in the clinic.
 No loud music to be played at any time.
 Library books may be signed out for two weeks at the secretary’s desk.
 The students MUST wear a proper color of gown in the lab and clinic. They should NOT
wear the gown in the PWL. Clinic gowns must be placed in proper bins. Gowns should NOT
be left in any other areas!
 Closets in the library are for faculty and visitors ONLY.
 Office phones are NOT to be used by students without permission from the staff assistant or
the program director.


Students are requested to speak ONLY English in the clinic and laboratory areas. Speaking
in a different language around those who do not understand is impolite.
Do NOT give the lab and office telephone numbers to patients - patients should call the front
desk and voice mail.
Any violations to these guidelines will be reported to the office and may result in a
disciplinary action.
ABSENCE AND VACATION POLICY
The program is closed (no clinic, no emergency clinic, no classes, office closed);




Thanksgiving weekend (Thurs-Sun)
Christmas to New Year
Weekends (Saturday and Sunday)
Federal Holidays and Patriots Day
The program will be open all other times, including during the school’s spring break and summer
vacation.
189
Students will have two weeks of vacation in 1st year and three weeks of vacation in 2nd and 3rd
years from July to following June, to be taken any time, provided three weeks’ notice is given
beforehand. Also, students must make sure before submitting requests for vacation that they
have arranged for their recall/emergency rotations and teaching rotations covered by other
students and that patient appointments are rescheduled. Students must also inform their
academic course directors of their absence and arrange for any missed work to be made up.
Any violations to these guidelines will be reported to the office and may result in a
disciplinary action.
Attending prosthodontics meetings and presenting at the meetings are encouraged; however,
those must be within reasonable time and period and approved in advance by the program
director. If your clinical progress and academic achievement are not up to the program standard,
you may not be allowed to attend those meetings.
Academic actions
Students who do NOT comply any regulations will be issued a Warning Form or Patient complaint
Form. Issue of TWO forms within one month could be subject of evaluation of student status by the
Program Director. Issue of two forms with same reason or more than three forms within three
school months could be subject to establishment of student’s probation status by the program
director or the Faculty meeting.
Probation status period is from three to six months and could be more, and after this period the
student status will be evaluated at the faculty meeting. Dismissal from the program may be a
consequence after the probation period.
Right to Appeal
All students in PG Prosthodontics have a right to appeal the decision of Probation status or
dismissal from the program in writing within fifteen days after receiving a letter of the decision
from the program director.
The appeal letter in writing will be evaluated by a committee, which complies with following
members;





Program Director
A faculty member chosen by the program director
Departmental Chairperson
Dean of Admission and
One student representative who will be selected by PG Prosthodontics student body.
The committee will schedule a hearing process with the student and will make a decision. The
committee will communicate the decision in writing to the student as soon as possible.
The student may appeal the decision of the committee to the Director of Advanced and Graduate
Education in writing within seven working days of receipt of the letter from the committee and
subject to the limitations previously delineated in this section. The Director of Advanced and
Graduate Education will report to the Advanced and Graduate Education Committee and make a
decision. The decision will be send to Executive Faculty and Dean for the final decision.
The student has a chance to appeal Executive Faculty and Dean that described on [TUSDM
Student Handbook].
Complaints
When the student finds or thinks that problems exist with the program compliance with the
accreditation standards, they are encourage to report or file complaints of the issue to the program
director, the associate program director, or the dean of Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
in writing. Also the student may file complaints to the Commission on Dental Accreditation;
190
however the student is encouraged to communicate with the program director first to solve the
problem.
The Commission on Dental Accreditation will review complaints that relate to a program’s
compliance with the accreditation standards. The Commission is interested in the sustained quality
and continued improvement of dental and dental-related education programs but does not
intervene on behalf of individuals or act as a court of appeal for treatment received by patients or
individuals in matter of admission, appointment, promotion or dismissal of faculty, staff or
students.
A copy of the appropriate accreditation standards and/or the Commission’s policy and procedure
for submission of complaints may be contacting the Commission at 211 East Chicago Avenue, IL
60611-2678 or by calling 1-800-621-8099 extension 4653.
Departmental Research and Publications
October 2007
2nd JPS-GNYAP Joint meeting Tokyo, Japan
Predictable Management of Extremely worn down dentition
Space management for worn down dentition cases
Suda, T, Kumagai, N, Gatti, M, Al-Fulaij, W, Mao, C, Kang, K, Hirayama, H
October 2007
2nd JPS-GNYAP Joint meeting Tokyo, Japan
Advanced Application of Porcelain Laminate Veneer Restorations
Kumagai, N, Suda, T, Amirian, I, Amirian, Y, Hirayama, H
2006 Haythem Abualsaud: The Clorimetric Assessment of the Effect of Porcelain Crown
Substructures on Color of Cervical Regions
2006 Dr. Suhail Al-Ghafli: The Effect of Cyclic Dislodgements on the Retention of an Overdenture
Attachment System at Different Implant Angulations
2006 Dr. Gianluca Paniz: The Effect of Metal Framework Design on the Cervical Color of CeramoMetal Crown
2007 Dr. Seevan Shoher: Comparison of Effects of Implant Abutment Material and Crown Core:
Comparison on the Cervical Color of Anterior Crowns
2007 Dr. Waleed Al-Fulaij Comparison of Porcelain Fracture Resistance of Two Types of Implant
Metal-Ceramic Restorations
Michalakis KX, Kalpidis C, Kang K, Hirayama H: “A simple impression technique for dental implants
placed in close proximity or adverse angulations.” J Prosthet Dent 2005;94(3):293-295
Michalakis KX, Kang K, Hirayama H: Fabrication of a metal-ceramic fixed partial denture utilizing
the prosthetic components of an unidentified implant system.” J Prosthet Dent 2005;94(5):472473
Raptis N, Michalakis KX, Hirayama H: Optical behaviour of current ceramic systems. Int J
Periodontics Restorative Dent 2006;26(1):31-41
Trakas T, Michalakis KX, Kang K, Hirayama H: Attachment System for Implant Retained
Overdentures: Literature Review. Implant Dentistry 15(1):24-34, 2006
Kang, K. and Hirayama, H.: Study guide for Board certification in Prosthodontics 11 th edition on CD
ROM American College of Prosthodontists Chicago, IL. USA 2006
Michalakis K, Kang K, Hirayama H: Repositioning implant replicas after soldering a fixed complete
denture framework. J Prosthet Dent 2006;95 (4)331-2
191
Michalakis K, Pissiotis A, Hirayama H, Kang K, Kafantaris N: Comparison of temperature increase in
the pulp chamber during the polymerization of materials used for the direct fabrication of
provisional restorations. J Prosthet Dent 2006;96:418-23
Kamalakidis S, Paniz G, Kang K, Hirayama H: Non-surgical managements of soft tissue deficiencies
for anterior single implant-supported restorations: A clinical report. J Prosthet Dent 2007;97:1-5
Michalakis KX, Bakopoulou A, Hirayama H, Garefis DP, Garefis PD: Pre- and post-set hydrophilicity
of elastomeric impression materials. J Prosthodont. 2007 Jul-Aug;16(4):238-48
Michalakis KX, Pissiotis A, Hirayama H, Garefis P, Petridis H: Cement failure Loads of 4 Provisional
Luting Agents Used for the Cementation of Implant Supported Fixed Partial Dentures. Part 2: The
Effect of Thermocycling and Air Abrasion of the Abutments and the Intaglio Surface of the Copings.
Int J Oral Maxilofac Implants . 2007;22
Michalakis K, Pissiotis AL, Kang K, Hirayama H, Garefis P, Petridis H: The Effect of Thermal Cycling
and Air Abrasion on Cement Failure Loads of 4 Provisional Luting Agents Used for the Cementation
of Implant-Supported Fixed Partial Dentures. Int J Oral Maxillofac Implant (in review process)
Sakaguchi K., Mehta N., Abdallah E., Forgione A., Hirayama H., Kawasaki T., Yokoyama A.:
Examination of the relationship between mandibular position and body posture J of Craniomandib
Pract 200725(4) 237-249
192
APPENDIX B
FAMILY EDUCATIONAL RIGHTS AND PRIVACY ACT OF 1974
(Buckley Amendment)
The U.S. Congress in 1974 passed the Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act, which governs
the use, distribution of, and individual access to student records kept by educational institutions.
The purpose of this legislation was to protect students from the abuses inherent in the release of
inaccurate information, which may be present in his or her file. The act provides several
safeguards for the student as well as defining the institutional responsibilities and rights in the
maintenance and administration of student records. This document will serve to notify the student
of the School's implementation of the Act's provisions.
Definitions
For purposes of this notification, the Tufts University School of Dental Medicine uses the following
definitions of terms.
Student - any person who attends or has attended the Tufts University School of Dental Medicine.
Persons admitted but never matriculated are not considered students.
Education records - any record (in handwriting, print, tapes, film, electronic, or other medium)
maintained by the university or an agent of the university that is directly related to a student,
except:
1. A personal record kept by a staff member if it is kept in the sole possession of the maker of the
record and is not accessible or revealed to any other person except a temporary substitute for the
maker of the record.
2. An employment record of an individual whose employment is not contingent on the fact that he
or she is a student, provided the record is used only in relation to the individual's employment.
3. Records which are created and maintained by Public Safety for law enforcement purposes.
4. Records made or maintained by a physician, psychiatrist, psychologist or other recognized
professional or paraprofessional acting in his or her professional or paraprofessional capacity and
which are used only in connection with the treatment of a student and which are disclosed only to
individuals providing that treatment.
5. Alumni records that contain information about a student after he or she is no longer in
attendance at the university and which do not relate to the person as a student.
School official - a person employed by the University in an administrative, supervisory, academic or
research, or support staff position (including law enforcement unit personnel and health staff); a
person or company with whom the University has contracted (such as an attorney, auditor, or
collection agent); a person serving on the Board of Trustees; or a student serving on an official
committee, such as a disciplinary or grievance committee, or assisting another school official in
performing his or her tasks. Legitimate educational interest indicates the need of a school official to
review an education record in order to fulfill his or her professional responsibility.
The following are the student’s rights provided under FERPA:

The right to inspect and review the student's education records within 45 days of the day
the University receives a request for access. Students should submit a written request that
specifically identifies the education record(s) they wish to inspect to the custodian of the
record as indicated in the chart below. An official within the department that receives the
request will make arrangements for access and notify the student of the time and place
where the records may be inspected. If the records are not maintained by the University
official to whom the request was submitted, that official shall advise the student of the
correct official to whom the request should be addressed. A student may read any
recommendation in his/her files unless the right to do so has been waived in writing.
193
Enrollment Records Office of Student
Affairs
15th Floor
1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
Lee Gant. Registrar
(617) 636-6823
Administration Office (SAHA)
200 Harrison Ave., 4th floor,
Boston, MA 02111
(617) 636-2700
Cumulative Academic Records
(grades, transcripts)
Office of Student Affairs
15th Floor
1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
15th Floor
Lee Gant. Registrar
(617) 636-6823
Career Services Records 15th Floor
Counseling & Testing Records* Student
Advisory & Health
Disabled Student Service Office of
Student Affairs
Mary Ellen Marks, Executive
Assistant to the Dean
(617) 636-6544
Administration Office (SAHA) Deborah Quinn, Director
Disciplinary Records Office of Student
Affairs
1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
15th Floor
Financial Records Health Sciences
Bursar’s Office
200 Harrison Avenue
Posner Hall, Suite #101
Boston, MA 02111
Financial Aid Records Financial Aid Office 1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
15th floor
Health Records* Student Advisory &
200 Harrison Ave., 4th floor,
Health Administration Office (SAHA)
Boston, MA 02111
International Student Records
20 Park Plaza
Suite 1101
Boston, MA 02111
Miscellaneous Records
(Student education records not
included in above list)
Office of Student Affairs
15th floor
1 Kneeland Street
Boston, MA 02111
Robert Kasberg, Associate
Dean, Admissions & Student
Affairs
(617) 636-6539
Robert Kasberg, Associate
Dean, Admissions & Student
Affairs
(617) 636-6539
James Moodie, Health
Sciences Bursar
(617) 636-2141
Sandra M. Pearson, Director
of Financial Aid
(617) 636-0922
Deborah Quinn, Director
(617) 636-2700
Ghenwa Hakim,
Foreign Student Scholar
Adviser
(617) 636-0391
Robert Kasberg, Associate
Dean, Admissions & Student
Affairs
(617) 636-6539
*Health and counseling records are maintained by the Student Advisory and Health Administration
Office and are available only to health professionals. A professional designated by the student in
writing may see that student's records.
194


The right to request the amendment of the student’s education records that the student
believes is inaccurate, misleading or otherwise in violation of his or her privacy rights.
A student may ask the School of Dental Medicine to amend a record that the student
believes is inaccurate or misleading. The student should write to the Associate Dean of
Student Affairs, clearly identify the part of the record they want changed, and specify why
the student believes the record is inaccurate or misleading. If the School of Dental Medicine
decides not to amend the record as requested by the student, the School will notify the
student of the decision and advise the student of his or her right to a hearing regarding the
request for amendment. You may appeal to the Dean for a hearing by a board of
disinterested persons chosen for this purpose. The hearing will be conducted in accordance
with the procedures set forth in the Ethics & Professionalism section of this Handbook. If as
a result of the hearing the School decides that the information in the education record is not
inaccurate, misleading, or otherwise in violation of the student’s privacy rights, the student
shall have the right to place in the education records a statement commenting on the
contested information in the record or the reason(s) the student disagrees with the decision
of the School.
The right to consent to disclosures of personally identifiable information contained in the
student's education records, except to the extent that FERPA authorizes disclosure without
consent.
Personally identifiable information from the education records of a student will be disclosed by the
School of Dental Medicine upon the prior written consent or request of the student. The written
consent or request must (a) specify the records that may be disclosed; (b) state the purpose of the
disclosure and (c) identify the party or class of parties to whom the disclosure may be made.
However, the School may disclose information without the prior written consent of the student in
the following circumstances:
1. To school officials with a legitimate educational interest in the records.
2. To certain officials of the U.S. Department of Education, the U.S. Comptroller General, and state
and local educational authorities, in connection with certain state or federally supported education
programs.
3. In connection with a student's request for or receipt of financial aid, as necessary to determine
the eligibility, amount or conditions of the financial aid, or to enforce the terms and conditions of
the aid.
4. To organizations conducting certain studies for or on behalf of the university.
5. To accrediting organizations to carry out their functions.
6. To either of two parents when at least one parent has claimed the student as a dependent for
income tax purposes. A certified copy of the parents' most recent Federal Income Tax Form may be
required to verify dependency.
7. To comply with a valid court order or subpoena or to comply with federal law (e.g., the USA
Patriot Act).
8. To appropriate parties in a health or safety emergency.
9. To a victim of an alleged perpetrator of a crime of violence or a nonforcible sex offense, the final
results of a disciplinary proceeding conducted by the university with respect to that alleged crime
or offense. The university may disclose the final results of the disciplinary proceeding, regardless of
whether it concluded a violation was committed.
10. Directory information so designated by the university.
11. To a court or administrative agency in the event of legal action between the university and a
student.
Directory Information
"Directory information" is personally identifiable information about students in attendance at the
School of Dental Medicine that may be disclosed without the prior consent of the student, subject
to the right of the student to inform the School in writing that all "directory information" with
respect to him or her shall not be so disclosed, as discussed below.
The School has designated each of the following items as "directory information": 94
• the student's name
195
• local address
• local telephone number
• E-mail address
• photographs
• awards and academic honors received
• previous educational institution(s) attended
Students may restrict the release of directory information, except to school officials with legitimate
educational interests and to others as permitted by law. In order to restrict the release of such
records, a student must make a request, in writing, to Mark Gonthier, Associate Dean of
Admissions and Student Services by October 1st of the academic year.
(4) The right to file a complaint with the U.S. Department of Education concerning alleged failures
by the University to comply with the requirements of FERPA.
The name and address of the federal agency that administers FERPA is:
Family Policy Compliance Office
U.S. Department of Education
400 Maryland Avenue, SW
Washington, DC 20202-4605
Gramm-Leach Bliley Act
The Financial Modernization Act of 1999, also known as the “Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act” or GLB Act,
includes provisions to protect consumers’ personal financial information held by financial
institutions. The GLB Act gives authority to eight federal agencies and the states to administer and
enforce the “Financial Privacy Rule” and the “Safeguards Rule”. These two regulations apply to
“financial institutions,” which include not only banks, securities firms, and insurance companies,
but also companies providing many other types of financial products and services to consumers,
including universities who administer loans and other financial aid.
The Financial Privacy Rule governs the collection and disclosure of customers’ personal financial
information by financial institutions. It also applies to companies, whether or not they are financial
institutions, which receive such information. Because universities are already subject to the privacy
provisions in the Federal Educational Rights and Privacy Act ("FERPA"), the Federal Trade
Commission decided that institutions of higher education that are complying with FERPA in
protecting the privacy of their student financial aid records will be deemed to be in
compliance with the GLB Act.
The Safeguards Rule requires all financial institutions that collect or receive customer financial
information to design, implement and maintain safeguards to protect such information. Tufts
University maintains safeguards to protect student financial information and generally requires that
third parties who provide services to the University, which requires them to have access to student
financial information, maintain safeguards that comply with the GLB Act.
196
APPENDIX C
TUFTS UNIVERSITY
Drug-Free Campus Program
The Drug-Free Schools and Communities Act Amendments of 1989 require that colleges and
universities, as a condition of receiving federal funds or any other form of financial assistance
under any federal program, certify that they have adopted and implemented a program to prevent
the unlawful possession, use, or distribution of illicit drugs and alcohol by students and employees.
Federal regulations implementing this statute require that Tufts University provide the following
information to its students and employees.
The illicit use of drugs and alcohol can seriously impair the health and safety of members of the
Tufts community and their families. The University is committed to addressing and preventing
illicit use and abuse of controlled substances and alcohol within the University community. There
are substantial health risks and legal consequences that stem from alcohol and substance abuse.
All students and employees are urged to read the information below.
I. Health Risks
Alcohol and substance abuse are a national public health concern. The health risks associated with
the abuse and illicit use of drugs and alcohol are described in the CONTROLLED SUBSTANCES –
USES AND EFFECTS and in the enclosed STATEMENT ON ALCOHOL EFFECTS both of which are
listed below.
II. Counseling and Treatment for Alcohol and Other Drug Abuse
The University encourages Tufts students and employees with alcohol or substance abuse problems
to seek assistance and treatment. At Tufts, a variety of resources exist where additional
information can be obtained about harmful behaviors and forms of treatment.
Students/Student Assistance Program (SAP)
For students on the Medford/Somerville campus, confidential counseling is available from the
following:
Alcohol and Health Education
617-627-5495
Tufts Health Service
617-627-3350
Tufts Counseling Center
617-627-3360
Psychiatrist, University Health Service
617-627-3350
For students on the Boston/Grafton campuses, confidential counseling is available from the
following:
Student Advisory and Health Adm. Office (All Schools)
Resource for Impaired Students Committee (Medical)
Massachusetts Dental Society (Dental)
617-636-2700
617-636-6534
508-651-7511
In addition, the Dean of Students office within each of the schools and the University Chaplain’s
office are available for referrals to the other resources in the community.
Employees
Employees who need assistance in dealing with alcohol and substance abuse problems are strongly
encouraged to utilize the confidential assistance and services offered through the Alcohol and
Health Education Program and the Chaplain’s office. Employees may also consult with their Human
resources representative for advice and referrals through the various insured health plans of the
University, or to seek out other resources in the community.
III. Standards of Conduct
197
The unlawful possession, use, or distribution of illicit drugs and alcohol by students and employees
on Tufts University property or as part of University activities is prohibited.
IV. Disciplinary Sanctions
The University will impose disciplinary sanctions on students and employees who violate the
standards of conduct described above. Sanctions may include but are not limited to: warning;
probation; suspension; dismissal; and/or referral to appropriate governmental authorities for civil
and criminal prosecution. The University may also require completion of a professional assessment
as part of Tufts Student Assistance Program as part of the student disciplinary process.
V. Local, State, and Federal Sanctions Concerning Alcohol and Drugs
Local, state, and federal laws make the illegal use of drugs and alcohol a criminal offense.
Conviction can lead to imprisonment, fines, and other penalties.
Cities and towns in Massachusetts prohibit public consumption of alcohol and impose fines for
violations. The Massachusetts Department of Conservation and Recreation also prohibits public
consumption of alcohol in its parks and public recreational areas. Boston and other cities and
towns surrounding the various Tufts campuses have ordinances forbidding the possession of an
open container of alcohol on any public street by any person, regardless of any age. Anyone
violating such ordinances is subject to arrest.
Massachusetts’s law prohibits the sale or delivery of alcoholic beverages to persons under age 21.
Violations are punishable by a fine of up to $2,000, one year’s imprisonment, or both.
Misrepresenting one’s age or falsifying an identification to obtain alcoholic beverages is punishable
by a fine of up to $300. Driving under the influence of alcohol, even for a first offense, is
punishable by a fine of not less than $500 and up to $5,000, up to two and one half years’
imprisonment, or both, and revocation of drivers’ license for between 45 and 90 days, and
mandatory alcohol rehabilitation.
Massachusetts imposes criminal penalties for the possession and/or distribution of controlled
substances, or drugs, without valid authorization. The penalties vary, depending on the type of
drug. Sale and possession of “drug paraphernalia” also is illegal in Massachusetts.
Under both Massachusetts and federal law, penalties for possession, manufacture, and distribution
are greater for subsequent convictions, including mandatory prison terms and the full minimum
term must be served.
Massachusetts makes it illegal to be in a place where heroin is kept and to be “in the company” of
a person known to possess heroin.
Under federal law, penalties may be doubled when any of the aforementioned acts are committed
within 1,000 feet of an elementary, secondary or vocational school; a college, junior college or
university; or a playground or public housing facility. The penalties may be doubled if the act is
committed within 100 feet of a youth center, public swimming pool or video arcade. Penalties may
also be doubled when an individual over the age of 18 distributes drugs to a person under 21;
employs, uses, induces, or coerces a person under 18 to violate federal drug laws or to assist the
individual to avoid detection for her/her own violations of federal drug laws; or receives drugs from
a person under 18 who is not an immediate family member.
Penalties may be tripled if an individual over 21 years of age coerces a person under 18 to
distribute, possess with intent to distribute or manufacture, or assist the individual to do the same,
a drug within 1,000 feet of an elementary, secondary, or vocation school; a college, junior college,
or university; or playground or public housing facility. Penalties may be tripled if the act is
committed within 100 feet
of a youth center, public swimming pool, or video arcade.
Distribution of a drug by one who is over 18 to a person under 18 can result in a prison sentence of
up t 5 years and/or fine of not more than $50,000. Finally, conspiracy to commit any of the above
198
drug-related offenses carries the same penalties regardless of whether or not he conspiracy is
successful.
See the enclosed chart on FEDERAL TRAFFICKING PENALTIES and the description of FEDERAL
PENALTIES AND SANCTIONS FOR ILLEGAL POSSESSION OF A CONTROLLED SUBSTANCE for
additional information. Updates regarding federal drug trafficking laws can be found at the Drug
Enforcement Agency’s website (www.usdoj.gov/dea/index/htm)
Under both Massachusetts and federal law, penalties for possession, manufacture, and distribution
increase with each subsequent conviction, including mandatory prison terms.
Persons convicted of drug possession under state and federal law are ineligible for federal student
grants and loans for up to one year following the first conviction, and up to five years after the
second. The penalty for unlawful distribution of drugs is loss of eligibility for benefits for up to five
years after the first conviction and for a longer period after the second.
Effects of Alcohol
Alcohol consumption causes a number of marked changes in behavior. Even low doses significantly
impair the judgment and coordination required to drive a car safely, increasing the likelihood that
the driver will be involved in an accident. Low to moderate doses of alcohol also increase the
incidence of a variety of aggressive acts, including spouse and child abuse. Moderate to high doses
of alcohol cause marked impairments in higher mental functions, severely altering a person’s ability
to learn and remember information. Very high doses cause respiratory depression and death. If
combined with other depressants of the central nervous system, much lower doses of alcohol will
produce the effects just described.
Repeated use of alcohol can lead to dependence. Sudden cessation of alcohol intake is likely to
produce withdrawal symptoms, including severe anxiety, tremors, hallucinations, and convulsions.
Alcohol withdrawal can be life threatening. Long-term consumption of large quantities of alcohol,
particularly when combined with poor nutrition, can also lead to permanent damage to vital organs
such as the brain and the liver.
Mothers who drink alcohol during pregnancy may give birth to infants with fetal alcohol syndrome.
These infants have irreversible physical abnormalities and mental retardation. In addition,
research indicates that the children of alcoholic parents are at greater risk than other youngsters of
becoming alcoholics.
Federal Penalties and Sanctions for Illegal Possession of a Controlled Substance
21 U.S.C. 844(a)
1st conviction: Up to 1 year imprisonment and fined at least $1,000 but not more than $100,000,
or both.
After 1 prior drug conviction: At least 15 days in prison, not to exceed 2 years and fined at least
$2,500 but not more than $250,000, or both.
After 2 or more prior drug convictions: At least 90 days in prison, not to exceed 3 years and fined
at least $5,000 but not more than $250,000, or both.
Special sentencing provisions for possession of crack cocaine: Mandatory at least 5 years in
prison, not to exceed 20 years and fined up to $250,000, or both if:
(a) 1st conviction and the amount of crack possessed exceeds 5 grams
(b) 2nd crack conviction and the amount of crack possessed exceeds 3 grams.
(c) 3rd or subsequent crack conviction and the amount of crack possessed exceeds 1 gram.
21 U.S.C. 853(a)(2) and 881(a)(7)
199
Forfeiture of personal and real property used to possess or to facilitate possession of a controlled
substance if that offense is punishable by more than 1-year imprisonment. (See special sentencing
provisions re: (crack).
21 U.S.C. 881(a)(4)
Forfeiture of vehicles, boats, aircraft or any other conveyance used to transport or conceal a
controlled substance.
21 U.S.C. 884a
Civil fine of up to $10,000 (pending adoption of final regulations).
21 U.S.C. 853a
Denial of Federal benefits, such as student loans, grants, contracts, and professional, and
commercial licenses, up to 1 year for first offense, up to 5 years for second and subsequent
offenses.
18 U.S.C. 922(g)
Ineligible to receive or purchase a firearm.
Miscellaneous
Revocation of certain Federal licenses and benefits, e.g. pilot licenses, public housing tenancy, etc.,
are vested within the authorities of individual Federal agencies.
200
APPENDIX D
Tufts University Information Stewardship Policy & Supporting Information Policies
Information Stewardship Policy
Policy Statement
Tufts University and members of the University community are expected to responsibly manage
and use information in support of research, teaching, service, and administration. All information
that is created, collected, licensed, maintained, recorded, used, or managed by the University, its
employees, and agents working on its behalf, regardless of ownership or origin, is institutional
data. The electronic and physical systems owned or licensed by Tufts University used to store and
access institutional data are institutional systems. Members of the Tufts community are expected
to responsibly maintain and use institutional data regardless of the resource used to access or
store the data—whether an institutional system, a privately owned resource, or a third-party
resource. The privacy of the personal information of University community members and clients
should be protected. This policy and suite of accompanying policies, procedures, and resources will
help ensure that Tufts’ institutional data and systems are protected from misuse, unauthorized
access, damage, alteration, or disclosure, while preserving the ability of authorized individuals to
access and use institutional data and systems for appropriate University purposes.
Members of the Tufts community working with or using institutional data and systems in any
manner must comply with all federal, Massachusetts, and other applicable laws and regulations; all
applicable university policies, procedures, and standards; and all applicable contracts and licenses.
Members of the Tufts community who violate this policy may be denied access to institutional data
and systems, and may be subject to other penalties and disciplinary action, both within and outside
of the University.
Use of Institutional Systems Policy
Policy Statement
The electronic and physical systems owned or licensed by Tufts University used to store or access
institutional data are institutional systems. These systems support the University’s instructional,
research, and service mission, including all university related activities. Use of these systems, like
those of other university resources and activities, is subject to all applicable laws and regulations;
university policies, procedures, and standards; and contracts and licenses. All operation of
institutional systems should therefore represent Tufts’ values and mission and management
expectations for ethical behavior.
Authorized Individual Access
Tufts institutional systems are provided to authorized individuals for University-related purposes.
Types of authorized individuals are described in the Eligibility for IT Policy. All access and use must
be properly controlled in a manner defined by management, and consistent with individual roles
and job responsibilities. Members of the Tufts community are entrusted with access to institutional
systems on an individual basis. Members of the Tufts community are not permitted to extend
access further to any other person by any means, including sharing access, providing unauthorized
redistribution of services, or otherwise obfuscating the true identity of the user. Users are expected
to take reasonable steps to prevent unauthorized access. Authorized access to institutional systems
is generally expected to end when a user no longer has an official connection to the Tufts
community. Managers have the authority to limit the personal use of institutional systems. Such
personal use cannot involve access to confidential data, interfere with work responsibilities, or
place an undue burden on institutional systems.
Resource Management, Monitoring, and No Expectation of Privacy in Use
Use of institutional systems is not ultimately private. While Tufts does not routinely monitor
individual usage of resources, normal operation and maintenance of resources requires logging of
activity, backup and caching of data, and other activities necessary to provide services and ensure
adherence to laws and regulations.
201
The University may, at is sole discretion and without notice to the individual:
i. monitor the activity of individuals without notice whenever there is reasonable cause to believe
that a law, contract, or any Tufts policy is being violated.
ii. Utilize the results of any general or individual monitoring in appropriate university disciplinary
proceedings or in litigation; and
iii. disclose the results of any such monitoring, including the contents and records of individual
communications, to appropriate University personnel, local, state, or federal law enforcement
agencies, and pursuant to legal process (such as a subpoena).
Security and Local Policies/Practices
The University employs various administrative, technical, and physical controls to reduce inherent
risks associated with using institutional systems and to safeguard institutional data. However,
security cannot be guaranteed solely with centralized controls. School, division, departmental, and
individual controls, policies, and practice should establish and maintain appropriate access control
and security, including the use of antivirus software, personal firewalls, secure storage areas for
physical media, user accounts, and authorized forms of encryption for institutional data and
institutional systems.
Management Controls
Administrative, physical, and technical controls serve to reinforce Tufts’ interpretations of
responsible use, verify trust placed in individuals, and limit their authorization to institutional
systems and institutional data. Disabling, deliberately circumventing, or probing or testing such
controls threatens the entire network of institutional systems, and is a violation of this policy.
When an institutional system has been compromised or may not be operating under appropriate
management control—and in order to protect the confidentiality, integrity, or availability of
institutional systems, institutional data or to otherwise protect the University—management may
temporarily disable, disconnect, or contain any account, device or system, prior to, during, or upon
completion of an investigation.
Resource Exhaustion and Disruption of Others
Operation of institutional systems must respect the finite capacity of those systems and limit use
so as not to consume an unreasonable amount of systems capacity or to interfere unreasonably
with the activity of other users. The University may require users of institutional systems to limit,
schedule, coordinate, or refrain from specific uses in order to ensure that adequate resources are
available to all users.
Policy Violation
Depending on the circumstances, and in management’s sole discretion, members of the Tufts
community who violate this policy may be denied access to institutional data and systems, and
may be subject to other penalties and disciplinary action, both within and outside of the University.
The University may refer suspected violations of applicable law to appropriate law enforcement
agencies.
Information Classification and Handling Policy
Policy Statement
This policy provides a three-level classification scheme for the confidentiality of institutional data
and establishes the requirements to maintain the integrity and availability of institutional data
regardless of its ownership or origin.
Confidentiality
This policy establishes three levels of confidentiality for institutional data. All members of the
community must know the level of confidentiality for the institutional data under their care. All
members of the community must manage institutional data under their care with safeguards that
are commensurate with the data’s level of confidentiality. This includes implementing and operating
institutional systems that support the confidentiality of the institutional data under their care.
202
Confidentiality
Level
Level A: Confidential Institutional data that is meant for a
Institutional Data
very limited distribution—available
only to members of the Tufts
community on a strictly need-to-know
basis. This institutional data includes,
but is not limited to, personally
identifiable information (name plus
social security number, state ID
number, financial account number) or
protected health information. Tufts is
usually, but not
always, required to protect this
information by law or contract.
Level B:
Institutional data that is meant for a
Sensitive
limited distribution; available only to
Institutional
members of the Tufts community that
Data
need the institutional data to support
their work. This institutional data
derives its value for Tufts in part from
not being publically disclosed.
Level C:
Public
Institutional
Data
Institutional data that is meant for
members of the Tufts community and
in some cases wide and open
distribution to the public at large. This
institutional data does not contain
confidential information.
Description Consequences of
Unauthorized Disclosure
Some of the consequences
may include: violation of
peoples’ privacy, reputational
and financial loss, and legal sanctions
for Tufts
Examples
Payroll records, personnel files,
compensation data, tenure and
promotions files, financial aid
records, student records,
accounts payable records,
vulnerability and audit reports,
protected health information, any
documents with nonpublic
personal information, any
information unauthorized
individuals can use to steal
identities or financial resources.
Some of the consequences may
include: reputational and financial loss,
a hindrance to productivity, or a
competitive disadvantage for Tufts.
Internal memos and emails,
planning documents, logs, audit
trails, research notes documenting the
development of a patentable
invention.
Some of the consequences may
include: violating licenses, loss of
access to subscription resources, or a
financial loss for Tufts.
Limited to Tufts Community
Licensed library resources, licensed
software, Wide and Open Distribution
Publications, press releases,
information posted on and meant for
open websites.
Integrity
All information owners, managers, and custodians are responsible for maintaining the integrity of
the institutional data under their care, ensuring that the data is complete and unaltered in all
essential respects. Information managers and custodians are responsible for implementing and
operating institutional systems that support the integrity of the institutional data under their care.
Availability
All information owners, managers, and custodians are responsible for maintaining the availability of
the institutional data under their care to persons who are permitted to use such data, ensuring the
data is retrievable, deliverable, and understandable. Information managers and custodians are
responsible for implementing and operating institutional systems that support the availability of the
institutional data under their care.
Policy Violation
Depending on the circumstances, and in management’s sole discretion, members of the Tufts
community who violate this policy may be denied access to institutional data and systems, and
may be subject to other penalties and disciplinary action, both within and outside of the University.
The University may refer suspected violations of applicable law to appropriate law enforcement
agencies.
Information Roles and Responsibilities Policy
Policy Statement
Responsibilities
Members of the Tufts community manage and use institutional data to support their work. Using
and managing institutional data comes with a variety of responsibilities, which this policy defines.
All management and use of institutional data should represent Tufts’ values and mission and
management expectations for ethical behavior.
Respect for Individual Privacy
Except as required by policy and law, all members of the university community are obligated to
respect the privacy of others as noted in this policy and the Business Conduct Policy. Respecting
the privacy of others includes not placing confidential or sensitive institutional data on institutional
systems or other environments that are unfit or unauthorized for such purposes, or engaging in
activities that unnecessarily expose
203
institutional data to harm or unauthorized access.
Compliance
All members of the community are obligated to manage and use institutional data in a manner that
is compliant with all applicable laws and regulations; university policies, procedures, and
standards; and contracts and licenses. Members of the Tufts community are responsible for using
and managing institutional data in a compliant manner regardless of the resource used to access or
store the data—whether an institutional system, a Tufts community member’s privately owned
resource, or a third-party resource.
Requirements of Other Jurisdictions
All members of the community who engage in electronic communications with persons in other
states or countries or on other systems or networks may also be subject to the laws of those other
states and countries and the rules and policies of external networks and systems. Users should
ensure that their use of any particular resource is consistent with laws within those other
jurisdictions. The best source of information to clarify these requirements is with the user’s
academic or administrative manager.
Respect for Copyright
All members of the community must respect the work product and copyrights of others as noted in
the Policy on Fair Use of Copyrighted Materials.
Priority of University Business
All members of the community are expected respect the priority of university business and keep
the personal use of institutional systems to a minimum. Managers have the authority to limit the
personal use of institutional systems.
Prohibition on Testing of Security Controls
Under management direction, the University performs routine testing and audits of its security
controls to help ensure they are working as intended. Anyone who seeks to violate the legitimate
privacy of others or gains unauthorized access to resources is in violation of this policy and any
probing or testing of security controls is strictly prohibited. Violations will be investigated, will
follow established internal disciplinary procedures and may be referred to external law enforcement
agencies for further legal action.
Policy Violation
Depending on the circumstances, and in management’s sole discretion, members of the Tufts
community who violate this policy may be denied access to institutional data and systems, and
may be subject to other penalties and disciplinary action, both within and outside of the University.
The University may refer suspected violations of applicable law to appropriate law enforcement
agencies.
Roles
Members of the Tufts community play different roles in the use and management of institutional
data. The table below defines these roles and associated responsibilities. Individuals are not to be
formally assigned to particular roles (in fact, everyone has different roles for different types of
institutional data). Rather, this policy is designed to help members of the community understand
the interconnected framework of responsibilities for managing and using institutional data.
204
Role
Information Owners
Description
Generally speaking, Tufts University is
the information owner of institutional
data. Faculty members are often
information owners of their faculty
materials. See the Policy on Rights and
Responsibilities with Respect to
Intellectual Property for more details on
Information Managers The individuals charged by information
owners to ensure the responsible
management and use of institutional
data. Information managers are typically senior
managers, senior administrators, and directors of
schools, divisions, offices, and departments.
Faculty members are
the information managers of their faculty
materials.
Information
Custodians
Information Users
Information Subjects
Responsibilities
Information owners have the right and responsibility to
manage and use institutional data appropriately, as defined
by all applicable laws and regulations; university policies,
procedures, and standards; and contracts and licenses.
Information owners may delegate the responsible
management of their institutional data to information
managers.
Information managers make the decisions and take the
actions on behalf of the information owners needed to
ensure the responsible and appropriate management and
use of institutional data. Typical responsibilities of
information managers include, but are not limited to:
• Establish appropriate information management
policies and procedures;
• Identify the laws and regulations; University
policies, procedures, and standards; and
contracts and licenses that affect the
institutional data under his or her care;
• Identify the classification of institutional data
under his or her care;
• Determine the appropriate access and use of
institutional data under his or her care;
• Provide communications and education to
information users on the appropriate use and
care of institutional data;Work with information custodians
to establish and maintain trustworthy information systems.
Information managers may delegate some
management activities to information custodians,
usually for reasons of efficiency and
effectiveness. Information managers may also
appoint information stewards to undertake
activities for the manager, including, but not
limited to, surveying the location and state of
information, developing and implementing
information policies and procedures, and
implementing protective measures.
The entities or individuals charged by
Information custodians make the decisions and
information managers to execute aspects of
take the actions needed to support the
managing institutional data.
management function delegated by the
Information custodians are typically IT
information managers to the information
units that maintain and operate
custodians. Information custodians’ decisionmaking,
institutional systems in order to manage
actions, and responsibilities are limited
institutional data on behalf of information
to those delegated functions. Typical
managers.
responsibilities of information custodians include,
but are not limited to:
• Maintain and operate institutional systems;
• Ensure that institutional systems have the
safeguards in place that are commensurate with
confidentiality level of the institutional data held
or accessed by the institutional systems;
• Manage access to institutional data
appropriately;
• Follow and implement information policies and
procedures.
Individuals that access and use
Information users have the responsibility to
institutional data in support of their
access and use institutional data in an
research, teaching, service, and
appropriate and compliant manner. In particular,
administrative work.
information users have the responsibility to
Typically, information users are faculty, staff and protect the personal information of information
affiliates.
subjects in the institutional data they are
accessing and using.
The individuals that have information about them Information subjects have the right to expect that
in institutional data. Nearly all members of the
information users, custodians, managers, and
Tufts community—students, faculty, staff,
owners will manage and use the institutional data
affiliates, alumni, and donors, plus
that contains information about them in an
nonmatriculated students—are information
appropriate and compliant manner. In particular,
subjects.
information subjects have the right to expect that
information users, custodians, managers, and
owners will use reasonable efforts and resources
to protect the subject’s personal information.
205
APPENDIX E
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY ON SEXUAL HARASSMENT AND TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY
ON CONSENSUAL RELATIONSHIPS
Sexual harassment violates the dignity of individuals. It is a form of discrimination that violates
federal and state laws and is prohibited at Tufts University. Tufts is committed to providing an
education and work environment that is free from sexual harassment. The University works to
prevent and address sexual harassment through educational programs, training, and complaint
resolution. Tufts encourages all members of the University community to report any concerns or
complaints of sexual harassment.
Managers, supervisors and other agents of the University are required to respond promptly and
appropriately to allegations of sexual harassment that are brought to their attention.
What is sexual harassment?
Sexual harassment is a form of sex discrimination. It includes unwelcome sexual advances,
requests for sexual favors, and other physical or verbal conduct of a sexual nature or conduct
directed at a person because of his or her gender when:




Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term and condition of
an individual’s academic status or employment; or
Submission to, or rejection of, such conduct by an individual is used as a basis for
academic decisions or
employment decisions; or
Such conduct, whether verbal or physical, has the purpose or effect of unreasonably
interfering with the individual’s academic or work performance or
of creating an intimidating, hostile, or offensive environment in which to work or to
learn.
What are my rights under this policy?
You have the right to work, learn and live in an environment free from sexual harassment.
Who could be involved in an incident of sexual harassment?
Sexual harassment can occur between any individuals associated with the University, whether
between people of different sexes or the same sex. Sexual harassment can occur between people
of unequal power or between peers. Examples of who could be involved in a sexual harassment
allegation could include, but are not limited to, any combination of the following: supervisor and
subordinate, faculty and staff, coworkers, student and professor, student and staff, student and
student, contractor or vendor and staff.
A victim does not have to be the direct recipient of the conduct but could be anyone affected by the
conduct.
What actions constitute sexual harassment?
The following are some examples of conduct, particularly when unwelcome, which may constitute
sexual harassment:



Direct proposition of a sexual nature and/or subtle pressure for sexual activity that is
unwanted and unreasonably interferes with a person’s work or academic environment
gender harassment, including sexist statements and behavior that convey insulting,
degrading, or sexist attitudes
persistent and unwanted requests for dates, unwelcome and inappropriate letters,
telephone calls, email, or other communications or gifts
206






direct or implied threats that submission to sexual advances will be a condition of
employment, work status, promotion, grades, or letters of recommendation
subtle or overt pressure for sexual favors
unwanted physical contact such as touching, hugging, brushing against a person’s body,
impeding or blocking movements
sexually explicit statements, questions, jokes, or anecdotes regardless of the means of
communication (oral, written, email, text messages, etc.)
the display of inappropriate sexually oriented materials in a location where others can
view them
sexual assault, attempted rape, or rape. (Please see section on sexual assault)
Where does sexual harassment occur?
Sexual harassment does not restrict itself to the workplace nor does it have to take place on
University property. Sexual harassment could occur at any University sponsored program or
activity regardless of location. For example, sexual harassment could occur out of state, such as at
a conference, off-site project, or an externship.
What can I do if I feel I have been sexually harassed?





If you feel comfortable enough, you may talk with the person, inform him or her of the
unwelcome behavior and ask that the behavior stop. Document the incident and the
steps taken to resolve it.
Staff/faculty: You may report it to any supervisor or manager; Student: You may report
it to any university faculty member or university administrator.
You may contact any of the Sexual Harassment Resource Persons listed in this brochure.
You may call the Office of Equal Opportunity directly at 617.627.3298.
You may file a confidential and anonymous complaint through EthicsPoint, Inc.
(https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=7182) or by
calling EthicsPoint, Inc. directly at 1.866.384.4277.
Note: Complaints that are submitted without identifying the Complainant make it difficult, if not
impossible, to adequately investigate, respond or take appropriate action. Employees with
complaints are strongly encouraged to contact OEO directly if there are specific concerns about
filing a complaint.
Where do I go if I have questions about this policy?
Tufts University Office of Equal Employment and Affirmative Action is responsible for enforcing the
University’s Sexual Harassment policy. Please contact OEO at 617.627.3298 if you have questions
about this policy. OEO is located in Ballou Hall on the Medford Campus, first floor. You can call OEO
at 617.627.3298 or visit www.tufts.edu/oeo.
Rights and Responsibilities
As a member of the Tufts community you have the right to work, learn, and live in an environment
free from sexual harassment. All members are responsible for reporting incidents of possible sexual
harassment. Managers, supervisors and other agents of the University are required to respond
promptly and appropriately to allegations of sexual harassment that are brought to their attention.
Duty to Report
Managers, supervisors, faculty and other agents of the University have a duty to report any known
or alleged incidents of sexual harassment to the OEO.
Duty to Cooperate
Faculty, staff, student employees and students must cooperate with University investigations into
sexual harassment. Refusal to cooperate with an investigation may result in disciplinary action.
Freedom from Retaliation
207
Any member of the University community has the right to raise concerns about or complaints of,
sexual harassment without fear of reprisal. It is unlawful and it is a violation of University policy to
retaliate against an individual for filing a complaint of sexual harassment or for cooperating in a
sexual harassment investigation. Any person who retaliates against an individual reporting sexual
harassment, filing a sexual harassment complaint, or participating in a sexual harassment
investigation is subject to disciplinary action up to and including expulsion or termination by the
University.
Confidentiality
The University recognizes the importance of confidentiality and understands that some individuals
filing complaints or involved in an investigation may want their identity to remain confidential. In
some instances, the alleged harasser can be spoken to without the Complainant being identified. In
other cases, issues of confidentiality must be balanced against the University's need to investigate
and take appropriate action. The University will respect the privacy and confidentiality of
individuals involved in a sexual harassment investigation to the fullest extent possible.
Consequences of Sexual Harassment
Sexual harassment affects the victim of harassment. The student or employee may suffer a
diminished ability to work and study, which may have a lasting career impact or a loss of
confidence in the University’s ability to provide a comfortable and safe environment for work and
learning. A student's educational goals may also be significantly affected if the student decides to
avoid certain courses, change his or her area of study, or transfer to another institution. In
addition, sexual harassment impacts the University and the department(s) involved. The University
and the department(s) may experience an atmosphere of fear, intimidation, declining work
productivity and office morale.
A person found responsible for sexual harassment may face:






student disciplinary action
letter of reprimand
denial of promotion
demotion
suspension
termination
Sexual Assault Cases
Students who are survivors of sexual assault are highly encouraged to contact University police.
Reporting an assault to University police does not require filing criminal charges; however, it does
allow the University to assist and support the survivor. Sexual assault is an egregious form of
sexual harassment and it is a crime. The University takes all incidents seriously. The University
supports the right of the survivor of a sexual assault to decide how best to utilize various
university, community, private, and public support systems designated to address crimes of sexual
assault.
Within the University, instances of sexual assault should be reported to:
Tufts University Police Department



Medford Campus: 617.627.6911
Boston Campus: 617.626.6911
Grafton Campus: 508.839.5303
Students may also contact the appropriate dean of college/school. On the Medford campus,
students may contact Elaine Theodore, Sexual Violence Resource Coordinator located in Health
Services, at 617.627.3752.
For further information regarding sexual assault, please reference Tufts University Sexual Assault
Policy at www.tufts.edu/oeo/univpolicies.html.
208
Title IX: Central Reporting and Coordination
Title IX regulations of the Education Amendments of 1972 require all university personnel to report
any incident of sexual harassment whether resolved informally or formally through the grievance
procedure to the University’s Title IX coordinator. The director of the Office of Equal Opportunity
serves as the Title IX coordinator.
Reports should not include the names or identities of the persons involved. Reports should include
a description of the complaint and the schools or administrative units with which the participants
are affiliated. These reports allow the Title IX Coordinator to identify patterns of frequency in a
particular area or location within the University and report these findings to the president on an
annual basis and to coordinate compliance with federal regulations. For questions regarding Title
IX, please call the Title IX Officer at 617.627.3298.
University Sexual Harassment Resource Persons
Office of Institutional Diversity
Office of Equal Opportunity and Affirmative Action
Ballou Hall, 1st Floor—Medford 617.627.3298
Medford Campus
Sonia Jurado
Interim Title IX Coordinator
Office of Equal Opportunity and Affirmative Action
617.627.3298
[email protected]
Christy Galatis
Senior OEO Specialist
Office of Equal Opportunity and Affirmative Action
617.627.3298
[email protected]
Alison A. Blackburn
Director of Human Resources and Talent Management
617-627-6272
[email protected]
Margery W. Davies
Director of Diversity Education & Development
School of Arts, Sciences & Engineering
617-627-3385
[email protected]
Leah Friedberg
Manager Engineering Project Development Center
School of Engineering
617-627-4525
[email protected]
Steph L. Gauchel
Director, Women’s Center
School of Arts, Sciences & Engineering
617-627-4640
[email protected]
Laurie Hurley
Director of Admissions
The Fletcher School
209
617-627-2410
[email protected]
Doreen L. Long
Associate Director of Residential Life & Learning
School of Arts, Sciences and Engineering
617-627-5247
[email protected]
Inez McCarthy
Faculty Affairs Officer
School of Arts, Sciences & Engineering
617-627-3708
Mindy Nierenberg
Senior Programs Manager and Director of Leadership Studies
Tisch College
617-627-4159
[email protected]
Branwen C.A. Smith-King
Assistant Director, Athletics
School of Arts, Sciences & Engineering
617-627-3782
[email protected]
Elaine D. Theodore
Sexual Assault Resource Coordinator
School of Arts, Sciences & Engineering
617-627-3752
[email protected]
Boston Campus
Stacey Herman
Associate Dean for Student Affairs
Friedman School of Nutrition Science & Policy
617-636-3711
[email protected]
Janet Kerle
Associate Dean of Students
Tufts School of Medicine
617-636-6534
[email protected]
Kathryn Lange
Associate Dean, Sackler School
617-636-6767
[email protected]
Katherine Vosker
Associate Director, Student Affairs
Tufts University School of Dental Medicine
617-636-0887
[email protected]
Sabrina Williams
210
Director, Human Resources, Boston and Grafton
617-636-6600
[email protected]
Grafton Campus
Barbara Berman
Assistant Dean, Student Affairs
The Cummings School
508-839-8733 ext. 84725
[email protected]
Lucia Hackett
Senior Human Resources Representative
The Cummings School
508-839-7975 ext. 87975
[email protected]
Mary-Rose Paradis
Associate Professor
The Cummings School
508-839-7926
[email protected]
OEO Grievance Procedures
The OEO Grievance Procedures can be found in this brochure or by visiting
www.tufts.edu/oeo. You may also request a copy of the procedures by contacting
OEO at 617.627.3298.
Other Resources
Complaints or inquiries concerning sexual harassment may be filed directly with:
For the Student Community:
US Department of Education
Office for Civil Rights
5 Post Office Square
Eighth Floor
Boston, MA 02109-3921
617-289-0111
211
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY ON CONSENSUAL RELATIONSHIPS
I. PURPOSE AND POLICY
Tufts University seeks to maintain a professional educational environment. Actions of faculty
members and academic administrators that are unprofessional or appear to be unprofessional are
inconsistent with the university's educational mission. It is essential that those in a position of
authority not abuse, nor appear to abuse, the power with which they are entrusted.
Faculty members and academic administrators exercise power over students, whether by teaching,
grading, evaluating, or making recommendations for their further studies or their future
employment. Amorous, dating, or sexual relationships between faculty members, academic
administrators, and students are impermissible when the faculty members and academic
administrators have professional responsibility for the student. Voluntary consent by the student in
such a relationship is suspect, given the fundamental nature of the relationship. Moreover, other
students may be affected by such behavior, because it places the faculty member and academic
administrator in a position to favor or advance one student's interest to the potential detriment of
others. Therefore, it is a violation of university policy for a faculty member or academic
administrator to engage in an amorous, dating, or sexual relationship with a student whom he/she
instructs, evaluates, supervises, or advises, or over whom he/she is in a position to exercise
authority in any way.
II. DEFINITION
As used in this policy, the terms faculty or faculty member include all those who teach at the
university and other instructional personnel, including graduate students with teaching
responsibilities. Academic administrators include all staff who are in a position to counsel, direct, or
influence the academic performance of students.
III. POLICY VIOLATION
A violation of this policy may result in disciplinary action.
IV. REPORTING
If the person involved in a possible policy violation is a faculty member, the issue should be
brought to the attention of the appropriate Dean of the College/School. If the person involved is a
staff member or administrator, the issue should be brought to the attention of the Director of OEO,
The Vice President for Human Resources or the Vice President/Executive Associate Dean for the
College/School employing the staff member or administrator.
212
APPENDIX F
TUFTS UNIVERSITY POLICY ON SEXUAL ASSAULT
Tufts University Sexual Assault Policy
Sexual assault is a crime of violence that is never acceptable and will not be tolerated at Tufts
University. The University is dedicated to the elimination of sexual assault within the Tufts
community. Accordingly, the University takes all allegations of sexual assault seriously, and is
committed to providing information, resources, and clear direction to the members of the Tufts
community so that together we can help prevent and respond to sexual assault. The University
affirms the right of survivors to decide how they may best use university and other support
systems and processes to address crimes of sexual assault. Retaliation against anyone who brings
forward a complaint of sexual assault is strictly prohibited. Anyone responsible for retaliation,
whether that person is the accused party or someone affiliated with the accused, will be subject to
disciplinary action by the University.
Defining and Recognizing Sexual Assault
Sexual assault is the act of committing an unwanted physical contact of a sexual nature, whether
by an acquaintance or by a stranger, that occurs without indication of consent of both individuals,
or that occurs under threat or coercion. An “acquaintance” is not necessarily a person one knows
only casually, and can include a close friend, intimate partner, family member, classmate, etc.
Survivors and perpetrators can be of any sex/gender.
Sexual assault can occur either forcibly and/or against a person's will, or when a person is
incapable of giving consent. Under federal and state law, sexual assault includes, but is not limited
to, rape, forcible sodomy, forcible oral copulation, sexual assault with an object, sexual battery
(e.g., unwanted touching of an intimate body part for purposes of sexual gratification), and threat
of sexual assault.
Consent is an affirmative, conscious decision - to engage in mutually accepted sexual
contact. Signals of consent must be mutual and ongoing, as well as offered freely and
knowingly. Consent is required regardless of the parties' relationship, prior relationship, or sexual
history. A verbal "no," even if it may sound indecisive or insincere, constitutes a lack of consent.
Likewise, incapacitation constitutes a lack of consent. For example, a person is incapable of giving
consent when passed out, asleep, or incapacitated by intoxication. Consumption of alcohol and/or
drugs, in and of itself, does not relieve a party of responsibility to obtain ongoing consent.
Reporting Sexual Assault
Reporting a sexual assault can be difficult, and survivors may experience a multitude of emotions
in thinking about discussing what happened to them. For that reason, Tufts University wants
survivors to know that there are many options for them when considering whether to report sexual
assault.
Survivors of sexual assault are strongly encouraged to report the assault immediately to the police
with authority over the location of the assault. If the assault occurred on campus, survivors are
encouraged to report it immediately to campus police. Early reporting provides immediate access
to medical support, and to information regarding available legal and judicial resources, as well as
counseling and support services. Counseling and medical services are available immediately and
confidentially, whether or not an individual feels ready to make any decisions about reporting the
assault to police or campus judicial resources.
Survivors who notify the police should be aware of the importance of the immediacy of reporting
the incident in terms of preserving physical evidence at the assault scene as well as on the person
assaulted. The gathering of physical evidence can provide important evidence in support of
criminal charges. Survivors may also choose to report an assault well after the assault occurred,
even if the opportunity to collect physical evidence has passed.
213
Survivors who immediately report an assault will be provided with information directing them to an
appropriate health care facility to allow for collection of evidence and treatment. If a sexual assault
survivor chooses to report the incident days, weeks, or even months after the assault, important
support systems are still available and can be arranged, but the survivor should understand that
delay may make it more difficult to collect physical evidence of the sexual assault that could impact
an investigation.
Reporting an assault to the Tufts Police or other law enforcement does not require filing criminal
charges. Tufts University has police officers who have been specially trained to work with survivors
of sexual assault, and they can explain your rights and options, as well as direct you to other
resources.
Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO)/Title IX
(617-627-3298; www.tufts.edu/oeo; [email protected])
Pursuant to Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, Tufts University is committed to
providing a campus environment free of sex discrimination. Sexual assault is a form of sex
discrimination that violates Title IX. The University’s Title IX Coordinator, as part of OEO, is
charged with the intake and investigation of reports regarding sex discrimination (including sexual
assault and other forms of sexual harassment). Students, staff and faculty may contact OEO to
report any type of sexual misconduct.
Resources
Tufts University recognizes that survivors must focus on their security, health and healing in the
aftermath of a sexual assault. The following is a list of resources that can assist survivors on or off
campus.
Resources for Students on the Boston Campus
Tufts Police: 617-636-6911 or ext 66911 (emergency); 617-636-6610 (non-emergency)
The Tufts Police can help with transportation to a hospital, reporting the assault if you wish to do
so, investigating the assault and obtaining a restraining order.
Student Advisory and Health Administration Office 617-636-2700
Debbie Quinn, Director
During normal business, this office provides short-term confidential counseling for personal
problems, academic concerns, career indecision, increased self-awareness, stress management,
anxiety, and family and interpersonal issues.
Dean of Students Offices
The staff in the Dean of Students offices can help arrange for safe housing, stay-away orders and
can facilitate university disciplinary action, should you wish to pursue it.

School of Medicine 617-636-6534
Amy Kuhlik, Dean of Student Affairs

Office of Public Health & Professional Degree programs 617-636-2497
Robin Glover, Assistant Dean

School of Dental Medicine 617-636-6539
Robert H. Kasberg, Jr., Associate Dean, Student Affairs

Sackler School 617 636-2143
Naomi Rosenberg, Dean of Sackler School

Friedman School of Nutrition Science & Policy 617-636-3779
Patrick Webb, Academic Dean

Human Nutrition Research Center on Aging 617-556-3357
Arlene Walsh, Senior Human Resources Representative
214
Title IX Liaisons
The Title IX Liaisons are University employees who are available to receive reports of sex
discrimination at Tufts, including sexual harassment and sexual assault. The Liaisons can provide
information regarding available resources, but are not responsible for investigating reports. Rather,
they will direct the information they receive to the University’s Title IX Coordinator in OEO.
On the Boston campus, the Title IX Liaisons are:
Stacey Herman
Associate Dean for Student Affairs
The Friedman School of Nutrition Science and Policy
617.636.3711
[email protected]
Janet Kerle
Associate Dean of Students
Tufts School of Medicine
617.636.6534
[email protected]
Kathryn Lange
Associate Dean of the Sackler School
The Sackler School
617.636.6767
[email protected]
Katherine Vosker
Associate Director of Student Affairs
Tufts School of Dental Medicine
617.636.0887
[email protected]
Sabrina Williams
Director of Human Resources for Boston and Grafton
617.636.6600
[email protected]
Other Resources
Tufts Police: 617-636-6911 or ext 66911 (emergency); 617-636-6610 (non-emergency)
Tufts Police can help with transportation to a hospital, reporting the assault if you wish to do so,
investigating the assault and obtaining a restraining order.
Local police departments in your town: Dial 911 for emergencies; otherwise, each town
lists a non-emergency number in your phone book, and you can ask to speak to a detective. Some
larger police departments have a specific sexual assault unit.
Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO): 617-627-3298; www.tufts.edu/oeo
OEO is responsible for Title IX reporting and enforcement of the university’s sexual harassment
policy. Staff and faculty should contact OEO to report a sexual assault.
Community Resources
These resources are listed for your information. Tufts University is not affiliated with any of these
organizations.
Center for Violence Prevention and Recovery: 617-667-8141;
www.bidmc.org/violenceprevention
215
Located at the Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston, the center provides confidential
support and assistance to survivors of violence and abuse. Services include individual and group
counseling and assistance navigating the medical and legal systems.
Boston Area Rape Crisis Center: 617-492-7273 (hotline); 617-492-8306 (business);
www.barcc.org
Staff provides a range of confidential services for sexual assault survivors, including a 24-hour
hotline, counseling and legal assistance. BARCC also provides medical advocates who offer
emotional support at all SANE site hospitals (sites equipped to do a rape kit and exam) in the
metro area. BARCC serves women and men.
Fenway Community Health Violence Recovery Program: 617.927.6250 or 800.834.3242
www.fenwayhealth.org
In addition to being a full-service lesbian, gay, bisexual and transgender physical and mental
health center, Fenway’s Violence Recovery Program offers an LGBT Domestic Violence Support
Group, a sexual assault and/or childhood sexual abuse Male Survivors Group (co-facilitated with
BAARC—contact Peter at 617.927.6224), and a Trauma Recovery Group for LGBT people who have
experienced abuse, violence or other trauma (contact Ben at 800.834.3242).
Rape Crisis Center of Central Massachusetts – Worcester; 888-887-7130;
www.rapecrisiscenter.org
Victim Rights Law Center: 617-399-6720; www.victimrights.org
VRLC provides sexual assault victims with free legal assistance.
Victims of Violence Program – Cambridge Health Alliance: 617-591-6360;
http://www.challiance.org/vov/vov.shtml
VOV provides a range of clinical services to victims of violence including: crisis
intervention and response, hospital-based and system-wide victim advocacy and support, longer
term clinical care (psychological assessment, treatment planning and psychotherapy) for adult
survivors of physical and sexual violence, and a wide array of groups (including groups for adult
survivors of childhood abuse and domestic violence).
District Attorneys' Offices
If you wish to contact law enforcement authorities to report a sexual assault, select the district
attorney in the county where you reside.



Middlesex County: 781-897-8300
Suffolk County: 617-343-4400
Worcester County: 508-797-4334
Sexual Assault and Related Crimes: Definitions
The following terms are defined by Massachusetts General Laws (Mass. Gen. Laws) and are not
necessarily applicable for purposes of any university policy. They are summarized below for
reference only in order to assist readers in understanding the criminal context of sexual assault and
related crimes.
Sexual assaults, as generally described in the Mass. Gen. Laws, are addressed through the criminal
justice system. Readers should refer directly to the Mass. Gen. Laws for more information or to
obtain the complete text of any criminal statute.
A. Domestic Abuse – Massachusetts defines "abuse" as one or more of the following acts between
family, or household members: (a) attempting to cause or causing physical harm; (b) placing
another in fear of imminent serious physical harm; (c) causing another to engage involuntarily in
sexual relations by force, threat or duress. M.G.L. c. 209A § 1. "Family or household members"
includes those who (a) are or were married to one another; (b) are or were residing together in the
same household; (c) are or were related by blood or marriage; (d) have a child in common
216
regardless of whether they have ever married or lived together; or (e) are or have been in a
substantive dating or engagement relationship. A court considers several factors in determining
whether a "substantive dating relationship" exists, including (1) the length of time of the
relationship, (2) the type of relationship, (3) the frequency of interaction between the parties; and
(4) if the relationship has been terminated by either person, the length of time elapsed since the
termination of the relationship. M.G.L. c. 209A § 1. The rights of the survivor of domestic abuse
include the right to an order restraining the attacker from abuse, an order directing the attacker to
leave the household, building or workplace, and an order directing the attacker to pay for losses
suffered as a result of abuse including medical and moving expenses, and property damaged
sustained. M.G.L. c. 209A § 3.
B. Rape – In Massachusetts, "whoever has sexual intercourse or unnatural sexual intercourse with
a person, and compels such person to submit by force and against his or her will, or compels such
person to submit by threat of bodily injury," is guilty of rape. See M.G.L. c. 265 § 22(b). The term
"unnatural sexual intercourse" includes oral intercourse, anal intercourse, digital penetration, and
object penetration. Rape occurs when the sexual act is without consent and forced by (a) force, (b)
threat, or (c) when the survivor is unconscious.
C. Aggravated Rape –The crime of aggravated rape occurs (1) if the rape results in serious
bodily injury, (2) there is more than one perpetrator of the rape, or (3) the rape is committed
during a serious felony such as assault and battery with a dangerous weapon, robbery, kidnapping,
or burglary. In Massachusetts, aggravated rape is punishable by life in prison. See M.G.L. c. 265
§ 22(a).
D. Assault with Intent to Commit Rape – It is a crime punishable by prison time for anyone to
assault a survivor with the intent to commit rape. If the person who assaults with intent to rape is
also armed with a gun, the punishment is at least 20 years in state prison. M.G.L. c. 265 § 24.
E. Drugging for Sexual Intercourse – Whoever applies, administers, or causes to be taken by a
person any drug, matter or thing with intent to stupefy or overpower such person so as to thereby
enable any person to have sexual intercourse or unnatural sexual intercourse with such person
shall be guilty of the crime and subject to at least 10 years to prison. M.G.L. c. 272 § 3.
F. Stalking – It is a crime to (i) willfully and maliciously engage in a knowing pattern of conduct
or series of acts over a period of time directed at a specific person which seriously alarms or
annoys that person and would cause a reasonable person to suffer substantial emotional distress;
and (ii) make a threat with the intent to place the person in imminent fear of death or serious
bodily injury. This includes contact by mail, e-mail, and fax. See M.G.L. c. 265 § 43. Any
individual who commits such acts is guilty of the crime of stalking.
G. Sexual Harassment – Massachusetts prohibits sexual harassment both in employment and in
educational facilities. Sexual harassment in the workplace is defined as sexual advances, requests
for sexual favors, and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature when (a) submission to
or rejection of such advances, requests or conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or
condition of employment or as a basis for employment decisions; (b) such advances, requests or
conduct have the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering an individual's work performance by
creating an intimidating, hostile, humiliating or sexually offensive work environment. M.G.L. c.
151B § 1(18). Sexual harassment in an educational facility means any sexual advances, requests
for sexual favors and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature when:— (i) submission to
or rejection of such advances, requests or conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or
condition of the provision of the benefits, privileges or placement services or as a basis for the
evaluation of academic achievement; or (ii) such advances, requests or conduct have the purpose
or effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual’s education by creating an intimidating,
hostile, humiliating or sexually offensive educational environment. M.G.L. c. 151C § 1(e).
217
SURVIVIOR'S RIGHTS GUARANTEE
Sexual assaults, including acquaintance rape, are a very serious concern of the University. If you
are the survivor of a sexual assault or think you may have experienced sexual assault, the Tufts
Police will guarantee you the following:
1. We will meet with you privately, at a local place of your choice, to take a police incident
report.
2. We will not release, without your consent, your name to the public or to the press during
the course of the investigation.
3. Our officers will not prejudge you, and you will not be blamed for what occurred.
4. We will treat you and your particular case with courtesy, sensitivity, dignity, understanding,
and professionalism.
5. If you feel more comfortable talking with a female or male officer, we will do our best to
accommodate your request.
6. We will assist you in arranging for any hospital treatment or other medical needs, including
transportation to a local hospital with a Rape Crisis Treatment Center.
7. We will assist you in privately contacting counseling services, the development of a safety
plan and advising you about other available/necessary resources.
8. We will discuss the options available to you. We will investigate your case to the fullest
extent possible. With your consent, we will refer your matter to the District Attorney’s
office to discuss the charging and prosecuting of the responsible individual.
9. We will continue to be available for you to answer questions, to explain the systems and
processes involved (prosecutor, court, etc.) and, if you wish, to be a listening ear.
10. We will treat your case seriously regardless of your or any suspect's sex, gender identity
and expression, sexual orientation and behavior, race, ethnicity, religion, national origin,
age, disability, or veteran status.
If you are a sexual assault survivor, you may call the Tufts University Police at (617) 627-3030 to
indicate that you want to file (privately) a sexual assault report. You may call the division anytime
(24 hours a day, 7 days a week).
If you have an emergency or would like to access a city police department, call 911.
If we fail to achieve any part of the listed guarantee, the station commander (phone number 617627-3030) will meet with you personally to address any problems/concerns. University Police want
to help you make the Tufts campuses safe for students, faculty, staff and visitors.
218
APPENDIX G
Americans with Disabilities Act Policy
Policy Statement
Tufts University is committed to providing reasonable accommodations for qualified individuals with
disabilities in a fair and equitable manner, and in accordance with applicable federal and state law.
All personnel who are responsible for the implementation of the University’s mission are charged to
support this policy. We urge everyone in the Tufts community to join in this commitment.
Reasonable Accommodations
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act, require Tufts
University to provide appropriate academic and employment accommodations to employees and
students with disabilities unless doing so would create an undue hardship, compromise the health
and safety of members of the University community, or fundamentally alter the nature of the
University’s employment or academic mission. As described more fully below, the University
engages in an interactive process with the student or employee to determine disability status and
accommodation needs.
Reasonable Accommodation Procedures
Students
Academic Accommodations
Medford Campus
If you are an undergraduate or graduate student enrolled in the School of Arts, Sciences and
Engineering, the Fletcher School, or the Boston School of Occupational Therapy and you need
an academic accommodation, please visit the Disability Services website at: http://uss.tufts.edu/
arc/disability/ or contact the Program Director Program Director, Sandy Baer, at 617-627-2000
or [email protected].
Note: If you are a faculty member who has received an accommodation request from a student,
please refer him/her to the Program Director for Disability Services at the contact number listed
above.
Boston & Grafton Campuses
If you are a graduate or professional student of any Tufts school located on the Boston or Grafton
campus and you need an academic accommodation, follow the procedures set forth in your
school’s student handbook or contact the appropriate school administrator listed below.
Note: If you are a faculty member who has received an accommodation request from a
student, please refer him/her to the appropriate school administrator listed below in the
contacts table.
The following is a list of school administrators to whom requests for accommodations on the
Boston and Grafton campus should be forwarded:
School Contact/Title Contact Information
Cummings School of Veterinary Medicine
Barbara Berman
Assistant Dean of Student Affairs
(508) 839 8733
[email protected]
Friedman School of
Nutrition Science and Policy
Stacey Herman
Director of Student Affairs
(617) 636 3711
[email protected]
219
Sackler School
Kathryn Lange
Associate Dean
(617) 636 6767
[email protected]
Tufts Dental School
Robert H. Kasberg, Jr.
Associate Dean of Student Affairs
(617) 636 6539
Tufts Medical School
Colleen Romain
Director of Student Affairs
(617) 636 6576
[email protected]
Non-Academic Accommodations
Medford Campus
Housing – For all requests related to accessible housing, please contact the Office of Residential
Life at 617.627.3248 or visit: http://ase.tufts.edu/reslife/policies/disabilities.asp.
Transportation – For information regarding accessible parking and/or Tufts accessible shuttle
service on the Medford Campus, please contact the Department of Public Safety Parking and
Administrative Services at (617) 627 3030 or visit: http://publicsafety.tufts.edu/adminsvc/
Other - Other–For all other non-academic accommodations, including information involving
medical leaves, please contact the Dean of Student Affairs at 617.627.2000.
Boston & Grafton Campus
For all non-academic accommodations on the Boston and Grafton campuses, please contact the
appropriate school administrator in the table listed above.
Helpful Resources for Tufts Community Members and Visitors
Access Issues
To report an issue concerning access to Tufts’ buildings and grounds, including access issues
involving snow removal, curb cuts, and non-operable automatic door openers, on the Medford,
Boston, or Grafton campus, please contact the Tufts Facilities Department:
• Medford Campus: 617.627.3496
• Boston Campus: 617.636.3535
• Grafton Campus: 508.839.7921
Accessible Parking
For information regarding accessible parking on the Medford, Boston, and Grafton campus, please
contact the Tufts Department of Public Safety:
• Medford Campus: 617.627.3030
• Boston Campus: 617.636.6610
• Grafton Campus: 508.839.5303
Campus Accessibility Maps: http://www.tufts.edu/oeo/univmaps.html
Commencement Resources: http://commencement.tufts.edu/
Planning an Accessible Event: http://oeo.diversity.tufts.edu/10steps.html
Arts, Sciences & Engineering Conference Bureau: http://ase.tufts.edu/conferences/
Frequently Asked Questions
1. What is a disability?
According to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), disability is defined as a physical or
mental impairment that substantially limits one or more of a person’s major life activities (for
example, walking, standing, or breathing).
2. What is the interactive process?
The interactive process is when an employer and an individual with a documented disability
220
work together to identify what barriers exist to the individual’s performance of a particular
job function. This analysis often includes a review of the individual’s abilities and limitations
and which factors or job tasks pose difficulties. Fundamental to the process is ensuring that
the employee provides sufficient documentation to enable the university to determine if the
condition substantially limits a major life activity, and if so, what accommodation(s) may be
reasonable but still permit the employee to meet the essential functions of the employee’s
position.
3. How are reasonable accommodations made?
Accommodations are provided through an interactive process between the applicant or
employee and Tufts representatives. The individual requesting the accommodation may be asked
to obtain documentation from his/her health care provider to be forwarded to OEO. Supporting
documentation from a qualified clinician may include:
• a diagnosis of the impairment and any accompanying test results,
• a detailed description of the specific impairment, functional limitations (with and without
the use of mitigating measures such as treatment, aids, and medication), functional need,
and the medical justification for such need, and
• a recommendation for the type and duration of the accommodation needed, as well as the
rationale underlying the request.
Upon receiving and reviewing the appropriate documentation, a determination will be made
regarding the individual’s disability status as well as his/her essential job functions as they relate
to the accommodation being requested.
4. What should I do if I feel as though I’ve been discriminated against or harassed
because of my disability?
Students, staff, and faculty may report alleged acts of discrimination or harassment by contacting
OEO at 617.627.3298. For further information on reporting incidents or filing an OEO grievance,
visit www.tufts.edu/oeo.
5. Where do I go if I have questions about this policy?
Tufts University Office of Equal Employment and Affirmative Action is responsible for enforcing
the University’s ADA policy. Please contact OEO at 617.627.3298 if you have questions about this
policy.
Rights and Responsibilities of Tufts Employees
Duty to Cooperate
Managers, supervisors, faculty and other agents of the University have a duty to engage
students, employees and applicants in an interactive process in response to requests for
reasonable accommodations. Anyone who feels uncomfortable initiating the interactive process is
encouraged to contact OEO at 617.627.3298 as soon as they have notice of a possible need for
an accommodation.
Freedom from Retaliation
Any eligible member of the University community has the right to request a reasonable
accommodation. It is a violation of University policy to retaliate against an individual for
requesting an ADA accommodation. Any person who retaliates against an individual is subject to
disciplinary action up to and including termination by the University.
Confidentiality
In accordance with the ADA, Tufts will protect and maintain the privacy and confidentiality
of medical information of its employees obtained in connection with the reasonable
accommodation process. All medical information will be treated confidentially and maintained
securely and separately from personnel files.
OEO Grievance Procedures
The OEO Grievance Procedures can be found in the OEO Policies and Procedures brochure or by
visiting www.tufts.edu/oeo. You may also request a copy of the OEO grievance procedures by
contacting OEO at 617.627.3298.
Terminology Used
ADA: Americans with Disabilities Act
Disability: According to the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), a disability is defined as a
physical or mental impairment that substantially limits one or more of a person’s major life
activities (for example, walking, standing, or breathing).
221
Essential Functions: Job duties considered so fundamental that the individual cannot do the job
without performing them.
Interactive Process: The interactive process is when an employer and an individual with
a documented disability work together to identify what barriers exist to the individual’s
performance of a particular job function. This analysis often includes a review of the individual’s
abilities and limitations and which factors or job tasks pose difficulties.
Qualified Persons with Disabilities: An employee or applicant with a disability who satisfies
skill, experience, education and other job-related requirements for the position and who can
perform the essential functions of the job in question with or without reasonable accommodations.
This includes part-time, full-time, probationary, non-career status and temporary employees.
Undue Hardship: An action requiring significant difficulty, expense or disruption, or an action that
would fundamentally alter the nature of an operation at Tufts University.
222
APPENDIX H
TUFTS UNIVERSITY NONDISCRIMINATION POLICY
POLICY STATEMENT
Tufts University is committed to employment practices and a learning environment that are free of
discrimination and harassment. We seek to promote a diverse and inclusive university community.
At Tufts University, equal opportunity and affirmative action is not only a legal commitment; it is a
moral commitment as well. This policy shall apply, but not be limited, to the following employment
activities: recruitment and employment, promotion, demotion, transfer, compensation, selection
for training, job reduction, and termination. Tufts is further committed to take affirmative action to
ensure equal employment opportunities are afforded to all.
Tufts prohibits discrimination against and harassment of any employee or any applicant for
employment because of race, color, national or ethnic origin, age, religion, disability, sex, sexual
orientation, gender identity and expression, veteran status (special disabled veterans, disabled
veterans and Vietnam-era veterans), or any other characteristic protected under applicable federal
or state law. Tufts also prohibits retaliation based on protected activity, such as the filing of a
complaint of discrimination or participation in the investigation of such a claim.
Persons with knowledge about discrimination or harassment at Tufts are encouraged to report their
information to a manager or supervisor, a dean, any senior member of the University
administration, or directly to the Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO).
All personnel who are responsible for hiring and promoting employees and for the development and
implementation of university programs or activities are charged to support this effort and to
respond promptly and appropriately to any concerns that are brought to their attention. The
University expects everyone to join in this commitment and provide for the prompt and impartial
consideration of all complaints of discrimination issued by its faculty, staff, and students.
Tufts University’s OEO is responsible for planning and implementing the University’s affirmative
action program, monitoring of affirmative action-related decisions and activities, and enforcing the
University’s nondiscrimination policy. Tufts University seeks to maintain an internal system of audit
and reporting that shall facilitate the identification and removal of inequities and deficiencies in its
employment and those policies and practices that could preclude the fair and equal treatment of
minorities, women, individuals with disabilities, and all covered veterans (special disabled veterans,
disabled veterans and Vietnam-era veterans).
Rights and Responsibilities
As a member of the Tufts community you have the right to work, learn, and live in an environment
free from discrimination and harassment. You have the right to equal opportunity and equal access
to all university programs and activities.
Duty to Report
Managers, supervisors, faculty, and other agents of the University have a duty to
report any known or alleged incidents of discrimination or harassment to the Office of Equal
Opportunity.
Duty to Cooperate
Faculty, staff, and students must cooperate with University investigations concerning allegations of
discrimination or harassment. Refusal to cooperate with an investigation may result in disciplinary
action.
Freedom from Retaliation
Any member of the University community has the right to raise concerns or make a complaint
regarding discrimination or harassment under this policy without fear of reprisal. It is a violation of
University policy to retaliate against an individual for filing a complaint of discrimination or
harassment or for cooperating in an investigation of alleged discrimination or harassment. Any
223
person at Tufts found in violation of this policy is subject to disciplinary action up to and including
termination of employment or expulsion from school.
Confidentiality
The University recognizes the importance of confidentiality and understands that some individuals
filing complaints of discrimination or who are otherwise involved in an investigation may want their
identity to remain confidential. In all cases, issues of confidentiality must be balanced against the
University’s need to investigate and take appropriate action. The University will respect the privacy
and confidentiality of individuals involved in an investigation to the fullest
extent possible.
OEO Grievance Procedures
The OEO Grievance Procedures can be found by visiting www.oeo.tufts.edu. You may also request
a copy of the procedures by contacting OEO at 617-627-3298.
224
APPENDIX I
Advanced and Graduate Education Forms
Master of Science Registration form
Master of Science Advisor/Committee Acceptance form
Contract for Independent Study
Research Proposal Guidelines
Master of Science Progress Report
Approval of Research Protocol form
Certificate of Fitness (form a)
Approval of Thesis for Binding (form b)
Submission of Thesis for Publication (form c)
225